ON THE 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 SYNTAX, 
 
 AND 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON MOST OF THE IDIOM^ 
 OF THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE; 
 
 WITH 
 
 AN ATTEMPT TO TRACE 
 
 THE PROPOSITIONS, SEVERAL CONJUNCTIONS AND ADVERBS TO 
 THEIR RADICAL SIGNIFICATION, 
 
 BY 
 
 GEORGE DUNBAR, A.M. F.R.S.E. 
 
 AND PROFESSOR OF GREEK IN THE ' 
 UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH. 
 
 THIRD EDITION, 
 
 GBEATLY F. v HGED AND IMPROVED. 
 
 PRINTED FOR STIRLING & SLADE. 
 
 AND G. & W. B. WHITTAKER, 
 
 LONDON. 
 
 1822, 
 

 Western Ont. Univ. Library 
 
 8EP 2 5 1939 
 
PREFACE 
 
 TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 ER the experience of some years in the use of the 
 1 Exercises, it may reasonably be supposed that their 
 ^ominent defects would be discovered, and that 
 /ould be removed in a second edition. As every 
 is naturally partial to his own work, and is frequent- 
 7 d to faults which strike the eyes of others, I may, in 
 » quence, have overlooked some things which ought 
 : ive been corrected, and have applied but an insufii- 
 • t remedy to those that could not escape observation, 
 ran, however, say with truth, that I have endeavoured 
 CO render the book as useful as possible for those to whom 
 it was chiefly intended, I mean my own Pupils, and have 
 made some alterations in the examples, the better to ac- 
 commodate them to the progress which they may have 
 made in the study of the Greek language. It has been 
 ray practice, as soon as the Junior students have made 
 themselves tolerably acquainted with the declension of 
 nouns, adjectives and pronouns, to put the Exercises into 
 their hands, and make them read a small portion of the 
 first part every day. When they have gone through the 
 paradigma of the verb in their Grammar, they then enter 
 upon the examples in the Exercifees, and so on through 
 
IV 
 
 the rules of syntax. Having found some of the examples 
 rather difficult for beginners, I have in this second edi- 
 tion made, what I consider, a necessary distinction, by se- 
 lecting a few, whose meanings and construction are simple, 
 for the younger class of students, and by reserving those 
 that follow the mark } for such as have made greater pro- 
 gress. I have also added a considerable number in 
 English to be turned into Greek, and some from the Poets 
 as exercises upon different kinds of verse. These, it will be 
 evident, are intended for such as have read several of the 
 Greek authors, particularly the Poets, and are tolerably 
 acquainted with the prosody of the language. That they 
 might not appear too formidable, I have included within 
 brackets the more difficult words, hoping that, by careful- 
 ly attending in the course of reading, to the idiom of the 
 language, and to the observations occasionally made upon 
 particular expressions, they may be able to turn them into 
 Greek with correctness and elegance. Considerable ad- 
 ditions, it will be seen, have been made to the observations 
 upon the different rules, with a view of stating most of 
 the important idioms. These, I imagine, will be better 
 understood by being placed under the rules from which 
 they appear as deviations, than collected together without 
 any particular reference. By studying them with care 
 and attention, many of the difficulties that occur in read- 
 ing the Greek authors will be rendered easy, and a more 
 thorough knowledge will be gained of the language. 
 
 .'^ To render the examples as perspicuous as possible, and 
 point out the idiom of the original, it was judged necessai-y, 
 in some instances, to adopt an interpretation at variance 
 with the vernacular idiom, and which may be thought clum- 
 
ey and inelegant. Though a different turn might have 5een 
 given to some expressions, no harm, I imagine, will ensue 
 from such interpretations, but rather an important advan- 
 tage, as the pupil will understand more easily the mean- 
 ing of the original, and will obsei've at the same time the 
 difference between the idioms of the two languages ; it 
 being always supposed, that he will be made to give a 
 freer and more elegant translation of the passage. 
 
 Though the first part of tfhe Exercises, including tho3e 
 upon the adjectives, pronouns, and verbs, is adapted to 
 the Rules of Moor's Grammar, the examples will, I pre- 
 sume, suit any that are used in the public schools, whether 
 in this or the sister kingdoms. 
 
 In treating of the prespositions, I have followed the 
 same course as in the former edition, by endeavouring 
 to trace them to their respective roots, to discover 
 their primary meaning, and from it deduce their se- 
 condary and figurative applications. The observations 
 upon most of them are considerably extended ; it be- 
 ing my wish to mark their diflPerent significations with 
 as much precision as possible. Although some of them 
 may be derived from other sources than those pointed 
 out, yet even an approximation of this^ kind is of con- 
 siderable value, as it brings before the view of students 
 one simple meaning attributed to each, and points out, 
 from the natural associations of the mind, the extension of 
 this meaning under different shades to ideal and figurative 
 objects. As, however, these discussions might appear be- 
 yond the reach of beginners, I have given a short summa- 
 ry of all the praepositions before the exercises on the 
 
VI 
 
 verb, so as to enable them to go through the example^ 
 without having previously studied the praepositions in their 
 Grammar. The observations upon some of the conjunc- 
 tions and adverbs have also been enlarged ; the rules re- 
 specting the construction of the former with different 
 tenses and moods have been stated, it is hoped corrrect- 
 ly ; and some farther endeavours have been made to trace 
 to their respective roots, a few more of the latter that oc- 
 cur most frequently. 
 
 In this edition it will be seen, that the rules for the Ar- 
 ticle and the different Dialects have been omitted. As 
 the former appeared too complicated, and in many in- 
 stances vague, I thought it better to state such as should 
 be generally known in the form of notes or observations 
 under different rules of syntax ; and as the dialects were 
 discussed at considerable length in the last edition of 
 Moor's Grammar, and are to be found in others, I saw no 
 reason for retaining them in the present work, unless I 
 had given exercises upon each of them, which I judged 
 unnecessary, as several occur in the course of th€ exam- 
 ples. 
 
 The work thus extended, and I trust, materially im- 
 proved, I commit to the candid judgment of the lovers of 
 Grecian literature, hoping that, among many others 
 framed to facilitate the knowledge of the Greek language, 
 it also may obtain a share of public patronage. 
 
 College, Edinburgh 
 17 jlug, 18 
 
 urgh, I 
 16. J 
 
PREFACE 
 
 TO THE THIRD EDITION, 
 
 In this iEdition of the Greek Exercises very few altera- 
 tions have been made upon the first part, as it was in- 
 tended chiefly for Junior Students, while the second part, 
 containing the Rules of Syntax, &c. has been augmented 
 by a considerable number of Examples and many import- 
 ant Observations and Notes. It has been my object for 
 some years to collect, in the course of reading the Greek 
 authors, examples of the most important idioms and pecu- 
 liarities of expression, and to arrange them under the 
 different Rules of Syntax, from which they appeared as 
 deviations. To those who are acquainted with Matthias's 
 Greek Grammar, and other works of a similar kind, the 
 value of such Observations and Notes will be duly esti- 
 mated, especially when arranged under the standard Rules 
 of Construction, and unencumbered with useless, and 
 sometimes unintelligible distinctions. These Exercises 
 I have also intended as the means of introducing into the 
 schools and seminaries of education in this country a more 
 general and correct knowledge of the Prosody of the Greek 
 language, particularly the Iambic, Trochaic, Anapaestic 
 and Hexameter metres ; as, without an accurate know- 
 ledge of these at least, no man can have any pretensions 
 
Vlll 
 
 to the name of a scholar. For this purpose, examples of 
 one or other of these kinds of verse are given under almost 
 every rule, and references are occasionally made to the 
 " Prosodia Grseca," where the laws respecting them are 
 stated and explained. It must be sufficiently obvious to 
 every one who has made some progress in the study of the 
 language, that, without a knowledge of its prosody, the 
 errors and interpolations which have been introduced into 
 the writing of the Greek poets by transcribers, ignorant Of 
 the laws of versification, can neither be discovered nor 
 rectified. In this part of the island, we have long been 
 subjected to the reproach of ignorance of this branch of 
 literature, particularly in regard to the Greek language. 
 Let us hope that in future the combined exertions of mas- 
 ters and scholars will rescue us from this imputation upon 
 our literary character, and that, with the aid of such an 
 auxiliary, we shall henceforth be better able to judge as 
 critics, and to relish those exquisite productions of the 
 Grecian muse, which have given the force and breathed 
 the spirit into the best poetry of modern times. But with 
 us, unfortunately, the study of the Greek language is 
 neither valued as it ought, nor prosecuted for such a 
 length of time as to render it useful in connection with 
 other branches of learning. If studied in its principles 
 with accuracy and diligence, — if read with due attention 
 as a vehicle of thought, and as the means of strengthening 
 the understanding, invigorating the fancy, and forming the 
 taste, few studies would be more practically useful for men 
 engaged in the higher professions. " I see no more pe- 
 ** dantry," says the author of the Pursuits of Litera- 
 ture, " in the knowledge and study of the G7-eeIc tongue 
 " than of the French or the German. But when I con- 
 
IX 
 
 *• sider that every subject in philosophy, in history, in 
 " oratory, and in poetry, whatever can dignify or em- 
 '* belhsh human society in its most cultivated state, has 
 *< found in that language the highest authors ; — that the 
 " principles of composition are better taught and more 
 *^ fully exemplified in the Greek writers than in any other ; 
 " — and that they are the acknowledged universal legisla- 
 "tors in taste, criticism, and just composition, from whom 
 ^* there is no appeal, and who will be found unerring di- 
 " rectors. I would, with a peculiar emphasis and earnest" 
 " ness, request young men of fortune, ability, and polished 
 " education, not to cast off the study of the Greek writers 
 " when they leave school or the university, A fev/ hours 
 '^ devoted to this study in every week will preserve and 
 " improve their knowledge of it, which will animate the 
 " whole mass of their learning, and give colour to their 
 " thoughts and precision to their expressions." 
 
 A few additional remarks have been made upon some 
 of the Prsepositions and Conjunctions, particularly upon 
 the particle uv, the nature of which appears to be alto- 
 gether unknown to those editors and commentators who 
 have endeavoured, with laudable zeal, to ascertain the Ten- 
 ses and Moods with which it is usually construed. I con- 
 sider speculations upon the origin and primary use of the 
 Prsepositions and other Particles to be of great importance 
 both to teachers and scholars, as accustoming them to 
 habits of investigation, and enabling them to form more 
 precise notions of the force and meaning of words than 
 they are ever likely to obtain from the loose and general 
 ideas of the greater number of grammarians and Critics. 
 
I have now to return my best thanks to those Teachers 
 who have introduced the Greek Exercises into their Schools 
 and Seminaries. With the view of assisting them in the 
 more difficult examples, a complete Key will shortly be 
 published, comprehending all the examples under the 
 Rules of Syntax, and those also under the Prsepositions. 
 And I entertain the hope, that the improvements made 
 upon this Edition of the Exercises, and the facility that 
 will be given in teaching them, will induce others to put 
 them into the hands of their pupils. 
 
 College^ Edinburgh, 
 1 Jan. 1822. 
 
KEY TO THE ABBREVIATED SIGNS. 
 
 1. 1st Declension. 
 
 2. 2d do. 
 
 r s singular. 
 i dudual. 
 [ pi plural. 
 
 f m masculine. 
 <j f feminine. 
 I n neuter. 
 
 i 
 
 no nommative. 
 g genitive. 
 d dative, 
 ac accusative. 
 V vocative. 
 
 po positive. 
 
 c comparative. 
 
 sup superlative. 
 
 Att. Attic. Ion. Ionic. 
 
 3. 3d Do. 
 
 a active voice, 
 mi middle do. 
 pas passive voice. 
 
 pr present, 
 im imperfect. 
 
 1 f first future. 
 
 . 2 f second future. 
 ^ 1 a first aorist. 
 
 2 a second do. 
 p perfect. 
 
 ^ plu pluperfect. 
 
 r in indicative. 
 I SQ subjunctive. 
 J op optative. 
 j imp imperative. 
 I inf infinitive. 
 Lpa participle. 
 
 Dor. Doric, ^ol. 
 
 ^olic. 
 
 N. B. English words in Italics, or included within brack- 
 ets, have no corresponding words in the original. 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 Page 49, Example 3, for TrecfA^aXog read 7eu^(pecyoi. 
 
 . 53, 2, for g d. 
 
 55, ■ ' 1, for ^ueta-Toe hKet(rrm, 
 
 ■ 5S, 4, for Ti^zrahs n^uTM^sg* 
 
 69, Rule, for la-d" i(rd\ 
 
 70, Example 4, for m im. 
 
 — — 93, — , 2, for fAiv f^ftv. 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 ON THE 
 
 CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES with SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Terminations o?, ?;, ov ; og pure and ^og* 
 
 A handsome youth. v&eTyiec?^ xaAc?. *^ 
 
 Immense wealth. u(p9oyog ^^y,^ec^, " 
 
 Narrow roads. c-nvog o^e^^. ^ ^^ 
 
 A hostile town. TrcXtfUog TroXig^. ^ ^'^ 
 
 Powerful nations. Uvog^ is-^^og. 
 
 The right hand. ^s|<«5 XH^- ^ ^'^ 
 
 Ruinous schemes. oXcog /iovW, ^^ 
 
 Cruel chains. ^io-fAcq^ u^y»Mog. 
 
 O unfortunate Adonis. A^^y^s^ ^y^^rorttflf. 
 
 To a worthy man. av^^wa-of* «|<«j. 
 
 Termination og declined in the Attic form. 
 Gi^am. p, 46. 
 
 Uncultivated land. u^yog yji^. ** 
 
 To the newly married wife. o myxf^og yvvvi^. 
 
 Cities overturned. TroXtg^ ecvetTTocrog. 
 
 Inglorious security. uo-pccXnot} u^o^og. 
 
 ♦ See Moor's Grammar, p. 44. 
 f See Moor's Grammar, p. 10. at the bottom. 
 
 A 
 
Adjectives and Substantives,* 
 
 The beautiful rosy-finger'd x«Ao? ^o^c^etxrifXss ia^^. ** 
 
 morning. 
 
 That the lady was not un- ovk uxx^i<rros it yy»js^. '* 
 
 grateful. 
 
 Immortal poets. TFcinrn^^ ^Setvetrog. 
 
 A counterbalancing alliance. <rv^^xxi»^ uvrif^oTrog. ^^ 
 
 With false locks. 7t^o<r6sTog Ko^nK 
 
 Terminations ccg^ aim, av, — s/?, laaa, sv. — y^jg/w, «. 
 — Gram, p, 4^1. 
 
 Through the dark night. 
 
 Black garments. 
 
 Of the bloody war. 
 
 Winged words. 
 
 Deliberate speeches. 
 
 In a short time. 
 
 Furious war. 
 
 Sweet song. 
 
 Sharp cliffs. 
 
 Many and precious gifts. 
 
 TToMfiog^ B'^eccrvg, ac 
 
 The Common Gender in m^n^, ^g, o^i', mas. and 
 fem. ov, neut. — tjv, mas. and fem. or g/i/a,fem. 
 ev, neut. — yjg, mas. and fem. eg, neut.—/? and 
 vg, with the compounds of ^rovg, pes. — Gram, 
 pp. 49, 50. 
 
 Your son unhurt. Trut^^ n c-og u-TFYi^m, ac 
 
 Into many families and flou- ycoXvg ^' %U d/xo?^ x«< »r»A<j' «y- 
 
 rishing. states. ^xttcav. ac 
 
 O unhappy man. Z rXn^aiv «<v»g\ 
 
Adjectives and Substantives, 3 
 
 To their happy lives. /9«os^ * ecvruv ivdaifAMt. 
 
 Tender flowers. n^nv uy6oi^. 
 
 The propitious and kind Bios* ixiui* ri km iv^tm* 
 
 gods. 
 
 The experiment is danger- «yx u<r(peiM? *i 'ru^oi}. 
 
 ous. 
 
 To an unhappy woman, a yyv>}^ ^va-rv^/n, ^ovXn, 
 
 slave. 
 
 Relentless to enemieS;, and (in^v^ ^^ ^ £;^^g«5, ««* <P<Afli sy- 
 
 gentle to friends. iwsvus. 
 
 The order unimpaired and « t«|<5^ ar^ya kxi «eyjjg«T«§. ac 
 
 unfading. 
 
 Of swift steeds. aKvrov^ tTTTrog^. 
 
 In a disagreeable misfortune, u^ot^tg <rv(A(pc^oi}, 
 
 The brazen-greaved Greeks. ^»>.KOKyvif^ Ky^dio^. 
 
 And the powerful ruler of o re ^^ Atey<!»o"^«v»)? T|;fit<vot* t^s- 
 
 the trident, the fierce |t«<flS5^, y>j ts x«< a.'h^v^tg $•<*- 
 
 shaker of the earth, and Aaso-o-^ «yg<05 A4o;kjXgt;T»j5^ 
 
 the briny deep. 
 
 ADJECTIVES WANTING THE NEUTER 
 GENDER. 
 
 The Terminations ng and aq declined like 
 Masculine Substantives of the First De« 
 clension. 
 
 Insolent men. ky^^uTeo^^ v^^nrrt}?. ac 
 
 The hundred-handed Bria- B^ix^saf^ f Ixxroy^a^, ac 
 
 reus. 
 Unfading thanks. ;t;«g'5^ ^^ eiyn^ag, 
 
 * Declined in the x-lttic manner. 
 
 f Declined in the Attic manner. — g. B^iaatu, d. Bgiw^jw. ac. B^ia^tm. 
 
Adjectives and Substantives. 
 
 An active general. " 
 And most of them wounded. 
 Beautiful-maned horses. 
 The sable deep. 
 A general both a thief and 
 robber. 
 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES, INCLUDING 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 The ranks intent upon. 
 They two being alarmed and 
 
 fiiv rx^Qwxs XXI xl^ofAivoi* 
 
 vsoj m xvTog. 
 
 7FX^xhavg\ ^^ i ;roA<s'.4 
 
 All engaging. 
 
 They two being young. 
 
 Those that betrayed the city 
 
 Soldiers to do this. o mro TroiYia-m a-T^xric^rin^, «c 
 
 Willing rather than unwil- hav ^«»aa©v ^ ax,m, "^ ^'■ 
 
 ling. .. 
 The women laughing. ii ymv? yiKxu, 
 
 They came to assist. «xoj» ^ofika. 
 
 They two in the bloom of l ^iv k^wx^, 
 
 youth. 
 Every man such as ; every ^«$ oo-oj, &c^. 
 
 woman, &c, 
 
 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE DEGREES. 
 
 See Gram. pp. 55 — 61. 
 
 But the way is far more 
 simple and direct with us. 
 
 More persuasive arguments. 
 
 In his mind most humane, 
 and most studious, and 
 most ambitious. 
 
 Happier men. 
 
 XXXX TTOXV UTrXoog XXI IV&Vi 
 
 wx^ flfziv vt oaoi . 
 TTita-TiKog Xoyoi^. ac 
 
 f^xdvig KXi (ptXorif^os. 
 
 ivaxif^eov xy6pa>7rog. / 
 
 Gen. x«AA/tj<,\;')j. 
 
 j" Gen. ira^adtvToi, 
 
Pronouns^ Sfc. 
 
 Swifter horses. 
 
 A most wretched course. 
 
 Greater hopes. 
 
 The greatest labour. 
 
 Most venerable ^Ether. 
 
 What remain are still far 
 more numerous and illus- 
 trious. 
 
 These things are better. 
 
 Bowmen and targeteers not 
 fewer. 
 
 O most wise spectators. 
 
 More compliant and much 
 more humble. 
 
 For the life of such men is 
 most renowned. 
 
 voXv y In TTohv? x.ftt KxX^i roe, 
 
 uyxSog Itti tocvtoc. 
 
 Kpog, ^c 
 £i coipo? B-iccrvji^, 
 
 fCC^iOS XOtl TTOXV rXTTilVOg,^ 
 
 yx^ rotovros gyxXgjjj /3<05*. 
 
 PRONOUNS SUBSTANTIVE, ADJECTIVE, POS- 
 SESSIVE, RECIPROCAL, &c. 
 
 See Gram. pp. 64- — 70. 
 
 To us two still alive. lya In (^ccatrei. 
 
 But you having neglected , u^iXnTotg d& a-u ^^ ^^ kxi kcckit-* 
 
 ( them ) and become wick- htg. 
 
 ed. 
 To you being wise. 
 Whatever soldiers. 
 These are the things which 
 
 you know. 
 Respecting this vision. 
 Our far-famed father. 
 
 (TV ^^ a'o(pog. 
 
 oTTiq a-r^xrieurvig^* i^ 
 
 t » t ' * 
 
 CV70$ iO-TtV 05 (TV iTClT-roCTeil, 
 
 /AiyxXctfvvf^og \yu * TTK-m^. ^c 
 
 * The substantive pronoun, if used, in the genitive, the possessive 
 in the accusative. 
 
6 Summary of the Prepositions, Sfc. 
 
 The amount of your own li ^wetfcti^ n a-es ttAij^oj'. 
 
 force. 
 
 To show himself obedient Ixvrov xet^i^^nv 6V7Fn6n5 o u^- 
 
 to his officers. ^av^. 
 
 Respecting their own affairs, ttb^i o Uvm 5rg«y^«'. ^ 
 
 Whatever benefactress. otti? ivi^yin^^. ac ; J^ tC I/. 
 
 All these. Ikhv^s Trctg.} 
 
 You have bodies not infe- ro e-aust.^ yi ly6>^ ovhv KenKoq 
 
 rior to us, it becomes you Ix^n, -^v^a ^e ov^iv kcckos 
 
 to have minds also not a-v ^ Tr^oa-nKU \yu § l)(,uy. 
 
 worse than we. 
 
 Which gives every thing ot o %a,i ra o f«<xg<>5 c I uyecdoe c 
 
 the vanquished to the . ^a^nrxu 
 
 victors. 
 
 SUMMARY OF THE PREPOSITIONS AND THE 
 CASES THEY GOVERN. 
 
 Four govern the Genitive, viz. Avrf, Ato, 
 E;^, or E|, and Upo. 
 
 Avrif commonly signifies Instead of j for. 
 
 A'TTOy '■ From, 
 
 E«, -, Out of 
 
 U^o, Before. 
 
 Two govern the Dative only, viz. Ev and ^v\>, 
 
 Ev, commonly signifies In. 
 
 2vy, With, 
 
Summary of the Prepositions, 8fc. 
 
 Two govern the Accusative only, viz. Etg and 
 
 Eli commonly signifies To, into. 
 
 Avx, Up, through, jind alo7ig. 
 
 Four govern Two cases, the Genitive and Ac- 
 cusaiive, viz. A/a, Kara, Msra, * and 'T^g^. 
 
 A<«c, with the gen. signifies Through, 
 
 ^with the accusat. Through means of. 
 
 Kctrx, with the gen. signifies Along, regarding, against. 
 with the accusat. Down, according to. 
 
 MiTx, with the gen. signifies With, i. e. sharing tvith. 
 with the accusat. After, 
 
 'Ttts^, with the gen. signifies Higher, or above, for, 
 •i with the accusat. Over, or beyond, , 
 
 Six govern Three cases, viz. AjO*^/, Hs^/, Et/, 
 Upog, Ha^a and 'T^o. 
 
 AjKfp/, with the ^e». signifies About, ox for, 
 
 with the dai, - Close about, 
 
 with the accusat. Motion about, 
 
 m^{, with the gen, signifies About, or for. 
 
 with the dat. Close about, or for, 
 with the accusat. Tending about. 
 
 * MtTflf' with the Poets, sometimes governs the Dative, signifying 
 H'ith, Among. 
 
8 
 
 Summary ofihi Prepositionsy 8^c, 
 
 E^rt) with the gen, signifies 
 
 with the dai, 
 
 . ^with the accusat, 
 
 U^og, with the gen. signifies 
 
 w ith the dat. 
 with the accusat, 
 
 Tietgety with the gen, signifies 
 
 with the dat, 
 
 ^with the accusat, 
 
 *r7rof with the gen. signifies 
 
 with the dat. 
 
 — with the accusat. 
 
 Upon. 
 
 Close upon, depending upon. 
 
 Directed upon, or against. 
 
 From, by. 
 
 Close tOf near. 
 
 To or towards, against. 
 
 From beside. 
 Close beside. 
 To beside. 
 
 Under, by. 
 Close under, by. 
 Motion under. 
 
 The following Conjunctions always require the 
 Subjunctive mode. E«y, itv, if; Iraxv, gjrijv, l;r«», iTtit^etf, 
 since ; crccv, xvhen. See Gram, part 2, p. 79. 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 ON 
 
 VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 For what hinders ? t<? yotg ycui^u •* 
 
 Do we not call this forget- » ev obrog Mh Myu ; 
 
 fulness ? 
 
 You are hastening, c-y^i e-TFiv^a. 
 
 My hopes do not yet slum- Ixyrt^^ 3' ovyra Koihv^a, 
 
 ber. 
 
 Do you think that your mo- vi vofAt^u KocKovo&i « f^nrY,^ ac 
 
 ther is ill-affected to you ? a-v ihui ,• 
 
 He is formidable who serves ^nvo? <?? $««? a-t^u. 
 
 the gods. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Commonly preceded by Conjunctions or Indefinites after 
 
 Verbs of the present or future Tense. 
 Or should send others not a >> uXXo? ^vi oXiyo? ei7ro<rTihXu. 
 
 few. 
 Although he may not prac- Keiv f^vt 'letr^zvu. 
 
 tise as a physician. 
 
 * N. B. Any teacher may vary the persons, and so multiply the 
 examples for the benefit of his scholars. 
 
 B 
 
10 EXKRCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Optative, 
 
 Commonly preceded by Conjunctions or Indefinites after 
 Verbs of the j^as^ Tense. 
 
 I will stay. fjLim * uv. 
 
 We would properly say. o^6&)i Uy Myv. 
 
 If they also should look for- i\ h kch 5rg<»(r€AgT». i. - 
 ward. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Stretch out your aged hand, o^tya ysg^to? X'H^* n 
 
 Let the truce remain. n ff^vh ^^ (tttyy f . iwS) ««- tikf^^^' 
 
 Infinitive. 
 To give his vote. (pi^u n ij/jjipoj-. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Avoid pleasure afterwards <pivyu H^cvv^ (ps^u Wn^oi ^Xu- 
 
 bringing pain. Csj. 
 
 Angry at his mother. Tir^og it f^nrnf ^ccMttxivu. »c 
 
 The defendant. « (pivya. 
 
 The plaintiff. o ^lAfKoi. 
 
 * The particle av, with the optative of the present, gives it the force 
 of the future, 
 f Attic form. See Grammar, page 115. part ii. 
 
ACTIVE VOICE. 21 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 And he did not distinguish .,pl ?, .^, ..(p.c^,,i,i * 3,,, 
 betweenwisdom and good ^t!^a, 
 sense. 
 
 My rank did not maintain o yi,,,^ ox, /3.a-«^ |y^. 
 ' me. 
 
 And the hearers without ..; « ^... - o^ ;,.A..,, ,«^,. 
 
 aithculty they persuaded. 
 And you were also singing ^^^ h ^..^ y...y.cc yaAo.^,. 
 
 very ridiculously. 
 
 They were keeping guard ^l^o, f,^, rccvm (pvXcc<r<rc, , 
 there. ' ■+* 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 How will you inscribe at v^cc^a, ^^, l^' 'i.u^c, iccc^, 
 
 the streams of Inachus ? 
 She shall suffer punishment, ha, h^n. 
 For this reward I will make t. ycc^ «gg^., rasa,, f 
 
 good. 
 
 But ifyou will not point out u de .Ire, ^,^«;,^pi ly^ ; 
 to me the actors (those ^^«&,. ?» 
 doing) of these things. 
 
 p. isf' '^' '^°^' °^ augmenting compound verbs, see Grammar, 
 t Attic, by the elision of the . and the contraction of the vowels 
 
 B2 
 
12 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Optative, 
 
 Who love another more. ^cmi «>/«? f^xxxcy (ptXtu. i 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 He says that he will unmask hcKccXwrTM lyu ^v^ti xxt uytj 
 me and will bring me be- yt o ^viftu.^, 
 fore the tribunal. 
 
 Participle, 
 
 About to adjudge an action ygot(pn Tccc^etvc^os ^ hKec^u, 
 
 for a violation of the laws, 
 I will send him to bring Ti- uyu TrifiTea hv^a T«^cc/«5'. 
 
 resias hither. "^^oirTa nichS:) 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 I will call him out hither to etv-rog xxXiu * ^v^cc^i div^t 
 
 the light. TT^cs Tfi <pa;j. f 
 
 But who will marry her ? yot^ia 2e rtq «v i 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 The one her father called « fizv itrfjtYtn Trurvi^ hofiu^a, 
 Ismene. 
 
 * What is put down here for a second future is nothing else than 
 the Attic contraction of the first. Thus KxXiUt xK\t<ra, <t elided ku,\%u, 
 contracted xaXu. — See Gram, page 73. 
 
 f Aristoph. Nubcs. 
 
ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 13 
 
 These two youths then suf- Ixftves fA.iv ovv o fcei^etKtov* ^Kti 
 
 fered punishment. nu. 
 
 They cause the stars to ap- us-r^ov h *i vv% ^ uvcc(pu,im* * 
 
 pear in the night. 
 
 He both clapped his hands, c-uyxgonw ts « f xi^g, -TfeTf f L 
 
 Why pray did not you tell n hrx ovto? p^ cv lya ror* 
 
 me this then ? «yeggy w i 4-- 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Do not pass encomiums up- vTn^ a-sctvrov y.vi <?§«?« Iy««' 
 
 on yourself. 
 
 If we convict Ctesiphon. 
 
 If you would then make me 
 your friend, I will lead 
 you to the most agree- 
 able and easiest road. 
 
 loiv CUV lyu ^;A0$ ' TTO^EA^y livi 
 
 Optative. 
 
 How I should distinguish 
 Thersites from the beau- 
 tiful Nireus. 
 
 If you should again see. 
 
 That we might not alone 
 and unprepared wage w^ar. 
 
 t 
 
 oTTis^ dtxx^im Qi^tTitm e67r« 
 
 Save me. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 * For the formation of the 1st aorlst of Liquid verbs, see Grammar 
 p. 161. . 
 
 f The masculine article is used viath the dual. 
 
 I The JEolic, Ionic and Attic form of the Optative of the First 
 Aorist is thus declined : 
 
 CI. <rvy}/tia, C ' Cl. ruyf/tiUftiVf 
 
 Sing. < 2. rv4'ua;, IDu&i. <2. rw^uarev, Plur. <2, Tt;^^l/«T^, 
 
 (,3. rv^/iii. ^3. TuypuaT'/iv. (,3, rvypnar. 
 
 Of these persons, however, the 2d. and 5d. singular, and 3d. plural 
 onlv are in use. 
 
14 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Hear me reporting. aK^a p^ iyu ^ Xiyu, 
 
 Pity me an unfortunate. o;xT«g&» \ya *i ^vtrhoti^m. ^ 
 
 Infiiiitive. 
 
 To send the army away. a-r^xrog ^iv uTeoa-nX^at, 
 
 You gave permission to pro- m^vo-cra iTctr^iTra^ * 
 
 claim. 
 
 Participle. 
 Having persuaded me. tthQc^ ^ lya. 
 
 Having obliged us to wait h kyoqct avxyxx^u \ya ^kc- 
 
 in the forum. t|<€&>^ *. 
 
 And easy for you who have xoti g-v uxova x^ivu^ * tvf>ix6vii 
 
 heard it to judge. [xoyo^). y 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 You left the house empty. . s^j5«05 a«^6> * ^o^wof . 
 They two ran up. * o f>e,iv l7ri^^ctf<,ita. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Lest some snare cut me off. («)} r;? ^oAa? lya x.retvej. 
 
 If also when w^ are dead. u kui Ittsi^uv uTnSeiyov, 
 
 Optative, 
 That they might not fall fivi iTriTriTrreo f o xufzva. ^ 
 
 upon the fatigued. 
 Weshould leave as a triumph xiv ivx^^M n^txftog xcci T^uon 
 
 to Priam and the Trojans. Mittu. 
 
 * See the rules for the ^Sd future, from which the 2d aorist is com- 
 xnonly formed, in Moor's Grammar, page 152, &c 
 f 2. aor. ind. l-ri'TSffov. 
 
ACTIVE VOICE. 15 
 
 Imi^erative. 
 But will you dare to slay your aXXx ktuvu «■«? tfxh TeA|t««*', 
 two children, woman ? yyvjj; 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Tell me. uttov'* \ya»t.il^ i. 
 
 So as to escape observation, as-n M^e*' 
 
 Participle. 
 Calling out. amn^et^u. 
 
 The daughter of Menelaus 5<W(t6flsP^ I«a«t» MmMui xa^jj. 
 having left the house. ^^^L^- 
 
 PERFECT TENSE f. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 If you are wise. il a-ocpoq (pvZ. 
 
 The lawgiver has made the »> ^ovM vTnvdvvog %cnu e vo^o- 
 
 senate responsible. Ssrvi?. 
 
 He gave orders to me. ly^; S' l7ri<rTi?^Xaf. 
 
 They have abolished the « K^ia-t^ KxraXvu. 
 
 trials. 
 
 Has he attempted this most «Voy ToXudc^ ggyov ulcr^^c^ ch ; 
 
 disgraceful action. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 If they have spoken. Ixv Xiya. 
 
 If they have given security. Ixv %ihuft,t ^* il(At iv6vh "^^ 
 
 Demosth. Fs ^ixPt^ £i<rf 
 
 * u-Ttot retains the augment through all the moods. 
 
 f The perfect must be very often translated as a present, and iv 
 then called the Perfec t- Present : the pluperfect as the imperfect. — 
 See Clarke's note on line 37th of the 1st book of the Iliad, h X^v^kv 
 
16 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Who may not have former- 05 os,v (a^ Tr^ozi^os a-v p^ fionha ''^ 
 ly assisted you. ii^i, Demosth. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 He should have found him iv^ia-Kc^ (iv^ico) TroXifAios- 
 
 his greatest enemy. 
 
 And may have been prac- ^ di ttoM^ikv) ri^vvi «c-»£« *, 
 
 tising warlike arts. 
 
 I shall have escaped the ly&iy uv |x^it^g»i* Tra&o^. 
 
 calamity. Soph. :^±^'^ 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 And because they thought Koct art ^ a-Tcov^n ^^ Tr^on^o? ac p 
 that they first broke the Xva iiyiof^en ecvro?.^^''' 
 treaty. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 He happens to have enacted. ' rvy^xm y^ot(pu. 
 Having done nothing good ovhts vym^ ttohu.^ 
 (sound). 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Whom you had sent. eg hcTrsfCTFu. J 
 
 They had contrived to make. ovTtg 7rc6^xa-Kivx^u. 
 
 * Instead of the optative of atrKttu the participle with the optative of 
 ti/ii, sunit is used ; thus, 'hrKrtKons ihv (for utKrav.) 
 f Attic. See Person's Adversaria, p. 98. 
 \ Yin with the participle. 
 
MIDDLE VOICE. lY 
 
 And hitherto they might koh f^i^^i o s cttroi ^'^ uv yiy 
 perhaps have known this. vojg-kcj ** 4c«v * /o-<w$. 
 
 When he hiad not yet sold or av'jva TnTr^xaKca "^^ {tt^ccu) 
 himself. kecvrov ilfAi, Demosth. 
 
 Note. Instead of the regular indicative, subjunctive and opta- 
 tive, the perfect-participle, active, middle, and passive is frequently 
 used with some tense of s/^/, sum: thus, tl V o fAiv — lyvaxcos 'icrrxi. Id. 
 If he shall have been sensible, ous hri l»rs9rofA<poTis , Xen. Cyr. 
 Whom you had sent. /^ 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE, 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 If you wish to learn. u /ScvXcftM f (Mtv^avu, 
 
 Kindness cannot change na- « ^ec^ig xXetTTa ^ * vi (pvtrtq ^ «v 
 ture. ^vvx/axi. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 If we are upon our guard, lav (pvXctrru. 
 
 Whom they may please to 05 uv ^ovM^xt fionku. ^ * 
 assist. 
 
 * Demosth. OJynth. I, 
 
 f BiuXofiKiy oiofAui and o-^tfikat have s/ instead of « of the second per- 
 son singular. The Attic poets always used u of the 2d person, instead 
 of >?, in the present and future tenses, middle and passive. 
 
18 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Optative* 
 
 You would appear ridicu- fe.xTctyi)\cicrrog (pxiv^t. 
 
 lous. 
 For being collected we shall ciS^oo? y«g m ^* xxi rxx,v xxt 
 
 proceed both most speedi- a<r(pxXig xv Tro^ivo^xt, 
 
 ly and safely. 
 
 Impej^ative. 
 
 Deliberate slowly. ^ovMvu fnv ^^xheo?. 
 
 Send ye ambassadors. X7ro7rsfi7rof4.xt ^^io-^v?. 
 
 Go rejoicing. %<«<g<y Tro^ivo/xxi. ■■.■ 
 
 Ltfinitive. 
 
 Are you thinking to turn Itt* to uiyx? \7r190iu t^ittu ,• 
 yourself to greater ob- 
 jects ? 
 
 And they teach them also h^xa-Ku h xvroi kx] -xnda '"' « 
 to obey the magistrates. «g;^«v'^. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 He was overjoyed at pleas- V7rigx,«'^^» ^^^ ^j^^cs ^ X'*i*^^" 
 ing them. ^xi. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. J ' > 
 
 You asked me again, i7rs^df2xi \ya vxAtv. ^jirjlYu^^^^d 
 
 They two conversed a little c-f^iK^ov tt^o^ u>^xixa * dixXtyc' 
 
 with each other. f^xi. 
 
 For the judges were asham- xW^wofAxi yx^ ^iKua-rfu, 
 
 ed. 
 
 * iXXv^M in the dual. 
 
MIDDLE VOICE, J 9 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 I will get myself taught. ^<Wx<y «yro$.f 
 
 And you will receive his oh^ r hh^of^mf y^oyof^^ 
 
 answer. 
 
 He will assuredly err. u^sc^na hyrov. 
 
 Having marched home he px^tag Itti j5 o'ikioc, "^ ^a^ovP 
 
 will easily repel you. ufcw&t. 
 
 Will you not avoid your fa- Tram^ ov (pivya ^'^ E^mvg ; 
 
 ther's imprecations ? 
 
 ^ 
 
 Paulo post, or the Ionic reduplication of the 
 first syllable. 
 
 But grant this favour to me eiXXx ^o$ — lyca U ecu ^md- 
 who will always remera- ^xi ^^ « pc^C'?* 
 ber it. 
 
 I will then give over. ovkoZv Tcotva. 
 
 These I shall remember. oih' ^ iyta ^vxo^cclX Eurip. 
 
 Med. 
 
 Optative. 
 He did not consider what cvrcs ov hvom oa-ng Tcxcr^e^ 
 
 he might suffer. (i^ Truarci/). 
 
 They should obtain suitable res, cilice, ^ riv^&> (for rvyx^- 
 
 rewards. ya). 
 
 * Aristoph. Nubes. f Eurip. 
 
 \ Person on this observes that the Tragedians always use (ji,ifjt,\)w»fjt,at, 
 never fjt.v^ff6r,iroftat ; x,ixXr^(fofjt,ai^ never K\n6mof/,ai : but ^\r\dn(fo(ji.tici and 
 ^i^KriirofAui indiscriminately. 
 
 2 
 
20 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infiniti'ue, 
 You think that you will in fAVihi<; r^o-n-oq ^^ olo^sti ^wx- 
 no manner be able. ^«< 
 
 Thinking that they (^//ie>/i- vof4,i^u izxvolyiv»f4.ci(. 
 selves J will become fit. 
 
 Participle. 
 Declaring what will happen. <p^cti^M *^ o '"' aTroSnt^o^oxi. 
 
 I have come to you to see lyai yr^ag (rv il^i "^ ^V* l/rirKiTr- 
 how you do. ro^xi wag iX^'-J- 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 I will sit in silence. g-io/tt'^ Koc&i^a.f 
 
 They will turn themselves. rggTr^r. 
 
 Into such a snare shall she roto? tk^^-'cos " TtTrTco (^Tno-u "M. 
 
 fall. 
 
 That I would equally perish, ot^oiajg ciTroh'^o-xa. 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 Indicative. 
 But I vilified the art of de- ly^ h n^vn ^etvriKag ^tfcipo- 
 
 vination. f^xt. %■ 
 
 He received me. i(rh^ouui \yu. 
 
 They two seized his hands. yja^ ^ ^' uTrrofAui. , 
 
 You would treat us so. toiovtos *^ p' xv iya *^ l^y*- 
 
 l,CfAXi.X 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 if the people shall decree. lav ■^^(pi^cj o hf^og. 
 But should separately make xxx' i}ix ^rcna « ii^/ivr,. 
 the peace. 
 
 ♦ See Grammar, p. 121. f See Grammar, p. 155. § .7. 
 
 f The aiiijment n. 
 
MIDDLE VOICr. 21 
 
 Optative, 
 
 If you should think this u h euro? ityiouxi (pxvXcg. 
 
 wrong. ^ 
 
 My father would gratify you. 7r»T^ «y XH^^'^^'^^' 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Collect your strength. c-vxxtyu a-kvc?.^ 
 
 Let Phoenix conduct them. (Pom^ ^yio^xi. 
 
 Do you two gratify them. -s&yTo/^flsg<Jfl,tt«/. 
 
 Embrace and address your cca-Tra^o^oti »»i Tr^os-iTra ^* * 
 father with me, Trarti^ /wst' ly^ ^^'-f" 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Before that you asked any tt^iv cr<oyv iv^cfAxi c-v ^'^. 
 
 thing whatever. 
 
 If you neither wish, said he, g< ^vi^i ovto?, \(pn, fiovMf.titt 
 
 to answer this. xTroK^ivo^xi. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Having begun along with «(t4» >> SsA^v.} ^ ote.'K.'^. 
 
 the moon. _ aX^. o <, 
 
 These having written and oyros ««< ye^ct(^a ac x,oti a-^^xt- 
 
 sealed. v«. j 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 As soon as he came. ag h uififtoustt Tct^ic-Tcc. 
 
 And they obeyed. i55g TraSa. 
 
 But whom did they choose ? «aac6 ng ha ;* 
 
 Augment u 
 
22 EXERCrSES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Do you wish that I should /io'jMfieii (4)5) r^i7rc» ; 
 
 turn myself? 
 He will not be persuaded. ov ^n 7Fn6a.^ 
 
 Optative. 
 I could not obey. ovx, av TruSoj. 
 
 Let some one of the gods x^ityh ^s ng B-iog yivouxi. 
 be judge. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Do not betake yourselves to lip' ke^iruyn f^n r^iTca.j 
 plunder. 
 
 Irifinitive. 
 I will not conceal from you cv(^,vi o-v **' y.^^vTrTu Tc^oq oa-ns " 
 
 to whom I wish to go. /SeyAe^a* cUpacoiAcci. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Those that were good. ^SXcg p^ 7""'/^*^^^//-? /.^g Ss<ri 
 
 Promising that he would ^dXov uvrog vTFta-^vio^eti'he,/, i 
 give them rewards. [ 
 
 PERFECT, TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 In the next place do you ilr ovk ilhu (^ ol^x) C^oi^hoo 
 
 not know ? 
 
 The moon deserted her » o-gAjjv;) hc?^U7ru >> e^o^.^^ 
 
 path. (tiV ^v.-^^y^.-rv. 
 
 From the time when these g| (jg S' ^a^tuTaa <rv -^ evra 
 
 orators appeared asking (pxivcj ^nrue,- Demostli. 
 
 you. 
 
 * The subjunctive of the second aorist middle, with the particles 
 ev fjLY), has the same force as the future indicative. 
 
PASSIVE VOICE. 23 
 
 Optative. 
 How could he be ignorant ? %ag <«» M^i* ;* 
 
 Injlnitive. 
 
 Upon account of having left, ^ac o^^^ UMiTra. 
 That a certain alliance ap- (pxivM m o-vf^^x^icc.^'^ 
 peared. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Trusting to the truce. G-xov^n p^ -xiiSa. 
 
 The fluttering shadows of re^il^a o yg«go? i5 o-x<«. 
 
 the dead. 
 
 Of those aged above fifty o vTrsg TTivrriKcvrx Irog ''^ yg- 
 
 years. yovx, 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Nothing else was left them, ovhi^ uvrog uXXog xu-rtu 
 )r ye were all baw 
 at the same time. 
 
 For ye were all bawling out 5r<«? ^n y«^ k^n. x^et^e*. ^ 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 They are maintained. r^i(pu. 
 
 Every good is afforded him. ^xg ciyxSog ^* oh xogi^a. 
 
 * Sec Rule, Gram. p. 158. 
 
24 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 If he be opposed to honour- hey xxXog KuyecScg ^ uvtitxttu. 
 
 able and good men. 
 But if you are pleased with ^v h lyu kxi o Iftog iv(p^etim p' 
 
 me and my intentions. sv^'/jfc^c^a :' 
 
 ' Optative. 
 
 If the citizens would serve il o TroXnm f^ir uXXn>^6iv <^''§«-q»v7'^ 
 together rather than the iivofMi f^thXcv » e-vvrxrraf 
 Lydians be drawn up with ccvrog ^ Avdoi. -•— 
 them. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Let them with justice be shorag ^giAo? vt^it^u. 
 accounted cowards. 
 
 htfinitive. 
 
 To the not being thrown - ug ro *^ ^vi rx^xrra. 
 
 into disorder. 
 To be checked in every way. ^«j r^oirog ^^ kuXvu. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Not known by their actions ov to TrpctyjjLx 'xxi to ttoXitiv 
 and administration. f^ct^tvuc-Ka. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Another army was collect- «aao? a-T^xrivfix a-vXMyu* av- 
 
 ing for him in the Cher- to? h Xgppoyjjo-cj. 
 
 sonesus. 
 The soldiers were assembled o a-T^xTiarAg cvmyu^a. 
 
 together. 
 
 * For the composition of l» and trvr with verbs, see Grammar, part ii, 
 
 p. 4 1 and 42, 
 
PASSIVE VOICEd 25 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 1 shall be frequently obliged TroXXocKii Mya umyKx^a ^m 
 
 to speak of myself l^xvrov, 
 
 I shall appear maintahi- tlrtg to «^<j5 e;t;«^* (petivu, 
 
 ing this practice. 
 
 If I shall be persuaded to « vu6ca ^ ^ ^" lg;^jo|t6«* * * ^•^^ 
 
 go to see (her). ^zetofAcci, Y 
 
 Infinitive. 
 I think however that Archi- olfAott fUvtot *A^^m *i Atuv 
 nus or Dion will be cho- xt^za, 
 sen. 
 
 Participle. 
 To shew the power of Philip *i <E»<A/^Tfi5 hmfnig hwa * * 
 about to be dissolved. ^i»Xva. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 You shall be hurt. ^"KcvTcru. 
 
 He shall be seen doing IIjjAgy?* re ycc^ «|<o?, wasTjjg 
 
 deeds worthy both of t A;i;*AAgy5 sgyov Sgaw^ (p**!**/. 
 
 Peleus and his father A- 
 
 chilles. 
 
 * Attic, gen, 
 
 B 
 
26 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Optative, 
 Many will appear, ttoXv? ^etiw. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Expecting to be beaten. 9rA)i0-0'«; Tr^oa^oKtw^ 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 He was immediately lulled Trx^x^^nf^x xttfjtxw vttc t« /mi- 
 
 to sleep by the melody. Aoff,s 
 
 Against whom we were sent. I<p* Jsac 'xifA-xM. 
 
 They have lost their lives. /8/05 ^c s uipxi^tM. 
 
 Afterwards I was brought lyntr rgg^^* lA?ri?8 x«Aof 
 
 up to the fairest hopes. vTrof, 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 But if on the other hand «v §* au x^xrw. 
 
 you be vanquished. 
 That he may be saved. ota>? hx<ru^6>. 
 
 When the laws are observed ot»v hxr^M vofAog » w»A<f. 
 
 in the state. 
 
 Optative. 
 Nor a house well managed, ovr o/xo? xaAw? o<xe«. 
 How he might best pro- oTFug m Kxx^ta-rx ro^ivt^t. 
 ceed. 
 
 Imperative, 
 Be saved. eu^a. 
 
 Be gone from me. u.%x>^>.x<T7a>^^ utt \yu. ^ 
 
 Reverence tutelary Jove. fcxxxiln^fMi 7rxr^»t^ Zw^. 
 
 • 1 fut. ^geffrifefixh f Eurjp. Hecub. 
 
PASSIVE VOICE. 27 
 
 Infinitive. 
 That these things be done. ro tc^oco-o-u ovrog, ac 
 So as that these things be aa-rs ^n ovros A«<y kxi ^n uvscy 
 
 aboh'shed and not be xec^a. _1 — 
 
 forced. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Having learned and been fia&w^^ xxt Ui^o* /mjj <poCg«™ 
 
 accustomed not to dread o fioc^<^ot^os.^c 
 
 the barbarians* 
 
 Hew great is the little sea- 6)5 fc^y^ fnx^cg la-riv h xeti* 
 
 sonably given. g65^ ha» 
 
 He would find nothing o- gygov"'^ ovha IxxitTca. 
 
 mitted. 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 I was defrauded. 'TeuguKOTcra. 
 
 By whom I was sent. cs^ u'xc<rr%xxei viet. 
 
 The thunder burst through ySgovTjj §' fUTa-co* h' oiirr^ctfrn, 
 
 the lightning. 
 
 The point of the spear stuck ^o^v uxuKn h yxm isiiirvu, 
 
 in the earth. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Not though you should burst, oy^ «v o-y he6'ffvira-&f. > 
 
 Optative. 
 As any one of you would aer^e^ uv co tKeta-ro^ et\<rj^vw n 
 
 be ashamed to quit his t«|;5 Miiea.^ * 
 
 post. 
 If he should appear accuser, u xxrayo^c? uvec(pxim. 
 
 * For the formation of the 2d. fut. of this and similar verbs, see 
 Gram. p. 152. and 155. § 3. 
 
 B 2 
 
28 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION, 
 
 Imperative. 
 Appear the bravest. (pxiva uyoth^, 
 
 Liflnitive. 
 That the dead body never HKvg fmTroTi ^et^ru*, 
 
 be buried. 
 By being not corrupted. rc^ ys ^v^ ^ioc(peu^u. 
 
 To appear as splendid as a? y^oifATr^trxTx (pocivco. 
 
 possible. 
 
 Participle. 
 But omitting these long ad- o ^xx^og ^' <«7r«XA«o-c<» ytvdt' 
 
 monitions. tjj^^.s 
 
 These having appeared. aWog (potiva.^ 
 
 PERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 And I am also persuaded. Tru&a h h,cci. 
 
 The great heaven is com- IvirgiTrM ^gy^j cv^avbg. 
 
 mitted. 
 
 I have executed a greater to Igyav f^iyccg l^t^yec^ofixi. 
 
 work. 
 
 Though we have not been el kui ^jj }c»6^ 'eaauvs? y^6av ac 
 
 educated in the country rei<^a. 
 
 of the Greeks. 
 
 Mortals do not possess riches cbrci ro pkjgjj^at thx kt^o^uxi 
 
 really their own. ySgoros. X 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 If any one be possessed of Ixv ng xnv o xyxhg^ xrxc- 
 
 it without the best. ftut. 
 
 We may have arranged ojP^ /iovhofixi hoixtupa. (i<^<). 
 
 what we wish. 
 
 * 2 f. TccipZ. 
 
inf 
 
 S 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 29 
 
 Optative. 
 
 1 was afraid lest poison h.ix.u^^^ ^ f^n Iv o K^ecm^ <?<Ǥ- 
 
 should have been raing- /tcaxovP^ f^iya. 
 
 led in the cup. 
 
 That he should then most tots f^etXia-rec o ^€o$^ jttvaso- 
 
 of all remember the gods. ^oti.f 
 
 You shall both be called a-o^c? t' civ avrcg Kocyot^a^ n-oi- 
 
 wise and good. Ag» <«^a.:|: L.-* 
 
 Imperative, 
 Beware of doing those things. (pv>.ct<r70i ys oi/tos ^rote^w. 
 Let these things be told. tvrog lggft>. " 
 
 Let it seem good to the ^ox^ o ^jj^d? 0/ 'Ahyoaoi.^ 
 Athenian people. 
 
 Infinitive, 
 He is allowed to possess it. l|«<rT< Kxaof^xi. 
 
 Participle. 
 Being ordered by the poet, vtto ;to<j)t>j$s mxi^a. 
 With the good order of the n c vuthva ivfcotrf^ix. 
 students. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Indicative, 
 There was prepared for it a TFugena-Kivot^ea §' uvro^ text erKX" 
 boat and victims. (po? xeti h^uov. 
 
 * See Gramm. part II. p. 14. 
 
 f Attic form. 
 
 \ The optative in this sentence is formed ziKXy/xnv, yo, ^ro. There 
 seems to be two forms of the optative in certain words as used by the 
 A tiic writers: thus (ws/xv^j^a/, has both fjuifAvaifinv, So, fro, and fnf/.v^" 
 fitjv, jio, yro, ^o(>uv (Mfiniro (aov. Aristoph. Plut. 991. 
 
30 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 The unfortunate Phocians \%»7roe.r»(a §g o rotXxiTru^cg ^a- 
 were also deceived and xgy^ ««< uvxf^iu n ttoXis uv* 
 their towns razed. to?. 8 
 
 And the one was buried. scect ro (aiv ^xtttu* 
 
 Aiid I mjself was disturbed, xxi uvrog lyuyi rec^uavu. ^ 
 
 Contracted Verbs in a<y. 
 ACTIVE VOICE, 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 The armed son rushes. Ivo^tAaj cgfteta Truig, 
 
 You perceive the prepara- ^ f*69 •xot^xvKivn e^uu. 
 
 tion. 
 Is my son dead or alive. ? 0vj)o-x«p 4 ^««* erects ^«5 ; 
 
 When any one asks him. crxv ng uvrtg iTFi^uxua, 
 
 What pray should we do ? rtg hrx ^^«u , 
 
 Optative. % 
 Should I hunt after friends ? (piXag u» \yu %^etu jf 
 They would not permit you. ov» uv Icca. 
 If we should see you. ei (aiv a-v c^ecw. 
 
 * See Grammar, p. 98. 
 
 t Or in the Attic. See Grammar, p. 98. 
 
CONTRACTED VRRBS IK eia, 31 
 
 Imperative, 
 
 Speak out. xxratv^xeif. 
 
 Pray consider, said he, bet- e^x^j hi «<?«> /SgAT^^y. 
 ter. 
 
 Infinitive, 
 
 Having instructed the fore- ch IfAv^t^kv (nyxa h'^MKu, ^ * 
 
 most to be silent. 
 
 Before that {you) are hun- ;r§<v jwsw mimu,^ \^ 
 
 gry. ^ 
 
 Participle, 
 
 Not suffering to proceed in «v» \«,u^ h rgXo? hurro^-' 
 
 the procession to the end. 5rgy&;.** 
 
 Loving their safety for the uyxTrua^ ii Iv o Ti-ec^m^ ffam- 
 
 time. ^i». 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 He loved them as being 0^ a>? 6i(piXifio§ ecyxTfuat, 
 
 useful. 
 They regarded each other iiho)^ xhXaXuv^ c^xu. ^ 
 
 with pleasure. 
 
 See Grammar, p, 98. 
 
32 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION, 
 
 MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 They blame him alone. cttrtua uvrag fcovog. 
 
 Whom they now accuse of ojP^ wv ourictu ^tmu o ^rdAf^os. 
 having made the war. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 If you should obtain good Ixv 'tfx^sc vug ivvotet xrxofcxt, 
 
 will from all. 
 But perceiving their evil «aa« tm luvrcv xxKh ^ieco/Mi 
 
 deeds may be grieved. etvido^eci. 
 
 Optative. 
 Nor would you be at a loss f^vi^' — cctto^w opt ^ncg a^ncv * 
 
 what to make of divine en ^^U6^eci. 
 
 signs, i. e. of signs from 
 
 heaven. 
 How should men be sooner vcjg S' «» fiecxxov h lAxy^y?^ 
 
 overcome in battles ? i)Tr»6f^eci uv6gu7ttg -, _L- 
 
 Imperative. 
 Endeavour to be good. '^u^xca ctyoc^c; yiyufAon. 
 
 Use what have been said, ^^xo^xi « «g>}^a<P* » i^nnu 
 or seek better. fiiXrtm, 
 
CONTRACTED VERBS IN uw. S3 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 So as to employ them. ofa-n yc^etofcett* atJro?.^ 
 
 And if you would wish to be urs vtto (piT^a s |^gA« °p uyot" 
 beloved by your friends. -Trac^xi, 
 
 Participle, 
 
 In quest of your person <ro? dsj^cts B^eiu. 
 
 (hunting after). 
 They contriving a laugh. oh fC'/i;,^etvuM ygA&;?.^ 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative Mood. 
 
 He endeavoured to remedy Tru^ecuf yv<y^jj ciicic^xi. 
 
 by his advice. 
 
 He imprecated many curses. ^oXXot kxtu^oco^cci. 
 
 They were seen by all. o^xu v-xa -xu^.^ 
 
 ♦ See Grammar, p. 
 
34 EXERCISES ON VEJIBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATIOK. 
 
 Contracted Verbs in g^. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 The most worthy Diogenes ch aycchs sup Aitym^ fru^oi- 
 
 lives beside Sardanapalus tau f^iv 'Zx^amTeuXa^ d « 
 
 the Assyrian, and Midas Ac-e-yg^?, Kott Mi^cc^ o ^gy|, 
 
 the Phrygian, and certain kui u^-Xo^ tis o TPoXvnXm, 
 others of the grandees. 
 
 They call them ungrateful. ci^et^ia-Tcs xecMu, 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 If you consider.] ^ }cetrecnia,pl 
 
 Who may be conscious to o? uy ^vyuhtf kecurtv d tC m~ 
 
 themselves of having been xgA>.nopapa 
 
 well disciplined. 
 
 0]ptative, 
 
 What would appear to him. t<j Soxew ayrof. 
 Whom he might invite to c? kxMu* Im rt hinm. 
 supper. 
 
 Imperative, 
 Don't^ be ignorant of your- /kj} uyvtza auvrtv. 
 
 SQ\f, 
 
 Hate flatterers. fAic-ia e xo^MxsvA'.pa 
 
 * See Grammar, p. 100, 
 
CONTRACTED VERBS IN ««;. 35 
 
 Infinitive. 
 So as also to be rich. a<rti x.»i vXwnu, 
 
 Participle, 
 All are relations of the sue- o ivrv^eas ttks sw cvyymi* 
 
 cessful. ^ 
 
 Accusing others. d uXXci^ lyxx)^. p' 
 
 But you have been found «aa* l(pgy^g<y ' ^ pas ^^^.^^ ^^^^ 
 
 less wise. vg^;, p* A — ' 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 He frequently invited. xxXiu a? t» -irtXXec. 
 
 They praised her. echiu ecCrtgU 
 
 Plato, I suppose, was sick. HXaxm §*, M(4.e»f eta^mat. 
 
 MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 No one buys. ovhn mib(Mi, 
 
 They are anxious. Im^iMcfiui 
 
 As fractures and sprains are cJo-^rsg ta piiv^« km t» r;r«0'^<« 
 then put in motion. tots x<vg6>.'' 
 
36 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 For when any one does this, orxv yu^ rtg ovrc^ ttchu. 
 Until the one before take tt^iv «» o iTgocr^gv iiyiofAxt, 
 the lead. 
 
 Optative, 
 They were marching with ^a-va-r^xrivM oTrti ityicf^ui. 
 
 him wherever he might 
 
 lead them. 
 She should be deprived of 0*05 (kvvi^^ o-n^iu. 
 
 such a husband. 
 
 Imperative, 
 Do not only praise the good, jttu f^ovav l-Kcttviu ayuhi, eix^u 
 
 but also imitate them. x,eci ^tf^&;,i- 
 
 Both respect each other. <»AAj}A&;y r «l^go^«<.P* 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Good to be exercised by the ay^^a^ uo-Kisj vtto o-r^etnu' 
 
 soldiers. tjj?.^ 
 
 That he himself being irre- uv iTriXn^tag uvrcg^^ av l7r</t*g» 
 
 proachable take charge. Mof^ett, 
 
 Participle. 
 Thinking to do away such viyiofc^i^^ Ay w ^ ^ e raiovrog 
 
 pretexts. 7r^o(pcC(rig.^ 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 For I would never have oyrg y»^ civ xcn iyitftuu 
 
 thought. 
 When you chose him ge- ifviKx ul^iu^^ c-r^urnyos, 
 
 neral. 
 
 * See Grammar, p, II. p. 42. 
 
57 
 
 Contracted Verbs in oo;. 
 ACTIVE VOICE, 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 No one dedicates a crown. G-rz^xveg ovhig K»6ii^ou, 
 
 He gives much. Teoxy^ec ^i^oa. 
 
 The king requests you to o fioitriMv? k^icu <tv u'KmMon. 
 sail. 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 If the council crown any kv ^iv ng c-nipecvou « /36«Ajj. 
 one. 
 
 Optative, 
 
 Calling to him his friends, ^r^dcrxasAe^ «i <piXoi,L <r7rov^xii>- 
 
 he engaged in earnest Xoysofcett Jm ag ^jjAow * oi t<- 
 
 conversation ujjVA them, ^ao).^' 
 
 that he might shew whom 
 
 he honoured. 
 
 The sword would bring the o trih^og uv hou o ua-kvti? o 
 
 weak upon an equality Wjcv^cg ^h o TroMfcoiA 
 
 with the strong in battle. 
 
 * In the Attic form. See Grammar, p. 102. 
 
38 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Imperative, 
 Let him restore. uTco^ihcu, 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Perfectly to understand eiK^tQau outo?* 
 
 these things. 
 To punish those not per- ^i)^<oft» o fcn euros Tirmu, 
 
 forming these things. 
 
 Participle, 
 Turning my face round. xvxXau 7rg(iff6>Tcv, 
 
 V 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 He afforded them a begin- a^^vi u.\nt^ \M(Ka vtXi^t^, 
 
 ning of the war. 
 And manned the ships. Koti « vuvg TrXn^ow. 
 
 As you wished. uo-tts^ g-v u^icu. 
 
 MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 So that he again bribes this a<m ttuXiv f^icha o xurcc" 
 contemptible wretch. vrva-rog tiro?. 
 
 Whose glory you envy, imi- o'j « ^o%» ^»3Aoa>, fiifnofieti it 
 tate their actions. ^f«|<?. 
 
 Subju7ictive. 
 If they should be opposed, lav uvros Imntoa, 
 
CONTRACTED VERBS IN «&-. S9 
 
 Optative, 
 
 But you, however, would uXhx <ru fAivrot, f*syctXec y h 
 incur a heavy loss. ^TSfciou, 
 
 Imperative, 
 
 Think yourselves deserving «|<o» /wgya? rtfin, g 
 of the highest honours. J^-* 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 He thinks him worthy to be ecvrcs u^tou (m(pxvcM. 
 
 crowned. 
 If indeed they seemed in d ^g rt u^x « « crat^cx s /o-^jjuj s 
 
 any respect to be inferior fnica ^oKiw.im 
 
 in strength of body. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 These things being dedi- ovros h^oc* ^sa$. 
 cated to the god. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 And at the same time took xxt ufcoc h%im ctvroi.a.c 
 
 hold of his right hand. 
 They soon manned the ships, rux,^^? n mvi feM^m.^ 
 
40 
 
 EXERCISES 
 
 ON 
 
 VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATIO:^. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 He enacts a law, and a very riSn^i vo^o$, xxt ftuh.et xccXeu^ 
 
 excellent one. l^a. p* 
 
 They two say. oh (pn^t. 
 
 They say that all stop. ^retg (pvifn IvofAiva^^^ 
 
 They know this also. y^eci euro? hv^i. 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 But when the law sends crxv h sn^oi fizv ^uvn up^fi^ 
 forth one sound. o vo/^o?. 
 
 Optative, 
 
 If he knew any thing good, f < rtg il^vif^i uyxh(;. 
 
 That no one should first h» ^-^Tm (phy-i iTriv^o^^t* P* ^ * 
 
 boast. 
 
 One would say. (pv^i^i uv rtg. 
 
ACTIVE VOICE. 41 
 
 Imperative. 
 Hear me, my friends, KXvf*^ <p<Ao5. 
 
 Prepare a feast for the se- dectwfAi^^ ^en? yi^m. 
 
 nators. 
 Keport my answer. uyyiXix «;ro<p}j^<. " 
 
 Irifinitive. 
 
 To go to a feast. h ^»i$ ^^ hfci. 
 
 Do you indeed give to me, ^ k»i ^i^uf^t, <pn^t, lyu ; 
 
 said he ? 
 
 He said that he was ready uTrchncwfn (pnfit kotfiof^'* tlyea 
 
 to shew the dead body of ro Truthov c vgxwj. 
 
 the child. 
 
 Participle, 
 Mixing with it certain bar« Trx^ecf^iyvvfn u^oc /Sec^Qu^wos 
 
 barous names. m cyo^et. 
 
 Giving completion to the nxta-ipe^cg* ^i^u>^/ xi^^f^^^'"^ 
 
 oracle. 
 Uttering a sound. <pmi} ci(pni^i 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 Which he was eagerly bent 05^ Tr^ohf^c^i etTroXXv^ct. 
 
 to ruin. p 
 
 They dismissed their slaves uvrov tUimg ^Trm^t etTrtXtv^ 
 
 free. k^og, 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 Indicative. 
 He then put on a certain oivrc? fAiv cvv fiuyncog rig ^v^i 
 magic robe. o-roAjj. 
 
 * TiMo'fB^os agrees with ^^nff^os, 
 
 D 
 
42 EXERCISES ON VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION, 
 
 At length one of the popu- tsXo? uvKrr-AfAi^'^ ^ * tig o Jjj^as- 
 
 lar orators rising up, read yayog uvxyvaifAt '^n^pur-f^cc 
 
 a decree to the following rciovrog, ~L- 
 effect. 
 
 Suhjunctive, ^J 
 If you should desert me. h \yu <rv ei(pivifAu 
 
 "When they do not requite. orar ^n etTrMe^^i. 
 Should any thing not go »v rt (a^ xxt» y^u^i^^ hfZn^i. 
 according to their mind. 
 
 Optative, 
 Just as if you should say. ^(r^rsg a,i d ^mt. 
 Should become master of xugje?"® » Q^mkh xxdi^mut. 
 
 Thrace. 
 May you never proceed. jkjjts o-wp* vron Tr^o^n^t, 
 
 Imperative. 
 Allow me to command him ^t^ufct'lyu r^itg ifit^et ei^%ot^ • 
 
 three days. ayro^.^ 
 
 Dismiss ambitious views. fci&ivjfAi^ ^^ to' Xixv, 
 
 Let him submit to me. iya v<pi<mfi(Jt,i, 
 
 Irifinitive. 
 
 Being able to requite a fa- dwxfAui ^ec^i^ aVo5<S«t;^(, 
 
 vour. 
 
 To give an account pf his Aoyoj ^<^a>,«6< o^^ w^ao-o-dj.PP^P"* 
 
 conduct. 
 
 To make an offering. ^vechi^t-* a.vatnhff'i* 
 
 To impute illiberality. uvxMvk^ix Kxrxyvufcu 
 
 Participle, 
 Having placed upon them Tixjx ts l-riridnfAi kxi Je^v^*' 
 a tiara and given them goj 7rx^x^i}^j(^i, 
 jjuards. 
 
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE. 43 
 
 Not only transgressing the cv « v6ft.oi (aoiov vTn^'^nfAi. 
 
 laws. 
 
 Now getting out of the dl- wv }i l^ia-Tvif^t o og^n ««< hK^ciof 
 
 rect and right path. «^oj.^2- 
 
 MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 You court ambition the *i xxko^ ^xt^m l^infAt (piXtti- 
 most infamous of god- f^m^,^ 
 desses. 
 
 The enactor points out to « y^scipu^^ iTnhiKWf^i i d- 
 his hearers. xoyw.^* 
 
 He goes if he i^ould be kf*t il n ^wxf^cxi^'^ (ia^hu} " 
 able to lend any assist- 
 ance. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 That you may know to Uot, Tr^to^ocw l^nnufAeci ra a-vf^.- 
 
 foresee your advantage. ^sg6v.^^ 
 
 Optative. 
 You may soon perhaps be rxyy y dv ^wxf^xr fixvJdxvuv 
 able to learn about rythm. yn^i pv^^os.S 
 
 Imperative. 
 Boy, don't buy a torch, f^n -pr^ixfAxi, vxt^y Jas^, i%ii^i^ 
 since the light of the ^^/j" SgA}jy«<fl kxXou 
 moon is fine. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 To be filled with all things. %x<-^ l/^Tri'^Xvif.u, 
 He ordered them to gird ^o^wvy^t hoiyv. 
 themselves. 
 
 I) 2 
 
44- EXERCISES ON VEItBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Participle, 
 Always neglecting the pre- to ^iv ttx^ov cth Tr^om^t,^^ 
 
 sent. 
 Being desirous to do what {(ptufn '^•^^ Tr^ctrrM k 7ra,hKi 
 
 they were long anxious Ini^v^iu).'^^'' \ 
 
 to do. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 The ground was opened. to I^^c^os uvue;AyvviAi, 
 
 He did not refuse labours, cv ttovos^ v(piyji^tf ov Kiv^vvm^ 
 
 nor shun dangers. cc(pia-Tnfit, 
 
 Each spread his repast. ri6vif^i^^ ^c^ttc? Ixceo-ro?*. 
 
 Such as might be already oa-og f^av dv dvxTn^^TrXmt jJ^jj 
 
 infected (filled) with vice. xxkicc.^ 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 The name Poiynices your ovo^» UokvniKvii^'^ Trotrn^ -rthfct 
 
 father gave you. a-v. 
 
 They willingly gave up the Ucav rv^ctwis^ oc(pivi^t, 
 
 sovereign power. 
 
 The horse which he sold. tTTTro^^^ 05 ocTroh^co^i. 
 
 Thus he spoke. m? (p-/i^i. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Being afraid lest we attack (poZiCfAxi fim s^ixitfn^; ctjJro?.'' 
 
 them. 
 Whatever the people may etfro-cx, \uog crvni^nf^i. 
 
 agree to. 
 
 Homer. 
 
MIDDLE AND PASSIVE VOICE. 45 
 
 Optative. 
 Unless he should have sold il ^-^ xoXvq^ uTTbhi^cofii. 
 
 it for more. 
 We would yield to no man. Ai^^ ocvS^taTroi^ ^' v^m^i. 
 You would not even thus ov^ elv ovrco ^irxyv&ff^i. 
 
 change your resolution. 
 
 Imperative. 
 Let me first go now. f^i6iyi^i^^ vw uou -Tv^Znoy, 
 
 Itifiniiive. 
 To alienate his property. hciridnui o ^^ " Uvtov. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 All the citizens having com- ctTra^ o TroAiTjj? 7rii^uK0tTy.ri&-/iUi 
 
 mitted the state to you. yi w^Xi? o-v. p^ 
 
 And having put off the mask, text ra Tr^rxT-^jTrucv uTroTth^u. 
 
SYNTAX 
 
 or THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 I. CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OP 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 I. CONCORD OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Rule. Two or more Substantives relating 
 to the same object agree in case : as A^oysDrig 
 JjTiksog vtog^ TToSocg uKvg A%/Xsy^. Homer. The 
 noble son qfPeleus^ the swift footed Achilles. 
 
 O prince and king, and our u htrTrcrfig, x»t /iua-iXivf, xut 
 
 Jupiter. vi^iri^tq Zivi. Lucian. 
 
 And all the other men pro- xui o uXXcg xec? dvS^e/Trttg utec- 
 
 claiming him their bene- xxXtu, o ivi^yirm, • »f»i^, o 
 
 factor, a man of worth. uyuh^. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Cyrus having freed the Per- Ko^of, Ixivh^ciu^ * Ui^Tui « 
 
 sians, his countrymen, by uvtov w«AiTjj?, i uvrcv <p^o« 
 his own abilities. 
 
CONCORD OF SUBSTANTIVES. 47 
 
 \ § And perceiving once Chae- Xxi^i^ptuv h -xon koci Xon^zx^ec" 
 
 rephon and Chaerecrates, t>j?, a^iX(po'; f^iv av «aAjj- 
 
 being each others bro- A(wv, ixvrov '^ yvtki^if^o^, oticr- 
 
 thers, and known to him, 6e6vo^oti * ^ ^ix(pi^o^ui. Xen. 
 
 disagreeing. Mem. .^%\^ 
 
 \ And they said that they saw kxi o /SxcriXnog cryi^uov a^ota 
 
 the royal standard, a cer- (pytta, ^ * utrog rig x^va-iog 
 
 tain golden eagle upon a Itti jtsAtji. ^ Xen. Anab. 
 shield. 
 
 For I reckon you to be ray vof^i^a yx^ a-v \yo> ^ tlfci 'xetr^ig 
 
 country, and friends, and kxi (piXog Kxt <rvf^fix^og, 
 
 allies. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 .^neas, counsellor of the Amixg, T^aat /3o«Aj)^o|a$ pjjseA- 
 
 brazen-armed Trojans, I jco^itmv, 'Iti-^o? du j ^g vota ^ * 
 
 saw the horses of the swift Tro^uKng Aix^i^vig. JEol. Horn. 
 
 Achilles. II. (2 Hexam.) 
 
 Go, call 1 * your master (vr^oa-rxng), Cleon to me. Ari- 
 stoph. Ran. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 But, O Socrates, obeying us your supporters, {r^o(pivg)f 
 neither (^))t«) estimate children more (^rgg* ttXuuv ttohu '"') 
 nor life (to ^xcj), nor any thing else, than (^rgo) justice. 
 Plato. 
 
 Note. The noun is sometimes repeated in a different case from the 
 preceding : thus — II. %. 395. AvJ^a^a;^*;, B^vyxTfi^ (/.iyaXnTo^oi Kiriuvesy 
 KtrtuVy OS \iuiiv. 
 
 Observation 1* Nouns connected with other nouns to 
 limit their signification are converted into adjectives : 
 thus, T>j» 'EAAesJot ^o/yjjv l^if>ix6ov, for *EAA)jv<x)jv, I have learn- 
 the Greek language. Lucian, OXvfATFix^a Mova-xty Olym- 
 pian Muses. Horn, l^^tv xn^x. Hesiod. i^y, 191. Simi- 
 lar to .these are several expressions both in our own and 
 other languages ; as, sea-water, gold-ring, wine-glasses, &c. 
 
48 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Observ. 2. The noun is sometimes put in the accusa- 
 tive, agreeing with the action denoted by the verb : as, xai 
 
 (^i^nnvuv TTecrti^ ^vjjTw Tfcc^' ecv^^fj roy^' utcoi/ ^vecyKxcriv. Eurip. 
 Alcest. 6. And father (Jove) forced me to serve xvith a 
 mortal, as an expiation for that offence. 'EAevjjv Krxmftiv, 
 MmXtu XvTTTiv TTiK^uv. Comparc Eurip. Orest. 491-2 ; — and 
 sometimes in the nominative, as explanatory of the pre- 
 ceding : thus, xgflSTjjgEj iKTiVf «v?go$ ivx,u^cg Ti^vn- Sophocl. 
 QEd. Col. 472. 'iTr^roAyToj, eiyvcu Uirhag Tronhvf^etrx. 
 
 Observ. 3. The infinitive with the article, standing in 
 place of a noun, often agrees with the preceding noun or 
 pronoun : as, l^as n tovtov, rov ^iKxl^itv. Aristoph. Vesp. 89. 
 
 Observ. 4. Abstract nouns are sometimes used instead 
 of appellatives : as, et\ia>%, If^ov Kvi^ivfcec (affinitas) for Ifiov 
 xn^io-Tt). Soph. OEd. Tyr. u ^vyyintot Trxr^og l^ov. Eurip. 
 Orest. 1237, for Ivyyivvi? or %vyyinq. 'riKixvov T£, ^im yivi" 
 (TiVf Kott f*nTi^ec Tvi6vy. yin<ri)i for y£vv>jTo^i». Horn. II. |'. 201. 
 rv^ocvvt^og ovref 7FiT(iV(7i/ig,^or Tv^oivvov, &c. Soph. CEd. Tyr, 128. 
 
 II. GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Rule I. One Substantive governs ano- 
 ther, denoting a different thing, in the Geni- 
 tive Case : as, zoczcov ayyekog, the messenger of 
 evil. 
 
 It is not the language of an hfjit ^e ov^ « Aoyo? o ^vtru^ De- 
 orator, mosth, Tirs^t a-rs^. 
 
 The language of truth is uTrXoog o f^vSeg i uXTiktei l(pv¥. 
 simple. Eurip. Phceniss. 
 
 iSHM 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 49 
 
 Of how many evils is igno- 
 rance the cause to men. 
 
 Menelaus the base, the be- 
 trayer of my father. 
 
 § The legislator hath there- 
 fore prescribed this first 
 in the oath of the judges. 
 
 The golden cincture put 
 about her head, sent 
 forth a wonderful stream 
 of devouring fire. 
 
 Don't we assuredly say that 
 poverty is the sister of 
 beggary ? 
 
 uv^^uTTog. Plato Alcib. 2. 
 
 Ixoi TTetrvi^. Eurip. (Iamb. 
 Trim). 
 
 TTgwTo? rarru ^ ^ Iv rtf o dt' 
 x.cca-rn'; o^fcog. i^sch. adv. 
 Ctes. 
 
 X^VG-iag fAlv cif6(pi fc^oig xa fleet 
 TrXoKog 0o6Vf>icia-rog nu vstfuc 
 TFctfi^xTidg TTV^. Eurip. (2. 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 6VX6VV dilTTOV ti TTTi'J^^ilCC 7FiVi{& 
 
 (P'/ifci il^i a^gx^m Aristoph. 
 (Anapaest. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 And there were stewards (rec^iug) beside the ships dis- 
 tributors (^«r»g) of food. Homer. (Hexam.) 
 
 Whether (g<V) on Olympus' sacred, snow-topped (;^iova- 
 €aj)to?) summits (xogvfpn) you sit. Aristoph. (Anapaest. 
 Tetram Cat.) 
 
 For you, Athenians, having been much and greatly in- 
 jured («^<xs«) pa. p. pass, by (v^o) Mnesarchus the Chalci- 
 dian, the father of Callias and Taurosthenes. jEsch, y 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. When one substantive governs another, each having 
 its article, the following arrangement is commonly ob- 
 served : The article of the governing noun is placed first, 
 then the article with the noun governed, and lastly the 
 governing noun : thus, tjjv t?? yi/i^^n^xg yroMug tv^yiv uv Imi- 
 
50 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 finv. Demosth. Olynth. 1. — 2. When the governed fiub^ 
 stantive is without an article, it is placed in the same 
 manner : thus, rav ^g Mivcavog crr^xTturuv, Xen. Anab. As 
 also personal and reciprocal pronouns. tU ra leivrov trt^oc 
 rivfAct. Id. — 3. The same kind of arrangement is observed 
 when prepositions are employed to denote a certain rela- 
 tion between the nouns : as, Kygo? h ii<r6n» rov Ik rm *EAAji- 
 vm ik fovg /Bx^Zoi^ovg ^ooov i^cjv. Xen. Anab. hct^t^avxi roi<; 
 ufc^i -^ccTTTrov B'i^oiTrivrotig Xen. Cyr. Itti tS Tn^i Tovrav Myziv, 
 Id. Mem. tov vTez^ tjJ? UTCoivrav IXivk^ixg Kut crarn^ixg Kiv^woi 
 agotfiivai. Demosth. — 4*. But when the two nouns are both 
 in the genitive, the articles precede their respective nouns : 
 
 as, TTCTi^OV Tig CiVTiJ (pjj TOV /SlOV TOV "ZuK^XTtVg l7rt6vfiVITX»Ti } 
 
 Xen. Mem. — 5. When an adjective is used, it commonly 
 follows the article ; as, Ig rov uttxmtcc ecvS^uyrm jSiov. Hero- 
 dot. When the noun is omitted, the article and the go- 
 verning adjective are sometimes placed after the word in 
 regimen : as, i^Vsg lav ecX>^ov d ttMicttoi. Xen. Mem. — 
 More frequently the article precedes the intermediate sub- 
 jects, and the adjective is placed after them : as, Txd' If 
 fAiTM tovruv uTceAvroi. Xen. Anab. — The same arrangement 
 usually takes place in Latin ; as, devehendum in ultimas 
 maris terrarumque oras. Liv. 1. 21, c. 10. See also Ci- 
 cero de Oratore, 1. 1, c. 10. — 6. The article is frequently 
 repeated to point out more precisely the relation between 
 the two nouns : as, <«AX' g^xg^^jj ttuXiv Kxc^tv g« rUg TF^iT^ouug 
 tetVTVigj TJjj g^< rovg o^xovg, Dcmosth. aai rec •Tt^ccy^ot.Toc ttccvtm 
 tPiVfiTiVxtOf xa. tm icaXiug. Id. xCxovv ^o^naSxt ^^ Tovg •<poyovg 
 XXI eia-TFX^scrSxi ravg ZTrxtvovg, rcvg rov hog gxg<voy, <«AAos (^n Ttfwf 
 rm ^roA^yy. Plato Crit. In all instances of this kind the 
 participle of g/jtt/, or yt^t^xi^ is understood ; and the article 
 is a demonstrative pronoun. See Obs. I. under Rule III. 
 of the government of adjectives. 
 
 Note. Several nouns are used to govern proper names, and names 
 of animals, which express some peculiar quality belonging to the indi- 
 
GOVEIINMENT OP SUBSTANTIVES. 51 
 
 viJuals : as, a^jrs St n^iccftoia lim- Homer. Bring the ynigfit of Priam, 
 ftiva; Akxivtoie. Id. te TnXtf^a^eio Id. vt 'otvtrirtui P>ioc- Sopli. Phi- 
 loct. gSives Eur^a^iktio. Homer, h fiiffffiu 3« AQUxovTOf lnv <poSoi. He- 
 siod. In the middle was the terror of a dragon, i. e. a terrible dragon. 
 ^ecvKTOio riktfy for B-xvare;. Homer. Est Hedercs vis. Horace. The 
 King's Majesty. 
 
 Rule 2. The Genitive Case is often ga^ 
 verned by another Substantive understood : 
 as, r/ rrig (paXayyoj, supple ^Apog. A paj^t of the 
 line. Xen. Anab. 
 
 Tor the possessions of friends Kavo? ycc^ o o (piXtg. Eun'p. 
 
 are common. Orest. 
 
 'We ought to bear the de- hi <pgg<y o o ^tcg. Eurip. 
 
 crees of the gods. Phoeniss. 
 
 Go you and bring the son of X^^tu <ru xeci tco^i^a « Msvof- 
 
 Menaeceus. j«£yj. Id. 
 
 J^For since those who lived l^rs* yct^ ovtos tf^o lyu g ^oca *'*' 
 
 before us had descended k (^o^og) dh^ KocTi^^o^ut, 
 
 to the abode of Hades. p^" Lucian. 
 
 ""It was in your power to be l^ia-n o-v (pvyn g rifAecu i * »»'» 
 
 punished with banishment. (supple) ^<;6)j. Plato Crit. 
 
 You ought to rejoice and to grieve {xvTriu) for you are 
 (^VAT * *) mortal j and though (kuv fcn) you may not wish 
 it, the laws of the gods are thus ordained, {vo^i^ofcm 
 ppass Eurip. (2. Anapaest. Dim. & Versus Parcemiacus.) 
 
 Observ. 1. Under this rule may be included such ellip- 
 tical expressions as the following: to Ao<^av tjJ? «^«§«$, 
 supple |t««go5, the rest of the day : jjjtgrg U rt ^i<ro» rdu o-r^u.- 
 r*7ri$tvj supple %4;§<av, come to the middle of the camp. 
 
52 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Xen. Anah, S^^c. So also h ttuvti xxkov ihxt. Plato, Rep, IX, 
 h TFuvrl u6v^ioig. Thucyd. VII. 55. 
 
 The nouns commonly understood are fcegos, pars ; f^t^t?, 
 pars or portio ; ^ixa-rviuu, spatium ; o^o?, via ; dixn, jus ; 
 iifcs^oif dies ; roTrog, locus ; ^c^^oc, regio, locus ; ^of<,oSf ^ufiu, 
 or oixoj, domus ; yvw^jj, sententia : /SovXvjf consilium ; ti^'^n, 
 ars ; ^^ovog, tempus ; iTcaq or pf^a, verbum ; l^ycv, opus ; 
 xrvifix, possessio ; &c. 
 
 Observ. 2. Nouns formed from comparatives require 
 the genitive, as also from the positive of adjectives : iirrcc 
 rov TicfAocroq. Plato, Leg. I. uK^ctrnoti v^tivcov kxi AuTr^yv. Id. 
 
 Note. The Greek writers frequently use the articles with a noun 
 in the genitive, governed by a substantive understood, by way of peri- 
 phrasis for the noun itself: as, ««) T^otrh^^ifjtsvu) f/toi ra tjj; o^ym vftuv 
 Is fts ysyivnTKt. Thucyd. Your anger has come upon me not unexpect- 
 edly. In expressions of this kind the article implies all that in the 
 circumstances can be predicated of the noun : kkXu? ra, rZv ^luv xu.% 
 ra. rr,% rvxini Ix'-'' Eurip. Phoeniss. 1217. 
 
 Rule 3. The Genitive Case is often put 
 elliptically : sWa, izdrty or ovvszoc^ on account ofy 
 being understood : as, hCkaii rov vovy supple 
 ovvsjcc^. wretched upon account of your temper. 
 Soph. 
 
 \0 wretched I u^on account m f^iMog lyu KUKog. Eurlp. 
 
 of my misfortunes. Orest. 
 
 He blames us neither upon oiJt' «^' cy gt3;t;<wA)} Iviftiju^o- 
 account of a vow nor m uui ov6' iKccrt^tQyi. Horn. 
 sacrifice. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 53 
 
 jVAiid often indeed former- 
 ly also I have pronounced 
 you happy through your 
 whole Hfe on account of 
 this disposition. 
 \ CEax, tranferring the hatred 
 he bore my father, on ac- 
 count of Tvoy, 
 
 TSP6V h TT^J /3/05 d iVOXlf^O' 
 
 ))i,tju ^ * Tga^of. Plato 
 
 Crit. 
 
 TTxrii^. g Eurip. 
 
 Note. The Latin writers have frequently imitated this onstruction : 
 as, Spretae injuria formje, supple Ivsxa or causa. Virg. -^n. 1. Ob irara 
 (lv£xa, causa,) interfecti ah eo Domini. Liv. 1. 21. Mitte leves spes 
 et ccrtamina divitiarum. Horat. Ep. I. 5, 8. Arabitio et honoris 
 contentio miserrima est. Cic. Off. I. ]„ 
 
 Observ. 1. The pronoun is sometimes put in the ac- 
 cusative case with ^ot^iv governed by the praeposition 5x^05 
 or its understood : as, lf*z tvv TF^o^ideca-Ks, xeti ifttiv x^^^* utto' 
 K^ivou. Plato Hipp. Maj. Wherefore instruct me, and for 
 my sake answer. Kai ';rci^6C>trr,(rit Trur^o?, (pvy»i d(pitvxi TTeciTt 
 i6ierh\ Ifiviv ^ec^tv. Eurip. Med. 1152. 
 
 Observ. 2. The genitive is also governed by rt ^e^oj, 
 some case of t<j, or ik with the praeposition h or g| under- 
 stood ; thus, become of them , i. e. 07ie of them for me ; roy- 
 Tuv yivov (Aoi. Aristoph. Nub. 
 
 some of the g/^< c-Tccv^t^. Thucyd. 
 
 There were 
 
 stakes. 
 Won't you even permit me 
 
 to drink of this water ? 
 
 dv 0^6 TFivof 2 a I'^ej^ crvyi 
 
 i^ufjki i 2 a op Theocr. 
 
 $ Perhaps useful to admini- vonoj ^tev icru^ dyS^uTrog xi*i'^^' 
 ster to men in sickness ,1405 iTritthf^i 1 f ro (pec^fiec- 
 some drugs, but nothing xo», dv^^aih? ^£ ov^u? Itti- 
 manly have you exhibi- hiKWfit. p pa pass Lucian. 
 ted. 
 
Si SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 If he himself should ever koci dt yutaei ^ot uvr^f, i « 
 marry, or ani/ of his rela- ivyyi^y it o (pt\o(. Aristoph. 
 tions, or his friends. (Troch. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 So that it is allowed you to share : for you are one of 
 my friends. Aristoph. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 And there is none of mortals who knows {llixt<rrecuxi) if 
 he shall live (/sioo^cct) through the day to come {uv^uy 
 fitXXej), Eurip. (2. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Rule 4. The Poets* frequently, and the 
 Prose writers sometimes, use the Dative 
 instead of the Genitive : as, rocroi ti^jju^ov 
 (povov. The avenger of your father^ s murder. 
 Soph. Elect. 
 
 Q^the son o^Labdacus. o Au^^ecKuoi Trui^f, Soph. 
 
 CEdip. Tyr. 
 
 * Homer very frequently uses the dative of the personal pronouns 
 instead of the genitive. 
 
 f Proper names, as in this example, are sometimes changed into 
 adjectives : the regular construction is, rev irxtSos AaS^xKov. So also, 
 a hi^ivixna ^vyarti^, for a Bi^ivixas B^vy. Theocr. t^nrro^tvi «•«{« »»(/ 
 Tiv\r>yivtos /Sac/Xjjoj*, for Nsfl'Tsgey. Horn, 'o^ipnx yri^vg, for '0^(pta/f. 
 
 * Jn this example the explanatory noun is put in the genitive as if 
 the former part of the sentence had been Hivre^si Tttt^u. vm/. So also 
 Plato Apol. S. A^wvxiffj my vaXiw, -rni fAiyt^rfti kxi iv^iKifAuirnefH ih 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 55 
 
 And you will confirm the ksci ^i^ottbu I ^iKettrr/s ^ ^o|<*. 
 
 opinion of the judges. Plato Crit. 
 
 What is niT/ aged father rig yec^ Treirn^ ly&t Tr^iffQvg h 
 
 doing Qt home ? ^«^05 ^* '^^etu\ Eurip.(Iamb. 
 
 Trim.) 
 
 § As Homer says, Minerva 
 removed the mist from 
 the eyes o/'Diomede. 
 
 But said the accuser, both 
 Critias and Alcibiades, 
 having become the asso- 
 ciates of Socrates, did 
 the state very much 
 harm. 
 
 d(p»i^iia^ * ^ el^>^vg, Plato 
 Alcib. 2. 
 dxXot <pmi^ ^ yi KXTnyt^of 
 luK^oiTrii of^iXviTVig ytvofcoci^'- 
 
 A;? TTbliU. 
 
 Xen. 
 
 Eur. Alcest. Bit} 'H^aKXnitti. Horn, tfa^rxivuv AUvret fityuv, TiXa/iu- 
 viov vm, Horn. II. ^'. 115. In Latin the same form of speech is not 
 infrequent ; thus, Epistolce CiceroniancB, for Epistolce Ciceronis, Per- 
 mit Acheronta Herculeus labor. Horace, b. 1. Od. 3. S. Catonis vir~ 
 tus incaluit mero. Miltonic strains, Newtonian philosophy, &c. are 
 expressions familiar in the English language. 
 
 Note. This construction is generally adopted to prevent that of 
 two genitives : thus, xai ruv o'^rXm rots ffT^ariareiis ^oXXei Ivri iifAu^av 
 xait vjro^vytuv '/lytro. Xen. Anab. Also when the nouns are derived from 
 verbs, and imply action or communication : thus, Xen. Mem. eiyec^rfirn 
 fjttv ffvvs^yoi rt^'HTttis^ •Trtffrn ^t (pvka,^ olxav hff^oraiSi ^'^lAivvif ^t -jru^uffrctrts 
 eixirais. 
 
 Note 2. The Latin poets have likewise sometimes used the da^ 
 tive instead of the genitive : as, Per tota novem cui jugera corpus 
 p?rrigUiLr» Virg. Mn, 6. 596. A—- 
 
56 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule 5. A Noun denoting time, and 
 answering to the question when^ is com- 
 monly put in the Genitive or Dative, how 
 long in the Accusative* : thus, 0/ vvzrog 
 xoct Tiytjz^ag l^pvkccrrov, who kept guard night and 
 day. 
 
 And a trireme was taken kcm r^i^n? ^ etvng ijfAi^et.^ 
 
 the same day. etXi^Ku,^' Thucyd. 
 
 The anger of lovers lasts ogyjj <piXw «A«yc5 i^^vca ^govoj. 
 
 but a short time. Menand. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Having held the sovereign ^i^rsp^jw'* ^s r^ei? « TgTT«g£f 
 
 power for three or four ^ut^x ^ rv^ocwu. Plato 
 
 days. Alcib. 2, 
 
 What if we should attack il vv% uvra^^ ;rgoe^fl6AAw2aop 
 
 them from an ambuscade Ix Ao;^jo? ;S Eurip. Phoeniss. 
 
 in the night ? 
 
 For the grasshoppers (t£tt*|) indeed one month or two 
 upon the boughs [tc^x^cg) chirp {u^u) : But the Athenians 
 are always, through their whole lives (/Sioj") singing upon 
 M«V law suits QiTcvi) Aristoph. (3. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note I, The dative is commonly governed by the praeposition 
 b either expressed or understood ; the genitive by B/a, and the accusa- 
 tive by am. 
 
 Note 2. Sometimes the noun is in the genitive, expressing length 
 of time ; but it is probable another noun is understood to govern it, 
 thus, 1% iron akouras. AristOph. Lys. i. c. avx tov x^avav i^, &c. un- 
 was]jed during a period of six years, on fixtriXivs ou (A.a^ur»i "hixa ^^its- 
 ^m. Xenoph. Anab. Sometimes the genitive is governed by ivros ; as, 
 irrof ov ^eiKkov ;t;gar«tf. Plato Alcib. I. and by the preposition \k ox a-xit 
 understood ; as, Trtnv ;^;^9Wf ti xut -^i'roghrai iroXn, /Eschyl, Agam, 288. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 57 
 
 Observ. Time is frequently expressed by an adjec- 
 tive, agreeing either with the nominative to the verb or 
 the word governed by it :* as, ov ptjgJJ •ffcAnv)(;,io',> (for %ua-ctv 
 WKT») it/hiv /2ovXn(po^ov Mv^^ic. Homer II. /S'. 24. A coun- 
 sellor ought not to sleep the iiohole night. •^roAysru? cnT&ia-^em 
 vog. Eurip. Orest. 467. 
 
 In the morning she ascend- 
 ed the great heaven. 
 
 They propitiated the god 
 with song the whole day. 
 
 In what time might I arrive 
 there with my army ? 
 
 So that the greatest number 
 either were cut ofF the 
 ninth and the seventh daj/ 
 by the internal heat. 
 
 vog. Hom. II. ci. 
 elds 7irxvviy^i^(og fioXvn Bs6s 
 
 Ixxa-Kaiicii, Hom.(Hexam.) 
 
 'PToa-Tccios dv cvv to o-r^xTiv^oc 
 hciiiri ot(pixv&6f^xi ; 2 a op 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 aa-n « dix(p6ei^ia oi TzoXvg Ivvei- 
 
 TOitOSf XOtt l^dof^OilOg V7F0 Q SVTOg 
 
 Kctv^oe.^. Thucyd. 
 
 What, pray, shall I say, beingf a time (ptjgavio?) from 
 the house ; pi Eurip. Andr. See Theocrit. Idyll. 2. 4. 
 
 Don't now long delay [fnxxet^^) to act. Sophocl. (Ana- 
 paest Dim. Acat.) 
 
 * The Latin Poets have imitated this idiom: as, Gnavus mane fo- 
 
 rum et vesiiertinus pete tectum. Horace. 
 
 -Y" 
 
 E 
 
58 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule 6. Exclamations of grief or sur- 
 prise are commonly put in the Genitive, 
 sometimes in the Accusative : thus, rng (Ji^of- 
 pug ! what folly I Aristoph. hmv 7s rov pctj^v- 
 zocf Aristoph. Av. 1269. 
 
 My stars ! for me now to ^ rvxn ' t6 lyu "" wv x«- 
 
 happen to have been call- ;vg&/ pa 1 a pass tzv^a rvy^x- 
 
 ed hither! vu.~^ Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Alas Adonis. ul 'A^<yv^$.ac Bion. 
 
 O king Apollo ! what a a «v«| 'A;roAA<wv, 70 n(pog. 
 
 cloud. Aristoph, A v. 
 
 O earth, what a sound ! how a yij, to cpkyf^cc ! J5* /jgoj koh 
 
 sacred and solemn and trzfAvo^^ xxi rs^nuh?. Aris- 
 
 portentous ! toph. 
 
 Note. The Poets generally employ the nominative : as 
 S ^va-TitXeiivec Xyu. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 
 
 Observ. I. Nouns are frequently found in the accu- 
 sative standing independent of the rest of the sentence. 
 They are commonly governed by the preposition xottoe. 
 understood, answering to the Latin quod ad, or quod attinet 
 ad: thus, Karvu^irkg ^g (supple icctrot) ovs vf^sn^avg (potJi 
 slvcct, il T< eniruv ilM<Pci(iiv, envroi etlriot ua-iv. Xen. Anab. 
 
 ^§' yriv. Eurip. Orest. 164?5. 
 
 * In this example the adjectives do not agree in case with the pre- 
 ceding noun, but are in the non^inative. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF SUBSTANTIVES, 59 
 
 Virgil has imitated this construction ; thus, Urbem, 
 quam statue, vestra est. — Mn. I, 573. 
 
 Observ. 2. Nouns, formed from verbs denoting action, 
 or words expressing motion, when followed by a preposi- 
 tion, require the accusative case after it ; as, (ts« §a|*i ^'^<*v 
 TO TT^ccy^ec, to TCi^i <n. Plato CritO. Kctt yetg cci/rn f^iyiTrn 
 ^oKzi ihai Itti TTXvrx res, atT^^cA «yg^wv. Xen. Cyr. 2ixdt}ovect 
 retg u(>c(pi Tov TroiTTTrov B-i^ccTTivrxig. Xen. Cyr. vjv ^s tcck^ etvrov 
 Tov Evip^xTYiv T TetPo^ o? a-TiVTi, Xen. Anab. /j,'. 
 
 Observ. 3. The nouns ;^jgg&», and ^^uet frequently have 
 the accusative with the genitive. Hom. II. a'. 650. n h 
 c-g x^^^ ^f^^^ » Eurip. Hecub, 970. ^^XXx ng X^ua <r IfAcv i 
 Sophocl. Philoct. 'I'GO. h^okv Xct^av orov <rg x^stet xai Trodog 
 fcecXia-r l)CU. 
 
 Observ. !■. The nouns ovofcct, ^rAjj^oj, i»4'oj, gygoj, &c. are 
 frequently put in the accusative, governed by the partici- 
 ple of l^^ understood : thus, furx tccvtu, ci<piKoyro Itci tov Zot' 
 Qxrov TTOTUfAoVf TO iv^oq iiTTU^av TrXiS^av, Plato Crit. supplies 
 
 the participle : iTVTto^^c^oqy a-rx^iov to wAastoj Ip^jA/v. ~' 
 
 E2 
 
«^v:.' 
 
 60 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GEEEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 III. CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule 1. The Article, an Adjective, or 
 Participle, agrees with its Substantive in 
 Gender, Number, and Case. 
 
 Knowing the two men to be 
 worthy of confidence. 
 
 If ye now truly have this 
 knowledge, be propitious. 
 
 That the life of private men 
 is secure and undisturbed 
 and without danger. 
 
 The boat was already crowd- 
 ed and full of lamenta- 
 tion, r 
 
 Xen. H. Gr. 
 
 ii 02 vyv uh.Vi&aq cvrog o Ittiftvi' 
 |KH l;^;«du fXius ti^i.op Plat.* 
 Euthyd. 
 
 XCCl UTT^XyfACOV KCtl aKiv^vvog 
 
 ay, Dem. Philip. 
 
 ^^wyn g uvxTirXiui; ( Att.) 
 
 Lucian. 
 
 J And they demolished one 
 of the two walls last ta- 
 ken. 
 
 He had an undisciplined 
 tongue, a most baneful 
 pest. 
 
 And had, contrary to ex- 
 pectation, subverted the 
 cities among the Pho- 
 cians. 
 
 vcTS^ov Xxf4,Qotva)V^ 1 a pass 
 
 KetTxQxX>^af,^ a Thucyd. 
 
 ciKoXcc(rroi ip^u 2 a yXaa-cu, u'lc 
 XS,o<; voc-og, ^ Eurip. Orest. 
 (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 xect ^ (Aiv h <^aKiig d <^cXig ;ras- 
 gcthd^ag civeca-TXTcg Tcctw, 1 a 
 
 .^sch. adv. Ctes. 
 
 And you will find the agents (vidj^stds) also of the Gods, 
 invisible. Xenoph. 
 
CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES. 61 
 
 For how can (dv) ungrateful {up^a^ia-TGi}, or careless, or 
 covetous (TrXtovntrm), or faithless^ or intemperate [ecK^xxn?) 
 men become friends ? Xen. Mem. 
 
 Short is the span (^^nux) of life: and we ought to pass 
 through it as easily as possible, and not with troubles 
 (TTovcg). Eurip. (2. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Farewell, O sea-girt (d^^toiXo?) land of Lemnos: 
 
 And send me auspiciously («^g,«Tr»j) with a favourable 
 
 voyage (gy^rAo/j) 
 Whither my high destiny (^^.ot^a) carries me. 
 And the will (yv«^>j) of friends, and that all-subduing 
 
 God, who has accomplished (iTrix^xiy&i^ ^) this, pi Sophocl. 
 (4 Anapaest. Dim. Acat. and the versus Parcemiacus. ) 
 
 Note 1. When the attention is more particularly called to the ad- 
 jective, which qualifies the noun, than to the noun itself, the article is 
 construed with both ; as, rov ^n^vyuKvi ravS* otuvov. JEschyl. Prometh. 
 Vinct. 294. u' tuv A6nvm rayi ruv iv^aifAoyav. Aristoph. Equit. 159. 
 
 Note 2. The Attie writers frequently use the article and the pronoun 
 
 oiiTos in the masculine gender with the dual of substantives feminine, 
 as, ffvnx^ormt n ru ^u^s. Xen. Cyr. He both clapped his hands. 
 fiovov ouK (xriffu Tea x^'i' ^^favns. Demosth. a'TUX^rnv ra (paXayys ut* 
 aXXtiXuv. Xen. Anab. rovroiv toiv xtv9}enotv. Plato Leg. x. xat fiiuv 
 ufi<pu rovTu ru hfjt-t^a Xoyi^ovrcn. Xen. Cyr. I. 2. 11. Participles and 
 adjectives are also used in the masculine gender after feminine nouns : 
 thus, wv ovrui %4axUff6ov, uffori^ tl ra ;^e/^e, as o B^tot Itt to ffvXXeifASavuv 
 aXXfiXctiv WomiTi)!, a,(pzfji.ivu rovrov r^uvroivro ^^og to ^letKukuuv aAX«Xa/, 
 Xen. Mem. II. 5. 18. ] 
 
 Observ. 1. The adjectives •/oj, talis, and oa-og, quantusy 
 are frequently put in the plural and neuter, though the 
 preceding noun be singular ; as, y^ci(pi xiiXc^,, oU Jluhviy 
 
62 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Observ. 2, Instead of the adjective the Greek writers 
 frequently use a participle denoting the possession of the 
 object included under it ; as, Myo) roivw, uu xoti ttccvu kxs. 
 TTetvrec^ov xccXKie-rov uvou uv^^t TrXovrovvTt (for 7rAayo"<a>), vyf 
 uivovrtf TifAdfAim vtfo rav 'EAPhjva"'* u(ptxofAivo) tU yne,oi?-> Tayj 
 uvrov yoveetg rsXivrncravrxgt fcetXui Tn^ia-TuXctvn vtto tZv uvrov 
 Izyovuv KxXa^ kxi fiiyccT^oTrgi'TFai rot^n^oit, Plato Hipp. JMaJ, 
 I say, then, that always and universally and every where 
 it is most becoming for a man, rich, healthy, honoured 
 by the Greeks, when he has arrived at old age, having 
 paid the last offices to his deceased parents, to be buried 
 handsomely and magnificently by his offspring. — KccrecXuva 
 oi TTccTgi^ot KM ^/Aovj ey^flffjtcpcoy vTse^ : for ^vhcci^avst^. Xen. 
 
 Cyr. 
 
 Observ. 3. Sometimes a verbal adjective is used with 
 the verb %\^ij or yivofAcct, instead of some tense of the kin- 
 dred verb J thus, l^agvoi Ic-t; ^n^" lihiiv f^i ^eoTrors. Aristoph. 
 Plut, He denies that he ever saw me. Instead of e|«^- 
 
 He will be laughed at. uCrog ti(At KotruyiXxa-Tog. Pla- 
 
 to Hipp. Maj. 
 For how should we presume ^&»? yx^ 4v rohfAxu op l^x^voi* 
 to deny that the beautiful g/^tt^inf to KnXog ^n Kxho^ «<- 
 is (not) beautiful ? (At ; Id. 
 
 She denied nothing. uTrx^ug ovhig e Kxiia-Tn^ut. '™ p^* 
 
 Soph. Antig. 
 I would say that she was (pti^t 2 a op uvto? vtto Bo^ixg g 
 carried off by Boreas. hx^Tcxa-roq yivtfMti. P "^i 
 
 Plato Phaed. 
 
 * Plato almost always uses this adjective and the verb tlfn, instead 
 of s^«g»««j{6a/. Thucydides frequently uses a noun with either of the 
 substantive verbs instead of the kindred verb ; as, Kv^vrri; yiymro rvg 
 haSuiriusj for Ku'Kvai mv 'Siu^ariv, B, III, c, 2S, 
 
CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES. 63 
 
 There is no denying {u^vyio-i?) what (gen pi) you ask («- 
 yi7TQ^ia). Sophocl. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. 4?. An adjective is sometimes made to agree 
 with the nominative to the verb, instead of being con- 
 strued with the noun governed ; nouns are also sometimes 
 converted into adjectives with the same concord ; as, 
 fcsc-aj 5s xu^ivig fcsv l^vn, for fitTiig xet^i^^, Anacr, tKcvrssf 
 cvK ctKovng, ov^e fiafitoi Trtrvovvro for tt^o^ ^ufiu, Eurip. 
 Androm, A similiar construction is sometimes found in 
 the Latin Writers : thus, Medius Hasdrubal inter patrem 
 et filium octo ferme annos imperium obtinuit. Liv. I. xxi. 
 c. 1. 
 
 Observ. 5. Instead of an adjective, the Attic writers, 
 and occasionally Homer, use an abstract noun applied to 
 
 persons j as, u> f^ic-ogy m f^lyicrtov ip^&KTTV) yvvoii Qiotg xxf^ot. 
 Eurip* JMed. 1320. yyyjj ts TCgog roitry ov<r lyiyvua-Koy Kse,Xa§y 
 (AKTAfiot, Tretcriv, Hippol, 408. u xg^revsj, kcck iMy^i\ A^ocitdeg, 
 ^VK It Ax,xioi, Horn, II. /3'. 235. f^tin^et, BsZv a-rvyog. ^schyl, 
 Choeph. 1025. ru ttxi^s ra c-a fCiXXirov, roX^7jf£xrx ecia-^ia-TX. 
 Eurip. Phceniss. o (MjjT^afpevTjjj ohi — 5^«x«y— 'O-Tyyjjf*' l^ov. 
 v^ij utter aversion, Eurip. Orest. 4'74'. 
 
64! 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule 2, An Adjective as a predicate. Is 
 often put in the Neuter Gender, x^^l^^ ^^^^" 
 monly^ zn^jj^K, T^ayiJbcc, and l^yov some times, 
 being understood ; as, ovx, ayochv (x^'/ii^^) '^o- 
 Xvzot^ocvr/], Horn, The government of the many 
 is not good.* 
 
 How troublesome friends 
 
 are. 
 Wisdom alone of possessions 
 
 is immortal. 
 Wealth is cowardly, and a 
 
 pitiful thing fond of life. 
 A woman is exceedingly 
 
 well fitted to procure 
 
 wealth. 
 
 »? %ot,}\.i7Ctii iifAi ^iXes, Ari- 
 stoph. 
 
 Isocr. 
 
 4^v^o5 xxKog, Eur. PhcEniss. 
 
 Aristoph. Eccl. 
 
 J The multitude are formid- 
 able when they have wick- 
 ed rulers. 
 
 Be prosperous : for friends 
 ('the things of friends) 
 are of no value if any one 
 is unfortunate. 
 
 dmog TTOAvg KotKovpyog orctv 
 i^a TTQoa-rxTVig. iiurip. 
 Orest. (Troch. Tetr. Cat.) 
 
 gy •TT^ota-cru* « T * ^ <p;A«5 d 
 cii^iig^ i]V rig ^v(rrv^W» 
 
 Eurip. Phoeniss. 
 
 * The Latins have imitated this construction : as Triste lupus sta- 
 bulis. VIrg. Varium et mutabile semper femina. Id. Dulce satis 
 humor. Id. 
 
 f U^ayiAotra, l^ya^ KtrifAara. Sec. are generally understood when the 
 neuter article is without its substantive ; as, azivduvug o^uv l^ovrx ra cl- 
 Ml, Bemosth. Perceiving his affairs at home in security. 
 
CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES. 65 
 
 Note 1. Matthia?, Gram. p. 633. has well pointed out the difference 
 of the construction of the adjective as an epitket and as a predicate, in 
 the following examples : ^n>-iia I'^tvos xaX'/j ou kuXov. Plato Hipp. Maj. 
 Xv^u, xa.\n ov KaXov. Id. 
 
 Note 2. X^'/ifiet with certain adjectives, such as fisyug, xakog, &c. 
 sometimes denotes a remarkable object ; as, crvog xs^f^^ ymrai (iiya. 
 Herodot. There was a huge monster of a boar. xce.raia.XXii njv Ixa- 
 ^ov, xaXav ri x^^fi^^ *«' fAsya, Xen. Cyr. A fine large animal, co^at 
 ri xi'^'f^^ utd^wffos. Thcocr. Adon. So also l^yov. Horn. 11. v. 285. o li 
 Xi^f^K^m Xa.il x^'Z'f -A-i^Mt?, [iiya, t^yov. XV^I^'^> when governing another 
 noun, is used as a term of contempt ; as, <piXoy^oyov Ss x^^f^"^ B-v^naiv 
 i(pu. Eurijy. Phceniss. 205. 
 
 Note 3. When two or more nouns are used, if the adjective precede 
 them, it is commonly put in the singular and neuter : as, 'teas fts> r^u 
 fi,a.Z,a, xat a^ros vruvuvri <payuv. Xen. It' is sometimes put in the neuter, 
 though the nouns precede it : as^ as n 'agertj »cu hxatovvv*) •xXtiatQu 
 a^ioD rets Kv6^aixois» Plato Crit. " *' 
 
 Note 4. An adjective in the neuter gender with the article is fre- 
 quently used instead of an abstract noun : as, Mnroi roy \fiov -ff^oSufAn 
 ([or T^oSu/jtiu) <piXomv a-xiaru. Eurip. Med. 179. ro h a?rXouf n xat 
 aXtjfiis 70 avro rS r,XiPiu IvoftiXiv thai. Xen. Anab. 
 
 Note 5. The comparatives vrXtov or ?rXe/a», ufiuvov, are occasionally used 
 as epithets with substantives masculine and feminine in the plural num- 
 ber: thus, liff^ovs fiiv a^iiy ov fiiiov ho'fAv^iav, Xen. Cyr. II. !• ^tXraff- 
 <Tus XKi ro^oras ^Xtcv n uxotn (Av^ict^as. Id. 
 
 Observ. 1. The Greek writers frequently make the 
 adjective, which, according to this rule, should be in the 
 neuter gender, agree with the substantive in the nomina- 
 tive case, usually put in the accusative before the infini- 
 tive : as, jj^g 'ha^za ^agiro^ xcti iTrutvov ^ttccctos, l<rri rvy^otniv. 
 Demosth. tt. a-ri(p. Instead of t»jv ^s ^a^iccv—'hiKcim hn. V. 
 justum est dona vero gratiam et laiides obtinere. 
 
 It is just that he have the tvrag yi uhiec avrog ilf*i ^iKctidg 
 
 blame of this. l^>j. Id. 
 
66 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 He was evidently transgress- d^Xog u^i p"" Tra^otvttfAM, ^ * p* 
 
 ing the laws. Demosth. 
 
 For it is just enough that lyu yecg -tfov hxeticg slfct, e-<y- 
 
 we, having saved you. run ^w ^ ^ a-Vf Kiy^vnvu oyro? o 
 
 this risk. x^v^yvoj. Plato. Crit. 
 
 And it is ridiculous for Ju- kcci Zst;? yeXo^os ofAWfAi c ii^a>?. 
 
 piter to be sworn to by Aristoph. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 tho^e knowing. 
 
 For it is difficult (et^yuMoi) for a god to be overcome 
 Q»^etu^^) by a mortal man. Homer. Odyss. (Hexam.) 
 
 Sometimes also before on ; thus, ^«Aoj ^' la-nvf crt rev 
 TF^uyf^etrcg ukt^koiv ru Aristoph, Plut. And oTrcog, Xen, Mem. 
 aorec fAiv ovv fiTj (poingtg «w o^r&^j lyiyvucrKiy, 
 
 Observ. 2. Sometimes they overlook the gender of 
 the preceding noun or pronoun, and put the adjective in 
 the neuter gender, and commonly in the plural number; 
 thus, olfAUk yoi^ vf^ctg rii<rh ym Kc^tyGio^s rcc Tt^car lo-gc-dfit. Eu- 
 rip. Med, 912. x,»i, Agyso? oiK^oe. tl6?^(ryot, Theocr, Adoni' 
 az. xda-riv rcc Tc^onot. tm ^xu f^co^S^iug. Aristoph. Ran, And 
 he is the first there in wretchedness. naT^oxAcf, eg ctv ttcc- 
 T|05 ^J* rot (piXrxrx^ Sophocl. Philoct. 436. 
 
 Rule 3. An Adjective or Participle is 
 often put in a different Gender from the Sub- 
 stantive with which it is connected. 
 
 Note. In a deviation of this kind from the common rnle, the gen- 
 der of the person, and not of the preceding noun, is tonsidered : as, 
 A/flf riKos ar^vrmr.. Horn. Invincible daughter of Jove. 
 
CONCORD OF ADJECTIVES. 67 
 
 children, overshadowed n tjxvov, Uryi^io^ KXct^oq Ik- 
 with suppliant boughs ! <rTg(p6;. p p^ p^«« Soph. CEd. 
 
 Tyr. 
 
 Alas ! O good and faithful (pgy w 4y^^o5 y^di Tri^rcg -^^v^vij 
 soul, thou art then gone oix^^xt ^n uxaMiTrcu pa 2 a 
 leaving us. ly^. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 1 opened and I behold a uvaiyea ^ ^ icut /S^s^o? |Wgy \<ro^cl(a 
 child indeed bearing a <ps§«P^ To|oy. Anacr. 
 bow. 
 
 Receive (vxo^s;^^©^^^* 1 ^) the two children of my brother, 
 , the handsomest of the gods. Lucian. 
 
 Hector, my son, both reverence (ccl^cfixt) these and 
 pity (|XA6« ^^) me Myself, if ever I offered {Itfs^u -'^) you 
 this sorrow-soothing breast (XxSiKnh^)* Remember these, 
 my dear son. Horn, 
 
 Observ. The participle is sometimes put in the siti' 
 gular, agreeing with the person, while the pronoun with 
 which it is connected agrees with its corresponding noun : 
 as, ^oScgflt 3' \\fitii7-iv oTaroif\ ofAi^Xcc Tr^ocryi^Sf "^M^ni ^xk^vuv, 
 (ro9 hf6»i [g/(r<56t»c-«]. Mschyl. Prometh, Vinct. 14-7. As if 
 it had been, ^o^i^x S' If^oi ho-a-ci^ — il(j-i^ov(7x. Horn, II. tt. 236, 
 
 n fAiV ^)} TTOT, I^OV It05 IxAvej iV^XfAiVOlO for IfCOV iTTOi gy|oS|t«£- 
 
 Homer sometimes puts the participle in the masculine 
 gender and dual number, when the two objects to which 
 it refers are feminine ; thus, 
 
 cvK uv l<p' vfitTi^ay o^iav^ TrMyiVTi (scil. ASvjVxm xxi 'H^ij) 
 
 Ki^XVVO) 
 
 «4' ^5 Ohi/fi'^ov iKi(rhvy Iv cc6xvxT6Jv i^oi IvTiv. 
 
 II. 6, 455. 
 
68 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Hesiod. Op. et Dier. 199. 
 
 'ASecvxTMV fiSToi (pv?C /tsjv, TTpoXiTTtyr civO^cj-^cvSi 
 
 Sophocl. CEdip. Col. 1676. i^om xat Trudova-uh ^br t^ovo-cct 
 
 Sometimes a masculine adjective with a feminine noun ; 
 thus, 'Hgjj ^ijAvs hmc6. Horn* 11. t. 97. 
 
 Note 1. Thucydides, Demosthenes, and Isocrates, frequently use 
 such expressions as the following : Xafioi/rsf va ff(^iTiga. aurut, Thucyd. 
 va, vfiiri^ avrm, your own proj)erti/. See Demosth. Olynth. 2. p. 25. 
 JReiske^s Ed. uX>J Iv avroi mv aipingav auruy a,7(pot,Xu; xa^trMnrai. Isocr. 
 But that they may enjoy their own territory (;\;&'g«v) in security. This 
 construction has been imitated from Homer : xett vuiri^ov >.t^os avrm 
 Kev^thov. II. 0, 39. In the following, a noun is used instead of an ad- 
 jective : xett vvv A/Saj rov l/xev l^st f^o^i^ov uSKtas. Eurip. Suppl. 931. in* 
 stead of r^v l/;ta« fAo^6'/t^a.v os,6Xtix,v. Eurip. An dr. 107. xui vov IfAov /itXtus 
 ifeffiVj 'E»To^K. Aristoph. Nub. 1204. 'hfisn^a xi^^n rav ffo(puV) instead 
 of xi^^n fifiav Tuv co<pm, Hom. II. g. 226. vfurs^ev ^i IxuffTov B-t/fAov ai%u. 
 
 Note 2. The masculine of comparatives and superlatives is some- 
 times used with a feminine noun ; thus, ^vffifA^okara^es r) Aox^ig. Thu- 
 cyd. III. 10. TMV x^arovvrav u^o^wrt^os h T^n'^is. Id. V. 110. 
 
 Note 3. Verbal adjectives are fi*equently used in the plural and neu- 
 ter when no particular subject is referred to ; thus, ^^/v tlffi ^vfiftu^ot 
 ayu^oiy ovs ov ^a^a^orta roTg A6nvu.wis l(rriv, ev^i ^ixaig xat Xoyois ^ictx^trta. 
 Thucyd. I. 86. ^tnx^ovi tifri (tot xui rh r^uyu. Aristoph. Plut. 1085. 
 
 Rule 4. Plural Adjectives often change 
 their Substantives into a Genitive case with 
 or without an Article prefixed : as, oi TroCkam 
 rm 'TToiyjTcop. Thucyd. The ancient poets, x^' 
 
 'ki'Tra^rocTri §' riv TTJg (xrav^coawg v Jc^vpiog, Id. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 69 
 
 Beautiful animals. o axXo^ to ^ojt^v. Isocr. 
 
 To the many men. a ttoAu? uv6^a7Ft>g. Plato. 
 
 To virtuous and good men. o uvr,^ a KaXa? xi^ya^aj. Isocr. 
 
 If you were required to in- u dit °p tv TruihvM Tra^xXx^'- 
 
 struct two boys, having C«v<w -^ dvo o noq, Xen. 
 
 got them under your care. Mem. 
 
 Note 1. The adjective must always be in the same gender as the 
 substantive. 
 
 Notes. Adjectives often supply the place of ^nouns, when the qualities 
 they express or the gender shows to what description of beings they be- 
 long : thus, ol xxXot, 01 Kocxoi^ have avS^aTToi understood, or the genitive 
 according to the rule above : to ilxos, supple 'S^ayftoc a probable thing : 
 tot, u^vmroi, impossible things. 
 Any woman that is beautiful ><««&> ^s x.cti cihn^t? ^cci ttv^ 
 
 vanquishes both steel and kxXo? ng m. Anacr, 
 
 fire. 
 
 IV. GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule I. Adjectives signifying desire, me- 
 mory , knowledge^ fitness, fulness, plenty, supe- 
 riority, defence, acquitting, or their opposites ; 
 also worth, difference, &c. govern the Genitive 
 case : as, av Tr^o^v^og IgS as/. Of which you were 
 always desirous. Soph. Elect. 
 
 Skilled in warlike affairs. iTtivni^m ^^ * o o-Tg<«T/«>T<x«j. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 Already fit for marriage. y^c^os «5ii ^§i«<05. ^ Xen. 
 
 * The preposition m^i is sometimes used after adjectives of this de- 
 scription. Thus Plato Hipp. Min. ctj^i t<wv ts,^v&»v Wiffryifim. And 
 occasionally they govern the case of their verbs. Thus Xenoph. Cyr. 
 
 III. i'ffiiTr'nfiovis 'hiTxv ra. ■r^oa-nKcvTcc rn lavruv iKX(rrei o-rXiffu. See Eu- 
 rip. Med. G91. Aristoph. Nub. 867. 
 
70 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 The whole world is full of 
 traitors. 
 
 Who is superior to the plea- 
 sures of the body. 
 Destitute of all things. 
 
 Works worthy of the highest 
 estimation. 
 
 For I happened to be ac- 
 quainted with the house. 
 
 § He persuades the Hiero- 
 mnemons, men unexperi- 
 enced in the artifices of 
 speech, and not foresee- 
 ing the future. 
 
 And their also furnishing us 
 with fire, a defence against 
 cold, and a protection a- 
 gainst darkness. 
 
 We shall now be nobly vic- 
 torious over my enemies, 
 my friends, and we are 
 got into the (right) way. 
 
 You are guilty of the same 
 ignorance with others. 
 
 Doing nothing at variance 
 either with his country 
 or his own disposition. 
 
 V6f4,0il P ^'^ TTgO^OTJJ?. De- 
 
 mosth. vipt o-Tg^. 
 
 eg iyK^ccT'Ag f^iv iifAt o ^loc o 
 
 cr&t/zce, s ii^ovij. Xen. Mem. 
 
 71-oig ggjj^cj. acpl Soph. CEd. 
 
 Tyr. 
 
 Igyov TToXvg u^tog. * Xen. 
 
 Mem. 
 
 IfiiTrei^og yug lif^i rvy^oiv&f *" » 
 ohtci. Lys. 
 
 avSgenTrog etTTSi^og hoytg ^' x«; 
 
 *Isgo^v>S|t6&;y %u^M, De- 
 mOSth. IT. erTg<p. 
 
 ro ^g «a< Q TTVg " TTogit^cif ' ^ lyu 
 
 STTlZOVgOg (AiV "f^V^Ogj ZTTiKOV 
 
 gog ^g G-xorog, Xen. 
 
 vvv KoiXXtviKog IfAcg i^Speg, 
 (piXcg^ yivofzottf xcct tig cdog 
 
 fioiivof p. Eurip. Med. (2. 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 » oivrog uyvoicc vvivdvvog iif*( o 
 
 uXXog,^ Demosth. 
 
 ov^tig ciXXorgtog Trcu&f, oyrs ii 
 socvTov ^ecrgig, eyrs T^oyrcg* 
 Id. 
 
 * The Greeks say either «!<«.< Waivov^ or WonnKr^xi. See Plato Mem'p. 
 as the Latins, di^ntis laude or laudari. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF xVDJECTIVES. 71 
 
 For they also are unaccustomed to submit* to any- 
 one.*' Demost/i. Olynth, 
 
 For a man a physician is worth {^tcc^io?) many others. 
 Homer. (Hexam.) 
 
 Friends, whoever is (xy^^*) acquainted with misfortunes 
 (Kuxoi) Knows, that {m) when (orxv) a flood (xp^v^^yv) of 
 evils comes upon mortals, every thingP^ usually [(piMu) 
 inspires alarm [hi^uxivof), JEschyl. (3. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. a|/fl?, digmis. besides governing the genitive of the object, 
 is frequently followed by the dative of the instrument : as, IfAn ^sv ^n 
 'Xux^aTtis, rotovTos uv, ihoxn TifAfis oi\i6s iivect tJJ ^0X5/ fACiWov 91 B-avarou, 
 Xen. Mem. ov rovruv a^iovg ye ovrxg tJJ irflXe/. Lysias. <rXtioves u^ios 
 6Jv \(pavnv T»j ^ur^ihi. Demosth. ir. <r<Ti(p. xcei cvhv tXamvos k^'ov aTTovhm 
 iuoi. Id. 
 
 Rule 2. Verbals compounded with the 
 privative a, t and those ending in tzog, govern 
 the Genitive :§ as, ohivsg h ocTrBt^ot ^fjum ovreg. 
 Such as are unacquainted with us, Xen. 
 
 * The genitive of the article with the infinitive of the verb KaraKoua), 
 
 f See an account of the privative a, under the preposition ocro. 
 
 § aflg«Tos and some others used in a passive sense requires the dative ; 
 
 s, ro^i Sj OIK0V9/XUV ao^KTos h(Aiv ItrriY, Xen. Mem. 
 
SYNTAX or THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Uninstructed in virtue. 
 That he might be as far as 
 
 possible from the view of 
 
 this city. 
 But if ever a war should 
 
 break out, you might not 
 
 be unpractised in these. 
 
 § And you shall not be with- 
 out tasting of every thing 
 delightful. 
 
 It is incumbent on a gene- 
 ral to be prepared with 
 every thing for war, and 
 capable of providing the 
 necessaries for his troops. 
 
 But if I bring a false accu- 
 sation against him, let the 
 gods deprive me of the 
 enjoyment of every bless- 
 ing. 
 
 cc<rTv, Soph. (Edip. Tyr. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 uyiverrog iif^i. Xen. Mem. 
 
 TTOi^cca-KZvacrriKo? eig ^roAg- 
 f^og ac G-r^dTYtyog ac gf^< 
 vp>), Koii TTOgiirriKog tcc ztti' 
 TVi^iiet G-^ccriaTiig. Xen. 
 Mem. 
 
 ii ^' cilria iTTccyco cvrog -^iv^Yigj 
 TFcig uyec&og uvovvirtg \ya 
 
 z-o<g«y '^"^^*^^- Demosth. 
 
 Whoever is unacquainted («5r£<§o$) with such language ^'^ 
 or is not pure {kca^u^ivcS) in mind. Aristoi^h, (Anapaest. 
 Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 And the most delightful sound {k^vtr^a) of all, the 
 praise of yourself,' you do not hear (avjjxoo?, you are 
 without hearing), and the most agreeable sight {^iecftx) of 
 all, you do not see (without seeing). Xen. 
 
 Observ. 1. Verbals compounded with the privative «, 
 and some other compounds, take the signification of the 
 middle and not the active voice of their respective verbs, 
 when there is any distinction in the voices ; thus, utfu&o?, 
 disohedient, from tt^i^i^ui, parco, ayivctog, tvithout tasting. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 73 
 
 from ytv»fMCtf gusto, Bxheia-a-bTXetyxrei^^o^vifAecTcc. ^schyl. 
 
 Prom, vessels traversing the seas. y»-g^^«yoff, proud, ap" 
 pearing above others. uet-rToi;, qtii tangi non potest. Homer, 
 passim, u^^x^w^ from x priv. and <p^oe,^o^xi, dellbero, cogito. 
 
 Observ. 2. Several adjectives, formed from substan- 
 tives, with the privative :*, likewise govern the genitive : as, 
 uTTfrXbi ^ct^iav XivKuVf not clad in vohite robes. Eurip, 
 Phceniss. a.y^at.y.y.ti »(r7Fihav, unarmed with shields. Soph. 
 (Edip. Tyr. ha-a-ui y flf^ogo? TiKvuv. Eurip. Med. deprived 
 of my tvoo children, nKvav uTroti^u. Eurip. SuppL u^rect^ 
 a^vivtv ycfov. Herod, Viithout male offspring, 
 
 Observ. 3. Other adjectives, formed from verbs govern- 
 ing the accusative, require the genitive. Herodot. II. 74?. 
 <go/ c^iiq., ecvd^d^av tv^ctf^ag oviXmovig. not harmers of men at 
 all, Sophocl. GLd. Tyr. 1437. 'Fi-^ov ^z yjjj he rviT^ oVof 
 TUX^'^^t '^TTtv Qvnriiv ^xvavfAXi fC'A^ivog TT^io-^yo^ag, Eurip. Hecub. 
 235. fivi^i Kx^tccg Jj)«T«g«». 117. v-TFOVTog ccv dh T^coiKv^g uXaa-g' 
 ag, Sophocl. Elect. 343. ixxvrot ya^ cot retftei ydv^ir^fiecrec 
 Kiing ^<5«exT«e. — Mivng ^i^xKra^ are suggested by her. Also 
 from verbs occasionally governing the genitive. Xen. Mem. 
 II. 2. uyeA^n <rvX^vi7Fr^ioc rav h g/^jjvjj TrovuVt jii'oxtx Ss tS» \v 
 ^tXtfiot <rvfAfi.u,x,oi i^yay, d^ivrn 5g ^tXietg xotvufog, Sophocl. 
 CEdip. Tyr. 149. <E>tf<So« 2g— 26>t«§ G'tKoiro xxl utrcv •xxwrn" 
 
 Rule 3. Partitives and words used par- 
 titively, Comparatives, Superlatives, Indefi- 
 nites, Interrogatives, and some Numerals, 
 
 F 
 
74 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 take after them the Genitive Plural : as, zuX- 
 \iffT(A 'TTcAthm, most beautiful of girls, Theocr. 
 
 The younger of the men. 
 For who of the Greeks, and 
 
 who of the barbarians 
 
 does not know ? 
 And some of them also fell. 
 
 And how they might be- 
 come the best of all. 
 
 O mother, of the Persians 
 indeed my father is much 
 the most handsome. 
 
 6 vioi dv&guTr'ii. IsOCr. 
 
 Tii h /icc^'^x^oi ; Dem. vi^i 
 
 oh Koci etvros UTTcdviiTKe/. * 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 Xen. Mem. 
 
 Xog \tCoq TTXTTI^. XcH. 
 
 Cyr. 
 
 § Of labours and other such 
 ftiattefs be always very 
 kindly allows whoever 
 wishes to have the great- 
 er share. 
 
 For there is no man at all 
 nameless, either bad or 
 good, as soon as he is 
 born. 
 
 Of mortals no one is either 
 happy or fortunate to the 
 end, for no one was ever 
 without trouble. 
 
 It is the easiest thing of all 
 to deceive one's self, for 
 what he wishes that each 
 also believes. 
 
 TTOVO; KStl «AA6; TCtCVTCf, 
 
 Atf^gvoj TTtXvg l^w, Xen. 
 Cyr. 
 
 fixt.-^ Homer. (2. Hex- 
 am.) 
 
 ^VVjTOg 5' oA€<05 ug TjAoj OVOUf, 
 
 (pvfci^^ ng uXvTTog. Eurip. 
 
 Iph. Aul. 
 fu^tog UTTug tif^i ecvrtv l|«- 
 •xetTUU^ * og yct^ /iovXofiec$, 
 6VT0g iKUPTOg )cxt chf^xi, 
 
 Demosth. 
 
CxOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 75 
 
 Introducing into the government (■^oMrsicc) a practice 
 (4^0?) the most alarming of all, and most disadvantageous 
 (ec(rvf6<po^og) to you. Demosih. 
 
 Alas ! there is 7ione of mortals, who is free ; For he is 
 either the slave of wealth or of fortune, Or him the 
 populace (^A»j^o?) of the city, or the enactment (yg«<p») 
 o^ laws, Compell {iigyu,) to employ (;tjf«ojtt«e<j) customs, 
 (Tg«;rfl?,) not according to his judgment. Eurip. ' (4 Iamb. 
 Trim.) 
 
 Observ. I. The article* is sometimes used as a par* 
 titive : thus, x^mrai ^g roj? f^tvovo-t rav l^nQuv at x^^ai. Xen. 
 Cyr. And the magistrates employ those of the youths 
 remaining, h ji §' «v rm (pvXeov. Id. In whichever of the 
 
 * The article is in fact a demonstrative pronoun, and was used as 
 such by Homer, and the early Greek writers.f The Attics employed 
 it in a much more extended manner in the form of an adjective. In 
 the first edition of this work, I gave a number of general and particular 
 rules, from Dr Middleton's Treatise. In this and the former edition 
 I have omitted them, as being too complicated, and in many respects 
 vague; and must refer the reader to that treatise, to the occasional 
 remarks made upon the article under different rules, and above all, to 
 the study of the Greek authors themselves. 
 
 f In the following sentence from Herodotus (Clio,) it is strictly de- 
 monstrative : tlius, eC^iii yot.(i ouru avonros ItTi, lirris •Jto'ki^o)) jr^o iiotiwi 
 al^tirai' Iv (tiv yk^ t^, (for in this) oi ^attis rov; ^an^as S-a-rravfi' iv ^e 
 Tu (but in that) ol ^etrt^ts rovs ^ai^as. In many instances in Homer 
 and Herodotus, it is used for the relative, and the adjective pronoun 
 eturos : thus, Kacirav^^xsy rhv KnTvi K>.vTaifJt,vmT^y) ^oXefittrie . Hom. Odys. 
 nar^oKXos, rov iyeo ^t^i ^ruvrav rtov Irai^uv^ 'l^ov Ifi^ KK^aX^y rev a'^uXiffu. 
 Hom. II, ^'. 81. £< TO xai re t^omcnv, evx, ay ocTtiSanv, ♦Demosth. 5r. a'ri(p. 
 — rTjs yk^ 9ri<f>'jxa fAyir^os' T>Jy for TuCryis. Sophocl. (Edip. Tyr. 1082. 
 r-iti'v (/.It fji.iXi<r6Kt^-—rKiv for tkvtkiv. Id. 1466. 
 
 F2 
 
76 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 tribes. When the Article is used as a partitive or pro- 
 noun governing a noun, the participle following always 
 agrees with it instead of the noun: as u roin dvra-tQcvo't 
 ytynrut JS^crav. Eurip. Med. 753. ^vif^iTcc S' cvn Bn^os, 
 cvTi rov Kvvw* 'EA^ovto?, tv orTreca-xvrt? I|«^«/v£to. Soph. Antig. 
 257. 
 
 Observ. 2. The poets sometimes put the substantive or 
 participle in the same case with the partitive : as. cv yoc^ 
 ru(pov vSv ru tccctriyvvirtj K^eav, rev f^lv Tr^oTKretg, ro) S' urifAoctru^ 
 f^u 5 Soph. Antig, For has not Creon honoured the one 
 of our brothers with a funeral, and dishonoured the other? 
 See also Mom. II. |. 28. ^roMig *EAAj}v<^fl«?, tivx? fnv uvxi^Sv, 
 t'lg rivecg Ss rovg (pvyu^xg xetrxyuv. Demosth, tt. arri^, l^u yu^ 
 TO e^eXoSf f9 f^h Iv IIwAaj, to 5' irt^ov b r^ 'xXvio-iei. Aristoph. 
 Equit. 75. 
 
 As soon as the enemy saw 
 them advancing, contrary 
 to expectation, none of 
 them could remain quiet ; 
 but some ran to their 
 ranks, others arranged 
 themselves, others bridled 
 their horses, and others 
 put on their corslets. 
 
 Tu^xrxrru, c S« tTTTroi ^x- 
 Ao'A', « ^1 ^ei^x\ h^vet. Xen. 
 
 Rule 4-. The Comparative Degree, when 
 a comparison is stated, requires the Genitive 
 
CtOVERNMENTOF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 77 
 
 after itr: as, rov ko(,i olivo yXcifcarig (/jSKtrog ykvztcou 
 .pzev avh'/i, Horn. From whose tongue the speech 
 flowed sweeter than honey. 
 
 I have found nothing supe- 
 rior to necessity. 
 
 Do you think you eould an- 
 swer better than Gorgias ? 
 
 For there is no greater evil 
 than anarchy. 
 
 There is a time when silence 
 will be better than speech, 
 and there is when speech 
 is better than silence. 
 
 jcu.^^ Eurip. Alcest. 
 
 olofActi <rv KetXog «v To^yiot^ om^' 
 
 ic^ivo^xt ; ^ ^ Plato. 
 uvu^^ix yot^ f^iyxq evK tl/^i 
 
 xetKog. Soph. ( Iamb. 
 
 Trim.) 
 Uf^t o ov o'lyA >^oyog uycc^o^ yi- 
 
 vofAeti^^°P^ civ il^i 5' ov 
 
 ciyn Xcyoq, Eurjp. Orest, 
 
 § But I think no acquisition 
 
 more noble or more splen- 
 
 , did for a man, especially 
 
 a ruler, than virtue, and 
 
 justice and generosity. 
 
 But if you have more bless- 
 ings than evils, as a hu- 
 man being, you should be 
 fortunate indeed. 
 
 Are you so wise as that it has 
 escaped you, that one's 
 country is more honour- 
 able, and more venerable, 
 and more sacred, than 
 
 lya oiy ovdiig Vdj^K^Af yi eiv^ff, 
 
 tltCt KTTjfAX, Oli^i XoiUTT^Oit 
 
 «|£T15, KXl oiKxiotrvvn ft-oit ytv- 
 
 vxibTYti. Xen. A nab. 
 
 xuprei y gy TTpeta-a-b/ oP ^ ^ 
 
 uv. Eurip. Hippol. (2. 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Vi^P ni> cry, cTi |W«T«g Tg Kxi 
 TTxrvi^ Kcit uXXcz TTptyavdi 
 
 KXt crifivog xon ciyieg, Kxi h 
 
 * kiS^uTTof here signiiies mitlier, as homo in Latin is sunictiiues fe- 
 piniue. See Cicero's Epist. ad Famil. b. 4, 5. 
 
78 SYNTAX or THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 botli father and mother (Aiyuq fioi^oc'^ ksci 7rot^c6 .^sog" 
 and all other ancestors, kcci ttx^x utd^aTrc? o voo? 
 and in greater estimation ix>'"-^^ Plato Crit. 
 both with gods, and with 
 men having a reflecting 
 mind. 
 
 I indeed judge no man superior to Hercules. Aristoph. 
 (Iamb. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 O Boy, may you be more fortunate {iv7vx,m) than your 
 father ; but like him in other respects : and you will not be 
 (y<vfl^af 2^ °P*^ with «y) bad. Sophocl. (2. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 As there is nothing sweeter than one's country or 
 parents, even (eiVsg) though one occupies (y«/<y) a rich 
 [•Tviav) house far oft' in a foreign (uXT^ohiTro^) land, away 
 from (a^ravey^g) parents. Horn. Odyss. (3 Hexam.) 
 
 Having said this,P^ he presents [^i^eo^i) to the clerk {y^u^- 
 iLiXTivg) a decree to read (dvxyiyvuTXM^ ^)\onger than the 
 Iliad, more frivolous [Ksvog] than the speeches which he 
 is accustomed to deliver, and the life v/hich he has led (/3<o«»), 
 full [fAiTToq) of hopes never to be reahzed (g/^/^^P*), 
 and armaments, (c-Tg^cTo^s^ov) never to be collected (o-wA- 
 Mya^ f ). jEsch. adv. Ctes. 
 
 Note. Adjectives denoting comparison require the genitive : as, 
 I'Tii^ttv rSiv uoxouvTuv 'Tfi^irrtx, Krr.ffuvrai. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Observ. 1. The comparison is sometimes stated by 
 praepositions ; as, xzii^m rs iTriytvof^ivo? fisi^uv ttu^x t«v Kxk- 
 TTnxvtety a^xv. Tkucyd. The winter having set in with 
 more severity than the usual season, f^n fix^wSao-iv kuk^ 
 oTfivi TTgo Toy hcvTcg. Sophocl. Philoct. 877. So also Virgil ; 
 Scelere ante alios immanior omnes. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 79 
 
 Every thing is inferior to y(rTego5 « 4AA05" p^ tt^*? yi «gg- 
 
 virtue. rvi. Thucyd. 
 
 That an honourable death ccl^zrog uvat o kxXqs ^xmro^ ^^ 
 
 is more eh'gible than a ^vr; o ecia-^^og /Biog, s Xen. 
 
 base life. de Rep. Laced. 
 
 But all this is not worthy to ctXXx ro oXog clrog cvx, sl^i 
 
 be considered as beautiful «|<05 x^im ^ ag m xccXog 
 
 in comparison of a horse ^^og iTi-Trog^^ n Kott Tru^kvog, 
 
 and a virgin. Plato Hipp. Maj. See 
 
 also Soph. Antig. 182. 
 
 Observ. 2. The adjective pronouns aXXagj ^hXoiag and 
 irt^og, are sometimes used as comparatives with the genitive 
 after them ; as, Ttong^v ovv rovg ^iovg jjyjj ra ^iK»ia 90fAa6iTUV jJ 
 wAAof Tuy hxeciav ; Xen, Mem, Tran^ov Icrnv iTricrrtifivi *i ei^irn i 
 >) ecAXcttv iTTia-rvijuyig ; Plato Menon. rx icru Ingee, Ittiv Ikhvou 
 rov to-ov, Plato Phcedr. Eurip. Here. Fur. 519. has the 
 praeposition uvn after uXXcg : thus, cvk la-d" o§' uXXog uvn 
 
 trcv vetihg, yi^ov. Neve putes aliiim sapiente bonoque bea- 
 turn. Horace, B. i. Ep. 16. vi 
 
 Observ. 3. The comparative degree is sometimes 
 joined with the adverbs f^xxxov, ttoXv and f&iyoc to express it 
 more strongly ; as, B-xvav "^ xv ih ^uxXXov ivTv^io-n^og 4 ^av. 
 TO y«g ^^v fcn KxXag fiiyug Trcvog, Eurip. Hecub, Dying 
 (to die) would be much more fortunate than living (to 
 live) : for not to live agreeably is a great vexation, hyai 
 l-ri rev eiymec ttoXv <rvv (p^ovvif^XTi f.ui<^ovi, jj rovraig. Xen. 
 Anab. To march to tlie contest with much more alacrity 
 than they. 
 
 That you may know in your o^^^ yivaxTKu ^ * kxtu B-v^o^y 
 mind, besides that you Jix^ iiTrov (Paragoge Bx) 
 may tell it also to ano- kxi xxxogy '^g KXKci^ytvi 
 
^0 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GEEEK L4.NGUAGE. 
 
 ther, how much better m^fyio-tn ^iy uyct0cs» Horn, 
 a good action is than a (2 Hexam.) 
 bad one. 
 
 Thus we boast that we are much better (/itXTiay) than 
 ^he men. Aristoph» Tkermoph. (Anapaest. Tetr. Cat.) 
 
 Observ. 4, The comparative, both of adjectives and 
 adverbs, is sometimes followed by if, expressive of than, 
 having the same case after it as before it : as, 45>j rmg xett 
 Ik ^iivoTi^av, 93 rotav^iy la-adficrxv* Thucyd. VII. 77. «5)) yecp 
 
 TTCT lyCi KUi ci^UOTtV tilTFl^ Vf^tV, 'Av^gflSff-iV 6)fCiX7i7^X. HomCr. II. 
 
 «. 260. or ftSAAojf VI rather than, and the superlative by the 
 prgepositions Ik or h. as, oy» Ictt^v ovdsv k^ho-tcv jj <p*Afl5 a-x^n?. 
 Eurip. Orest. There is nothing better than a real friend. 
 ^fim ^g ccf^iivov i utivot TO f^iXXov 7ir^0o^a^svav. Demosth, vi^i 
 
 I was thought the hand- 
 somest of all. 
 
 It is then more advantage- 
 ous to the Lacedaemo- 
 nians, as you say, to get 
 from you their instruc- 
 tion, being foreign, ra- 
 ther than be taught their 
 country's. 
 
 Knowing that to a man 
 thinking to be something, 
 there is nothing more 
 disgraceful than to show 
 himself honoured, not on 
 his own account, but thro' 
 the fame of his ancestors. 
 
 lya 6| UTretg it KxXog ^okm ^ * 
 Lucian. 
 \ yi AeiKioxifioyioif ag trv 
 
 Uf*l 
 
 Xi^^ios^ Plato Hipp. Maj, 
 
 ytyvua-Kia ^ ^ or* avjjg tUf^eci n 
 iifAi, ovK g<^» ov^itg uler^^os » 
 
 TTet^e^W iCCVTOV Tif^CCOfCat fAti 
 
 ^t* ixvTov *^ aXXec 2i» ^c^ec 
 
 TT^oyovoi. Plato Menex. 
 
 "Note. 1. Sometimes the genitive follows both the comparative and h 
 thus, h ll Keiin i(rTi fActK^tTt^ov v x^'il'i' Xcn. Hellcn. II. So Virgil- 
 JEn. IV. 502. graviora timet, quam viorlc Sicha?i. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 81 
 
 Note. 2. Instead of the superlative governing the noun in the genitive, 
 the expression Iv rot; is frequently used, not always however equivalent 
 to the genitive : thus, h roT; ve^urot Jg A^rfvatoi <rov ffi^n^ov »xrthvTo. 
 Thucyd. I. 6. See Matthias Gram. § 289. The superlative of ad- 
 verbs is used with the same form. 
 
 Observ. 5. Sometimes the comparative governs the 
 genitive, and is also followed by «. 
 
 And yet what opinion can kxi rci n^ uv uio-^^oi ti^i "^ 
 
 be more disgraceful than ovroi do^x, h ^oKia xi^f^* ^* 
 
 this (than) to appear to ^rjg* ttoXv^^ 7trcno(Axi « ^/Aa?. 
 
 value money more than Plato Crit. 
 friends. 
 
 There is not (than this) to children a nobler inheritance 
 (yt^xg) Than to be sprung ((pyft»P^) from a worthy (le-^A«f) 
 and good father. Eurip. HeracL (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. The comparison is sometimes made by the adverb ftaWov ; 
 as, I'^avnyi to ffr^xronhv U tjjv tv^v^cd^iav (j^aXXov, Thucydt He led 
 back his troops to a wider space of ground (to a wide space rather. ) 
 ao'Ti T« tiffTi^odce. Kv^og I'^o^iu'iTO tifAsXtjfiavcos fjcaXXov. Xen. Anab. I. ^aX- 
 Xov is also used with an impersonal verb instead of an adjective with a 
 substantive verb ; as, u ya.^ S>j «r^eTj< yi ftaXXdv (for iv^^i^iari^ei \<rri) 
 » auKtvn Tris xi"'^^^' Plato Hipp. Maj. Si ficulnea decet magis quam 
 aurea : and to govern the genitive as the comparative degree of an ad- 
 jective ; offris aXXov (auXXov (piXviffoi rod tJjj (pvXix,»ns ^lOfAivou. Xen. Cyr. 
 Who should love another more than the person requiring his protec- 
 Jtion. 
 
82 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Rule 5. An Adjective or Pronoun in 
 the Neuter Gender without a Substantive^ 
 governs the Genitive : as, eig roffovrov ^g zocy^tocg 
 7]Xhv. Lys. He arrived at such a pitch of 
 mckedness. 
 
 So much of hope I enter- 
 tain. 
 
 But he has arrived at such 
 a pitch of folly. 
 
 My marriage cannot be 
 blamed to this day. 
 
 For I will never proceed to 
 such a misfortune. 
 
 TOTOvrof y itrrt tya n gA^ij. 
 
 Soph. CEd. Tyr. 
 0^ iU roarcvrcg ^^ ^M^tcc ec^ix- 
 
 viofieiu^^ Eurip. Med. 
 
 ov fiifCTTTog ty&f 
 
 dpi 
 
 yxfcoi tig 
 
 e§* i^s^x. Eurip. Phoeniss. 
 lye/ yec^ ev^or ilg o^* ilf^i -j- 
 crvf*(pe^x» Id. 
 
 § Having come to this 
 country, I became herds- 
 man to a stranger, and I 
 hare preserved this fami- 
 ly to this day. 
 
 But old men, small is the 
 portion of life ; See that 
 you pass through it as a- 
 greeably as possible, not 
 indulging in grief from 
 morning to night; as time 
 
 ctKCg llg o§' ytfis^ot. Eurip. 
 
 Alcest. 
 
 AAA*, <a yz^aVf fAiK^cg fiiv to P' 
 /iiag. cvTog ^' oTrag i)^i(rrx 
 dlXTrt^eio/f^ l| iifii^x tig vv^ 
 fCii XvTriW ag Ix^rtg fih « 
 X^ovog ovK liTta-rxf^xi <ru^of 
 TO §' ovrcg a-Trovhx^a ^^^ S«- 
 
 * The substantive fn^oi is commonly understood. 
 
 f The present of il(t,i, eo, and its corapyunds are generally used by 
 the Attic writers in a future sense : thus, iifn »ui gaiau 9roXn. Eurip. 
 Pkceniss. I will go and save the state. fHK^o* Ivaveifjii. I will reca- 
 pitulate a little. Xeiu Cyr. See Zcun. ad Vigcr. p. 207. 8vo. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 83 
 
 does not know to pre- iVT«(t6«<.™Eurip. (5 Iamb, 
 serve hopes: but, intent Trim.) 
 on his own concerns, usu- 
 ally flies away. 
 
 For of the things that are good and excellent the gods 
 give none to men without (aviv) labour and care (iTriiciXnn). 
 Xen. 
 
 NoTK. 1 . The neuter article is frequently accompanied in the same 
 manner with the genitive, its noun heing understood : as, aXX« ro rau 
 &sfAitrro»Xiovi n) !;(;£/. Plato de Rep. 
 
 Note. 2. The construction of the Latin co with the genitive is the 
 same as this ; thus, eo dementice progi-essi sunt. 
 
 Note. 3. Similar to this is the construction of the demonstrative 
 pronoun, denoting a certain quality, with the genitive of the person or 
 thing : thus, lyu cuv xeu rauro iTTaivat AynfftXaou, ro vr^a^ ro aoivKtut von 
 "EXXnaiv, uietoi^iiv r>?v /iatriXsus ^tmav. Xen. Ages, rovr ovv axiro I'^etm- 
 civ iiKictoirvvnSf o avrti ^t uvrm fov 'i^ovru ovtvtKfi. Plato de Rep. II, 2oi/- 
 Xotf ToV siTTuSi f/,'/) kiynv a. ris (pgovet. Eurip. Phoeuiss. 403. 
 
 Note. 4. Sometimes the genitive follows an adjective which is used 
 in the gender of the noun ; thus, h tm •jr^ovw^ro* vuv purt^av offus ^X^' 
 for eaui puTiias. Aristoph. Plut. 1051. 
 
 b 
 
 Rule 6. Adjectives signifying advmitage^ 
 likeness y conformity , trust, obedience, clearness, 
 decency^ facility, affection, nearness, equality, or 
 their opposites^ with Verbals, and those com- 
 
84 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 pounded of ffw and ofjbov, govern the Dative :* 
 as, O/X/^ta; (Jjzv ^v ffV(jij(pi^ov. Demosth. t. crgfp. 
 It was advantageous to Philip. 
 
 Visions are like fictions. 
 
 To you it will be honour- 
 able and to the state ad- 
 vantageous. 
 
 Every tyrant is inimical to 
 liberty and an enemy to 
 the laws. 
 
 It is disgraceful to those 
 nobly born to live vici- 
 ously. 
 
 All things are spoken and 
 all attempted by him. 
 
 Be a relation to them, be a 
 friend. 
 
 Who made most of the same 
 opinion with us. 
 
 Giving your voice in favour 
 of their lamentations. 
 
 iff-og ^i "f^ev^ai o-^tg. Theocr. 
 Kcct (TV fcxXog iifci Keel i vcXig 
 uyecdoi, Xen. Mem. 
 
 KXt vof^og hecvTtog* DemOStll. 
 ^«ft> ecicr^pog eua-^^ug « KuXag 
 
 7ri<pvKcc. P^ Soph. Elect. 
 
 itrri iKiivog Tcag XiKTcg, vetg oi 
 
 roX^yirog. Soph. Philoct. 
 yivofAxi^ * «^g a-vyyivvig, ytva* 
 
 fleet phog, Eurip. Heracl. 
 TTcXvg ^"P ofioyv6)f^ei)v iy<a 
 
 TToisa. 1 ^ P* Xen. 
 ofio-^n<Poi «y tf ovT«f trrivxyfMg. 
 
 Lucian. 
 
 § Consider, said he, that hvosa ^ ^p' h, (pvi^it on lyyv 
 nothing is nearer (i. e. rsgov ^iv o uv^^uTnvcg ^xvxreg 
 bears a nearer resem- ev^ug iifit v^rvog. Xen. Cyr. 
 blance) to the death of 
 man than sleep. 
 
 * Adjectives compounded of <rvv or efteu frequently take the genitive: 
 th^is 'Vihai<ffti riv — ffuvheuXos AltrwTrou vov AoyoTaiov, Herodot. II. 143. 
 ri ^waiKos Tuv Ka.ru Sia/v A<*«. Soph. Antig. 451. See the example from 
 Xcnopli. under Obs. 1. ^n^< \yw uvni ra^tKam iuk aXX* ri v re rod *ȣ<r- 
 riV9i i(,u/x(piPov. Plato Rep. I. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 85 
 
 The future then no one 
 sees ; but the present, 
 lamentable to us, and 
 shameful to them. 
 
 But I hold the opinion op • 
 posite to them, that there 
 are more blessings to 
 mortals than evils : for if 
 
 this were not 
 could not live. 
 
 so. 
 
 we 
 
 ^UCJ* TO ^i VVV |Vt>)j«<,P "^^ 
 
 hiivog. Sophocl. (2. Anap. 
 Dim. and Anap. Basis.) 
 iya ^1 ovrti eivrtog yva^vi l^et, 
 TrXsiaiv TO ^^vitrrog ra aotKtg 
 iivxt /i^oTog' it f*Yi y«g ii/^t *"* 
 ro^g, oy« eiv ii/^i '"* h (petog, 
 Eurip. (3. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 (Those) who rule Qx^&i) states, and possess dignity 
 («|w,tt«P^) are most hated (voXsfitcg) by their rivals (avdu" 
 ^iXXeg). Eurip. (2. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 For when (oVav) any one, smooth («5y?) in speech, 
 wicked in intention [ip^ona KXKog), persuades the multi- 
 tude (^rAjj^fl?), much harm is done to the state (fityxt 
 KocKcg), Eurip. (2. Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. i. Some of these adjectives have the genitive 
 occasionally after them : as, Tria-roi ovng Kw^oy. Xen, Anab. 
 Being faithful to Cyrus. 
 
 For he is devoted to the in- 
 fernal gods. 
 
 But I am not like you, the 
 enemy of my country 
 
 Indeed you Cyrus, are the 
 same in this as in other 
 things, gentle and indul- 
 gent to human failings. 
 
 Sure enough these are (do) 
 
 Ugcg yk^ cvTog o KCtT» x>^ei>v ^ 
 
 B-iog, Eurip. Alcest. 
 
 «AA* ov TFxr^tg) ag (rvy vcXSfCiog* 
 Eurip. Phceniss. 
 
 uXXec (TV fAiVj u Kvgo;, kch dy- 
 rtt^^ cfcotog it olaa-'jri^ Kxt 
 «i uX)i6tf TT^ecog TS KUi vvy 
 yvufzm TO eiv6^cj7riveg Xfcet^" 
 rnfcx, Xen. Cyr, 
 
86 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 quite the opposite to htcvnos ^^ ovroi ^ Tcmu, 
 other pots. Aristoph. Plut. 
 
 Observ. 2. Some verbal adjectives govern the same 
 case as the verbs from which they are formed : as, kui <r 
 4>vr u6otmTav (pvlt^cog ovhig. SopJi. Antig. And none of im- 
 mortals shall escape yOu. uttoM^^os oh y' o TroM^de, uttc^k. 
 •ro^ifcog, ^schyl. Prometh, xui (notvrov cvk lyjtn; iv^iiv o7*6ioig 
 <pei^fMiKoig ixa-tf^og. Id, and you are unable to discover by 
 what medicines to cure yourself. See Soph. Electr. 953. 
 Plautus. in Aulul. uses the substantive formed from the 
 verb in a similiar manner ; Quid tibi ergo mearrif me invito, 
 tactio est ? 
 
 Rule 7. Comparatives and Superlatives 
 are commonly accompanied with the mea- 
 sure of difference in the Dative ;* as, av- 
 Q^coTav (jbccz^of koiarog. By far the best of meii, 
 Herodot. 
 
 By how much the greater oa-og uiyug roirovTog ^xMTrug/ 
 
 by so much the more per- Plato Crit. 
 
 plexing. 
 
 Art is far weaker than ne- ri^vY) T «vflsyx>j ucrGivvig f^ecK^eg. 
 
 cessity. iEsch. Prom. 
 
 The other by far the first of ih in^og o yiXi^ fixK^tg t« 
 
 • The substantive fA-iom or 'hmtrr'nfjt.et is generally underslood with the 
 Dative. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 his contemporaries in 
 every thing. 
 
 § The greater the number 
 of men are in the city — 
 the sooner I think they 
 toill be reduced by famine. 
 
 By how much superior the 
 history, exhibiting the 
 wonderful atchievements 
 of the Greeks and bar- 
 barians, is to that detail- 
 ing the calamitous and 
 grievous misfortunes of 
 the Greeks, by so much 
 is Herodotus more ju- 
 dicious than Thucydides 
 in the choice of his 
 subject. 
 
 Clio. 
 
 Herodot. 
 
 rev Mfce§ ecvTog yiycvfz,Xi ecXw 
 
 |t«<. * 2 a Xen. Cyr. 
 oa-og ^g x^itrrav « o ^etvfAXTTO^ 
 
 Ipyov O^Xoa 'EXXviVi§ TS KXC 
 
 (ioi^oc^ci y^cc,(pn} « ^ ciK" 
 
 Mng ^;«yy£AA<y ror^vvci 
 (PgcvifAog 'HgcSoTflj &ovx.v^t^iK 
 xotrx j5 ixXoyvi ^^ « vTfoSirfi. 
 Dionys. Halic. 
 
 Observ. 1. Sometimes the accusative is used, governed 
 by the preposition ik understood: as, iiyna-xro rovg fth 
 ^ia-9o(po^ovi rovrovg ov too-ovtov /itXTiovetg rav vTrviKoem stveitf ot-ov 
 i>i»T7ovus, Xen, Cyr, He thought these mercenaries not 
 80 much superior to his subjects as inferior in number. 
 fg«' o-g yflfg T^v^ I? TrAgoj* (jMSgog) yv^ctiy <ri^cif. Soph. GEdip, 
 
 Tyr. 
 
 * The first and second aorist, and sometimes also the perfect active 
 of tlie verb akia-Ku or aXu/tt, are used in a passive sense : thus, olh nvtf 
 Kut iaXutrav uurav. Xen. Cyr. And some of them also were taken. 
 aXXa rovTb yt ^iv%ofitv6s laXaKu. Xen. Cyr. I am here indeed caught 
 m a falsehood. Id, To itvri^av ya^ reig t/iais tuvrtiv ^^suv Tenets uXavat. 
 Soph. Philoct. 1439. See Grammar, p. 29 of the Fragment a, and 
 Xen.Cyr.LVll.c.5. 
 
8#. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Observ. 2. 0c-7t is sometimes the responsive to r^fevrev: 
 thus Demosth. ^. o-n^, tctovtov vTrs^n^Uf ^cuftvi xen ro>.fiv\ rtv? 
 tthMvg, aa-Ti ttxvtcc tfoiuv ecvTog ; 
 
 Rule 8. Adjectives frequently take after 
 them an Accusative case, governed by the 
 praeposition zara, understood : as, ilhog xuKktff" 
 rog, -^v^Tiv (pikay^^cii'TroraTog, Xen. Cyr. In 
 form the most beautiful, in disposition the most 
 humane.^ 
 
 There is no one of us so 
 obstinate by nature. 
 
 Endeavour to be, voith re- 
 sped to your body, fond 
 of labour, and mth re- 
 spect to y&ur mind, de- 
 sirous of wisdom. 
 
 <pv(rtq. ^schin. adv. Ctes. 
 <poj. Isocr. 
 
 § For you will not find, with 
 all your enquiries, a man 
 superior to me in point 
 of morals. 
 
 We select you for a man — 
 not inferior to him either 
 
 uvviP r^oTTOf ciyetdoi. AriS- 
 
 toph. Plat. 
 
 iKSmog KXKogy ovrt « yvetfiyif 
 
 * Instead of the Accusative the Dative is sometimes used, and occa- 
 sionally both : thus, ^uvaroi xeci roif irufiain xttt rccts ^f^v-^aif. Xen. Mem. 
 II. 1. iiTtvo; fisya hv to fufia, (fivirii v r^of» r, uftfort^x, Plato Gorg. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 89 
 
 m appearance, or under- ovn ^ ^wafttg. Xen, Cyr. 
 standing, or power. 
 
 You shall no longer find (opt with ^v) me a harsh (^^tfcvg) 
 or grumbling (^va-KoXog) judge, Nor in ray manners at all 
 (^uTTiv) surly ((TKXTi^og) as before this time. Aristoph. (2 
 Troch. Tetr. Cat.) 
 
 And I saw this Philip, against (x^o?) whom we^ are 
 contending (a uyan) for (vTn^) power and dominion, 
 (hma-ruct), deprived (hcxoTrru "^ p^^) of an eye, his collar 
 bone (xXg<5) broken (x«T«y<yP"^'), a hand and leg maimed 
 (Tm^ocu), every part of his body which fortune might chuse 
 (/SeyAa^f op*^ 1 ^ pass) to deprive him (Trx^oit^sofixi^-^), this 
 easily and readily relinquishing (x^ohfAcn^y so as to live 
 with the rest {xoiTcog ^) with (^f^ira) honour and glory. 
 Demosth. -xi^} ri(p» 
 
 Note. This construction has been frequently imitated by the Latin 
 Poets: thus, Crinem soluta, Virg. Nunc viridi membra sub arbutty 
 stratus. Hor. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE COMPARATIVE AND 
 SUPERLATIVE DEGREES. 
 
 1. The comparative is frequently used, particularly by 
 the poets, instead of the positive : as, Tr^ohfMg fietxxov » 
 9-»(pvri^a. Eurip. Med, With more zeal than wisdom. k<*i 
 
 rtvrm ov^ug evrs nuri^ogy ovre 7r^ia4vn^og m, Xen. Mem. 
 iy^CTi^oiFi a-via-i Uncon. Hom. II. fi\ 14:6. oTCTi^oi civ iif^uv 
 
 a)ii^ig uftuvom a)Ttt. Xen. Anab. Whoever of us may be 
 brave men. Somewhat similiar is the use of the compar 
 
 G 
 
90 SYNTAX or THE GREEK LANCiUAGE. 
 
 ative in Horace ; Quis non Latino sanguine pinguior cam-' 
 puSf Sfc. B. ii. Od. 1. The positive, on the other hand, is 
 sometimes used for the comparative. 
 
 2. The superlative degree is sometimes expressed by 
 a repetition of the positive : thus, x.xXoVi ic»Xov im? \(pc«.<rKit. 
 Theocr, She said I was very beautiful, eiy^tcv uy^iov Ia- 
 X6S' Bion. A very grievous wound, uvroi ^ h kcvi^g-i (/a-' 
 yeci fiiyecXuTtt rxwa-du^ kuto, Horn. He, enorraous in size, 
 lay stretched in the dust. htXxM hiXetim kv^h^. Soph, EL 
 Misera miserarum es. You are most miserable. t«v TrtK^vs 
 vTri^TTtK^ov. Mschyl. Prom, The superlative of the adverb 
 is sometimes expressed in the same manner : thus, mi* on 
 A«io»j rcc^^ y l(r<riTeci etUohv ethag. Hom, Certainly indeed 
 this will be a very grievous reproach. 
 
 3. Several adjectives in the positive are used as super- 
 latives, and take after them the genitive plural : thus, l<rT« 
 T< |W6< x«T« ^a(x.» vMTi^ov, ItTTi <P<a' uv^^uv, Tkeocv, Therc is 
 something strange in the house, there is, dearest of men. 
 
 Z ^ihei yvmwm, Eurip. O dearest of women. « rechxivee. 
 leetgkmu Id, HeracL In Homer also we find the following 
 expressions : hcc ywcctKm, noblest of women, i^o^cg ii^ctvvf 
 most distinguished of heroes. ^xTiXuet yvvxixwv, most royal 
 lady. 
 
 4. The superlative ought always to be put in the gender 
 of the substantive governed : thus, <rvj^^ovXog uyx6oq %^nrin 
 fboirctr^f xMt TvgetvviKurxrov UTruvrav x7nf*xT«fv hru, Isocr. 
 
 5. Sometimes the superlative of the adverb precedes 
 
 the superlative of the adjective : thus, frXiirroy uv&^wo/v 
 KetxiTTOg, Soph. CEd. Col. 743. rh TrMTarov iihtrmv B^civ Kv 
 crgiv. Eurip. Alcest. 802. — Frequently the positive of ad- 
 jectives : such as, ttoAAw, i^cck^S, 7r«AA«y, ?r«A«, -ra^ec fr«>it>. 
 
CONCOKD AND GOVERNMENT OP PRONOUNS. 91 
 
 Horn. II. «. 91. z-oXX»v *g<^T»?. Aristoph. Plut. 44-5. hivo- 
 
 TfiTCv l|y«v xct^et rrt'Kv- j 
 
 V. CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule I. 
 
 1. The Relative* and Relative Adjectives 
 agree with their Antecedents in Gender and 
 Number. 
 
 2. If there be no other Nominative be- 
 tween them and the Verb, they shall form the 
 subject of the Verb. 
 
 The great Jupiter is in 
 heaven, who inspects all 
 things. 
 
 Do those things which will 
 not hurt you : and reflect 
 before action. 
 
 This is better to respect 
 equality, which always 
 binds friends with friends, 
 and cities with cities, and 
 allies with allies. 
 
 lipd^eta Tceiq. Soph. Elect. 
 
 v^ua-a-ot Ss 6vrog eg a-v fivi ^XetTC 
 rUf XoyltfifAott^ ® ^g tt^o l^yov. 
 
 Pythag. 
 
 hcmog xuMg icorng rifMtu, cf 
 (f>tX<ig etu ^iXog, woXtg rt 
 
 Xf>g a-vvha. Eurip. Phoe- 
 niss. 
 
 ♦ offTif is sometimes used by Homer and the Attic writers for the 
 relative : th u s, eC fia Zjjv*, oirr/g yi B^iuv vretros xctt a^tffreg. II. ^'. 43, 
 See Soph. Aj. 1299. Trachin. 1072. Eurip. Orest. 279. Ao|i« Js 
 ftifjiipoftiHf ofTts ft Wa^cK. 
 
 G2 
 
92 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 § If you are very powerful Ixv h h6xh fctyxi gi^ui," xUt 
 here, and among others : h d aAAo*, xeci cv ficvcv h 
 and not only among the 'EXAjjvg?, uXXec xea h o /Sag- 
 Greeks, but also among /^cc^og, eo-og h » uvrcg \yu 
 such of the barbarians as bUiu «^g<g«j. ^ Plato Al- 
 live in the same continent cib. 1. 
 with us. 
 For often he learned this of •nt'k^.a.Kt yx^ o yt fcnrli^ Trivh^ 
 his mother, in private con- (axi^ voc-^iv dKovca, i eg uvcty 
 versation, who disclosed yi>,>k(ncu Ztvg ^syug vovifMc. 
 to him the purpose of Homer. (2 Hexam.) 
 mighty Jupiter. 
 
 o 
 I will not hear i^'"' your long harangues (ad v. the long 
 speeches of your speaking), who (responsive pronoun) have 
 made a truce (o-w-gv^^ ^ "") with the Lacedaemonians (AetKciv) : 
 but I will punish (rtfie^^iM ^ "^) you. Aristoph. (2 Troch. 
 Tetram. Cat.)* 
 
 Especially {xXXug re xcti) having such a leader (aof v. 
 such a leader being to us) who seems to me to be more 
 pleased («^o^«<) in benefiting us (gy 7r6<g»^*) than enriching 
 himself 5rA««T<^«). Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Note 1. Sometimes the clause of a sentence is the antecedent to the 
 relative, which, in this case, must always be neuter; as, viuravasV nv 
 U^tetfAt^m' Ko.) (li ym v^i^i'Tt/i.^l'iv. Eurip. Hecub. I was the young- 
 est of the sons of Priam, which circumstance sent me secretly from the 
 country. See also Iph. Aul. 469. 
 
 Note 2. The relative is sometimes put in the neuter gender when 
 its antecedent is an abstract noun, either masculine or feminine : thus, 
 
 Sophocl. CEdip. Tyr. 542. 
 
 * See Prosodia Graeca, p. 55 et seqq. 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 93 
 
 Note 3. After the adjective -xaty particularly in the plural, the pro- 
 iioun offoffTTso frequently follows, denoting such as, irivris, ofat^t^ 
 tnKtyovTB. Xen. Anab. -.^J^ 
 
 Observ. 1. The relative with its clause is often put be- 
 fore the antecedent and its clause.* 
 
 What it is base to perform 
 consider as not honour- 
 able to mention. 
 
 But he also did not conceal 
 the opinion which he en- 
 tertained concerning jus- 
 tice. * 
 
 § Don't you think that the 
 gods sometimes give us 
 some of those things which 
 we happen to pray for, 
 both of a private and pub- 
 lic nature, and sometimes 
 not? 
 
 ^ea jicjjSs Myu iUeci x«A«f. 
 
 Isocr. 
 
 yS om UTrOK^VTTTOfCXt Oi 
 
 l^a jna yyu^y^, Xen. Mem. 
 
 iv^o^xi ^^ Koii i^iia Koti 5fj- 
 fAocrieCj iviort ot/Tog ^ tat, ^%v 
 ^idaifAiy rx 3' ov j Plat. Al- 
 cib. 2. 
 
 Observ. 2. The relative sometimes agrees with the 
 noun following in gender and number, and not with its 
 
 * The article, construed with participles, is soanetimes elegantly 
 placed in a similar manner before adjective pronouns : ri vrar ovx, ia-n 
 TO etlnov, a av^^is A^mttioit Tov, rev fjtiv ovreu (pctn^wi ffr^arsvovrec, u^t- 
 Kovvra, irokiis KCcraXecfAScivovTci, finotva '^w^ort tovtov tl^uv &>i a^ixti xat 
 'ToXif/.ov ^anr rovs Se fAti S5r<T^£TE/y, fAri^i 'Tr^o'Uffiai tctura, (rviu,SovXivovrcef ^ 
 veuTovs TOV 'VoXifiov <roittv alriatr^ai ; Demosth. ^i^i t^k h Xt^. What 
 then, pray, is the cause of this, Athenians, that, when he is thus openly 
 attacking, injuring, seizing upon states, no one ever mentions him as 
 acting injuriously and making war ; while they, who advise not to 
 yidd nor to surrender these, are accused of making war ? o Ss rete 
 ifo^fAKi raurai xai rns "Jr^ofocinii vtt^ahavi etCrVy tvrci ?v« Dcmo&th, 
 *i^i fri<p. Sec also § vS'. yx^ ff^n^fix, Sec, ' 
 
9t SYNTAX OF THK GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 proper antecedent ; thus, Ut^a-iKdv |«po?, ro* uKivxtcvif xxXt" 
 ovTt, Herodot. b. 7, 54*. tjjv uK^nv, ect KuXivvToci Kxviihs tv^ 
 KvTT^ov. 5, .108. See Eurip. Med. l^. o ^oCo^ — ov ^ovXivoi- 
 
 tlTTo^iv, Plato, Leg. III. The Latins have occasionally 
 imitated this construction ; thus Cicero de leg. 1. 7. Ani- 
 mal plenum rationis et consilii, quern vocaraus hominera. 
 -—Omnes Belgas, quam tertiam esse Galliae partem dixe- 
 
 ramus. Caesar de Bello Gal. IL 1 Sometimes the relative 
 
 agrees with a kindred noun understood ; thus Hom. Odyss. 
 
 ^'. 74. Vi<PiM ^g f^t9 ei^^i^iQviKZ xvxvivi, TO fciv (scil. Vi^og) 
 ciiTFtr \gazi, Thucyd. IL 47. n voces -jcmtf* «g|«Ta ysvierdcci to?? 
 Adiivxioig, Agyojwsvov (to vocrn^x) f^zv xoci TT^o'A^dv TTcXXec^cffi lyKoC' 
 Tfl6ff'«J54'g. Eurip. Hec. 420. uw^^og, uwf^ivotiog, uv {^vfiivuiuv^ 
 fb l)c^T> rv^itv. — The relative also in some instances is 
 made to agree with another antecedent than the one to 
 which it might at first sight refer. This antecedent must 
 be gathered from the context, as in the following example 
 from Thucydides, who, from his remarkable brevity, left 
 it to be supplied by the reader's discernment •, thus, ey» 5g 
 ( w«ga«gAgy<y) on ovk Iv TTur^idt o uyav l(rroti, «AA' (Iv y^ ov^efttoc 
 <piXtiA as above) £| j5? (y^is) x.^u.'mv du, *i ^vi ^ot^iag uTeoy^u^nv. 
 B. VI. c. 68. 
 
 Observ. 3. The relative is sometimes put in the plu- 
 ral when the antecedent is in the singular ; but this hap- 
 pens only when a country or state is taken for the people, 
 when the antecedent is a collective noun, when one speaks 
 as the representative of others, or when the reference is not 
 to an individual but to a whole class ; as, vw ^ vTin^ uyretayig 
 
 *EAAa^05 ^(wo-g; ^<x»jv, m TrenTi^ecg Ixtuv^ uv r a.7ruM<riv riKvec. JEU" 
 
 rip. Orest. Now she shall be punished for all Greece, whose 
 fathers she slew, and whose children she destroyed. — 
 
 <P^ec<rxi §' 6V7FM nrXviKecg *if^(Vy ozov X'^i^^ (^ <' ^^ar^roTJj? o o-eg kik- 
 
 Aajjcs hv^t' 61 TToXXcc ^o^l^yi^xvTis. Aristoph, Flui. But you 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 95 
 
 Jiave never liad the confidence to inform us for what pur- 
 pose your master called me, as we have been toiling hard. 
 See also Eurip. Androm. 177. otv^^stog S' uvn^, 'OMyaKtg okftv 
 
 «/V«§, cujusque generis hominum. Eurip. Orest. 908 — The 
 participle is sometimes found in the plural, when the pro- 
 noun is in the singular. 
 
 Horn. II. r, 228, 
 
 In the choruses of the Tragic and Comic poets, the Co» 
 ryphaeus, or Qpryphaea, as the representative of the 
 chorus, sometimes uses the singular, sometimes the plural 
 of the pronouns : thus, <p«g8, Koivaa-ov yJuhv U «^«5* "^^oi S' 
 uv^^' uycchy, Trtcroy ts <p^a(7s<?. Eurip, Iph. Aul. 44. 
 
 Similar to this is a construction sometimes to be met 
 with in the poets, where the noun or adjective is in the 
 vocative singularj but the verb is in the plural : one only 
 being addressed as the chief person, while all present are 
 comprehended in the person of the verb : thus, 
 
 X,6i^zni roivvvy <y Aiovvcr\ Icra. Aristoph. Ran. 1479. 
 
 TTgOC-EA^gr' U TTOU, TTCil^l. Sopk. CEdlp. CoL 1104. 
 
 cci WccVf e67rci>^Xci^6yiToy utt' if*ev. Aristoph, Plat. Q6. 
 
 OByERv. 4. The imperative of the second person sin- 
 gular is sometimes accompanied with a subject in the third : 
 thus, xi''^^it ^iu^o ^oig yTT'/jgsTjjj. Aristoph. Av. 1186. to^ivt 
 7r«5 ng. Id. 1191. 
 
 Observ. 5. The antecedent is frequently understood :* 
 
 * This generally happens with the adjective pronouns tsiovto; or 
 Toioif and rotrovro; or rcffo;, the antecedents of oleg and offos : thus, ruvree. 
 di oouvTi, xKi QVTi oloi ■pT^oif^tiir^oy. Xen. Mem. As also <rti before o^ris ; 
 thus, Oy'» io-Tiv (rif ) vfiuv og-rts i'i "fov voffii. Saphocl. CEdip. Tyr. 60. 
 
96 SYNTAX OF THE GKEEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 as, Tii ^t ^ovveti dwoiTut in^w {roc ^^nf^xroc) u fcvt l^u uvrog i 
 Epict, Ench, Who can give to another what he himself 
 has not ? «§«? u 7rx<r^U6 j Aristoph, Nub, Do you see what 
 you are about ? 
 
 May I not obtain what I ^n lyuyivof^cci^^^^o^/icvXoftxi 
 
 wish, but what is useful. uxx' c? a'vfi(pi^ii. Divers. 
 
 Sent. 
 
 For the poor-spirited, being o fnv y«g f6fxgfl'4'y;c*J> «|'«5 
 
 deserving of good things, ilfAi uyecdcg* luvrcv uTroa-ri" 
 
 deprives himself of what gew eg ^ a%ioq hn, Aristot, 
 he deserves. 
 
 Prosecute virtue j for (»«/ y«eg) whoever («v) of mortals 
 becomes ((pyw^*^*^) wicked, the Gods punish (^vt^toea), 
 Eurip, 
 
 NoTK. In the following sentence the Greek idiom corresponds with 
 the English, the antecedent understood being necessarily in the plural, 
 while the verb is in the singular ; »«raX5<?r£r«< ov$ at (pvXtui, x,ui a.1 t^/t- 
 ruis Kui 01 ^yif^oi \% lavrcov etioouvron. JEsch. adv. Ctes. There is left those 
 whom the tribes, and thirds of tribes, and the people, choose from 
 among themselves. So also in the following sentence : Itrnv oufnvas 
 ay^^u^rav riduvfAKKus 83"/ (To(picf, ; Xen. Mem. sittiv ol rut •^r^^ifffioiruv 
 cra^iSm. Demosth. <r. ffnf. xa) Iv ro7s fia^€a^ois tfnv els v^v. Thu- 
 cyd. I. C. 6. cr^oyovav xuXoi 'l^yct ovk itrriv ols (Ait^u ko,) ^\uu vTa^x*'* 
 n Ahvetiotg, Xenoph. Mem. III. § 3. IVr/ S' oVt<j xa) xanXri^h. Xen. 
 Anab. wVts xa) aurZ fAsrafiiknv 'iff on. Id. Horace Od. I. 7. 5. 
 Sunt, quibus unum opus est, intactse Palladis arces Carmine perpetuo 
 celebrare. See also Od. I. 1. Sunt quos curriculo, &c. It is con- 
 sonant with the Greek idiom to say, Iffnv eg, aliquis : Iffnv oly aligui .- 
 \(rri» ol?, quibusdam : itrriv ols or ouffrivecst quos or quGsdam, &c. To 
 these may be added la-riv art, interdum : lanv otto/s, fieri potest : Ivrtv 
 itriVf alicubi : 'icrnv J, in a certain degree. 
 
 * Sec Rule 1. of the Government of Adjectives. 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 97 
 
 Observ. 6. The antecedent is occasionally involved 
 in the nature of the verb or other word ; thus, 
 
 ^dAAfi* fiiv yot^ rav oiv&^u7ru}) ovm TcXovrcvo-i Trovit^ti, 
 u^iKuq ecvTct ^vXMlxfAsvoi. Aristoph. Pint, 502. 
 
 Here ecvrx must agree with x%'^f*o^'^oc which TeXovrcvirt denotes. 
 
 . - _ . ^xr^ax d' iff-rix K,xr&<rKx(p7iiy 
 
 xvTo^ Sg fiuftS TT^li ^io^ffCiiTM Tctxm. EuHp. Hecub, 22. 
 
 In adjectivo, ttxt^ux, (says Porson,) continetur sub- 
 stantivum Trxm^, quo refertur xvroq. See Soph. Trach. 259. 
 ii ^e fM ^u Kxi yvvxtKitxg rt x^iT^gf c<rxf vvv gv ptjjj^g^as l<roVTxi. 
 Thucyd. II. C. 45. kx} dux y& -ttoAv fAnt^av jj vf^iTi^x T»i5 
 ^5?» oi'yi oiKix, (aIv j(,^(rh yjj rt kx( ov^xva, Xen. Cyr. V. 2. 5. 
 aXXa^ TS xxt xtto HsXtvtvvntrov 7ex^i(rof^ivvi<; a^iMlxqt ol (IlgAd- 
 ^ovif^a-ioi) rZv^i Kgilra-ov^ il<ri to Trx^xxxv rx 7ro?^ifctx, Thucyd. 
 VI. 80. So also Cicero in Cat. I. 4. Cum tu discessu ce- 
 terorum, nostra tamen, qui remansissemus cosde conientum 
 te esse dicebas? 
 
 Observ. 7. When the name of a person is changed to 
 an adjective with a substantive characteristic of some 
 particular quality of the individual, the relative or adjec- 
 tive, or participle, is always put in the gender of the per- 
 son : thus, 
 
 xXX tit]) Ttvx ^xcrt /3;jji» HpxfcXviUiiV 
 
 ilvxt, Sfi6V TTXri^Xi 
 
 OS TTon hv^\ Ix&m. — Horn. IL i. 638. 
 
 Z^^iTXl TTcXlV TjJV "Ev^VTitXV. TOv'^i yX^ fiiTXlTiCV MoV6y /i^6Tm 
 
 l^xTKi T6t5§' ihxi Tcxhv?. Sophocl. Trach. 260. 
 
 Observ. 8. When the possessive pronoun is used in- 
 stead of the personal &c. in the genitive, the adjective or 
 participle following is put in the genitive : thus, ^««5 xvr 
 
98 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 ijtcoi iffKS xwuTTidof. II. y 180. 2^ft» ^' «vt* hciivm rufitt 3»^Ttj- 
 vcv xxKU, 'TTri^Trcvurcy. Sophocl. OEdip. Col. ^4:4<. iyrt^uxwut 
 rta-i TO Ifiov 'Tr^tTWTFbVf ag hc7ri7r?^vtyi^ivov text ei6vfx,ovv7og. JEiSchln, 
 c. Ctesiph. So Cicero, Plane, nomen meum absentis. See 
 Matthiae Gram. p. 672. oy^o? Ss y* tcvTnv iXuQi yrxig ttui^os 
 ytg«f. Eurip. Androm. 585. 
 
 Rule. II. But when a Nominative comes 
 between the Relative and the Verb, the Re- 
 lative is governed by some other word either 
 expressed or understood. 
 
 For why should I live whose 
 father was king of all the 
 Phrygians ? 
 
 He gave them what he pro- 
 mised. 
 
 This man is an important 
 friend to whom he may 
 be a friend. 
 
 It is your business to em- 
 ploy such arguments by 
 which you shall reconcile 
 your sons. 
 
 " {,7r!^ 
 
 Eurip. Hecub. 
 xnofji.xi. 2 a Xen. Anab. 
 
 0? ecv (piXog il^p"^ Id. 
 
 «-oj €^yo» — Myu rmv^i ^v6o( 
 eg ^ixXXoiTTOf riKvov, Eurip. 
 PhcEniss. 
 
 § A few of them about even- 
 ing tasted food, a few 
 kindled a fire, many did 
 not come that night to 
 their arms, but rested 
 
 ^x ^^ <riTog * ysvofceti ^ '"', 
 oXiyog ^i 'Pirv^ ecvxKxiu, Wi 
 di TO oTrXov ^^ TtraXvg tvx. 1^- 
 p^of^ecf 2 a oyToj « vy|, " xfx^ 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS, 89 
 
 where each happened to 
 be, not being able to 
 sleep through grief and 
 desire for their countries, 
 parents, wives, children, 
 whom they thought they 
 should no longer see. 
 Looking around every where, 
 as an eagle, which they 
 say is the sharpest-sighted 
 of birds under heaven, 
 and which tho' high aloft 
 the swift-footed hare does 
 not escape. 
 
 fiKiA f Xen. Anab. 
 
 vxvroers Tra^Tutvof, ue-r eusr»s» 
 
 vz-ov^ecnos ^innvcit Of rt xeci 
 
 6xm^^ ^rru^. Hpm. (S 
 Hexam.) 
 
 Whether then, said he, do you think it more agreeable 
 to see men, through whom the noble, and good, and ami- 
 able qualities (xyccTmrog ti6c^) appear, or through whom, 
 the shameful, and wicked and odious ? Xenoph. 
 
 And the herald came near leading the amiable (e|<>i5««) 
 Bard, whom the Muse dearly loved (tts^i — ^tXiu) and gave 
 him both good and evil : she deprived him {ufi,u^a ^* •*°'-) 
 of his eyes, but gave him sweet song. Horn. (3. Hexam.) 
 
 Observ. The relative is sometimes placed first in a 
 subordinate m.ember of the sentence after the antecedent, 
 and is governed by the first of two adjectives or nouns : 
 
 thus, UV TT^XXovg X.CCI TToXXcC ^Pnf^OCTX l^CfAiV jJgTTOMCOTgf. XcD. 
 
 Anab. The complete construction seems to be ; xect t*AA» 
 X^n^tceTc6 »vrm k. t. A. but the relative, in the idea of the 
 writer seems to include the adjective pronoun. 
 
100 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule III. The Attic and Ionic writers of- 
 ten put the Relative by Attraction in the 
 same case with the Antecedent.* 
 
 To abide by tbe decisions 
 
 which the state might 
 
 pronounce. 
 The first of men whom we 
 
 know. 
 But examine each of the 
 
 things separately which 
 
 the deity hath said. 
 And all turn their attention, 
 
 not to the just arguments 
 
 which we have already 
 
 advanced, or might ad- 
 
 vatice, but to (the things) 
 
 which we are doing. 
 
 J Take courage, said he, ^x^iu, (p^^i, u Ky^o?, <v^s> ^^i' 
 Cyrus, not even tho' I ^■^^iTrvci Truva ^ ^ "*^ ^ut- 
 should never cease gazing 
 
 ^Ku^tlop Plat. Crit. 
 
 <%g» (for itrecfAtv). Hcrod. 
 
 -xia^^ ogS iTTO) 0SO?. Xen. 
 Apol. 
 Kxt TT^on^u uTTXi {vow) J ov^ 
 eg Zttu TToTg lye* ^ixettog, i 
 vvv cty Itfu op, aAA o? -xtnu. 
 Dem. Phil. 4. 
 
 upon her, I cannot be so 
 far overcome, as to do 
 any of the things which 
 I ought not to do. 
 
 Xen. Cyr.* 
 
 * This rule holds even when the relative precedes the antecedent, 
 as, xet) <pn(ri •r^oa'vxuv, ^s fth olxohv fixtr l^^^^ovris, Sa|*«f -^1^^ 'Af^uv a^iXfj- 
 Tai. Demosth. ?rs^i (rn^. il ma, o^un KaraffKiux^ovTa ni a^A^<" Ai^f«f* 
 Xen. Anab. I. 9. Somewhat simil|ar is the following example : A^>j- 
 v»ioi St (rgocraiflv Itrrtjfftnv) pg ol Tu^ffnvoi r^ovns Wotntravro tuv frt^eov : for 
 vfis r^o^ns tuv cn^av riv ol Jv^<r, W. Thucyd. VII. 54. 
 
 t So I apprehend the sentence should be pointed and thus translated. 
 Take courage, said he, Cyrus, not even tho' I should never cease gaz- 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 101 
 
 And the other Greeks too, 
 being deluded equally 
 with you, and frustrated 
 in the things which 
 they hoped, willingly ob- 
 served the peace. 
 
 Which may they fail to ob- 
 tain, and may they not 
 partake of those (bless- 
 ings) which you, anxious 
 for the best, entreat from 
 the gods, nor may they 
 impart to you what they 
 themselves have prefer- 
 red. 
 
 <rv (pevxKi^M P pass x<«< ^i«- 
 fAoterum P^ 05 e IXtti^m * * 
 uyu /) 6/gj}v>j uTfiivoq, Dem. 
 
 «$ S pi %etfAU^rccvi» "^ « " xxt 
 
 6og (icvXo^xiy 
 
 Bics 
 
 eg UVTO? TF^OXi^W* P P^'* Id. 
 
 For I cannot* do any of the things which are not agree- 
 able to you. Sophocl. (1 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 How much he is changed (fiidiTryif^i^'-^) from his former 
 manners, (from the manner which he formerly had). Aris- 
 toph. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note I. When the relative is put in the same case with the an- 
 tecedent, the antecedent is generally understood, particularly by 
 Xenophon. ttyowrai revf, in av fjt,a6affiv^ locvroit n Kat (rm) rSv ak- 
 X«», Srco av ^ovXuvrxit TTaitiftiv. Mem. 
 
 ing upon her, no, I cannot be &c. In all sentences where ou ftii oc- 
 curs, ou ought to be considered aS the repetition of the preceding nega* 
 tive, introduced again to make the negation emphatic. See Collect. 
 Gr. Maj. Vol. III. p. 65. Annot. 
 
 «y repeated. 
 
102 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 NoxE 2. Both Homer and Herodotus frequently use the article 
 instead of the relative. 
 
 Note 3. The article is also sometimes put by attraction in the 
 same case with the substantive preceding it with which it is con- 
 nected, as in the Alcibiades I. of Plato. Al. oruv vrt^t rm U«/r«v, S 
 "SttiK^enrss, ^^diyfjcaruv. Soc. <ruv tri^i vocufTnyius ktyus ; 
 
 'Rt t^oftm ffi (Ttgi ^^ivas Sf*iven cikXuVf 
 
 Tuv offoi Auxlnv i^iSay.a»a vxtiraavai. Hom. II. f'. 171. 
 
 See also Plato Crit. p. 52. — Also other adjectives j thus, *^o( kvl^atf 
 rikfAn^ovs, oirous »«« Afititatevst for offci g<V<v A^tfvecTo/. Thucyd. VII. 21. 
 
 Rule IV. The Personal, Reciprocal, and 
 Adjective Pronouns, are frequently used in 
 the Genitive, sometimes in the Dative instead 
 of the Possessive :* as, rars^ ^(^oovy the father 
 of us : for ^arg^ ri^irz^z, our father* Orat. 
 Dom. 
 
 Such as his Margites. tm mivti e Met^ytirn?* Ari- 
 
 stot. 
 
 Now your actions are ma- vv9 h e-uP^ ro l^ytv ^uvi^og 
 
 nifest, yivdfAxi.'P P*s* Lys. 
 
 You have ruined my art and uTroXXvfAi ^ * iyu ii n^vn K»t i 
 
 livelihood. /3;«5. Aristoph. Pax. 
 
 It is enough if every one Uxvo^ h, Ixv hceiffrci hcx>>it^tM 
 
 * Sometimes the genitive of the pronoun is governed by a pre- 
 position : as, iXX* fi yu^ i» ffcv luffftinix. Soph. Elect. 619. 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 103 
 
 perform his own duty. 
 
 From this period Astyages 
 sent for his daughter and 
 her son. 
 
 But Nicias also himself 
 thought that their affairs 
 were bad. 
 
 T6 IxvTC'J f^yov. Epict. 
 Ench. 
 Ik h cvro? x>^ouq ^ fjt.iravifi- 
 'TTtfieii ^^ Aa-Tvuyvig ^ Iccv 
 Tiv Bvyccrvi^ xett o ttuh ecu- 
 Toj. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 § For as in our bodies, as 
 long as one is vigorous, 
 he feels none of the par- 
 ticular infirm parts. 
 
 And in a public capacity 
 also you are able to be- 
 nefit your state. 
 
 Neither on their own bu- 
 siness, nor their own of- 
 JairSf being allowed to 
 spend their time, 
 
 Ceres, queen of sacred or- 
 gies, be present and pre- 
 serve thy chorus. 
 
 fWi fi&v eiv p*o« sup pass ^^^ 
 cv}us iTTXia-Sxyttfcxi o xx^ 
 bcxarrx vxi^aq, ^ Dem. 
 Olynth. 2. 
 Kxt etv ^nf^oG-iu. n crxvTov TTtXtg^c 
 tKxvog ivt^yirza. Plat. Hipp. 
 Maj. 
 
 6VT iTTt TO IgyoV^, OVT iTTl T* 
 
 ut/Tcv ihoi Ixa ^lur^i^u* 
 Dem. Olynth. 2. 
 
 Aiif*nTVi^t xyvii o^yix ecvxctrcc, 
 vvfATrxgxoxxtiUf XXI (ru^ut o 
 o-xvTov ^6^og, Aristoph. 
 Ran. (3 lam. Dim. Acat.) 
 
 Reform (exoTg2<p«^^) as quickly as possible your man- 
 ners. Aristoph. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 For it would be grievous if the Gods look to (^rgo^X *'**** 
 gifts and sacrifices, but not to our soul, should one (uv 
 vii) happen to be {rvyx»va and the participle of «/|W<) 
 pious and just. Plat. Alcib, 2. 
 
1 04 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Note. The Greek orators frequently use the possessive pronoua 
 with the article after the substantive : as, wv li, rvs ^sv fadufiitts rrit 
 vfAsri^uf xa,) r'^s afAiXuas xiK^uvviKi ^iXtcnres. JDem. Phil. 5. But tlOW 
 Philip has triumphed over your indolence and carelesness. 
 
 Observ. 1. The adjective pronouns uvrog, hczmg, chy 
 or the reciprocal Ixvrov, are commonly used instead of the 
 possessive pronoun og, «, ov, His, &c. 
 
 Observ. 2. Herodotus sometimes uses the genitive 
 of the possessive pronoun instead of the personal : as, 
 fitmav h yifAtts^Qv, i. e. h ru oIkm vifcsri^ov, for if^uv, Clio. Re- 
 maining in our house. 
 
 Observ. 3. The poets sometimes use the accusative : 
 as, voiov erg iTog (pwygv lgxo5* o^vrav j Hom. What language 
 has escaped the barrier of your teeth ? And sometimes 
 the dative of the second person, without any apparent ne- 
 cessity : Grammarians and critics say it is elegantly re- 
 dundant ! Perhaps it may sometimes signify the same as 
 trov %u.qi^i or 'Tcqjog <rg, for your sake, or as far as you are 
 concerned : thus, creti fnv h Us^a-xtg w, elfcoci croi iKUV6vg rove 
 tcyecdovg ret m^iKoc ptz^iag viKViTUv. Xen. Cyr» When I shall 
 be among the Persians, I think that I shall easily surpass 
 for you those good at foot-exercises. Other examples 
 may be observed in all the poets. 
 
 Observ. 4. The possessive pronouns «•«?, iuus ^ tficg, 
 mens, are sometimes used instead of the genitive of the 
 personal : thus, aAA* ^s a-cg n 7ro6og kxi fiiihxf ^eci^tfi' 'O^va- 
 e-iu. Hom. Odyss. a'. But desire Jbr youj &c. u r) fctt t» 
 'ftS ifUu Kxri^6id\ Soph. CEdip. Tyr. 969. era y»g i^xfCfifitv 
 
 * Perhaps the preposition nxra, ought to be understood to govern 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 105 
 
 f^iv 7ro9a). Aristoph. Pax. 584. o'ikto) Tz rS era. Eurip. An- 
 drom. 62. See Horn. II. t. 321. 336. 
 
 Observ. 5. koivTov is sometimes used by the Attic 
 writers instead of pronouns of the first and second per- 
 son: uvTTi Kx^" uvTnv. Sola mecum. Soph. Elect. 'Wn 
 
 IxvTovg 7r&7roir)^ivov§. Dem, Tn^i <^i!p. Philips Letter. Know- 
 that we have marched within the straits, and have re* 
 duced Phocis under our dominion. Kxi H ^n Trqat^ecvio-'m^iv 
 /itiK^cVj ovT xvxXci^iiv exvTovi uv jj^yvjj^'/j^gv. Id. And if WG 
 had not roused ourselves a little in time, we could not 
 have recovered ourselves. Mv^y^xva toivw, eipjj, oTrarn Is-t* 
 ^vvxfii?, TiTxyitiyoi^ roi^ xvrov xTXKrovi Xxf^^xniv rovg •xtiXi^tiov^* 
 Xen. Cyr. Contrive then, said he, as much as in your 
 power, with your disciplined troopsy to attack your un- 
 disciplined enemies. aAA' oivrc? xvtoV) scil. vTn^ l^uxvr^v- 
 Soph. CEdip. Tyr. 138. rot xbrm Mf^x l)C7r6^i^cof>t.i^x. xvrav 
 for viuay xvrm. Thucyd. I. 82. UTTd^ ir iItthv p.criv « S'gjjvov 
 ^iXa ifcov Tov xvrh. iEschyl. Agamem. 1333. «Ax' eCvrU etb- 
 Toy,* for If^xvTov, Soph. CEd. Tyr. 138. See ^Eschines c, 
 Ctesiph. p. 551. Reiske's Orat. 
 
 Observ. 6. The adjective pronoun xvroif with the 
 article, signifying the same is followed by the dative go- 
 verned by the preposition c-yy understood. 
 
 * It is surprising that Elmsley in his Ed. of this play should have 
 substituted aCreZ for ki/tov, as avrod is never used in such a situation. . 
 
 f auTos is frequently used when the person or persons are distin- 
 guished emphatically from others : as, jt^utov ^sv yu^, a. ovk loLn 
 fificts rovi 'TaiSccs voiiiv, Tavra auroi Ironin. Xen. Cyr. avrof is 
 often found in a compound state in the form of an adjective, with 
 various significations according to the nature of the word with 
 which it is joined : as, xuTirayyiXros^of his 07i'n free violion. kvtouo.-- 
 
 II 
 
106 SYNTAX OF THEGREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Unless one has been born ttm^ w t<? uvo o etvTo^ .vciivos 
 
 of the same ancestors y mftut.^ ^'^ Isocr. 
 
 with him. 
 
 He does not hold the same oCk Itti « ccvro? * ^ o^^tu a tto" 
 
 course with the multitude. a«j. Dem. jr. $-e<p. 
 
 And repeated the same kcci o uvra^ o aXXog ^rgso^ys 
 
 thing with the other de- ^TrayythXa, I ^ ^Eschin. 
 
 puties. adv. Ctes. 
 
 Simplicity and truth he to h uttXoc^ ts »ect uMhi ««• 
 
 thought the same as folly. f^»t '"^ o xvro? o yiXtCtos itmi, 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 Observ. 7. The accusative plural neuter of the pro- 
 noun cvTCi, IS frequently used in the middle of a sen- 
 tence to point to some particular reason or statement : 
 
 as, O-tf ^8 (16W ^6KUg OV 7F£^(Kn^ilV T69 VOVV TOVTOig, KCtl TCCVTU 
 
 e-o(pos m. You seem to me not 'to apply your mind to 
 these, and that loo, being a wise man. Plato in Gorg, 
 eiatftec Tcaim, a U^ariff-iXets, xui totvrcc, of4,OTi^vov ovrx <rof, 
 Lucian. You mil be doing an injury, Protesilaus, and 
 that too, to one who is of the same trade with your- 
 self. 'Av^ggj (TVf^^x^oi, Tet^eCTecg ^liTCgu^iv x l^oxs* ^cca-iy vif&if 
 •7Foh.Xov a,%ioi sheet* xai rxvret, tt^iv xxi ortevv ciyxdav y<p* ^^etv 
 7e»6iiv, Xen, Cyr, Allies, Gadatas has done what appears 
 to us all of great moment, and that too, even before he 
 obtained from us any favour whatever. The Latins have 
 
 roii sponte, of one's own accord. »««? uvravh^os, the ship with the men 
 themselves. auTo/AaXost a deserter, auro^t^aKroi, self-taught, avrox^u^^ 
 with one's own hand, aurorrtis, with one's own eyes. &c. See Vigerus, 
 p. 168. 
 
 * c^fAUv sive o^ufdcn 85r< ayxu^as dicunt Grjeci, \\t in notissima De- 
 mosthenis sententia ; oCx. i-jri t>j; ayV»f o^fit7 to7s -roXXeTsi ubi subaiidJeii- 
 dum ayKv^oLi monet Harpocration. Porson. annot. in v. 68. Eurip. 
 Orest. 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 107 
 
 imitated this idiom : thus, Quanquam te, Marce fili, an- 
 num jam audientem Cratippum, idque Athenis. Cicero 
 deOf. 
 
 Rule V. 
 
 1. Two or more Substantives Singular com» 
 monly have an Adjective, Relative or Partici- 
 ple in the Flural Number. 
 
 2. If they signify things without life, the 
 Adjective, Relative or Participle must be in 
 the A^ewfer Gender. 
 
 3. If they be of different Persons or Gen- 
 ders, the Adjective, Relative or Participle 
 will agree with the most worthy. 
 
 And all the men and women 
 were fair. 
 
 Don't you perceive that 
 shame and fear are innate 
 in men ? 
 
 When they saw each other, 
 his wife and Abradates, 
 they embraced each other. 
 
 Such entertainment he af- 
 forded them ( Astyages 
 and Mandane) at sup- 
 per. 
 
 Xen- A nab. 
 
 IfA^uros uy6g6i7ro(; av ; Xen. 
 Mem. 
 
 ag a uou ^ ^ eiXXn}<eov *i yvvvj xoct 
 
 A<ogO§flfTJJ5 UiTTirU^OfAXt ^ ^ 
 
 <»AAijA6»v. Xen. 
 
 'Tx^i^a Itti to ^sijrvov. ** 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 § For indeed, this very earth ii^i (aiv yx^ « yu kx) o xihi 
 and the stones and every kxi xttx? o toto? o h6xh 
 
 H2 
 
108 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE* 
 
 place here are injured hci(pkip&) p^^^^^ la-n icui 
 
 and wasted, KotrocZ^aa-Ku. Plato Phaedo. 
 
 Nor do beauty and vigour oyrs a-af^ce, xcc?^Xog xeti i<rx,vg 
 
 of person in a coward and duXog Kut KUKoq %vuiMa}, 
 
 miscreant appear graceful, tt^zttov cpxivM^, uKX uTr^i- 
 
 but unbecoming, and ren- Trri^' xxi Ix^pavjjj Treisa ' o 
 
 der their possessor more l^^m kxi UipctDtu « hiXiu, 
 
 conspicuous and blazon Piato Menex. 
 his cowardice. 
 
 For it was not Jupiter that ov yx^ n f^oi Zivg yiv o tcvi^va- 
 
 enjoined these to me, nor a-a ^ ^ p\- «^g, oyS' *i iwoiKo? 
 
 justioe the cohabitant of o K»ru ^iog Aikyij og o^s h 
 
 the infernal gods, who uv$^a7rog ^ ogi^a ^ * voftoj. 
 
 have ordained these laws Soph. Antig. 
 among men. 
 
 And they advanced ; and then Mars and Pallas Minerva 
 
 led them, (o-(p<y) 
 Both golden, and they were clothed in golden raiment * 
 
 (&) 
 
 Handsome and tall (ftsyos^) in armour, as^too gods in truth. 
 
 Horn. II. (3 Hexam.) 
 
 Observ. 1. The adjective is not unfrequently found 
 in the singular number agreeing with the nearest of the 
 
 substantives : as, km y»g (po^ag x.xt votcog iKcivog l^urat xaXvitv* 
 
 Xen, Cyr, For both fear [i. e. of public opinion) and 
 the law are sufficient to prevent love. The following 
 passage from Thucydides is similar; ^wv^z <po^og^ i) uvd^a- 
 ^6jv vofzog ouhig uTrii^ys.. Zeunius very conveniently gets 
 rid of the construction by the figure Hendiadys ! It is si- 
 milar to the construction remarked in Observation 5. 
 under the 1st Rule, Of the concord of Verbs. Sometimes 
 
 * The cognate noun u^oltol. 
 
CONCORD AND GOVERNMENT OF PRONOUNS. 109 
 
 the adjective is singular and neuter, though the preceding 
 nouns are both feminine : as, k^ k u^srvt kx} v> ^iKccias-wn 
 TrMia-rov cc^iov roi? av6^a7roig. Plato Crit. The adjective also, 
 following two nouns in the masculine gender, as the repre- 
 sentative of both, is put in the neuter plural : as, u ^i mvi 
 au^on^a TxvreCj x-xi gyvoyj rvi ^roXitj KUt ^Xov(riovgf ot f/Axa, 
 Txvrx K. r. A. Demosth. tt. trti(p. p. 128. of Collect. Maj. 
 voh lil.l 
 
 Observ. 2. Sometimes the pronoun is put in the 
 singular number, and often in the masculine gender, 
 though its antecedent be plural and neuter : as, rx yx^ 
 vri^i7a-x KcmvYtTx (j-u^xrx ttitttuv /Bx^uxtg Trpog ^lav dva"?rpx^ixig 
 I'PxT^ ftxvTig, oa-Tig xvdpaTTov cpvciv /iXxTrav, iTnirx f^fi xxr 
 uiS^MTTov (p^ovu. Soph. Aj. 749. For the prophet declared that 
 huge and useless bodies fall into grievous calamities from 
 the gods, xuho having the common nature of man, after- 
 vvards maintain sentiments not suitable to man. The 
 participle is sometimes used in the masculine, though the 
 substantive be feminine ; as, ^vo §' «vr< f^ixg A/^ns 'i'v^otg — 
 X^ovixv M^vviv hx'^xvT'i. Eurip. Alcest. 925. When the an- 
 tecedent, though neuter, refers to animated beings, the 
 relative is in the masculine : thus, B-xtiyTm Itttx ymxltav 
 rzKvav — ovg ttot K^yiiay a,yx% A^^xsrrog '^yxyBV. Eurip. ' Suppl. 
 12. Similar to this is the construction of adjectives and 
 participles agreeing in gender with the noun governed, 
 but in case with the governing noun : rmT, aa-r o^vi6m ^rgrg- 
 7imv shsx TToXXx — \y6x kx) iv6x 'TForaiTXi xyxXhoftivxi Trn^vyiTui. 
 Homer. II. /S'. 459. 
 
 Oeserv. 3. An adjective or substantive is sometimes 
 put in the plural when the pronoun refers to numbers 
 taken individually: as, artvi hrvy^xvony 'EXXTtn, w ^ovXa ^ 
 IXivSi^o), TTxvTxg hcTuvov. Xen. Anab. Whatever Greek, 
 whether slave or freeman, they fell in with, they slew 
 them all. xXXx xxvrxg 5|)5j, oTft> ivT'jy^etiv, xxi TXtox? xxi 
 
110 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 yvvciiKetg xriivovrig. Thucyd. But butchering all indiscri- 
 minately, whomsoever they met, both children and women. 
 
 nhno ^s ^o^'^rov iKeio-Toq. Hom. 
 
 But when any one chooses 
 to depart (that) I treat 
 themWX after seizing them. 
 
 According to the laws if 
 any one should be evi- 
 dently stealing — death is 
 their punishment. 
 
 This was my first (advice) 
 that none of the (sons) 
 of CEdipus be a citizen or 
 king of this country, as 
 being madmen and about 
 to overthrow the state. 
 
 For tvhoever thinks either 
 that he alone is wise, or 
 has a tongue, such as no' 
 other, or a spirit, these 
 after being unfolded (laid 
 open) have appeared 
 empty. 
 
 ( Tig ) <rv?\.?iOt^Qccv6f 2 a KXi 
 oivrog Kct^ag TToiia, Xen. 
 
 Anab. 
 
 Kccroi at vofio^ eajv rig (f>etv6^og 
 yivOfAUt 2 a »^S7rT»,*— ovxa/ 
 ^xvetrcg iif*( « (^fif*icc» Xen. 
 
 iKUVo fAiv yei^ Tr^urog Ufity 
 OidiTTog f^noiis weAiTJ)?, 
 jfcMjS' ««vos| U9e6t %6aVi aq ^flj<- 
 
 Xtg. Eurip. Phceniss. 
 
 oa-Tig yec^ ccvrog jj (p^oviu f^ovog 
 oaKiUf vi yXuTceCf og cvx «A- 
 A«j, ^ -^uxn l^^f ovTog P^ 
 dtecTcrva-a-et/i ^ ^ P^**^ oTFTOfiut 
 la pass ^5^^^ gopl, Antig. 
 
 (3 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. 4, If a woman, when speaking of herself, 
 uses the plural number, she uses also the masculine gen- 
 der ; if she uses the masculine gender, she also uses the 
 plural number : as, ovx. u^ ootx B-avovfzivovg f^ir^xhg vtuotg ; 
 Do you not then come to me (Hecuba) as being doomed 
 to die? Eurip. Hec. yj^ug ^' unKvoi toutti o-'. I (He- 
 cuba) am childless with respect to you. Id. «aa' u^iv 
 
 <vv T«3' l<rrtv \v ^icig KetXei, -Tret&AVTlg uv '^vyyvoi^iv *)fcet^TtiK076g. 
 
 But if these seem good to the gods, Jet me suffer with 
 ubmission for my error. Soph. Antig. 926 et 986. Soe 
 
CONCORD OF VERBS. Ill 
 
 Bnmclis Annot. For son's Notes on the Hecuba, 515 
 Eurip. Medea, 1059. When two are spoken of, the 
 masculine is likewise used in the dual number : as, 'iha-Ss 
 rc<>h ra Kxa-iyvnroi. Soph, Elect. 977. Eurip. Androm* 
 357. 361. Suppl. 151. KX'^gm ^i ^ovvm xett Movrt tcu,^ Ifiu, 
 meas puellas. See also Horn, II. g. 778. But if a 
 woman speak of herself in the singular, she uses the fe- 
 minine gender, and also when she speaks of the female 
 race in general: x-pxTia-nt tjjv ivkiuv (o^av) ^ 7n<pvxe6fci» o-o^ec^ 
 fietXtTrei. Eurip. Med. The direct road is the best, in 
 which we women are naturally best skilled. The Cory- 
 phaea, as the representative of the chorus, appears some- 
 times to have used the masculine gender with the singular 
 number: as, 
 
 Eurip. Hippol. 1 107. \/ 
 
 VL CONCORD OF VERBS. 
 
 Rule I. A Verb agrees with its Nomina- 
 tive in Number and Person ; * as, y/^s;^ h' ug 
 ryjv \z}ikyi(riav I'^ro^cveffh, Demosth. -tts^/ (rre(p. 
 And ye went to the assembly. 
 
 * In the choral odes of the Attic poets the 5. sing, imperfect of tlfu 
 occurs after plural nouns : thus, Sophocl. Trachin. 520. riv %' aft^t- 
 v-XtKrot KXifAUKcs. Aristoph. Lysistr. h yu^ ruv^^tf ovk iXaerffas vZf 
 •^x^y.Ks, rat Ui^ffoci. Matthias supposes, with much probability, that «v 
 
112 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Next day, at day-break, the 
 Prytanes summoned the 
 council to the senate- 
 house. 
 
 The gods love the humble 
 and hate the wicked. 
 
 Thus they two weeping' ad- 
 dressed their son intreat- 
 ing him much. 
 
 § For good order seems to 
 preserve, and want of or- 
 der has already destroyed 
 many. 
 
 And they love as if they 
 were going to hate, and 
 hate as if they were going 
 to love. 
 
 Lo the sea is silent and the 
 winds are hushed ; but 
 my sorrovir is never hush- 
 ed within my breast. 
 
 For to do violence to the 
 disposition which one al- 
 ways possesses is difficult. 
 
 oq f^iv TT^vruntg vi /3awPv)} kx- 
 M&> iU ra jSovXivrmov. De- 
 al OS th. TT, crTi<p. 
 
 yiu KXKCg, Soph. Aj. 
 cog oyl xXetiat Tr^ocrecv^xa <pt- 
 Xog * viog, tfoT^Xx Xta-crof^xt. 
 
 Hom. 11 
 
 H- 
 
 a ^8 xrx^ix TTcXvg *ion xttcX- 
 Xvfjti. Xen. Anab. 
 
 Kxi ^tXioJ ag fjcttncif ^ ^ P* y.xt. 
 f^tff-iM ag (piXsM, Aristot. 
 
 ^vi^e crtyxa [aiv Tcovrog, criyxu^^^ 
 o aviirtg, ceo If^ag ay triyxco 
 arn^vav P^ hxoa-hv xvix 
 Theocr. (2 Hexam.) 
 
 TO yX^ X^tTTHfAi ^^ ^xXi/Tog 
 ^VTig, i^a rig xn. Kxi 
 
 TOl TTOXXot TOVTO TTXT^a. ^ ^ 
 
 was the old Doric form for «(rav. A plural verb may be employed whether 
 the two nouns in the singular be joined or disjoined by a conjunction : 
 thus — Ku) ju.' ov6' nXouruvoi kucov, Ovf ov<ri xd^ri •4<v^o'TOfji,Tos av Xa^uv 
 ''Etr^ov Eurip. Alcest. 370. See Hecub. 87. — Sometimes there is a 
 transition from the plural to the singular, a neuter noun in the plural 
 having occurred to the writers or speakers thoughts: thus, Thucyd, II. 
 ". Kfjici^ai \e Tx; ohaui xa&itrrxffocv, "v avr) rit^ov; « (scil. ol^fAaTX.) 
 
 * The adjective (ptXos is often used by the pocis for the possessive 
 
 pronoun o?, 
 
 his, her, its. 
 
CONCORD OF VERBS. 113 
 
 And yet many have suf- "Evm^t p ^ ^ yTnifMt mgo?, 
 fered this: sharing the MgT^/3<«AXo;K««<2* a r^o^roj.* 
 sentiments of others they Aristoph. 
 have changed their man- 
 ners. 
 
 Let us f go through the city, and let a shout be raised 
 as quick as possible (ad v. the quickest noise /Soij). Horn. 
 (Hexam.) 
 
 Never indeed {ovroi), my sons, was I persuaded of this, 
 that (<y?) the soul whilst it is {lu^ f4.iv uv) in a mortal 
 body lives, but when (^orxv) it is separated from it («;r«A- 
 
 >i«(rr«2apassj dies. P 
 
 And they were always crowding (ofAiXw) upon the body; 
 as when flies in the fold buzz Q^of4,i<a) about the milk pails 
 {\7e1yhxyvig 'TTiXM) in the spring season, when the milk be- 
 dews (Ssy6>) the boins (ikyyoq), Horn. (3 Hexam.) 
 
 * The four first lines in this example belong to the system Glyco- 
 neum Polyschematistum (See Prosodia, p. 80. &c.) and the last Tro- 
 chaic Dim. Cat. See also Prosodia p. 59. 
 
 f The first persons singular and plural of the subjunctive are used 
 to signify let me, let us, the imperative or optative for the other persons. 
 See also II. v. 119. 
 
114 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule II. Plural Neuters are commonly con- 
 strued with Verbs Singular : as, kTirBKiiriv ra 
 'Xgny^ot.7(x,y Aristoph. Money lias failed* 
 
 But it is not so. 
 
 were 
 
 And the children 
 
 brought to him. 
 The armies were near each 
 
 other. 
 Objects themselves do not 
 
 distract men, but opinions 
 
 about them. 
 
 § My children, falling about 
 my knees, lament their 
 mother- 
 
 And this present (business ) 
 shews that the multitude 
 are able to perpetrate not 
 the least of evils, but al- 
 most the greatest, should 
 . one be accused amongst 
 them. 
 
 u>>X 6VX, iif^i tvroi, Dem. jr. 
 
 TToti^iov. Plato. 
 
 ytyvofixf. Xen. Cyr. •♦- 
 
 7r^<sjy|fccct, uXXoi to 5r£g< to 
 'xqccy^ct, ^ doyf^et. Epict. 
 
 ^ Ench. ^ 
 
 Tizvov o aft(pi ytvu d 'ffiTrru 
 KXotco (fct)}T)5g. Eurip, Al- 
 cest. 
 
 avroi; ^s SjjAoa; to ^«|oi' P^ vyv;, 
 
 0T< C<05 Tg llfit TTOXV? P^ tV 
 TO CTf^lKgtg P' KUiCag l|s^ytfc- 
 ^of^oiiy etXXet c-^zaov to |t«gy<6j, 
 
 Ixv rig Iv eiiiT65 ^iocQuXXa P 
 
 P^« . Plato Crit. 
 
 But, whoever you are, may much good (many good 
 tilings) attend you (y/vo^«<). Aristoph. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 This (fizv) is like a man (tt^o? dv^^og) of understanding 
 and sense (adv. having mind and intelligence). Aristoph. 
 (Troch. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 Observ. 1. When, however, they are neuter by ter- 
 mination only, but refer to animated objects, they some- 
 
CONCORD OF VERBS. 
 
 115 
 
 times take the plural : as, I'^xveccrrAorovreii nxvx Itti yovsis. 
 St. Mark's Gospel. Children shall rise up against their 
 parents. Mi^orruv ^g ipvXoi ^avrx KZocrui xtTreo ^x^zvrx. Anacr. 
 And the whole race of articulate-speaking men are lying 
 overpowered with fatigue. /it'oxa-iVf am \r iWl c-oi, f^urz^, 
 rUvx. Eurip. Suppl. 1138. tutx^z fch fAirot, Ahvdtuv zdvv) 
 la-r^drzvov. Thucyd. VII. 57. See Xen. Cyr. >' ' 
 
 Observ. 2. All nouns dual may be joined with verbs, 
 participles or adjectives plural •, as, ^ir^ ttuz d^^orxlcftif 
 ecT^XviXoiiv l^^of^iva. Hom. II. yJ. Lest rce ttjoo miss each 
 other in our way. 
 
 Nor did they (Priam and 
 Hecuba) prevail upon 
 Hector (persuade the 
 mind of Hector). 
 
 Two fleet dogs accompa- 
 nied him. 
 
 For we two, who were the au- 
 thors of their being (pro- 
 duced them) are dead. 
 
 Hom. 
 
 ^VfiOS ^Zldcif. 
 
 ctf^x oyi ovcif KVU9 etpyoi g^ro- 
 f^xi. Id. 
 
 lyu yct^, eg ^" (pvTiVM ^ * P* 
 cXXv^iy P^ P '"i V av. ^" 
 
 Soph. CEdip. Tyr. 
 
 § But if you attend to me, 
 and both of us examining 
 {it) together, we shall 
 perhaps discover [it). 
 
 From the time when we 
 two in one day were de- 
 prived of both our bro- 
 thers, toko fell by mutual 
 wounds (double hand). 
 
 Can you then tell us where 
 Pluto lives here ? for we 
 
 AXA ioiv iy(a ye Tir^otrB^u o voug, 
 
 dav iv^iG-KCt/. pi Plato AI- 
 cib. 2. 
 
 £| crov ^vo d^iX^og § ^" o-rg- 
 |S&» ^ * P'*^® ^vo, f4,i» 5vj5<r- 
 K6f P' 2 a ^i^^gf^ diTrXcog ^UP. 
 Soph. Antig. 
 
 l^a "^ dv ovv (p^otZfi) ^ ^ lyoj, dii 
 TLXovTUv tf^rof hScc^i tiK^u ^ 
 
116 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 are strangers; newly ar- (two lines Iamb. Dim. 
 rived. Cat. ) |gvo5^" y«g s<^<, " 
 
 (Iamb. Trim.) Aristoph. 
 Ran. 
 
 Observ. 3. But nouns plural can then only have 
 verbs or adjectives dual when only two persons or things 
 are implied : as, ug ^' ore p^iif^xo^ai Trorec^ott fcecr hgio-^i psof- 
 
 As when tvco torrents, rushing down the mountains, dis- 
 charge their impetuous streams together into one gulf. 
 
 My horses are weary. icx^m ^ ^ ^g lyw d /V^ro?. 
 
 Hom. 
 As two winds raise the fishy 6/5 ^' uvifcog p^ ^vo tt^vtcj o^ivu 
 deep* Ijc&voziq. Horn. 
 
 Note. See observations on the dual used as a plural by Ernesti, 
 Gesner, Gilbert Wakefield, refuted in pp, 36, 37. of the notes in the 
 second Volume of Dalzel's Coll. Maj. 
 
 Observ. 4-. Two nouns in the singular, connected by 
 a conjunction, when they express different shades of* the 
 same idea, require the verb to be in the singular num- 
 ber : as, |K«;y}j, TToXii^og rs ^ihi- Hom. II. The battle and 
 the fight raged (was kindled). 
 
 If I had the tongue and the ;'g/ ^ *0^(pzvs ly&»d yAtwrr* x«< 
 
 melody of Orpheus. ^wsAoj Tru^nf^t. Eurip. Al- 
 
 cest. (Iamb. Trim.) Af 
 Both the air and the atmos- kxi me, ^-oii to 7rnvf4,»y to ?j-2- 
 
 phere around it produces g* uvrtg ^^ uvrog toizu. 
 
 the same effect. Plato Pliaed. 
 
 And there xvas tumult and x«< .%gt/So; kxi ^tuTrt^ tlfn, 
 
 uproar, such as is likely olov ik^g, (pe^og liWTTiWTAi, ^ * 
 
CONCORD OF VERBS. 117 
 
 to happen, an alarin being ^lyyc^ut. Xen. Anab. 
 taken. 
 
 So also in Latin : tanta circa fuga atque trepidatioyttff. 
 Liv. 21. 7. pigritia et desperatio in omnium vultu emine' 
 ret. Id. 21. 35. 
 
 Observ. 5. Two or more nouns singular have often 
 the corresponding verb in the singular agreeing with that 
 which is nearest : as, rov §' u^ec ^sv^' a.vifzo<; ti (pig^uy jcai x,v 
 fMc. TTiXeca-a-s. Hom. Odys. Him both the wind impelling 
 and the waves carried hither. Homer sometimes has the 
 verb in the singular when the first nominative is plural and 
 neuter, though other plural nouns, of different genders fol- 
 low : thus, y.ocf^ctTia ^g Kut l^^S ya>.i[Ah ocUi TovvxTci rs, xv'Ufieit 
 
 (zx^vx^ivoii'v. II. §'. 385. Perhaps the adjective uTrxyru, in- 
 cluding the whole, may be understood as the nominative 
 to the verb. 
 
 This rule holds when the latter substantive is plural 
 and neuter : as, >cxi yup at xptivcci kx) rx ^pzxrx l-xiKitTFiif 
 TTi^vKiVf hcv Ti? X7t xvray x&gox kxi toXXx Aa^^afyjj. Demosth. 
 
 ^ Then both Cyrus' head and hrxvdx ^n K^^o? «5roTe^v» « 
 right hand is cut off. x.i(px>^n y.xi ^ii^^ *} ^2|«>5*. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 1 And Gobryas and Gadatas Trx^u^t h o To^^vx? kxi o r«- 
 
 ♦ Perhaps when the substantives signify things without life the 
 verb is put in the singular, in the same manner as if a neuter plural 
 were its nominative. 
 
118 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 arrived, bringing many 
 fine ornaments. 
 
 § Nevertheless both you and 
 Simmias seem to me that 
 you .would willingly also 
 have prosecuted this ar- 
 gument still farther. 
 
 The spring would appear to 
 me most desirable in the 
 whole year, when neither 
 cold nor the sun oppres- 
 ses us ; in the spring e- 
 very thing is pregnant, 
 all the sweets of the 
 spring bloom. 
 
 x.oo-fiog ^i^ca \, Xcn. Cyr. 
 
 1,l^fAlCiq Vt^iU^ civ KOit ovTog 
 
 ^loiTr^eiyfAoiTiva ^ * ™' o Ao- 
 yog Iti |W<5sAAok. PlatO 
 
 Phaed. 
 
 ilx^ lyu r^i7rt>6xrog eAoj hvtcx' 
 
 ■0»g TFOtgllf/A °^ ( 1 ) UVIKOC 
 
 fAVjTi x,^v(^f f^nTi vtXiog lyw 
 (ixgvvta (2) ilet^ ^otg P^ 
 xvu^ TTotq iloc^ ahvi P^ ^"XctT' 
 
 Tw. Bion, (3. Hexam. 
 Dor.) 
 
 Then whom first and whom last slew (i^zm^t'^a ^ ^) Hec- 
 tor the son of Priam and brazen Mars. Hom. II. 
 
 Note. The Latin writers £i-equently use a similar construction : 
 as, ne interitus et dissijmtio consequatur. Cicero de Nat. Deor. lib. 1. 
 Aderatque finis et spes novae. Tacit. Annal. I. 4. 
 
 Observ. 6. Nouns of multitude take either a singu- 
 lar or plural verb or participle, and sometimes both in the 
 
 * When ^oXvs is accompanied with an epithet, the conjunction xai 
 intervenes. 
 
 -f In this example, four peculiarities of idiom may be observed: 
 1. The verb in the singular agreeing with the substantive nearest 
 it: 2. rroXvf, implying many^ having the noun in the singular: 3. 
 The two adjectives separated by the conjunction, contrary to the Eng- 
 lish idiom : and, 4. The participle in the plural when two persons only 
 are mentioned. 
 
CONCORD OF VERBS. 
 
 119 
 
 same sentence : as, crTrcv^a §' l^gro xaog, l^nrvkv (for I^jjtw- 
 Siio-xv) h Kcch^^eci. Horn, IL /3,\ And the people sat dowa 
 in haste and kept their seats.* 
 
 The whole multitude having 
 sacrificed, came to the 
 temple. 
 \The numbers great, and they 
 advance with much cla- 
 mour. 
 
 The council kept quiet, 
 perceiving some like Sa- 
 tyrus, and not being ig- 
 norant. 
 
 1 a pi ^^g ya 5rAj)^«ff. Xen» 
 
 TO fAiv ttAjj^o; ^oAv?, xxi ttoAvj 
 
 x,^uvyl) iTTu/^i, Xen. 
 
 vj §g iSovXn ^<rvy,tot l^ca^ o^xu P' 
 of^Atog 'EuTvpo^f Kxi cine ety 
 ma,. PI Xen. Hist, Gr. 
 
 Rule III. A Verb, whether active, neuter 
 or passive, may have for its nominative an 
 Infinitive with the Article, or the clause of 
 a sentence.! 
 
 When an Adjective, or Pronoun, or Participle is con- 
 nected with it, it is always in the Neuter Gender : as, 
 
 * 'ixecffTos is frequently followed by a plural verb and tas sometimes 
 also a plural pronoun or noun : thus, ol II xXnoov liryifji.rivccvro txet<rTai. 
 II. «. 175. Sometimes it is preceded by cixxoi : tlius Plato Gorg. oi 
 aXXot Txvrts ^nfJt,toi/^ya), (ikifTatrss v^S to lituruv toyov tKairros, ouk ilxij 
 iKkiyifAivoi 'Z^off(pi^ii ci -T^effips^n x^oi ro 'iayov ro aurod. 
 
 f Sometimes the article with an adverb is the nominative to a verb ; 
 as, ei/TSi Ti rax,tJ rr.v Jix>}v l;^;?/. Eurip. Phoeniss. Instead of the infi- 
 
120 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Tflyg d^iKiiv CVT& dyx&ov tin KotXcv (|e"Ti). Plato Crit. 
 an injury is neither good nor honourable.* 
 
 To do 
 
 To love is voluntary. 
 
 For to imitate is natural to 
 men from childhood. 
 
 What sort of pleasure does 
 mctory produce ? 
 
 \To have a mind not ill re- 
 gulated is the greatest 
 gift of God. 
 
 ^It is a sign of folly to spend 
 much time upon what per- 
 tains to the body. 
 
 \ Indeed, Menexenus, in most 
 places to die in battle 
 seems to be honourable. 
 
 TO ^' l^ccu Ihhwcriti il(Ai. Xen. 
 Cyr. 
 
 61 »vd^607roi Ik 7rx7? iiffCt* 
 Aristot. 
 
 7r6/05 TtS Jj^OVJJ TO yiKOCU TCU^Z' 
 
 ^u i Xen. 
 TO fj(,n y-otfcug (p^tviei ^so? /ttgyef? 
 ^ugbv. iEschyl. Agam. 
 
 el(pvicc o-jj^ttgiov TO hoiccTgiZa o ^ 
 TFigi TO iru^x, Epict. Ench. 
 
 xiy^vnvu -j- xceAoj ihxi to h 
 TToMf^og uTrc&yvio-Ku, Plato 
 Menex. 
 
 nitive with the article being the direct subject of the verb ; the pronoun 
 rovTo, comprehending the circumstance, is used instead of them : thus, 
 
 TO fjivi Tv6i(rSa.i, tcvto fi aXyvnnv at. 
 
 Soph. Trach. 458. 
 
 f The Attic Poets sometimes put the adjective in the j^^ural though 
 only one circumstance is stated : as, ^^vyyvuffTa (nv ya^ ^v ci Xvcrufffiai, 
 yvvai. Eurip, Med. 701. See also 491- Hippol. 269. Aristoph. Plut. 
 1085. This idiom is commonly observed with the adjective pronoun 
 euros, the plural being used instead of the singular, though one object 
 only is referred to. 
 
 f Plato commonly uses this verb in the sense of hxiu, videor. 
 
CONCORD OF VERBSS 
 
 121 
 
 ^ To be a benefactor is then 
 to meddle with every 
 thing. 
 
 But honour somewhat alle- 
 viates the toils of a com- 
 mander, and the conside- 
 ration itself that what- 
 ever he may perform is 
 not unknown. 
 
 For to act being in order 
 later than to speak and 
 vote, is in effect prior and 
 superior. 
 
 To call to remembrance pri- 
 vate favours and to men- 
 tion them, is almost simi- 
 lar to reproaching, f 
 
 iVl^yiTiU CVV ilfCt TO voXuTT^xy" 
 
 (Atnu, Aristoph. (Iamb. 
 Trim.) 
 
 ii^vifAiy en ov Xotv&oiVM ccrrii 
 
 «y 9ro*g<y.'" Xen. Cyr. 
 
 TO yet^ 7r^etvr6> to ^ Xiyu xect 
 
 5r§oTggo5 i) ^vvccfAig km x-pur* 
 tav Icrr;.* Dem. Olynth. 
 
 TO Oi » iOM iVi^yZa-tOC V%OfAt[AVn' 
 
 CK&f xoti Xiyco fJtiKgoq ^£<V 
 Of^6toq U{£1 TO huh'^M, De- 
 
 mosth. 
 
 To guard ^ * our blessings often appears more difficult 
 than to acquire {Krat^^t^^) them. Demosth. Olynth. 
 
 For a person to overcome {viKxa) himself (is) the first 
 and the noblest of all victories, but to be overcome (j5t«* 
 vMfMt vTTo) by himself (is) of all things the most disgrace- 
 ful and at the same time the basest. Plato. 
 
 For to behold (ItXivo-o-u) domestic sufferings (^r^^c?) no 
 other acting along with^ow, (s^"- ^^^°'') subjects (vTrtru'vu) to 
 great pain (c}vm * ^^). Sophocl. (2 Anapaest. Dim. and Pa- 
 rcem.) See Prosodia Graeca, p. I. p. 62, &c. 
 
 * Nam geriere quatn fieri, tempore posterius, re atqire usu prius est, 
 SallusU Marius^s Speech, 
 f — — nam isthaec commemoratio . 
 
 Quasi exprobratjo est immeraoris benefici^. 
 
 Terent. Andr. Ac, I. Sc. I, 
 I 
 
122 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule IV. Substantive and Neuter Verbs, 
 and the Passives of Verbs of naming^ judging, 
 &c, take after them a Nominative Case : as, 
 ov» atxfjbyjrrjg '7rB(pvzsy, Eurip. Orest. He is not 
 a warrior. 
 
 The less is always an ene* 
 my to the more.* 
 
 The degraded spends the 
 rest of his life dishonour- 
 ed. 
 \I shall be called yours, afnd 
 you shall be called mine 
 if I shall conquer. 
 
 {\For a cautious commander 
 is better than a bold one. 
 
 For every thing seems dan- 
 gerous to the daring when 
 the foot traverses a hos- 
 tile land. 
 
 For I am as much a better 
 citizen than you regard- 
 ing those same things 
 which I mention, as I have 
 devoted myself to those 
 measures that seem cal- 
 culated to advantage all. 
 
 fAi « \Xy,)c^i. "Eiii'ip. ThcE- 
 niss. 
 
 e^s iKK^tvoj ^ * ^^^^ urifcoi o Adi- 
 JT05 /3<oj ^luxiMw. Xen. 
 Cyr. 
 
 (rcfA»if uKi x-^ciTza, Theocr. 
 
 <rvs c-Tg«6T»jA«Ti5?. Eurip. 
 (Troch. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 u^ztQo^ett^'^ ^6av.s Eurip. 
 Phoeniss. 
 
 A<Ti55 yivdf^eci ^ "" iig etireg 
 cvTog og MyeJ — o<rov lyu fii^ 
 if^otvrtv sig 1/retg d 
 Dem. 
 
 iidufii 
 
 7r. (TTZ^, 
 
 * The abstract is here put for the concrete, 
 
CONCORD OF VERBS. 123 
 
 But this, said he, it is proper 'aaa« roh\ pnfii, ^acxitt; l<«- 
 
 to consider, that if indeed vo5&;iapas ar;, gjVs^ « 4^;C'» 
 
 the soul is immortal, it uQdvecra^ g/^/, lyrifAiXiU ^i 
 
 certainly requires atten- ^io^xif ov^ vtts^ o pci^vo^ 
 
 tion, not for the time only curo^ ^ov6», h o? xdcXw t» ^ece/j 
 
 in which we are said to uxx* vtI^ o vxi' xati o x/v- 
 
 live, but in all time : and ^wo^ vZv Tn xui ^okU ^ * <^p 
 
 the danger now would elv f^KXia-rec ^uvts i'lf^t^ iUis 
 
 Seem to be particularly uvrii u^iT^la, ^ * Plato, 
 awful, if any one should 
 neglect it. 
 
 I hate that citizen who is fjiiviu ^oXiriij, oVf/? itpiXica 
 
 slow to benefit his cOuri- Trdr^x B^x^v^ ^vu, ^ fidxec Ts 
 
 try, but sufficiently quick yi ^hdTtta ra^rvg. Aristoph. 
 
 to injure her, (2 latab. Tritti.) 
 
 For he does not wish to appear just, but to be fst)), 
 Mschyl, S. Theb, (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 And they live [vena) under ground {karu^v^), like labo- 
 rious [u^v^ti) ants, in the sunless recesses (ftvy^ag) of 
 caves. JEschi/L (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. 1. The verb e;ij« is sometimes used in the 
 same sense as e/^;, and takes after it a nominative case ; 
 as, l;tj' ^(ri/pt^o?. Aristoph. Plut* Be quiet. ei(po'oog z^i. Eu- 
 rip. Orest. 1273. 
 
 Observ. 2. The verb ux-ovea, when it signifies to be 
 called, takes after it the nominative case ; as, ovr ukwo-^- 
 ft»t ic»K6q. I shall not be called wicked. Soph. (Edip. 
 Tyr. It is often used with the adverbs zZ, icuXas^ KUKUi, 
 followed by the preposition vtto or Tra^ei with a genitive ; 
 as, KocKas uKovziv V7C6 tuv TTtXtrcov. Isocr. To be ill spoken 
 of by the citizens. — Cicero employs the verb audio in the 
 same manner: Est hominis ingenui velie bene audire ab 
 
 12 
 
124 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 omnibus^^xXva, audio, is used in a like sense : kukus kXv 
 tvri, Male audienti, Eurip. Alcest* 
 
 Observ. 3. I'he future middle of some active verbs is 
 frequently used in a passive sense^ and takes the nomina- 
 tive case after it ; as, cv y»^ 2vi ^onvg uXuo-tfMtt. Soph, 
 CEdip, Tyr, I shall not be found to be a murderer, e^ ovrg 
 ^g»Tgfi;v vicyufAm ovna-t^i, Eurip, Med. 1345. o/5' aKnt^cv 
 it etXo»(rmr6, Xen, Anab, Others began to pity them if 
 they should be taken. fisXrttv S'gg\(/«vT<j«< xeti TFxthvo-cvreci, 
 Plato Crit, They will be better reared and educated. 
 tv yec^ TFu'trovrxi ol vaXXti. Plato, for the multitude will not 
 be persuaded. To these examples may be added the fol- 
 lowing futures, vift^^oftui, (mgviirtfAxi, x^^v^ofcoti, leca-t^xt, crw 
 ynvtfActu TTiTr^u^iTutj it shall be done, Aristoph. Plut. 1027. 
 xiKXyiTofieci is frequently used in a passive sense. Eurip, 
 Alcest. 340, &c. See Soph, Antig. 46, &c, __ -^ 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 125 
 
 VII. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 I. Of Verbs governing the Genitive Case, 
 
 Rule 1. Verbs implying any desire, qffec- 
 tion or anxiety of mind, or the reverse, govern 
 the Genitive^', as, Im^zKov avrrig, be earful 
 of her. f Xen. Cyr. 
 
 If being in any respect care- tl rt lypt xn^bfcect, Plato Cri- 
 
 ful of me. to. 
 
 Why are you eager for the ns f*x}c^ if*>it^u j?' Theocr. 
 
 fight? 
 
 Of beautiful personSf some l 5g x«X6?, o jtcev l^ua, o Js oy. 
 
 they love, others they do Xen. Cyr. 
 
 not. 
 
 I have indeed been often sraAAax*? tvv ^uvfAuZ^u ^ a n 
 
 surprised at the boldness toA^)] a Xzym v^rsg uvth* ^ 
 
 of those who spoke for Lys. 
 
 them. 
 
 * 9ro6iu, desidero, has always an accusative after it : as. ve4a» xt^u- 
 X>jf ^o6tu» For such a head (such a person) I languish. Horn. Im 
 vfefoy T« ofxei^i leoSom, That he might the less regret the things at 
 home. Xen. Cyr, Ifiu^a, desidero, is sometimes construed with the 
 accus. See Soph, CEdip. Tyr, 59. B^etu/ia^a, signifying to reverence^ 
 frequently governs the accusa^zue. ^qq Eurip. ilied. 1141. /itXirau, 
 signifying exerceo, governs the accus, ftiXtruffat rex, rt aXka. Xen. 
 Cyr. 
 
 f The following verbs fall under this rule : Wi/jt.sXi7(r0aij xnh<r^at, 
 f gflvr/i^i/v, which is frequently followed by wig). aXtyi^uv. fAtXu, a/ntXtiy^ 
 okiyu^iTv, inSufAiTy, ogiyiffSat, l<ptia6»i^ &c. It is, however, unnecessary 
 to particularise the verbs in the following sections, as most of them will 
 be found in the examples. 
 
im 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 {^Unsocial, lawless, home- 
 less is he who delights in 
 civil, cruel war. 
 
 \And in truth, most lovers 
 are usually captivated * by 
 the person before they 
 Jenotii) the disposition. 
 
 /For who would not admire 
 the courage of those men 
 who submitted to leave 
 their country and city, 
 having embarked on board 
 their ships, for the sake of 
 not doing what was order- 
 ed ? 4- 
 
 ft,t eKiivogf og TroMf^og l^xfcett 
 iTTi^yifZiog, OKgvtlig, Hom. 
 
 II. (2 Hexam.) 
 
 TggOV TO CrOffteC iVldufAiUf ^^ » 
 
 Tg09ro5 yiyvufFKiJ, ^ * PlatO 
 Phffidr. 
 rtg ycc^ cw uv uyu^tfAui °P ^ * 
 avvi^ iKUVog » u^smt og kui 
 
 ^ ^ vTTofcem, ^^ tig )i r^tvi^ng 
 IffcQeiiviJ, ^ * V7fs^ r« S ^)j ^6 
 xiXivofAtvog '7V0HU j ^ ^ Dem. 
 
 Why, my son, do you aim (l(ptvi^i) at ambition (jptXcnfiieti) 
 do not thou, an unjust goddess she. Eurip. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 For as we perceive the bee settling (xudi^etvu) upon 
 every flower (/iXeca-rvi^x p^), and extracting (;i«^€«y«) 
 what (are) useful?^ from each ; so ought those also aiming 
 (o^iyai^i) at instruction, to be unacquainted (uTret^og l^u) 
 with nothing, but to collect from every source (Trxyrx^d- 
 6iv) what (are) useful. Isocr . 
 
 Note. Several verbs in the middle voice do not govern the same 
 case as in the active : thus, aVra;, necto, governs the accusative ; a^ro- 
 (Aui, tango, tlie genitive : -zei^a^ persuadeo, the accus. viUofAaty obedio, the 
 
 * Here it may be remarked, that the Aorists require to be trans- 
 lated as presents with the addition of the adverb tisucdly. Various 
 examples occur, particularly in Isocrates, where tlicy must be ren- 
 dered by the present tense : viz. when an invariable truth is stated 
 or what generally happens. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS, 
 
 127 
 
 dative; kuy^dva, lateot the accus. Xa»^av0A<<«'> obliviscor, the genitive; 
 o^iyn), porrigo, the accus. j o^iyo/xett, appeto, the genitive ; 8^/«(tt/, im- 
 mitto, the accus. ; e(pi£^a/, cm^jzo, the genitive; (ii6lnfjt,i, the accus.; fii~ 
 fiUfiten, the genitive ; ^g«^<u, dico, the accus. ; (p^d^ofiut, delibero, ant- 
 viadverto, the genitive. See Theocrit. Idyll. 2. v. 84, X 
 
 2. Verbs expressive of any of the senses 
 except the seiise of sight, govern the Geni- 
 tive : as, cclX u;covi (jbov» Eurip. Alcest. But 
 hear me. 
 
 Which {things) you shall 
 
 soon hear. 
 It is dangerous to touch a 
 
 diseased person. 
 For you never sata a noble 
 
 deed of your own. 
 
 I saw them clinging fast to 
 them. 
 
 oi 7FV)i6eiVt(itcu tu^K, Soph. 
 
 Elect. 
 '^va-^t^ng •^ocva vocriu »Vi)^, Eu- 
 
 rip. Orest. 
 
 cii^ug yoc^ -TewKvti ccturcv ' 
 
 Xen. Mem, 
 Lucian. 
 
 § Alas! \\\^\. {ipledged) right c^iv hlicg ^zig, h c-u ^cxx' 
 hand which you often Xoifc'^ecvu,'^ Eurip. Med. 
 grasped. 
 
 When you are going to ap- 
 ply to any business, re- 
 flect with yourself what 
 sort of business it is. 
 
 No one ever knew Socrates cii^u? h TeaTran ^uK^urm tv- 
 
 oruv UTi-rofiut, ^ ^ rig l^ytv fiiX- 
 
 XWf VTTO^VXCif ^ * 0-MVT6V ^^ 
 
 oTTOug Irrt ro l^ycv. Epict, 
 Ench, 
 
 * The verb s;^;^, in the middle voice, sometimes signifies to hold by, 
 to he next, and has the genitive after it, governed probably by the pre- 
 position '^1^1 or a,9ro, thus, aUi ruv aya6av l^to. Hesiod. Theog. rris yvuftftt 
 vrti avrrti 'i^^ofiui. Thucyd. I. 93. l;^ofitvoi uXXt^Xtuv. Herodot, with some 
 adverbs, such as us, evras, tv, &c. e;^w has also the genitive after it : as 
 us l^ym iX'^i Soph. (Ed. Tyr. 
 
12S SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 doing or heard him say- du^ xa-i^n^ cvh uvoTUi cvn 
 ing any thing impious or tt^octtu u^m, oyrs Agy« «- 
 profane. kouu. ^ * Xen. Mem. 
 
 Note. The verb kkovm commonly governs the genitive of the 
 person and the accusative of the thing, affrs. Wt&vfuav tis t)x^v Irt 
 irXnu KKoveiv axirov. Xen, Cyr. So that one had a desire to hear still 
 more from him. — Here, however, and in similar examples, the ge- 
 pitiye of the person is governed by some preposition : as, a^ro, flraga, 
 l|. In Xenophon, we often find the genitive of the thing governed 
 by It : as, S-o^vSou ^Kovfi ^la rm ra%iuv lovres* Andb. He heard a 
 tumult spreading through the ranks. — When a*a«J«v signifies to lis- 
 ten it generally governs the dative : as, ^vvuffut li vu tatroi axouetv Avt^i 
 TinhofAivu. Hom. 11. 5r'. 515. 
 
 Observ. 1. Verbs that signify to seize » to touchy govern 
 the accusative of the whole with the genitive of the part : 
 thus, fAVru, TetvTX, xiXivovTog Kv^ov, IxdQovTo tSi? ^^vjjj rov 'Ogav- 
 TJjw BTFi B^ecvdra, Xen. Anab. «s-t? §' oTrta-hv, ^xvStig ^l xofcvii s'Ag 
 Tiny^iloivx, Hom. II. <i. 197. See Odyss. vt, 168. 
 
 Observ. 2. The Attics frequently make verbs oi hear- 
 ing, and sometimes those which denote the operations of 
 the other senses, govern the accusative : as, h%ircn wfi^x 
 
 ^^va-iav e6vu,ha-(^ei!v, ^i%iroci ^va-rotvog eirciv. Eurip, Med, 976. 
 
 "f-So that, if in possession of ua-T% it lyeo ro^ev p^ lyK^ecrns 
 
 his bow, he shall perceive ei'to-^uvo^xt, j '0/ft>A«, xxt 
 
 me, I am undone, and c-y '7r^cT'^iu,(pk{^a %vnifAu 
 
 sliall besides destroy you. Soph. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 being your associate. 
 
 For I have carefully in- lyu yct^ <rv ovto^^'^ kmriihe 
 
 structed you in this (these) h^cta-Ka'^'^'^' oTrug fin h' 
 
 that you might not learn «aao? I^^mvg^ « o 5-fio5o-V|e«- 
 
 the will of the gods thro* €oyA>j p' c-vmfn, <^p ^ » ^xxct. 
 
 other interpreters, but uvrag, kxi o^uu ro e^xros p' 
 
 ^hat you yourself seeing x«< ^xova> to axovo-rof, yiy^ 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 129 
 
 what is to be seen, and yavKu. °p See Xen. Me- 
 
 hearing what is to be mor. II. c. 1. p. 69. Ben- 
 heard, mig^ht know them. ^ well's 2d Edit. 
 
 This is in truth the very cvTOi itfci ^rcc ro kockos ecvrog 
 
 evil which I mentioned, eg lyu Myoi, o yx^ tfx^oc' 
 
 for you Jtear a proof of hiyfAx « fiuvix ^^ ukovu, p^ 
 
 his madness. Aristoph. Pax. 
 
 He said that he {i. e. another person) went to Dodona, 
 that he might hear ^ * ^p the purpose of the god Jupiter 
 from the lofty-spreading iv^Uoftoi) oak. Homer. (2 Hex- 
 am. 
 
 3. Verbs signifying to know, to remember, 
 to forget, to consider, reflect, understand. 
 
 No inclination has seized evS' ImSvfitx e-v xXXog TroXig 
 
 you to know another state ovii' £«aao5 yofioq ?ix^Qxm ^ * 
 
 and other laws. iihftt, Plato Crit. 
 
 And they remember with y,xi vtha? fcsv o TrxXxtcs tt^x^k; 
 
 pleasure their former ac- fcvxofcxi, p p^^ Xen. Mem. 
 tions. 
 
 But when he saw a hind ag h ii^a Ixx^og hcrrn^xa,^^ 
 
 bounding forth, forgetting ttx^ iTriXxv^xva * 2 a mi ^^s 
 
 every thing he heard. xkovu. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 * XavSavuy lateo, in the active voice, governs the accusative. See 
 Eurip, Hel. 271. Homer. II. /S'. 620. But the perfect middle be- 
 longs to the active voice, as this verb show^s : for in pther tenses in 
 use of the middle voice, it governs the genitive. Xen. Cyr. wWe /tt»j3i 
 V vt XiXyi^iftti, 
 
130 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 § How is it that (a person) n 5' STrtf (ng) mTtoq y^et^of 
 
 seeing a horse painted Ppass gj^^^sa ^^^ y,v^» y^et- 
 
 (the painting of a horse) (p6>, uve^a^Trcs uvxftvxofMi. ^» 
 
 and a lyre painted, calls '"^p^^^ pi^to Phs^do, 
 
 to his recollection a man? 
 Pay attention also to the h6vf4,i» ™' 5g y^eti o ilihaq, ctt*? 
 
 well-informed, what they Agy^y, Kai o<rrtg Troiia, Xen. 
 
 say and what they do. 
 If it may be allowed us to i^'v g|so-T; ?«*« a^yoj gy» ovrog 
 
 live idle, careless of all ttZs u^iXsa ; Aristoph. 
 
 these things. (Anapaest. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 See Prosodia Graeca. p. 
 66, 
 
 But having called up to your recollection (uvxfimc^xi 
 ^"P), my lads, your old (TFcthuiog) food* which she 
 formerly afforded us, those fig-cakes (^raAae-za), and the 
 figs, and the myrtle-berries (f^v^rov) and the pleasant f 
 new wine (rgyl). Aristoph. (6 Troch. Dim. Acat.) 
 
 Note, ai'ofivtjftsvivu governs the accusative : as, oJ;^; Tiyovfuiiot hKcitot 
 thai mv o^iymv a^ofivtiftcviviiv, &c. JEschines adv. Ctes. Not thinking 
 it right to remember your resentment, &c. (jtvaoiAoti also is occasionally 
 found with the accusative: as, u%ia> ^f, a av^^is 'A^fivatoi, xai ^te/iat, 
 Tovro fiif^vyiirPcn vfAag <pra^ oXov rov ayuva. Demosth. a*. ffrKp. I request 
 and entreat, Athenians, that you remember this through the whole 
 trial. a,va.fjt,t[jt.vyKr}iCtt has sometimes two accusatives : thus, Thucyd. VI. 
 6. cVEytffrcuot ^u/tftu^i^lav uvctfiifivurxovTis revs A^muious. Sometimes 
 the accusative and genitive : as, uv tyu fih vftas ety«fiiftvr,ffKu. Plato 
 Menex. y 
 
 * The article repeated with the adjective, 
 f Article repeated with the adjective. 
 
GOVERNMENT OiV VERBS. 
 
 ISi 
 
 4. Verbs signifying to rule or govern, * to 
 eJoceU to accuse or blame, t to judge, to be con- 
 demned, to neglect, to despise (;caroc(p^ovicj, ^Tts^o- 
 ^du) or ridicule. 
 
 The Sacian shall not com- 
 mand your entry to me. 
 
 He holding this in his hands 
 led the people. 
 
 If any one be charged with 
 theft and be not punished 
 with death. 
 
 And entertaining great 
 hopes that he will sur- 
 pass all in the power of 
 speaking and acting. 
 
 Consider it equally disgrace- 
 ful to surpass your ene- 
 mies in wickedness, and 
 to be surpassed by your 
 friends in kindnesses. 
 
 For no one of the fugitives 
 in the dangers of battle 
 
 XctJcas a.^'jC"' Xen. Cyr. 
 « «§' oy h x^i i'jCOi, iiyioftxi ^ * 
 
 A^flj. Horn. 11. 
 Ixv Tig a,}\l(rx,M ^ ^ ^cXoTrtif Kcct 
 
 f^h rificiu ^ ^ P ^dvatTcg. De- 
 
 raosth. 
 
 Kat fZiyecg Ix-Trig l^a^^ vrug 
 rs Koti TTgarru, Xen. Mem. 
 
 ( VTT^) <pth.og ^ yiTTetofAUt » 
 iVi^yiTtet. Isocr. M 
 
 ov^s yu^ h vcXt^og ztv^vvcg 
 ^ivya^^ ov^ug ictvrov x,of 
 
 ♦ x^etnuy signifying vinco, governs the accusative; as, il K^ar'Affai 
 ffvnZn ^iXiT^reu rh fta;^^y. Compare Sophocl. CEdip. Col. 1380. Aris- 
 toph. Nub. 1350. oVjj rov avh^a xgarmiif. Demosth. ?r. a'n(p. Eurip. 
 Ale. 506. civaffffu, imperOi for the most part in Homer, governs the 
 dative : as, Mv^fii^onfftv avufai.-^'Tavrtfft avaa-ffiiv, II. a. a^x"^ frequently 
 governs the dative : as, S«goi» yx^ ovk k^h ^iots. ^schyl. Prom. /3ag- 
 Saeai ovTis fyivois'EXXiifiv a,^?,cv(r ; Eurip. Andr. Sometimes the accu- 
 sative : as, "Aq^us V iKilvn ravra, yni 'tffov n/iuv ; Sophocl. CEdip. Tyr. 
 579. 
 
 f f£ifiipo/iat, culpa, for the most part^governs the accusative : ^as, ««'- 
 hit avrevs if£,ift^ire. Xen. Anab. 
 
132 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 blames himself^ but his r/iyc^is/y »hXct xett o o-r^ei- 
 general and his comrades, T«yo? xxt o ( u/v) «-A)j««r, 
 and all rather. kui 7r«$ f*»xxov. Demosth. 
 
 Olynth. 
 
 § And they give judgment hxet^u h kx; lyKXvifcetf * e$ 
 
 also upon a crime, upon lnx.x ecv^^wrog fucnu fAit «A- 
 
 account of which men >.^Xaiv fixXta-ret, ^{kx^o/mi 
 
 hate each other most, but Sg «««rT« — ccj^x^tartx, Xen. 
 
 do not go to law about Cyr. 
 at all — ingratitude. 
 
 Who not only themselves ag ov f*ovcv uvros ivilix afctXiof, 
 
 neglect neatness (of per- eixPix kxi o I'^t^iXecfcxi p^ 
 
 son), but even ridicule KxrxytXxa, Xen, Meni. 
 those who are careful a- 
 bout (it). 
 
 For we shall not agree (av %vft!oxtm^>) on other terms 
 («AA6>5) than on {Itti) the conditions stated (g/gjjjtc^tP*) That 
 I (wWg) swaying (k^xtw) the sceptre?^ be king ^of this 
 land. Eurip. (2 Troch. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 First {(Atv) you have begun i* your speech falsely, 
 stranger, seeking a tyrant here : for the state is not go- 
 verned by one man (^rgoj with the gen.) but (is) free. 
 Eurip. (3 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. Several verbs that signify to rule or conduct, sometimes 
 govern the dative ; as, TaS^uxs ^e tifiiv ao^iru aiiravf xeti fiytir^u f au- 
 veis» Xen, Cyr. Let Gobryas take the command of tliem for us, and 
 lead them. 
 
 * Perhaps the substantive in this example should be governed by 
 the preposition tre^) understood. 
 
 f In this verb, as well as in several others, the case of the noun is 
 determined by the agency of the person implied in the verb, as if it 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 133 
 
 5. Verbs signifying to begin, to desist, to 
 attempt, to attain and obtain^ to refuse or deny, 
 ((pdovicj, i/jzyai^a) to err or Jail, to surrender or 
 ^/Ve z^^, to a/zw a^, 
 
 I will go there, whence I lyei Jg avuftt \kiiti, ekv lya ^. 
 
 think there is an oppor* ^ckiu xeti^og ttfn u^^of^cti m 
 
 tunity to begin the fight. , iMxn' Xen. Cyr. 
 Which, having not obtain- c'sP* fm xv^ta^^ « hKvj, vn- 
 
 ed my right, I will try to ^etofMtt ^g««. Eurip. Phoe- 
 
 do. ^ „^ niss. 
 
 Hear what I wish to obtain 05 p* h o-V vvy^etm\^'^ l(pn* 
 
 from you. ^km/, uKtma, ^ * Soph. Phi- 
 
 loct. 
 
 were thus resolved, xa) riytfiuv Iffva uurois. In the same author we 
 have a similar construction, xa) (iutriXivg hytfAuv aiirois lirrt. Xen. Cyr. 
 If n>jAn' Iftirivtfu II. «r'. 574. He came a suppliant to Peleus, This 
 remark is of more general application in the philosophy oi languaige 
 than Grammarians seem to be aware of. In all probability, verbs 
 that govern the genitive or dative were originally nouns taking these 
 cases after them, and when tliey were formed into verbs, with the ad- 
 dition of the verb of motion, retained the same cases. See a small 
 treatise entitled " An Analysis of the Radical Tenses of the Greek 
 Verb." Edinb. 1815. 
 
 * hety^avu, sortior, governs the accusative : as, 1/a^«s r/g aitrnv «X- 
 Xos afiXiv ku^etv. -^schyl. Proraeth. 
 
 f Tvy^avej sometimes governs the accusative: as, to ya^ rvxu* 
 mvreis k-xiutr hruvi^ tv/. Soph. (Edip. Tyr. It is here that they ob- 
 tain every thing. «u vovff ixiriuffee. ffou ctf;^erv. Eurip. Med. 559. 
 When it signifies accido it governs the dative ; as, lyu ya^ ovx zl IvrrV' 
 Xu, rai/S' ovvixa SiXoifA av us vXinrroiffi ^yifioy»s rux^^*' ^schyl. Prom. 
 Vinct. compounded with Ivsignifying to meet with, it takes the Dative: 
 as, xu) roll 'Xu,( hfiii* hrvx^^* AffxXnriia'tv. Sophocl. Philoct. 1515. 
 but the case is determined by the preposition in composition and not 
 by the verb, as in various other instances ; thus, xurotyiXnu governs 
 the genitive, iyyiXtcu the dative, r^otryiXciM the accusative. 
 
134- 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 For now she seems to fail in 
 her designs. 
 
 § Since you have got a 
 mortal body and an im- 
 mortal soul, endeavour to 
 leave an immortal remem- 
 brance of your soul. 
 
 For they are determined, 
 as I understand, to at- 
 tempt our fortifications 
 at the same time both 
 with their infantry and 
 their ships by sea. 
 
 Kiu TO 7F^etyf*i», Demostli. 
 
 f*n^n KXTttXitjra. ^ * Iso- 
 crat. 
 
 fAOtlf TS TTstfiS UfAeC Td lU^O^ 
 lya TFllg^CAU K6tt ^ vuv§ Kxrct 
 
 ^xXxa-a-x.^'^ Thucyd. 
 
 Then the stranger, called h6ai ^vi o |£<y«f, xxXta^xi 2$ 
 
 Adrastus, darting his ja- 'A^^jjo-to?, uxoyrt^a o G-vg, c 
 
 velin at the boar, misses ^gv ufAu^rxvcj, rvy^xv^j Jg o 
 
 him, but hits the son of K^oKreg ttoh?, Herod. 
 Croesus. 
 
 May you be fortunate (jCTvxii») and may you obtain 
 such things as you desire. (l^Ua). Eurip. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 For it is evident that if you accomplish (^iccTr^cca-cr&t^^"^'^) 
 this you will yourself be able to obtain what you desire, 
 and be fit to assist your friends, and you will exalt (iTrut^it) 
 your fathers (^frar^aoi) house, and you will extend («y|g«) 
 your country, and will be celebrated (^hofuxa-Tos) in the 
 first place in the city, in the next place in Greece, and 
 perhaps (t<rZg h) as Themistocles, even among the Barba- 
 rians ; and wherever you may be, you will everywhere be 
 looked up to (TrggtCAc^rrij). Xen» 
 
 Observ. The verb iixt/, venio^ with the adverbs ira^p*, 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 135 
 
 tv and Iti ttoXv, governs the genitive : as, rovn h tov ^Uv 
 tv iiKOVTtf as rx Trocg ^^iv, rtMvrn rov /iiov A«j667rgoT*Ti5 l^rsyg- 
 HTo. Herodot. Clio, In the next place, he obtained a 
 most splendid end of his Hfe, well advanced in age, * as 
 we reckon. It is probable that the first part of the sen- 
 tence is elliptical, lin re^^cc being understood: thus, in 
 the Alcest. of Eurip. 659. x«;r< rs^fc «««y /S/oy. A similar 
 expression occurs often, particularly with the Poets : thus, 
 Sophocl. CEd. Tyr. 1529,^-^vihv' oX^i^nv, tt^iv h Tg^jtta rev 
 
 6. Verb's signifying to partake qfi f to in- 
 herit, (^zkri^ovo[jtjs7v^^ to enjoT/^ to want^ to des^ 
 pair. 
 
 That all may enjoy their tvx Trxg Ivuv^^oti fixTtXsvg. 
 
 king. Horn. 
 
 And all the citizens and Kxt vx^ ^oXnn? kx* o Tr^ao-^a- 
 
 neighbours men and wo- ga? xv/^^ x.xi ywvi fAtrij^a J 
 
 men, shared in the feast. « logrjj. Xen. Anab. 
 
 They were in want of every hM^iiifci xttx? xxi xtto^sm^ 
 
 thing and despaired of n (rum^ia, Demosth. hx 
 
 their safety. rx Nsx^j(<. 
 
 %. * Some translate rod ^iou iv tikovti, to him having had a considerable 
 fortune. This can scarcely be correct, as it was Solon's object to con- 
 vince Croesus that happiness did not consist in riches or fortune. 
 
 f Such as xeivuv'tM, (Atri^Ut cruXXxfiSavea^ or in the middle voice. 
 
 f It is probable that the substantive /as^os is generally understood 
 after ftin^u to govern the genitive ; as, Scrag av Ifov iKxtrros — hfnv 
 fAiruffx,^ Tov^i rod Il?.ovrou fAi^og. Aristoph. Plut. That each one may 
 obtain an equal share of this same Plutus with us. See also Isocr. 
 Arcidd, § 1. Aristopk. Plut. 1144. ou yu^ fAir^ix'-i rxs "irx? -ffXriyu; 
 
 mi 
 
136 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 § So these inherit your re- 
 putation and your pro- 
 perty. 
 
 He taught that the tempers 
 seeming to be best, stand 
 most in need of instruc- 
 tion. 
 
 For I will announce that 
 all, sharing of every 
 thing, ought to commu- 
 nicate, and live in com- 
 mon, and not that one be 
 rich and another misera- 
 ble. 
 
 Demosth. 
 
 ^i^ecFKM on » ecyeiSo^ ^OKici^ 
 
 hof*ct(. Xen. Mem. 
 
 Kotvmsu yct^ vrecs <f>mt Xi*>* 
 Trees P^ fiSTi^af xxi he o etv' 
 Tflj ^ua '°^ Kxi fin fiii 
 ttXovtw ^e MXics Ufii. 
 Aristoph. Eel. (2 Ana- 
 paest. Tetr. Cat.) 
 
 And I also will take a share of this trouble with you. 
 
 Eurip. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Their bestowing (rh ^e Tr^oa-rlSvi^eci - ^ ) on men senses, 
 fitting to eachP* by which we enjoy all good things. 
 Xenoph. 
 
 Note. I. The verb uvroXeeua, to efyoi/f governs either the genitive or 
 accusative* See Xen. Mem. IV. c. 3. sect. 10 ^ 11. 
 
 Note. 2. The following expressions occur very frequently in De- 
 mostheoes : ^oXXou yi Kcti %it. Multum etiam abest. It is even far 
 from it. oXiyou^etv. Pesne, parum abfuiL Almost. ^eojKa/ frequently 
 takes the genitive and accusative . as, ^Xl h<rreiveny Vtonai rotwv vftuv 
 rouTi treivu ftm^ov. Aristoph. Nub. 428. O Ladies ! I but wish this 
 mtre trifle from you. fin hif^i enQetiuv ftnTiv. Demosth. ir. vrtf. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 137 
 
 7. Verbs signifying to differ from, to op- 
 pose, * to forgive, to spare, to speak falsely 
 of- 
 
 Spare my kids, spare, wolf, (pu^ofiect f o ^^et^os, (pii^ofMci 
 
 my dams 
 
 And if you have any thing 
 to say in opposition to 
 my statement, oppose and 
 I will yield to you. 
 
 § But men through the 
 fear of their own death, 
 speak falsely of the 
 swans. 
 
 For whoever does not re- 
 gard the most noble ob- 
 jects, but seeks by every 
 method to do what is 
 most agreeable, how 
 should he differ from the 
 most senseless animals I 
 
 hvKos, « rcKUi lya. Theocr. 
 (Dor.)_ . .li/^v 
 
 5rg<^«.'"' Plato Crit. 
 
 ^g uvd^axoi, ^tx TO ccvroq 
 ^ioq B-eivetrog, xeti o kvk- 
 V6<; Kxroii^iv^of^eci* PlatO 
 Phaedo. 
 
 oTTig yetg ro fAiv eiyot&a^ fcvt 
 (TKOTFia, ra w^yj P^ ^' e« w«5 
 TgoTTflj ^nt^M vona, rt uv 
 ^ie6^i^0 °P u^^m (ictTKVifXM ; 
 Xen. Mem. , 
 
 Note. Verbs signifying to oppose, frequently take the preposition 
 ?rgef after them : as, ^aXt^av iffriv uvrikiyuv ^^os rcc xukeug ei^nfAiva, 
 Plato. It is difficult to oppose what has been well stated. 
 
 * 'AvTikiyu sometimes governs the dative : as, »«< jts^} rm aWuv 
 vfoXketKis KVTtXtyovras lavraig. Demosth, TSgi ari(p, roittn ^ixateig avTi' 
 Kiytiv. Aristoph. Nub. 1343. 
 
 f <pethfiai^ sometimes governs the accusatiiie: as, (peth«u fn^'hhy «v Wiv- 
 fttctctu Eurip. Med. 412. 
 
 K 
 
138 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 8. Verbs signifying in the Active voice 
 toj^//, * to empty, t to satiate^ to free, t to de- 
 prive of, % to frustrate, to deserve, to remind 
 of, to obtain for (\o(,yx'^''^^) govern the accusa- 
 tive of the person with the genitive of the 
 thing. In the passive voice they govern the 
 genitive* 
 
 Eurip. Med. 
 ffv ecvrtg /xif^viiTKUf, ^ ^ Hom. 
 
 Eurip. Phoeniss. 
 
 ^otva °^ 7rggff-€t/?. Xen, 
 Cyr. 
 
 ;^j6>go$ 2f' 0^' /«g«j, ag crtt^^ U" 
 fcxG-oit, ^gyu 4- ^ot^y^i Ihettu, 
 
 I have Jilled this tender eye 
 
 with tears. 
 I will again remind you of 
 
 these. 
 Since he wishes to be a 
 
 sharer of this banishment. 
 He was full of shame, so as 
 
 even to blush when he 
 
 met with his elders. 
 
 This place is sacred, to 
 all appearance abounding 
 
 * TlXfi^ca, impleo is sometimes used in a passive sense and governs 
 the genitive : as, v\vi6ou<n hk^uv ^uff^orfAoii l^^x^fjctvsjv 'ZaXaftivos uxrai, 
 ^schyl. Pers. 277. 'Truvra. %i ya.'kaKros 'ttXyiSovitiv. Theocr. iv^Xiffuffce. 
 XiTuvav. Horn. II. 5r'. 123. Implentur veteris Bacchi pinguisque 
 ferinae. Virg. JEn. Implevitque spei socios. Liv. xxxvi. c. 12. 
 
 f Ktvm and some others. 
 
 \ IXiuh^oa frequently has the preposition a'lro or Ik after it: thus, 
 Thucyd. II. 71. Ileivffecvias iXivdiguffa? t^v 'EXXaSa a'To <ru¥ TAfi^uv. 
 
 J kmffTi^iu, voffipnu, &C. 
 
 \ fi^vu sometimes jtakes the dative after it : as, (i^vm fisXiTTuis, xut 
 TT^oZccrtoHi Kxt <rrt(A(puXois, Aristoph, Nubes. Abounding in bees, sheep 
 d vines. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 139 
 
 with laurel, olive, and ufA7n>.6^. Soph. (Edip. Col. 
 
 vines. 
 
 § It was often (in one's pow- 
 er) to see beside the 
 highways, men deprived 
 of their feet and hands 
 and eyes. 
 
 Frustrated then in this hope 
 also I was still more vex- 
 ed. 
 
 All knowledge separated 
 from justice and every 
 other virtue is villainy, 
 not wisdom. 
 
 Nor assuredly when dead, 
 let his brothers and sis- 
 ters obtain for him a fu- 
 neral pile. 
 
 XXI xfii^ ^^^ o(p6ec?ifAag crn- 
 
 gs&i uvd^aTTog, Xen. Anab. 
 
 tr^ctXha * "-^ P^*^ ovv Kctt cvrog (J 
 
 Lucian. 
 
 <rvvn XXI « aXXog aggT») ^rajv- 
 ov^ytx ov tre^tx (pxiva/, Pla- 
 to Menex. 
 cvh vv oyi yyurog xxi yvarn ts 
 
 TTV^ ^.Xy^XVCi) 
 
 Horn. II. 
 
 Wherefore come fire (gf^^""?) come swords; 
 And yoke 7/our horses, fill the plain with chariots, 
 As I shall not surrender (Trx^kfci) to him my power (ry^. 
 «i/»/V). Eurip. (3 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 * it(paXXa also sometimes has the dative after it, governed probably 
 by the preposition l» : as, on l(p>i^ ifjcas luguv xai ruis yvufiuis zmt roif 
 ffufAUffi a(pa\Xo(jt.ivovi. Xcn. Cyr. Because said he, I saw you debilita- 
 ted in your minds and bodivs. 
 
 K2 
 
140 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 GENERAL EXAMPLE. 
 But indeed, from («5ro) the learning ^ » any thing ho- 
 nourable and good, and from the being careful (In-ifuMo' 
 f^ui 1 ^ P^^^ ) of any of such things, through which Otoe) 
 one might (<^v) regulate QioiKia ^ ^ «?) his body well, and 
 manage {oUovofnicd) well his house, and become useful to 
 his friends and the state {ytvc^ui ^ ^), and overcome [Kgetna) 
 ■ his enemies, not only the greatest advantages («(pgA««), but 
 pleasures also, accrue (y<yvo/W£«<), which the temperate 
 ilyx-^ccrm) enjoy, by practising ^Tr^xTra) these things^ and 
 in none oftaJiich the intemperate share. Xen. Mem, 
 
 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 
 Observ. 1. Verbs denoting origin or termination, 
 buying and selling, distance from, the materials from 
 which any thing is made, the food or drink of which one 
 partakes, the 'period of time spoken of, and some others, 
 are commonly classed under the general rule : But a little 
 attention , will make it evident that the genitive case of 
 the nouns following them in the order of construction, is 
 either governed by a preposition in composition or wn- 
 derstood, or by the ellipsis of some noun : as, o/Vsg xxi rav 
 Kiv^vvm TfXiKrrov fct^og [Aik%w<nv, &c. Isocr, Archid. who also 
 shall have the greatest share of the dangers. 
 
 After they had ceased* from 
 labour. 
 
 uvT66^ Itch 'xuvafiut ^ ^ (Jt,7rt) 
 Troves. Horn. 
 
 About what time will Her- 
 mione return to the house? 
 
 cO "^'5 p^jgovo? '} Eurip. 0- 
 rest. 
 
 * So Horace, in imitation of the Greeks, desine querclarum. 
 Mox, ubi lusit satis, abstineto. 
 Dixit, irarum, callidaque rixtc. Car. III. Od. 27. 69. 
 
govj:rnment or verbs. 
 
 141 
 
 Don't you think we might cvk «y, oh^xt avres («;ro) 
 
 check his boldness ? ^gaec-oj iTTKr^^f ; °p Plat. 
 
 Hipp. Maj. 
 
 The Armenian said that he (pvif^i o 'A^fAzviog (««vt<) tto^vs 
 
 would give a great deal «v obrcg 7r^ioca-6xi. Xen, 
 for this. Cyr. 
 
 § And considering how they 
 may sell dear what they 
 bought cheap. 
 
 Having seen Philip, for in- 
 stance, the Macedonian, 
 I was not able to contain 
 myself: he was pointed 
 out to me in a certain 
 corner mending rotten 
 shoes for hire. 
 
 ^vg * ^^tx.u£vog croAt>5 ^ xtto' 
 ^i^c^^c. su 2ami Xen. Mem. 
 
 Toy dvvxTog elf^i' htxvvfci ^ ^ 
 ^£ hyM h yafVi^toD ri (o6vr*) 
 (i(,i<r6cg xxiofAxt TO (Tx&^tv to 
 
 v7Fohn(Ax.^ Lucian. 
 
 Take food (oeW^^" «") and welcome : but after tasting 
 ['TTuof/.cii'^^) of supper, we will enquire who of men you 
 are'^": for the race of your progenitors (toKivg) has not 
 perished. P "^' Horn. Odyss. (3 Hexam.) 
 
 Observ. 2. Sometimes two prepositions are used, one 
 in composition and another governing the substantive: 
 as, tv^iTTor he icx^xxm «^ojr«yff-0|t606<, I shall never cease from 
 my troubles. Sop/i. Elect, 
 
 Observ. 3. The poets and Attic writers sometimes 
 use an accusative instead of a genitive : as, m ^t^ »<pa>igu' 
 rxi x^va-vi'i^x ^oiQog 'ATroPiXcov. Hom. 11/ ci. 275. Since 
 PhcEbus Apollo takes Chryse'is from me. xTroTn^a o-g r» 
 X^nt^xrx. Isoc7\ I deprive you of your money, xrx^ 
 TivK^Av T^Xx^mtov iv^og XTTViv^x. II. o, 463. See Eurip, 
 Androm. 325, and rule 3. of verbs^verning the accus. 
 
l^'i SYNTAX OF TRE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Observ. 4. Verbs formed from the comparative of 
 adjectives govern the genitive, as implying comparison : 
 as, ovoiv ^yiiTo f4.itbvtr6o{.t tm a.7io jroAAwv Kcti f^ByuX&iv ttoXXcc 
 xect fx^iycthoe, B'vovr&ty. Xen. Mem,. He thought that he was 
 in no respect inferior to those who offered many and large 
 sacrifices from opulent fortunes, d ^rrc<>fAz6oi uvtcv gy yroiovv- 
 rag, Xen, Cyr» If we are inferior to him in doing good. 
 A<e^oKofAC6g vc-regjjcrg tjJ? fid^ns* Xen. Anab. The active voice 
 of some of these verbs governs the accusative with the geni- 
 tive : as, Ksit f^v^iv fAUov Toy dXvi&ov? too rav 'KoXifAim. Xen. 
 Cyr. and do not lessen the affairs of the enemy below 
 the truth.* 
 
 9. E/|M//, ymiMai, and other verbs signifying 
 possession^ property or duty^ govern the geni- 
 tive : as, 7m ya^ vizojvtoo'j IffTi, Xen. Anab. it 
 helo7igs to the conquerors. 
 
 It belongs to those who o yu^ f*6cx,yi viKot&> p^ jcai to u^- 
 
 have gained the battle x^ £°"'»''' ^^"- Anab. 
 
 also to command. 
 
 They become of the old ovro? o yi^etio? *^ yiufcxi, Xen. 
 
 men. Cyr. 
 
 But when it was necessary oTron h k^ivu ^ ^ ht op oTron^oq 
 
 to determine whose the h ;^j/t&;v «p. Id. 
 
 coat should be. 
 
 * Verbs formed from the superlative may likewise be added : as, 
 ^ifi^u ya,^ uvryi ^u^\ a, KUXkiffrtvirai tmv vuv h Kv^nuxcKTiM, Eurip. 
 Med. 945. See also Hippol. 1013. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS, 
 
 143 
 
 § All poetry is by its nature 
 enigmatical and not for 
 every one to unriddle. 
 
 For when any one shall 
 have confessed that it be- 
 longs to a commander to 
 prescribe v/hat must be 
 done, he has shewn that 
 it is the duty of a subject 
 to obey. 
 
 Don*t thou die with me, nor 
 claim as thine what thou 
 didst not touch ; my death 
 will be enough. 
 
 ulviyfX.ccra^'Ai; xett ov {Ian) 
 gi^cj. 1 * Plato Alcib. 2. 
 
 Xi^i 
 
 TTotia, 6 di 
 
 Ci^^C 
 
 Xen. Mem. 
 
 f^ii lyu Bvwx-co ^ ^ <rv koivuj 
 fivi6 P* jKij ^fyii/ TTOtia 
 imp mi p-gayTOW ^ ei^KlH ^vn» 
 
 o-KuV^ \ya. Soph. Antig. 
 (2 lam. Trim.) 
 
 Of this* race and blood I boast that I am. 
 Hexam.) 
 
 Horn. 
 
 Note, l^u is sometimes used for s/^< in the sense of possessing : 
 thus, Oi uvh^i; 01 uyadot ra, f/,iv a,?-ka rovg aCrav vhTs ^toao'xova'iVj a. ^i^a- 
 ffxaXuv sx,iTai. Plato in Prolag. Good men instruct their sons in 
 other arts which belong to teachers, ceo T l^-rui on xiv a^xV' Horn. 
 II, 1, It shall depend upon you what he shall first say. 
 
 * The particle t<j< is placed after the pronoun. 
 
144 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 11. Of Verbs governing the Dative Case. 
 
 Rule 1. Verbs or Adjectives' followed by 
 nouns expressing the cause, manner or instru- 
 7ne?it, require them to be put in the Dative.* 
 
 He entreated them by every 
 art and contrivance. 
 
 And they live by remem- 
 brance more than by 
 hope. 
 
 But with brazen and ada- 
 mantine walls, as he says, 
 he fortified our country. 
 
 For it had been cut off by 
 a scymitar by the Egyp- 
 tians. 
 
 For the divinity is not bles- 
 sed by silver and gold j 
 nor powerful by the thun- 
 der and thunderbolt, but 
 by knowledge and wis- 
 dom. 
 
 j(,ecvn. Xen. Anab.- 
 Ixttis. Aristot. 
 
 got, lya ru^i^M.^ * .^sch. 
 adv. Ctes. 
 UTrbKOTrra P'" yetp fcoTrts vvc c} 
 AlyvTrrioi. ^ Xen. Cyr. — 
 
 (iCXKOi^lOS TO ^116»' Oli^i /SgOV- 
 
 Plut. 
 
 Come, iEschylus, go rejoicing (x^^^'^ with ;^<»/g<u) and 
 save our city by good counsels, and instruct (TFeahvof^ ^) 
 the foolish, (avoVo?) and many there are. Aristoph. (4 Ana- 
 paest. Dim. Acat.)f 
 
 * This case would with more propriety be denominated the ablative, 
 f See Prosodia Graeca, page 62 Sec. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS, 145 
 
 For know this assuredly (hTrov) that (an) by none of 
 all his (schemes) has Philip gained greater advantages 
 over the state (K^arza) than by being before (us) (the 
 article with the infinitive) at the head of his affairs, (^rgftj 
 with the dative). Demosth. Tre^t rm h ^i^. 
 
 Note. The poets soraetiraes govern the noun, expressive of the in- 
 strument, by tlie preposition Iv : thus, Homer II. a. 587. f^n ffs, fiXnv 
 
 Rule 2. A verb signifying advantage or 
 disadvantage governs the Dative^ : as, as a^- 
 miv (pikoig. Soph. Elect. So as to assist his 
 friends. 
 
 If it is agreeable to you. il g-v vj^dfixi l<rti\, Plato 
 
 Phaedo. 
 It is not easy for every thing ttcc^ h tv fuhog ^vjrra? ccvn^ xec 
 
 » 
 
 Verbs of this description sometimes govern the accusative : as, 
 tl ai fin iTa^xiiTa}, Eurip. Crest. If I shall not assist you. u<psXiu,Juvo 
 frequently governs the accusative, ovri rovs hxaXofjuvoui ol ffvyytms 
 dxpiXovtriv. Xen. Mevi. With the preposition cr^aj it takes the dative. 
 See Eurip. Suppl. 336. injfiuivcu, Icsdo, governs the accus. II. o, 42. 
 ivioytriu also, ous nu? iv'/ioyirvtffa. Aristojjh. Plut. The verbs cronu, 
 ^^au, accompanied vpith the adverbs, tv, xxXug, xaxug. Sec, require the 
 accusative: an, TYjv'EkXa^a ^st^anov lu 9roiuv. Xen. Mem. ovnfAi and 
 ovtv*ifM,juvo, and (iXafriu, Icedo, require the accusative. Xuav for XutrinXiTv, 
 Sophocl. El. 1005. 
 
 f The participle in this example is made to agree with the pro- 
 noun, and the sentence may be thus translated : " If it is to you 
 feeling the pleasure." The common expression is, el eei v^u la-r/. 
 The pleasurable feeling is meant to be expressed instead of the agree- 
 
146 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 to happen to a mortal r* vco? ^^ Iv o iavrov /3«5 he- 
 man according to his Qxtv&f, Plato Menex. 
 wish in his life. 
 For in lest no less than in »xi yetp 7c»il(a p^ cvhi irrtv « 
 
 hxr^i<^Jl^^^en, Mem. 
 
 earnest, he benefited those c-rrovSxC^ '-Xvtrir&Ma o 'Tuv- 
 
 associating with him. 
 
 § And I, perceiving the 
 youth sinking, wishing to 
 relieve him, that he might 
 not shrink from us. 
 
 Hence, I suppose, it hap- 
 pened to the multitude, 
 instead of inordinate and 
 unseasonable indolence, to 
 lose their freedom : and 
 to their rulers, thinking 
 to sell every thing except 
 themselves, to find that 
 they had first sold them- 
 selves. 
 
 TO f^ii^UKiov, /5ovXof{,xi eivoc- 
 
 3g<A<«w.i* op Plato Euthyd. 
 
 £<r , ol/^oiif <rv[X.Quiveo P o f*iv 
 7rXr,6o?f dvTt vj ttoXvs koci cc- 
 
 dTToXXvf^i P" ^' ds TT^bia-rvi' 
 f^t P P^ Kctt dxXog jrAijv lxv» 
 rov ^'^ cidf^eci TraXicifi v^urtg 
 loCVXtV TFiTC^eCKCt P^ xlriitvo' 
 
 f4.»iv pass Dem. 5r. s-£(p. 
 
 ^ 
 
 I wish not {(Mt i'k ix^v) for the land of Pelops, 7 ivish not 
 for golden talents: nor to run before (crgoV^g) the winds. 
 Theocrit. (1 line Hexam. 2 Pentam. Dor. Dial.) 
 
 Note. This rule comprehends most of the following, but it was 
 thought necessary to particularise them. 
 
 able quality in the object that excited it. See also Xen, Cyr. hru v- 
 (JI.UV (ji.n a.x!^nfi.itM s/jj. See Horn. II. |'. 108. Sophocl. Trachin. v. 18. 
 n(rf/i.i))vt Vi (jLOi^ 'O «Xe/vof v^Xh Zt^vo; AA;;^>5v>?j ts tccT;. Aristoph. Pax. 582. 
 « ^iXraTYi y u; acr/^ivoicriv 'h/ntv '/iXhi- Phito Gorg. u uvtm yi aoi jSawXa- 
 fjiXvu Ifl-T/v a.'TeoK^lntr&ce.t. ^schyl. Prom. v. 25. «o-^sv4; 5s <r« « ^sixikufiuv 
 vvl arox^u-^n (pdo;, Quibusbellum volcntibus erat. TacilKS. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 U7 
 
 The following Classes of Verbs for the most 
 part govern the Dative. 
 
 1 St, Verbs of commanding^ obeying^ yield- 
 ing^ announcing^ approaching, and meeting. 
 
 I shall obey those in ofi&ce. ol h 
 
 He ordered each man. 
 
 The body must be accus- 
 tomed to obey the mind. 
 
 What wild beasts he should 
 not come near. 
 
 We announced, therefore, 
 to each other to come as 
 early as possible to the 
 usual [place). 
 
 § May the son of Maia, the 
 conducting prince, bring 
 you to your home. 
 
 If the rector went away, 
 he caused any of the citi- 
 zens that happened to be 
 present, to be master, and 
 to prescribe to the boys 
 whatever might seem to 
 be proper. 
 
 TgAos /3gS»5 TFiiiai So- 
 phocl. 
 
 Horn. 
 
 ritf. Xen. Mem. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 7roiPCAyyiX?\.6> ^ ^ ow aXM^uv y,- 
 
 iU)6cc. Plato Phaedo. 
 
 (Anapaest. Dim.) TriXut^oj 
 ^oficg. P^ Eurip. 
 
 5 c ^ ' op 2 a. 
 
 TTbliCO ^ ^ U,U TTUgUTt TCCXl' 
 
 T>35 xyg;o$ zhxi xoti iTnrxrrctf 
 TTcci? on »v uyccSog ookzm °P 
 
 iivut. Xen. de Rep. Lac. 
 
 For we would not listen (y;raxov<y ^ ^) to ani/ other of 
 the present race of sophists (ftinco^oTocpia-TYig), Aristoph. 
 (Anapaest. Tetram. Cat,) 
 
 When (iji-^xfli) we were preparing to come [ci^ogfAua"^''^) 
 hither, The moon having met {7vvTK,yx,tiva 2 a) us, charged 
 us to say, In the first place. {Trearx f^h) health to the Athc- 
 
148 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 nians and their allies, Then (gfra) she said that she was 
 angry (,^y^a/y<y) for that she had been very ill treated, 
 Qitvoc w«»V;c&>pa). Aristoph. (4 Troch. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 Observ. Verbs that signify to accompany or Jbllotv, 
 and those compounded of e^ou, simul, take the dative af- 
 ter them, governed by the preposition a-w understood : 
 as, crot yceg l-^o^^&ci a^». Soph. Elect. For we will accom- 
 pany you, cfAcXayoo fci. Aristoph. Plut, I agree with 
 
 you. iTFia-QoCl ^g ^OKit fABl,\l(7T0t, T^ U^Ct^lO-TtOt, « UVOtlO-^VVTiSt. Xen» 
 
 Cyr. Impudence seems chiefly to accompany ingrati- 
 tude. 
 
 Note. The verb to come, sometimes governs the dative of the per- 
 son with a participle or adjective expressive of a certain feeling : thus, 
 
 SophocL Tracliin. 18. 
 
 2d, Verbs of praying or entreating : * as, 
 ^^o(Tev'io[Mda> t roiffi aoig hyoLk\hcc(Si, Eurip, Hip- 
 po!. We mil invoke thy image, 
 
 I intreat all the gods and o ^ios evx.of^xi yrc6i kxi ^rxa-x, 
 
 goddesses. Dem. tt. G-ri<p. 
 
 We will pray to caution, the ^ ^' sv^^u'^nx, pc^vio-ifcog %iet e 
 
 most useful of goddesses, ;rga(rsu|;o^5/«^£ liucca^u 7CC' 
 
 to save this city. y^iq. Eurip. Phoeniss. ( 2 
 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 * ^10) or ^lofiut, rogo, indigco, governs the genitive. See No. 6. of 
 Verbs governing the Genitive, roffovrou ya^ ^zu> Xeyeiv. Dem. <x. ffnf. 
 I am so far from saying. 
 
 f Herodotus makes ^^onuxofAxi govern the accusative : as, -r^offiv- 
 ^ovTo rt <rtir aiS^uieov. Clio. And Xenophon sometimes the preposition 
 ^^oi after the verb : as, k») ivx^Ta h r^oj rovs S-iovf, &c. Metn. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 149 
 
 Note. Xtajt/jboti, Xtranuu aiiJ iKinvu always govern the accusative. 
 See Homer's II. «,. 283. ahrxo lyuyi "kurfftyC 'A;^/XX>jl' ftihfiiv ;^flAo», 
 &c. The construction and interpretation of which ought to be, avra^ 
 lyuyi "kKKTofioLt (<ri) fAtSifjiiv p^oXov A'^iXX'^i\ but I particularly entreat you 
 to give up your resentment against Achilles. See Collect. Grsec. Mia. 
 Not in Horn. v. 283. 
 
 2d. Verbs o^ using, rejoicing and gratify- 
 ing, admiring,'*' resembling. 
 
 They seem to use you in 
 a still more friendly way 
 than others. 
 
 But he thought that the gods 
 were much gratified with 
 the honours of the most 
 pious. 
 
 § For on this account I sup- 
 pose that we, when chil- 
 dren, learned by heart the 
 sentiments of the poets, 
 that, when men, we might 
 use them. 
 
 Wherefore, at seeing these, 
 to me the life of man ap- 
 peared to resemble a long 
 procession, and fortune 
 appeared to conduct and 
 arrange each part. 
 
 crv ^g— g<x6» P ^'^ hi <piXix.aT^6f 
 ii «AAd5 ^pccofAxi> Xen. 
 Mem. 
 
 Xen. Mem. 
 
 uv el TToiyiryi^ yva^in htfiuv- 
 6ciy6j, iv ccvriP mv oiVTog X^ett' 
 f/M.1. i^schines. 
 
 
 Tv^'^. Lucian. 
 
 pi 
 
 * The verb ayaf^iii, admiror, takes either the accusative or dative 
 after it : as, xa) o Kv^o; ayitffhts aJrovj and Cyrus admiring him. oh 
 ^AC^a^arn; ayuffhis toi{ Xoyoi;. Xen. Cyr. b. 6. Abradates admiring 
 her speech. When it is followed by the genitive, a preposition or noun 
 is understood. 
 
150 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Be complaisant to all, but 
 be intimate with the best, 
 for thus you will not be 
 hated by the former, and 
 you will become the friend 
 of the latter. 
 
 hag f^iv i^oj tt^o^ Kira.^^ X^tto" 
 «!s (piXog yivofceti. Isocr, 
 
 4lh. Verbs of admonishing^ * blaming, re- 
 proving, and being angry. 
 
 I admonish the sailors. 
 
 Hector, you always some- 
 how reprove me offering 
 in meetings good advice. 
 
 The soldiers having heard 
 it, were angry and highly 
 exasperated at Clearchus. 
 
 J But I blame Apollo, who, 
 inciting to a most unholy 
 deed, encouraged me in 
 words but not in effect 
 (deeds). 
 
 They are chiefly indignant 
 at those insulting orphans 
 and the deserted, think- 
 
 ^2 vocvrvig '^x^uiva. Thucyd. 
 
 *ExT^|, ecu f>e,iv Tcug lya l-rt- 
 
 TrXyiTcrcti aytget Iff-dXcg P^ (p^ec^ 
 
 ^6^izu Hom. 
 
 MTfxiVit} xeit o^yt^ofAect l<rj^v- 
 
 ^ug KA8<»g;(jo5. Xen.Anab. 
 
 Ao|i«5 ^2 ^iiA^tfJt.ott)\ ocrrig lyu 
 iTrciiga ^ * ggyov Iq uvoTiog, 
 
 l^yav tv, Eurip. Orest. 
 
 v6fii(rxa Tg |Mfl{Aa etvreg zU o§- 
 ^uvbg (tsxvov) icxt l^nfcog 
 
 * The verbs •xa^a.xa.Xico and •pr^or^iTru, adhortor, vovSiriu and 7ra^o\Cvu, 
 govern the accusative. — Instead of the verb <xa.^amu, Thucydides com- 
 monly uses the substantive •Tta^ctman with the verb •xonu or \x"- ^oi- 
 lo^iu, convicior, in the active voice, governs the accusative, in the middle 
 the dative : thus, 'pravtrtti Xot^ogovfAivos aurlj. Demosth. cr. (m(f. 
 
 f fAtfA^ofiut, and other verbs signifying to blame, commonly govern 
 the accusative : as, /av^i -r^cg arm S>j^a&inra.t /^i/^i^y.fi'i tu^v*. iEschyl. 
 Prom. 1108. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 151 
 
 ing them to be the ^lyx^ viymfioti kui U^og. Pla- 
 
 greatest and most sacred to de leg. 
 
 pledge. 
 
 Fellow soldiers, don't be surprised that I feel hurt at 
 the ^present posture o/'afFairs. Xenoph. 
 
 Note. Verbs signifying to reproach, to rebuke, take the dative of the 
 person, with the accusative of the thing: thus, (laXiara av iu'^oxifio/yis, 
 il (palveio ravru, f^yj <;r^oirruVy a ^07$ aWoi? av rgxTrovffiv Ixinfjbii'ni. Isocr. 
 
 3th. Verbs of contending^ opposing, or re- 
 sisting, (^avri^aim, av^iarn^i,) avenging^ {7i[hU' 
 gia^ assisting, (dihvm, ^ *) pardoning, trusting, 
 and distrusting. 
 
 No one opposed him. 6v§g<$ ecvraq f4,»^tf4,xt. Xen. 
 
 Anab. 
 And I pardoned you. koci lyu o-v irvyyivutrKu, \ 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 And they entreat you to be kcci kzMvco <pvXaTT&/ "' ikjj tf^ug 
 upon your guard lest the iTrinSn^i ^" J 2 a mi ^ ^^^g ^ 
 barbarians attack you in /S<«g€«goj. Xen. Anab. 
 the night. 
 
 * In the middle voice, signifying to repel, it governs the accusative; 
 as, afiuviadxi rov -^^orsoov ^okifiovv^' fifjt,iv, Demosth. 
 
 f The Attic writers more frequently use tlie expression ffvyyvojfi.tsv 
 l^iiv. See Eurip. Hippol. 117. ox avyyveafiuv zhai : as, 'laaov, alrovfiat 
 ffl rcav ii^ijfiivav ^vyyveaf/.ov' ilvai. Eurip. Med. 865. aAX' ffvyyvuiAm i^z 
 ifAov •pru^avonffavTos a^oXiaj^la. Aristoph. Nub. 1480. 
 
 \ Xenophon makes ijrirthfiai sometimes govern the genitive : as, 
 us haSaivovTiitv f/AWonv Ifriri^iff^ai, that they intended to attack them in 
 their nassaffc. 
 
152 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 But I perceive some rather «ax' (o^w) hm f^xXXnv Ikuvoc; 
 trusting him than any of ^icrrevu it n? uvroq. Dem. 
 them, TT. cvf*. 
 
 ^ By how much the more eo-o? ya,^ iroifioretr ecvrtg (Aa- 
 
 readily we seem to ad- yog) ^okzu ^^xof^xi, rto-ov 
 
 vance arguments^ by so toj f>caXXcy U7ci<ma 7r«6j «t3- 
 
 much the more will all dis- to?. Dem. Olynth. 
 trust them. 
 
 For there is somehow this \nifx.i yet^ -xag cvtog -a rv^xvng 
 disease in sovereign pow- voo-vifioc, o (piXog^m 7r8<^ft;. p"*"' 
 er, not to trust friends. ^schyl. Prom. (2 Iamb. 
 
 Trim.) 
 
 I will assist, as far as I am able, the law. Eurip, 
 
 Them* if any traveller (o5/th?) going near (^rag^) Shall 
 inadvertently disturb (x<v£»), they having a bold (olxxtfAov) 
 heart, all ^^"g fly (mro^xi) forth (Tr^oa-eu) and defendt (<«^yyft> ) 
 their young [rixog). Horn. (3 Hexam.) 
 
 Observ. ufi(p(a'Qviri6j, discepto ; ^£T£;^i<y, participo ; koi- 
 vrnzuf communico ,* cvyyivaffKUy ignosco ;^ ^dovzu, invideo ; 
 fciyeti^Uy invideo ; for the most part take the dative of the 
 person (perhaps governed by a preposition) with the geni- 
 tive of the thing ( perhaps sometimes also governed by a 
 preposition or the ellipsis of a noun) : «AAa tccci {-Tn^t) rev 
 <rirov rov vi^iti^cv eifi(pia-^viTyia-c6g (a-vv) iif^iv, Demosth. But 
 also having disputed voith us about our food. 
 
 GENERAL EXAMPLE. 
 
 When will they thus obey crors ^e ohru ttuSu i i^x^y d 
 the magistrates, who even xui uyetXXcfcect It* to tcuTx- 
 
 * viz. ff^fixxs. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 153 
 
 glory in despising them j 
 or when will they be thus 
 unanimous, who, instead 
 of labouring together for 
 their mutual advantage, 
 calumniate each other and 
 envy each other more than 
 other men, and most of 
 all differ in their private 
 and public meetings ? 
 
 ia<^ e^ovoiofj oi yg uvri f*iv 
 rov trwz^yei ixvrcv ^ to irvfA* 
 
 ^« Trcc^ h Tg *i I'^icg vvnotg 
 Mem. 
 
 Rule III. Passive Verbs sometimes govern 
 the Dative of the Agent.* 
 
 Has any thing new been de- 
 creed by those below con- 
 cerning those here ? 
 
 With respect then to the 
 whole of this accusation, 
 I hope I have spoken with 
 moderation. 
 
 Why then, pray, when blam- 
 ing others does he make 
 no mention of my actions 
 (the things done by me) ? 
 
 aozi&t ri vjo; o %e6TU ;rgg/ o ix- 
 
 6xh i Lucian. 
 5rgg; fiiv ovv *i oAoj xxrviyo^iei ^ 
 
 p^ss iEsch. adv. Ctes. 
 
 T< TTflTg tvv aAAoj ^ lyKotXiu, i 
 lya TT^XTO-u^^ P P^^ (ivj^i fcy»0' 
 
 ^»t } P P«s Dem. TT. G-Ti^, 
 
 § He happened to arrive at i:v^^x¥cf "^ % x»tx tovto xxt* 
 that period of time, when ge? s Ix^m h U '^ Irrrx ^g» 
 
 * The Latins have sometimes imitated this construction : thus, nox- 
 que una Hannibali — acta est. Liv. xxi. 34. 
 
154 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GRKEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 a double wall of seven or 
 eight stadia, extending to 
 the large harbour, had al- 
 ready been finished by the 
 Athenians, except a small 
 part towards the sea. 
 
 i 9KTU c^^oi^^(^v ii^n IffirtXit* 
 
 ^uXecFTx,^^ Thucyd. 
 
 For by the base, base actions are taught. SophocL 
 (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. Passive Verbs frequently take after them the 
 genitive of the agent governed by a praeposition expressed 
 or understood. 
 
 NoxE. The prsepositions commonly used are urof aa-o, irag*, T^of, 
 and \» or l|. 
 
 It is evident, that if he de- 
 part farther, we shall be 
 frozen with cold. 
 
 That the citizens might not 
 be infected (filled) with 
 vice by strangers. 
 
 Say that you shall not be 
 injured by us, my daugh- 
 ter. 
 
 For it IS intolerable to be 
 laughed at by enemies, 
 my friends. 
 
 Shall I be left by you also. 
 
 •^/v^tg. Xen. Mem. 
 cTCug f^n Dotaiov^yici o TroXtrvif 
 U7V0 C %lVttg lu.7ri7FXxf**i. °P 
 
 Xen. de Res. Lac. 
 Myejf ag 'tfu^ lyu tv^iv ct^i- 
 
 xg<y"i», Ttfcvov, Eurip. Iph. 
 
 in Aul. 
 tv yet^ yiXetu rXnrof g| l}cH^^* 
 
 <PiXett. Eurip. Bled. 
 
 Soph. 
 
 Farewell forme, mother, do not weep (dxK^vco^'^)y O 
 beloved country, and ye my brothers, entombed (yij m^h}f 
 and thou the father that begat me (a rvcm). In no long 
 time ye shall receive me. I shall come to the shades 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS^ 155 
 
 (vvc^og) victorious (vixrt(poPog) (kxi) having destroyed (xs^' 
 6a '^^) the house " of the Atridae, by whom I have been 
 ruined. 2api Eurip. (4> Troch. Tetram. Cat.) ': 
 
 Observ. Sometimes both the dative and genitive, go- 
 verned by a praeposition, are found in the same sentence. 
 This is done for the sake of variety : thus^ ttoXv, vn Atx, 
 flf (^cc'Ti^yot^ofAivoi) ^<w«s, eijre^ yg f^n tv^vi rivif uXXcc vtto yicofAv^ 
 r^vTx yiyivYiTotu Xen. Mem. 
 
 Note. The praeposition is frequently understood : as, ^ag (osfa or 
 vi-^os) ffoZ fAovYi Myjhict XiiTiffSai ^i\it ; Eurlp. Med. 51. >.et'ffo{/.a.i (Juiro or 
 sr^flf) ^tXus fiovoaroXos ft fcar^og. Id Alcest. 417. 
 
 Rule IV. g/////, swn, when used for l^o;, ■* 
 haheo, governs the Dative. 
 
 * Note 1. l^ca is sometimes used by the Ionic writers, and imitated 
 by the Attic poets, with the participle of some other verb : thus, ysj^^as 
 !;(;«?, for iyn/^cts. Soph. (Ed. Tyr. Have you married ? ffmaa-i £;^«;, for 
 larn^ta.i^ Id. eicc fioi ^iSouktuKca; l^^t ^^r (iiSouXivxs. Id, What advice 
 he gave me. g/;^s xa<ra(rr^i-<^a,fii*6i K^oiffo;. Herodot, Croesus had sub* 
 dued. The idiom of the English is precisely similar. 
 
 I have admired. ^xvftct^a ^ * Ix,^)* Soph. (Ed. 
 
 Col. 
 Now you have excluded me wv h u^i^pon^og ^ p^ lya utto- 
 
 from both. KMil^a ^ ^ i^o), Herodot. 
 
 I have received you into my oiKog p^ v7rohx,o^»i l^u. Id, 
 house. 
 
 L2 
 
156 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREKK LANGUAGE. 
 
 We have no other good but 
 our arms and our va- 
 lour. 
 
 So that we are no longer 
 able to surround them by 
 fortifications. 
 
 Those who are of such an 
 opinion arid those who 
 are not, have not the 
 same common sentiment. 
 
 You have the other requi- 
 sites of a Demagogue, a 
 wretched voice, you are a 
 knave, you are one of the 
 mob. 
 
 «|Jtg<5 cvdiig uKXog I7ri uyx6cg 
 it ftvi cttXx Kett u^irn* Xen. 
 Anab. 
 
 aa-n (An tivoti (ey*/) vi^trii^i^(o 
 ^ ^ xvro^,. Thucyd. 
 
 Ct O 6VTU OiOO'/fACil XXt Of j(«>}, 
 
 Plato Crit. 
 
 ficii P " KoiKogy ciyopctTog tif^t' 
 
 Aristoph. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 My friends have a pleasant and easy [uTr^dy^uv) enjoy- 
 ment of meat P^ and drink ^ for they abstain until (g'^yj «y) 
 they desire ^ ^ them. Xen. 
 
 And do you keep them as remote (I^h^om) as possible. 
 Eurip. 
 
 NoxK 2. The participle of l^eif is, on the other hand, sometimes 
 construed by the Attic poets with another verb : thus, roura fitv kv^ng 
 \;C"* »«gTfl5. Aristoph. Av. 341. t/ ^nru, ^ixr^iSus t;^c»y. Id. il kw- 
 Tu^ets ix"^' Nub. 509. 
 
 Note 3. l^u is frequently used in the sense of si/t*/, . having the 
 reciprocal pronoun \uvtov understood : as, t'l^i rovro ovrus Iz^* supple 
 iavro, Plato Phcedo. If this holds itself so, i. e. if it is so. eturei 
 Xiyovai vruvra, r i}c^' *^^^' '" *"? ^^V'> *'' V '^"^'^''"'^ ^!C' I^' They mention 
 every thing as it is. vfus av evv tot Ixoh ^ Sa«^«r«j ; x/v5«v£y« ya^ ouy^ 
 evrus i^etv dxr^t^ ur,6*)v. Plato Alcib. 2. How is it then, Socrates ? for 
 it seems not to be as I thought. And often with the adverbs lu, xaXus^ 
 KXKuf : as, kuXus t;^«vj bene se habere. Thucyd. ru h Ku^y u<rix^ivaTo 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 157 
 
 M-i uvTu /ziXo/, o^us xa,Xus i;^ei. Xen. Anab. He answered Cyrus it 
 would be his care that it should succeed well. «< rov6^ burus \rvy)^av& 
 i^ov (loLvro) Demosth. — It is sometimes construed with, and sometimes 
 without the dative, in the same manner as tlfjti : thus, kou rois S»» ^>» 
 ^Xoviriotsy ^ot\i^9; ^i to ytj^ci; ^i^oviriv, iv i^n o ecuros Xsyog. Plato de 
 Rep. r^iipu is also frequently used by Sophocles in the sense of u/tt r 
 thus, xK^T iv i\<riffi v^Kpu (piX'A [jt,iv 'h^etv, &c. Antig. 897. I am in the 
 greatest hopes, I cherish the fond hope, &c. By Homer also, II. «. 
 266. KoaTiffTOi ^n xeivoi i-rip^hviuv r^ei^iv avh^uv. 
 
 Note 4. l^u is also frequently used for Swva^a;, jjossum, or has the 
 substantive tjjv ^wva^/v understood : as, uXXa ^ecvrts l^ovo'' ^n^xi. Xen, 
 Mem. But all can show. The adjective pronoun eiog (jqualis) with 
 the particle n, * has the same power ; as oh^ ^tes n Itrrt <fii\<t<ro(petv. 
 He is not able to philosophise. The sentence is elliptical, and has 
 been supplied by Zeunius in his notes upon Vigerus in the following 
 manner ; ohpj^ iffrt roioures oloi o fisXXuv (piXotfo^eiv, He is not such a 
 one as is going to philosophise. This, however, is not the proper way 
 to supply the ellipsis, as may be seen from the following passage in 
 the Hippias Major pf Plato : xctXot, (pafnv^ ei o<pdeiXfioi tliriv, el^, o'l a* 
 ^oxaffiy roiovroi thai oUt (jt,vi 'hvvaroi o^av. I would therefore supply it 
 thus : olx Itrriv roiovres o'los iffri ^vvaroi (piXeffeipetv. ov^ otov ti Itrriv. He- 
 rodot. fieri non potest. 
 
 If they could. ez o/oj ts g<><. Plato Crit. 
 
 Did you imagine^ that it was c-y V oUfixt, e(o$ t sheet vcvni* 
 
 * It must be observed that the particle re does not always mark 
 this distinction, as it is sometimes the conjunction preceding xui ; 
 thus, oiot T£ ovTis ^ittytyvovrat a^^ovrsg ««< olot ovrtg avrayavto'Tai fi/xiv 
 iirovTai. Xen. Cyr. Who they are that are become commanders, and 
 who they are that will be our opponents. The particle re is some- 
 times oramitted before the infinitive ; as, o\oui rtftvetv z'imi. Xen. Mem. 
 And when part of the sentence intervenes between oUs and the verb: 
 as, «/«» (scil. yXcarretv) ocXXort akXa^yi ypuuovffav rou tfrofixrost a,^6^ouv 
 Tt r?jy (pmnv. Xen. Mem. In poetry the substantive verb is sometimes 
 oinitted : a-v, t«A/; yci^ — (iu^aiv eV olix o'iotn (pomou fi^ou. Soph. (Edip. 
 Tyr, 22. 
 
158 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 possible for a wicked man go? m %q;wt(^q (p<Ao5 xT«d- 
 
 to procure good friends ? ^oa ; ^^ Xen. Mem. 
 
 Are you not able to remem- tvy, olog t' zitct fAvxof^ut ^ on ro 
 
 her that I was investiga- toccXov uvro? l^araa j Plato 
 
 ting the beautiful itself? Hipp. Maj. 
 
 JsFo one is any longer able Xuy.vxi; V ov^nq cUq n ^sg<a 
 
 to carry a lamp through (Anapaest. Dim.) vtc' «- 
 
 want of exercise. yv^mo-tx hi vwi, ( Parcem. 
 
 Aristoph. Ran.) 
 
 Examples. These things are able. We are able. This woman is 
 able. These women are able. I say that we are able ; that she is 
 SLblp; that you are able ; that most men are able, &c. 
 
 Away, away, I am no longer able to look to you, (v^off' 
 ^^^zttm) but am overcome by evils. Eurip. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note 5. With several adverbs Ip^u governs the dative of the person: 
 Fjt(^i Twy 'TTavv vvv ^oxevvruv alzsieus l;^eiv aiira, Demosth. Phil. 1. Even 
 ' of those who now seem to be very closely connected with him. «J« a.^t>t- 
 giarui (jt.oi l|«v ovn T^og vfiuv. Xen, Anab, (piXovetKus ^X^^t ^f>iulari, 
 ip^ovtfiui ix^.v, jirudens esse. tZv h ariKfAu^reas Ixovnav. Xen. Of such 
 as are without proof. ^k\cos l;^«y. To be otherwise, tetvag t^^^* 
 graviter metuere, aot^urata s^&v, to be most ingenious, t^«» amaiita- 
 vixus, dissentire. Demosth, <ruv If^-ni^as avred \xovruv. Xen. Anab. 
 of those acquainted with him. avctyKaius %x^' Eurip. Her. F. To 
 these I shall add the following phrases, w^hich I recommend to the 
 attention of learners. <xga.yfLa. I^oj, I am busy, ^nrit ts »a) •r^ayfjt.aTK 
 l^« ^it^suvcifAivos. Plato Theat. He is both seeking and is at great 
 pains in the search, iitrvxim ix^v, the same as '/iffvx<^K"v^ and so of si- 
 jjoilar expressions. I;^ay ;^oA.oy and ffwyyvufiyiv rut, to be angry at any 
 one^ to jmrdon, tat^r a'JtKrricf.v^ ravr o^yttv £;^«. Demosth. this raises 
 dis^rusty this anger. s;t;«* <poivas» to have understanding. Sophocl* 
 CEdip. Tyn 154. sx^iv XH'^ '"'>"• Eurip. Aleest. 560. «rX««i» 'ix^ivt 
 pvodesse, h<tffov or iXectrffev 6;^s/y, to be inferior, xxi^ev Ix^h opportunely , 
 «;^«v xaxov, to be ill. ix^v koyov, to be reasonable, also, to apprehend- 
 <pu<riv Ix^v, to be natural, eyof/ta ixi^h to have the pretence, ixftf^tt "raDy 
 ihxfifAurav rod ^iXir^ou. Demosth. to stick close by, to keep a strict eye 
 ypon Philip's misdeeds, irietvh* Ixof. Aristoph. I hasten. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 159 
 
 NoTK 6. tp^u with us, cfTfas, «us, oiirag, xxXiis, fAtr^iatg, requires the 
 genitive : thus, A6riva7oi "hi us ^ohuv iTx^^* rdpf^itrra Kovthuv is vo eia-rv : 
 quantum pedibus valebant : as fast as they could run. /xtr^ius tpc^f 
 ^lov. Herodot. I. SO. us o^y'yis 'iz"- Sophocl. CSdip. Tyr. 345. curu 
 v^o<!rev 'i^^y, eo ingenio esse. Xen. Cyr. VII. 5. xkXcus 'ix^tv fti&si' 
 Plato Gorg. to be pretty drunk. Perhaps these are elliptical expres- 
 sions and may be resolved thus, us tixov {\aurev( iri^) or ifttuc) vroiZf, 
 &c. See Matthiae Gr. Gram, p. 451. 
 
 Rule. V. Impersonal Verbs govern the 
 Dative. 
 
 It is incumbent upon every 
 one. 
 
 We could not seem do what 
 becomes us. 
 
 But let it be sufficient for 
 you, seeing their works, 
 to reverence and honour 
 the gods. 
 
 Does it then appear to you 
 to be possible for a man 
 to know every thing that 
 exists ? 
 
 Many, who had it in their 
 power to enjoy friends, 
 and confer and receive 
 favours^ having wished 
 to employ them as slaves 
 
 Ikocttos P^ 
 Ench. 
 
 TT^OTIlKit* 
 
 Epict. 
 
 wotiu. Xen. Cyr. 
 wAA* llei^Kit^^ (TV TO l^yoit etvm 
 Tog o^oicij (Ti^o^xi Kelt Ttfioiet 
 
 ci B-sot. Xen. Mem. 
 
 vetrcs iheti ro «» P^ ^Xf hnv' 
 rosfictt ; Idw 
 
 voXv4^^ filv o'i^iTtt (piXci ^^d* 
 cfAetif K»} IV TFcitWi xxi to 
 veicr^iiff nvro? oovhoq ftetX^of 
 ficvXofJcen ^ * P* ^ (p<Aoj ;ef««- 
 
 /U,C6if ifTTO tCVTOi CVTOf h'xH 3/- 
 
 Altic optative. Se# Grammar. 
 
160 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 have suffered by these 
 same: and to many it 
 was not enough, them- 
 selves having a compe- 
 tency, to live comfort- 
 ably: but being desirous 
 to become masters of all, 
 through this also lost 
 what they had. 
 
 itii ^ ^ CIVT05 ro |ttggo5 i^a 
 
 TTCiVTig X.VP10S ilVXlf Old TOV 
 
 TO P^ Kxi cl \^u *™ KTTorOyr 
 
 ^dvoi. ^ * Xen. 
 
 Note 1. Instead of the impersonal ioxiT with the dative plural of 
 iyu (yifiTv) we often find the 1st person plural of the same verb with ftet 
 ixsQji. by the speaker: thus, xai ya^ ou^t ^oppu ^oxovfjtiv fioi avrou Kaii^if- 
 $ui, Xen. Anab: Sometimes the 1st person sing, when the speaker 
 states his own opinion only as, rayros [Aot toKu avrZ aKXag >.ey«». Plato 
 Phsed. 
 
 Note 2. rr^i^retv has sometimes the genitive : thus, T^iTrov yt r h «» 
 Zai/tovos rod fitov ro^u Soph. Aj. 554. 
 
 Observ. 1. The following impersonal verbs frequent- 
 ly govern the dative with the genitive viz. hi,* oportet g 
 fcintTTi, est mihi cum aliquo ; f^iXst, curce est ; ^irecfctMi, 
 pcenitet ; hx(pt^i(f differt ; 5rgo(r>}xg<, convenit. 
 
 I see that you also will need 
 
 these requisites. 
 Whose troubles I share. 
 
 What pray have I to do 
 with the Corinthians ? 
 
 He said that he would care 
 nothing about your con- 
 fusion. 
 
 JgfiCfi/ ^g xcct (TV tvrci |g*. P^^^ 
 Xen. Mem. 
 
 05 fiiTio-rt \ya TTdvog, Eurip. 
 
 Phceniss. 
 T<V ^s 7r^oa-»xit ^iJt' lya Ko^tV" 
 
 6101. Aristoph. 
 
 9 Vf^iTi^Og ^-OgvSo?. LyS. 
 
 § Of the duty however, *i funei, hetxmecy ji e<p' l««(r- 
 grounded upon each of ret, 7c^»crg-u " "^''* 
 
 p pass 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 161 
 
 the transactions 1 affirm IfAetvrov fUTi^n (paj^<. Dem. 
 
 that I likewise have my vr. <m<p. 
 
 share. 
 
 But by your country's gods, ciXXa Tr^og B-iot ^ ^rxr^aog, Trettg^ 
 
 my sons, honour each o- T<^«<y a}^Xah.(i>v, it ft xxi 
 
 ther, if you have any wish toS ly^f }^xp^of*xi ftiXu 
 
 to gratify me. vfisig. ^ Xen. Cyr. 
 
 You seem to me to say that ^okm h/at — Xtya, ag avjjg, ^ 
 
 a man less than (a slave fnx^og o ^ix rou <rafAtc ij^a- 
 
 to) the pleasures of the v)}, 5r«^7r«fy oiihig u^sm ^rgo- 
 
 body is altogether unfit o-nKu, Xen. Mem. 
 for any kind of virtue. 
 
 A keen wit {hmg ^ovXzv^x^^) it appears you require 
 against him. If you are to get the better {vtfi^^xXXu^) of 
 the man, and not become a laughing-stock (ysA^;? o(pXiA>^), 
 Aristoph. (2 Iamb. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 Note 1. ^« sometimes takes the accusative of the person with the 
 genitive of the thing : as, ;^a/^(wy <V, ov ya^ ccat (ti S« B^if^nfffiKTut, 
 Eurip. Phceniss. Farewell, begone, for I don't want your oracles. 
 See Hippolytus, 23. 490. It occasionally governs two accusatives, the 
 interrogative and another pronoun ; rt tri hT^ n ^o^ets ; Aristoph. Ly- 
 sist. avTov yx^ ffi lu -^fgofin^iui. iEschyl. Prom. 86. The impersonal 
 J^r, though it most frequently takes the accusative before the infinitive, 
 sometimes has the dative ; tlius, vyv aoi rot, XufJt.'ffga rxura ^u ^alvetv eV>7. 
 Sophocl. CEd. Col. 721. 
 
 Note 2. The impersonal ;^^>j, opoi'tef, in Homer, frequently go- 
 verns the accusative with the genitive : as, ov'Si ri a% xi'^ rxvrtjs a<p^O' 
 ffvvnS' Horn. You have no need of this folly (why this folly !) Both 
 Xi^i and let most commonly have the accusative before the infinitive, 
 though xi''^ sometimes takes the dative : as, lyu V a^^uv ji x^^* /"*" 
 Tgivai Tuvli Tuv fiouXiVfiarav. Eurip. Med. 881. tt>^Xso ya^ ri 'fJt.oi xi'^ 
 yt rtjffV aaxeiv ;i;^avtff. Soph. Antig. 136. a; (xi'^) V*? Mifftrttvvf 
 a^ivras, -rairiffaff^ai Tr,v ii^vym. Isocr, That we ought to make peace 
 by giving up Messene, ffofooTi^cvs yccQ J« (ieoTuv ilmi ^iovs. Eurip* 
 Hipp. 
 
162 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule VI. Verbs of comparing^ giving^ pro- 
 mising, declaring, and taking a*way, govern the 
 Dative v^^ith the Accusative. 
 
 He did not compare me to 
 a god. 
 
 But Jupiter does not ac- 
 complish for men all their 
 intentions. 
 
 To you he announced peace, 
 to them assistance. 
 
 I promise you ten talents. 
 
 To avert the baneful plague 
 from others. 
 
 J If you would consider with 
 
 yourself as I do. 
 I will do this ; but do you 
 
 give my seat to Sophocles 
 
 to keep. 
 
 The Lacedaemonians both 
 in private and public in- 
 dividually put up nearly 
 the same prayer, request- 
 ing the gods to give them 
 the honourable with the 
 good : and no one could 
 hear them praying for 
 more. 
 
 Xen. Ap. Soc. 
 ^AA ov Zivg uvvi^ voviuct leeti 
 TiMvTxa), Horn. 
 
 iTTetyyiXXo^ai. ^ ^ Demosth. 
 
 vTriF^vso^ixt c-v ^iKe6 rxXetvrov, 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 uitxvig >\.6tyo5 at/ktweo ' * 
 
 Horn. 
 
 et ecXX»t, 
 
 ti di^ci>(4.t ^^ y o)g lyuy <retvreu 
 
 "htytq. * Soph. (Edip. Tyr. 
 
 eyT»5 P' 'jrtiia* a-v ^g o ^cckcs o 
 
 TYi^ia. Aristoph. Ran. (2 
 Anapaest. Dim. Acat.) 
 
 KUt Idiot. KXl 
 
 a-tcA iKeccrrcri 
 
 TTCi^XTrXnO'tOS IV^n iV^OfAXf 
 {AXKi^XffCOVlOl) T* XXXdV P, 
 
 iTTt ro xyxSos ^ P' o'l ^ot ^i- 
 ^6iff^t KiMva XV a-^iii xvro^* 
 TfoXvs y ouhts XV hcttvos iV' 
 X«f^<*t xx-ovct). op 1 a Plato 
 
 Alcib. 2. 
 
 * The difference between S/Bo»a/ Xoy«» and h^ovat Xoyav Iuvtm, &c. 
 is this : The first signifies rationes reddere^ to give an account of a 
 trust. The latter, rem seciim expcndercy to weigh the matter with one's 
 self. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 16$ 
 
 The morning saffron-robed from Ocean's streams arose, 
 (c^vv^i) that to immortals she might bring light and to 
 mortals. Homer II. 
 
 Pray, said he, son, among the accomplishments of a 
 general (Iv (rr^ocTViytKcg l^yov), did the man, to whom you 
 are carrying the fee, make any mention (iTrt^vuo^eci 
 la pass J of the managements of supplies (oixovof^tsc) ? As- 
 suredly soldiers require provisions (iTrnvihix) no less 
 than the domestics in a family. Xen* Cyr, 
 
 Observ. Verbs signifying tx) impart, to participate 'with, 
 govern the dative and genitive : thus, ^dXTrtv? ^Iv Kctt 4^v- 
 ^6v? Koci crnav xxt vrcrav xcti vwov uvdyxvi jcai roi^ ^ovXoi^ fx,iref 
 ^ihovdij TTtXi^iyJn'; ^' l7r«rT«|t6jj5 not) (tisAsrijj 'TeetvrdxuTiv cv f^itX' 
 coiiav Toyro;?. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Note. In the following sentence, £<p;j li hiv, a f^h fici^ovrees vronTv 
 f^aixecv ol ^le), f/,av$a.vitv^ Xen. Mem. the participle fiadcvras agrees with 
 rovs av&^MTovs understood, governed by the infinitive h7v, instead of be- 
 ing governed in the dative by the verb 'i'^uxxv. The sentence should be 
 pointed with a comma after fia^ivra?, and is an instance of attraction 
 in construction scarcely to be met with in any other language. 
 
164 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 III. Of Verbs governing the Accusative 
 Case, 
 
 Rule I. A Verb denoting action or mo- 
 tion, governs the Accusative* : as, yvco^i (tsocv- 
 70V. Know thyself. 
 
 Fear God and honour your o ^g» 0«o5 (poQiofAxi, o h yanvg 
 
 parents. 
 For either time consumes, 
 
 or disease impairs beauty. 
 
 Do not choose the impious 
 as your friends having re- 
 jected the pious. 
 
 Tifixa, Isocr. 
 
 Id. 
 
 rip. Orest. 
 
 J And when I looked to- 
 wards Getica I could see 
 the Getae waging war j and 
 when I passed over to 
 the Scythians, I could 
 behold them wandering 
 about in their waggons : 
 
 KOCl on f^iV k JJ TiTllcn U7F6' 
 
 o^ctM '"^ '" o< Yiiot-i* on h 
 f^irodZmvcj * ^ °^ Ititi ol S^y- 
 &Xly TrXctvotM iTFt ct,l k(AU%en 8 
 
 VM ^ ^ 01 o(p6ecXfcoi Itti ^ccn- 
 
 * In the following example from Xenophon instead of the accusa- 
 tive governed by the active verb, the genitive is governed by the 
 verb oiuvTui. vofAi^ovffiv — ^otncrnv, orav (iovXeoyrai, xet) avifitovs, »«< vharuj 
 »ut u^aS) »eii orov V av «,k\ou ^savrxi rm roiovrav. Mem. instead of rt 
 aXXo Tuv TOiovruv m civ ^iuvrui. 
 
 f The comparative is frequently used by the poets instead of the 
 positive. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 105 
 
 directing my eyes a little 
 to the other quarter I 
 saw the Egyptians tilling 
 the ground ; and the 
 Phoenician was trading, 
 and the Cilician robbing ; 
 the Spartan was a flogg- 
 ing, and the Athenian 
 engaged in his law-suit. 
 
 Ttvtifi x,eti Accicuy f^aa-rtyoo-' 
 
 fcxi, Lucian. 
 
 But from enemies in truth many things wise men leam ; 
 For caution (^ivxdQux) saves all. From a friend indeed 
 you would not learn this, but an enemy himself forces you 
 (llxvxyfcei^a ^ *). Aristoph. (3 Troch. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 Time alone points out a just man, but a bad (man) 
 even (x«v) in one day you might know. Soph. CEdip. 
 Tyr. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. 1. Sometimes the infinitive mood with the 
 article stands in place of a noun in the accusative : thus, 
 Kcc^.ovvi yg xKoXxo-ixv TO VTTO Tuv ti^ov6fv x^j(fi<r6xu Plato Phced* 
 They call the being governed by pleasures intemperance. 
 
 And thinking slavery a 
 grievous evil before they 
 were in love. 
 
 He also loses the remem- 
 brance of his gratitude to 
 fortune. 
 
 And most of us till then 
 were tolerably able to re- 
 frain from weeping. 
 
 For to deliberate well I find 
 to be the greatest gain. 
 
 KXl fAXXx X.XKOg VOfAl^CJ ^'^j TT^IV 
 
 yg i^xa *"^, 10 ^ovXivej, 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 e-v»xvx?ita-Keif ^ ^ x»i to fcvxo' 
 
 fixi p « rv^n « ^»^t?» De- 
 most. Olynth. 1. 
 
 Kx) lyu TTcXvs '^^ rstifg fx,gv 
 
 IxtitKCOq clog Tg ilf^l XXTi^Hf 
 
 TO /xi) ^xx^v&f, Plato Phaedr. 
 T6 yx^ zu fiovMva xi^o<; "^^ f/(,i- 
 
 yx<; iv^ltrxM ilf^i. Herodot. 
 
166 SYNTAX Ol" THE GREEK LANG'UAGE, 
 
 J And indeed if I had bar- xai finv ti ro x-uXvat ^\* it d 
 
 gained with Philip to pre- 'Eaajjvs? koivmvix Trt-x^etaicu 
 
 vent the convention of ly&> ^iXitttto?, Dem. fr. 
 
 the Greeks, ad v. if I fe<p. 
 had sold to Philip the 
 preventing, &c. 
 
 And now also, said he, it xoci vw yz, (piif^ttf oyTojP* lyu 
 
 appears the same to me ^okw oavrtg, orxv ^rgoj uvto 
 
 when I reflect with my- Td ei^^» '^^ o-koxw Xoyt^o- 
 
 self considering the sub- i^xi, Xen. Cyr. 
 ject of command. 
 
 He left ^ " this only to them, to fight with a sword and 
 shield and corslet. Xen, Cyr. 
 
 Note 1. Demosthenes very frequently uses the infinitive with the 
 article instead of the noun. 
 
 Note 2. The Greek writers frequently make the clause of a sen- 
 tence the object of the verb, or, as comprehending the clause or clauses, 
 the pronoun TotZra ; thus, ou ya^ a •ffotHrroiifiv el lixatoi, aXX' a fjch •Trpdr" 
 vooffij ravTu TLtyns. Xen. Mem. 
 
 Observ. 2. The verb liXivrota, finio, sometimes go- 
 verns the genitive, implying, " to arrive at the end of:** 
 thus, Wu^xv 1CV uv&^uTcivov /Biov TiMvTna-a. Xeji. Cyr, When 
 I shall arrive at the end of this mortal life. Perhaps, 
 however, the cognate substantive th nXtvTviv may be 
 understood. 
 
 Observ. 3. Several neuter verbs take after them an 
 accusative of their corresponding nouns: thus, TrcXsfioy 
 TTcXif^cil^iiv. Horn, To wage war. fiec^nv IfAxx^vre. Id, 
 They fought the fight, irz^ctv vo<n7v veo-ov. Plato Alcib. 2. 
 To be affected with another disease, t/ ^^oryiXurs rof 
 '7ruvv<rrxro9 yihm i Eurip. Med. 1037. When a verb is 
 followed by its cognate noun, that noun is always in the 
 accusative, though the verb usually governs another case : 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERRS. 167 
 
 as. It T« Tifx ti^^ti* ei^x^VTt. Demosih, Tne} eT2<p. Taorai' f)t>i9 
 
 hn^iK Mschia, c. Ctesiph. 
 
 Not only the cognate noun is put in the accusative, but 
 also one of a similar meaning with the verb : thus Sophocl. 
 Trachin. v. 50. Karil^ov ^^jj Trav^dK^vr o^v^f-cxTx Thv 'Hgas- 
 xXtiov g|o^oy yo&ffcgv^v. Elect. 591. t] t^ /3/«i' ^oy^H^}^' 3-lso the 
 relative when its antecedent is a cognate noun : — (t^s k^u.^- 
 rlx<; vTrz^^H? lU £/»'> ^h n tfxi^' lf<>h k^^xgrocviK;. Eiirip. Andr. 
 517. 
 
 Observ. 4. Verbs signifying to sit, to stand, with the 
 Poets, sometimes take the accusative, thus, ^suf/Jvtav Ti %ou 
 yA^'^iy ^i«,la<; viXf^x (Ti^vh yiftivaiv. iEschyl. Agam. 190. c|5 
 S' a;^Aoy, cml^ovTcc Kxt ^dc-Tovr ciK^av, Eurip. Orest. 861. 
 t/»«5 Trad* e^^xg rac-T If^coi .^oa^gre ; Soph. CEd. Tyr. 2. 
 
 Observ. 5. The poets sometimes use neuter verbs 
 in a transitive sense: thus, xtxv ov^avixv cpxzym. Soph. 
 Aj. Blazing the heavenly calamity. And active verbs 
 in a neuter or passive sense : as, cv^' uv rov xvtov ttxi^cc n? 
 doiii KTxmv. Eurip, Phoeniss, No one would give his son 
 to be put to death, ^xMttxi yx^ xi vuin^xi (pvo-iig xe\xt, 
 Thucyd, For your tempers are difficult to manage or to 
 he managed, xv^ ^xm <pv>,xa-a-nv. Eurip. Med, A man 
 easy to guard or to he guarded, x\itg ^xvuda-xt, Thucyd. 
 I. 138. iTTir^v^xq ^ TirxX^xq x^ivxg TFXihiva-xi, 9j ^vyxr'i^xg 
 vx^6ivov? ^ix^vXu^xt, ^ ^^i^XTX ^ixtracrxt, Xen. Mem. I. 5. 2. 
 rximiv r»iv yugxv mrgs^'^ ^ix^Trxcrxi ro7g "EXXviTiv, Xen. Anab. 
 See Eurip. Orest. 1151. ^ag f^zv H^v fix^x xxt x^rog Truvmrt 
 (pxyitVf vug ^g ^v v^co^ ^i-<\/cvri tfiuv. Xen. Cyr. Damm 
 says, " notum est omnia fere verba Grceca activa, scepe et 
 intransative notare."* 
 
 * Toii ,tt£v oiKohv (pikoli l^^^ei Kah(rr*i^'. Eurip. Med. I am become 
 an enemy to my friends at home. Ko^tfrn/^t is frequently used in an 
 intransitive sense. 
 
168 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Observ. 5. The Attic writers frequently adopt the 
 accusative instead of the dative, or the genitive governed 
 by a praeposition : thus, oU ^s Tromg, for If^ci. How you 
 use me ! Ketfcx TcXne-rcc it^yoio-ficit rov vfcin^ov oikov, for t« 
 v^irz^a oha>. Thucyd. I have done the greatest harm to 
 your family. J? vi[Aci<; tfoXXoi, xcckoc ^i^^xKev. Aristoph, Thesm. 
 Who has done us much mischief, cuctvir^ u yvvaiKsgy ot 
 il^miv V TTccpov^yog ^(zxg k7CU.(ro(.g etv&tg uv. Id. You hear, 
 
 ladies, what this wretch again says of us all. 
 
 Note, The following phrases I would recommend to the atten- 
 tion of learners, iv 'Ptaax,^, beneficiis afficior ; su •?totu^ iZ l^au, benefi- 
 ciis afficio : l^oiTrm o -xa^m lu rod ^oti](rcivTos, Aristot. Eth. the obliged 
 is inferior to the obh'ger. xaxeos vra.trx^u vvo rtvos, malis afficior ab ali- 
 quo. xazag ^oico riva, injuria aliquem afficio. u vis ocyadov Jj xx»o» 
 ^otmuiv avrh. Xen. Anab. If any one should treat him well or ill. 
 luvk ti^evhvai. Aristoph. Kub. 606. to be abominably ill treated, vtutr- 
 %ovrt Se ««< a,ya.6a. ovx, oXiyee. Herod. They enjoy also no few advan- 
 tages. Ti x^vf^m ^ao'Xii'is, u 'xan^ ; Aristoph. 2<[ub. What ails you, fa- 
 ther ? — jr^arru. 1. cr^arruv vi -xa^ot, rtvos^ aliquid ab aliquo impetrare. 
 2. ^poimtv ru, voXiriKa. to engage in politics. 3. ras xoivct ^^ctmiVj 
 rempub. administrare. 4. $J ?r^aTTjiv, to be prosperous. 5. xazus 
 jT^aTTS/y, to be unfortunate. 6. ^st« nvos, or iicrs^ nvo; T^arTin, a 
 partibus alicujus stare, to act with, or in behalf of any one. 7. x«- 
 Ktov vel ;^£r^flv nr^amiv, to be more unfortunate, uftmov 'X^a.rrofjt.iv. 
 Aristoph. Plut. we are more fortunate. ;^;^»(rTo» r/ -ritarruv. Id. 541. 
 in good luck. 8. ^^arnffSai rim ^^nftaToc. Thucyd. 4. c. 65. to fine 
 any one. Ixu^vi ra^yv^iov ix^Birrofcriv. Aristoph. Ran. When I asked 
 money, /ncr^ov l\ ovriv' a» n^arrsj /Jti. Aristoph. Nub. 246. What- 
 ever reward you may bargain with me for. ovofiutrrd ^^affvuv. Eurip. 
 Med. Her. F. 509. 9. ffxoruva ^^amiv. Eurip. Suppl. 534, ob- 
 scure degere. 10. ra fiiyiara, ar^ecTTsiv^ sometimes signifies, ad sum- 
 mum forturuB pervenire, sometimes, res magnas gerere. 11 . ^uvra ayaSa 
 vr^arruv, to be exceedingly fortunate. 12. vrokXa vr^etrrtivy to be 
 officious. 15. vr^ctTTiiv ^iXa nvi, to gratify one.* S«i/»«< ^ix,n* rtvi, to 
 
 * U^arrtiy, originally signified to acty to perform : UeuTv, to make^ 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 169 
 
 tfuffer punishment, i. e. to give satisfaction. ^ix»}t» XaSs/v 'jra.oa rmt, to 
 inflict punishment upon any one, i. e. to obtain satisfaction. Xivtrtf^o; 
 hxn^ lapidatio. Eurip. Heracl. 60. x^V^ hhvaij to do a favour. x«^fv 
 Kvnmovaif to requite a favour. Xsye/y xaxus rivu, to speak ill of one, 
 kiyovr utixecxus rvgoivtevi, Eurip. Med. 458. rtvi Knxmi (p^svitv, to think 
 ill of one, ov» kv ^uvai/anv ffoi kkkus f^onTv rori, Eurip, Med. 465. 
 
 Rule II. Verbs of accusing, condemning^ 
 acquitting, freeing, estimating or ^valuing, take 
 after them the Accusative of the person with 
 the Genitive of the thing.t 
 
 The accuser blames Socra- oyro? ^^ic^oiTm o fcxTnyo^og 
 
 tes for this. ctlnecouxi, Xen. Mem. 
 
 But you, goddess, having «AAo6 <rv o yg l^x"^'^^ ^ ^> •^^^' 
 
 come freed him from his vTcoXvofixi ^ ^ ho-fco^. Horn, 
 bonds. 
 
 For such are the exalted oJt6>? lyu kxi <rv o kxXos p^ »^p 
 
 to do. As in their application to a variety of objects, they must nearly, 
 in several instances coincide, they are, therefore, frequently used syno- 
 nymously : thus: ra fi\v yk^ otiAyxaia, ffuviSoukiOt xai sr^am/y, tug hoUi- 
 ^£v u^iffr a» •r^xx^yivai' ^s^t 5s rav oi^^Xuv, o^ug ct^oSmoiro, fiavriurofitvovs 
 t^ifixtVi tl ^Qnnria. Xen. Mem. 
 
 f Several verbs compounded with the praeposition xara, signifying 
 to accuse or condemn, govern the accusative of the thing with tlie geni- 
 tive of the person. The genitive, however, is governed by the praepo- 
 sition : as, *a<?aw V ahxiuv fiiv ri hT xetrtjyo^nv, Eurip. Oresl. 28. ivrii^n 
 fftuvrov xaralixu^uf BamTOv, Herodot, uvti ri (jimKXov IfMu g-u ravrx 
 xctTtiy9^t7f, V lyu ffov ; Demosth. t. trnip, 
 
 M 
 
170 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 ideas I have entertained kxi l^xvrav "" «|<6iw.p Xen. 
 of you and myself. Cyr. 
 
 But if the property be esti- letv h Teohvq «5 tvs-ix a^rcr*- 
 
 ft.cAei> 
 
 ppass 
 
 UfAl %%tf*-»- 
 
 pi 
 
 Dem. w. 5-g^. 
 
 UG-TFi^ civ il riq vetvxXn^d^y ttccs^^ 
 
 70 crXoicVf a,<^ ct ^ vxbXufA- 
 Qxv6> (Tu^cjy 1 ^ P*** lira xnfA- 
 av ^^oidfAxi ^ * Koii TTonu ^ ^ 
 etvtos ^ TO e"xg«ft?, ^ t) XXI <rvV' 
 r^iQu * * P3SS oA6>j, ^ vcivxyicc 
 
 mated at more money. 
 
 Just as if one should accuse 
 a pilot, q/ter having done 
 every thing for safety, 
 and equipped his vessel 
 with every thing by which 
 he supposed she could be 
 preserved, then, when she 
 has encountered a storm, 
 her rigging shattered, or 
 even wholly destroyed, of 
 being the cause of the 
 shipwreck. 
 
 Whether having summoned him to court {ilTecyu - 3) am 
 I to convict (g'/Aov) him of insanity {TrotgetnU) or shall I tell 
 his madness to the undertakers ? (cego^ruyi^) Aristoph. (2 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. A prseposition, either in composition or understood, fre- 
 quently governs the genitive of the crime, ,punis^iment or subject of 
 complaint : as, l^e a^oXuffov vaurns fns WifAtXii»s. Xen. Cyr» Free 
 me from this care, ow, r/j ulrieca'aff^en cri^t tZv vrx^iXfiXudorav. Dem. 
 w. flip,. Not, who will bring an accusation respecting the past. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 1 ft 
 
 Rule III. Verbs of asking * and teaching, 
 giving and taking awai/y benefiting and injur- 
 ing, clothing and unclothing, concealing, hin- 
 dering and persuading, and some Verbs of ac- 
 cusing t, govern two accusatives t, the one of 
 the person, the other of the thing ; § as, tjv rig 
 Bi^j^roci fjbs rojpo[jijOi, Lucian. If any one should 
 ash me my name. 
 
 Whether did I ask any ^roT^jgov uhia t<? <ryj Xen, 
 
 thing of you. Anab. 
 
 They teach the young men h^eccrxu h o -zruig koci a-u^gam 
 
 also modesty. (ry»»j. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 He did much good to the tcoXv? uyxh^^'^ ^ tfoXi^ Tcma.^ '^ 
 
 city. Isocr. 
 
 As he did not persuade the 0/5 oyro^ oy ttu^oj d (^uKxhz?, 
 
 Phocians to this. Hesiod. 
 
 It is in the power of the l%z<rri o 'E^6go< ^aa-iMvg ^gaeo 
 
 Ephori to treat their king ^ ^ oyro?. Thucyd. 
 thus. 
 Do not conceal from me /wjjro* lyu tcgvTrrca «" ^ » tlrt? 
 
 * alrta pefOy is sometimes followed by the genitive of the person 
 governed by tlie praeposition a-ffo, Ik or -jra^a : as, ffo V aXka <r«v KiXiutrov 
 alnTir^ai 9r»r^os yuvaixu, &c. Eurip. Med, 938. Itri^sixvys oe, us zuvidis 
 iirii fiyifiovet ttlruv ?r«ga rovrov. Xen. Anab. 
 
 f See Rule 2. 
 
 \ The passives of such verbs govern the accusative ; as, ou yu^ a* 
 
 •rfort Z,m7os y ixuvov, retvT Iffv^n^m lyu» Soph» Philoct. 
 
 § l^iu, dico, frequently governs two accusatives : as, on l^oZaiv el 
 ^oXKoi hf/Mi. Plato Crit. 
 
 M2 
 
172 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 what I am going to suffer. 
 
 2a 
 
 tfCTgg fAl\>\.U TfOLT^U 
 
 M%cy\. Prom. 
 You have deprived hoary TcaXioi r u(p»i^ico ^^mi ;r«T»ig 
 fathers of their noble sons* ivyzv^^ t/xv<». Eurip.(Iamb. 
 
 Trim.) 
 
 § Women have a certain 
 
 pleasure in saying nothing 
 
 good (sound) of each 
 
 other. 
 Lest some one accuse us of 
 
 impiety to Rhadaman- 
 
 thus. 
 A big boy with a small coat 
 
 having stripped another 
 
 little boy with a large 
 
 coat, put on him (the 
 
 boy) his own and clothed 
 
 himself with his. 
 And say nothing impertinent 
 
 of respectable men, and 
 
 men of intelligence, of 
 
 whom, through their par- 
 simony, no one ever comb- 
 ed his hair or anointed 
 
 himself. 
 
 Let go (fii6tiifii 2 a) my hand, by the gods, 
 child. Soph, (Iamb. Trim,) 
 
 Whatever you may say of him, though he were a ras- 
 cal (Tfecvov^yog) when alive, and loquacious, and a calum- 
 niator. Aristoph. (% Troclu Dim, Acat,*J 
 
 vyiyji uXXiiXuv Myu, Eurip. 
 Phoeniss. 
 
 y^x(pn urzQiM Itfi o ^otacc- 
 fActv&vgJ^ Lucian. 
 
 Tcetig ^lycti fiiK^tg i^cj p^irav, 
 Irggoj 5res<5 f&iK^cg, [x,iyctg 
 l^a ^iravy hc^vu uvtogt ^^ o 
 l^sv laet/roy hcuvog ^^ u^' 
 (piicifj ^* 0^2 hcztvog ^ otvrcg 
 h^v^i. 2 a Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Kci} fivi^itg sTttcv <pXccv^og uvii^ 
 ^i^iogf xeti vovg 's^av ci vtto 
 
 Aristoph. ( 3 Iamb. Trim. ) 
 
 my dearest 
 
 * See Prosodia GiJPca, p. 59, 3d edition. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 173 
 
 May we say then that they kaow {iTFiTxecfcxi) about 
 what things they differ so vehemently, so as that, dis- 
 puting (<i^(p<(7^)iT£<y) with each other, they reduce them- 
 selves (Iffyec^ofAxiP^) to the last extremity (It^xto^)^ — 
 Plato Alcib. 1. 
 
 Observ. 1. Verbs, which in the active voice, govern 
 two accusatives, in the passive have the accusative of the 
 thing : thus, to ygov /SoyAjy^tt', y^* aroy o-KitTrr^^v rtfid^ r xttotv 
 Xurxi. ^schyl. Prom, 177. rug tt^octo^ous uTrtTTi^^a-cvrxi. 
 Thucyd. VI. 91. u^irnv eirri lfixrt»9 cif*(p(i7-ovTeci. Plato. 
 
 Rep. V. 
 
 Observ. 2. The preterite passive of several verbs in 
 like manner govern sometimes one, and sometimes two 
 accusatives, the first of the person, the second commonly 
 the cognate substantive : thus, in the Euthyphro of Plato 
 we find the following expression ; t; (png ; says Euthyphro 
 to Socrates, y^x^p^v <r% Tig, as ioifcZy yiy^XTTTUi. What say 
 you? some one, it appears, has accused you, — The same 
 tense of the verb is used by Xenophon with two accusa- 
 tives, i^n MiXirou yiygxf^fAivou xvrov rhv y^x^'Av. JMelltuS 
 having already accused him, — Numerous instances are to 
 be found in Demosthenes, particularly of the perfect passive 
 used in an active sense ; thus, adv, Phorm. ag hriduf^ivog 
 rx ^^vjfAXTx sig rh vxvvy as if he had expended the money 
 upon the ship^ rov ^ vttb^ rov yyn yivi<r6xi rxvrx xya\x in^ti 
 %o)£tg iifAuv viTxv TFivoivif^ivoi, Dem, -TV, (m<p. But others with- 
 out us woidd have engaged in this contest that these things 
 might not happen, kxi mv (aIv 1^6^x9 tuh ra ^tivXia^xi ku- 
 Xvuv Ivh^nx^Sxi. 7c, rut b Xi^^av. And to denounce our 
 hatred and inclination to thtvart him. x.xi rxvrx, f^vthTru- 
 TFtTi T«j TTtXiag \v rotg tf^TT^OG-div ^^6Votg ci(T(pxXuxv xho^ov (tt^AAoi* 
 i) rtv vTFi^ ruv kxX^jv kiv^vvov y,^*if/^in,g. Dem, tf. <rri^. And 
 that too ivhen the stale in no former period ever preferred 
 
I74t SYNTAX OF TRE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 inglorious security before danger in an honourable cause, 
 ug ciTTtHTefg ^ TiroXig — TCZ'rol'ATcti. Demosth, vi^i ftz^. ug lyco 
 TOiovTb rt dtxTriTT^oty^cit. jEschi?l, ;rgg« riis TCcc^et-K^itr, That I 
 did such a thing, txvr lyriMMo-reci. Aristoph. Nub. He 
 Jbrgot this, uxx' uficuvcv vw (ii^whivy^^i ru^z. Eurip. Med, 
 889. See also v. 1127 & 1137.— To these verbs may be 
 added, ^g^gy^a;, accept ; ii^yxc-^xif perfeci ; '7Fz(pvy[A»i,J'ugi* 
 
 Observ. S, The Jlrst and second aorists passive of 
 several deponent verbs, and of others having the active 
 voice, are also used in a transitive sense : thus, or* f^cv 
 
 >io<Td f^bt ^letXz^Snveci If^tv ri Tr^etyf^oc, Demosth, Tr^tg HoXvx. 
 That he "wished to talk to me about some affair of my ouin, 
 tv (^oZvikvrig r»y Torg ©nQaioig ^uf^ifl x-ett ^e|«ev VTrec^j^ovTetv. 
 Dem. "TT, cTTgcp. Not being alarmed at the poixser and repu- 
 tation the Thebans then possessed, Tret^ecKccXuv ^s uvrovg 
 Karei7r>^uysvrug rev ^iXtTTTTov. Id, And to exhort them, being 
 in no dread of Philip, » ca-a Hg UTPccvrei, tov ^rgo rtv TroXif^iou 
 h'^otTrotr/id-ds. Demosth, Olynth 1. Than xuhat you expended 
 upon every war before this, o oZv 'Tt<rerci<p^v7ig ug fCiTov 'ixav, 
 UTCnWayfi. Xen^ Anab, tov §' A^i>.Mag ftv^iv (poZr)6^g ^cciy. 
 Eurip, Androm. 
 
 Rule IV. The Accusative Case in general 
 after Passive and Substantive Verbs, or when 
 any related circumstance is introduced, is go- 
 verned by the praeposition «ara understood. 
 
 I am distracted in my fear- g*:r£<v6»PP^^ ^oSg^o? ^gii». Soph, 
 ful mind. Oid. Tyr. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 175 
 
 They are unfortunate both 
 at home and abroad. 
 
 And strikes me on the mid- 
 dle of my liver. 
 
 Having my hand armed with 
 this sword. 
 
 Having his shoulders enve- 
 loped in a cloud. 
 
 § They all sailed wounded, 
 one on the leg, another 
 on the head, and another 
 maimed in some other 
 part ; to me they seemed 
 come from some battle. 
 
 And they rushed together 
 with a mighty shout, and 
 the wide earth resounded; 
 and around the great hea- 
 ven rung ; and Jupiter 
 heard, sitting in Olym- 
 pus, and he laughed in 
 his heart with joy, be- 
 cause he saw the gods 
 mingling in strife. 
 
 TO P' t' Iv^ov s/jtti, T« n ^VgCC^i 
 
 ^va-rv^^g, Eurip. Orest. 
 )cxt iyu ivxru i^czTog n-Tvet^. 
 Anacr. 
 
 vov, Eurip. Phoeniss. 
 vzcpiXn ilxv(^i oifAog,* Horn. 
 
 ofAiv TO o-xsAdj, ch Vi xs^flJAij, 
 o^Z «AAo T< (7f vT^iC^y, P P*"* 
 
 %ct,o(a^, Lucian. 
 
 o-yv ^g viTrru, ^ ^ f^zyxq o/^sc 
 
 ufA<pt ^g ^ciXTTtyycif ^ ^ ^lyccq 
 ovpxvog, ciia at Zivg yjf^eii 
 'OAy^TTo?, yiXocco ^ ^ Oi lot 
 ^iXo? *irop yr,6oa-vvyi, od o^ 
 ^xo^xi'^"^ Sso5 l^cg ^vviav. 
 
 Hom. 11. (4 Hexam.) 
 
 Alfred, reduced to extremity by the Danes, who were 
 spreading devastation all over England, was obliged to re- 
 linquish the ensigns of his dignity, to dismiss his servants, 
 and to seek shelter, in the meanest disguise, from the 
 pursuit and fury of his enemies. He concealed himself 
 under a peasant's habit, and lived sometime in the house 
 
 * In the same manner Horace, " J^ube candentes huineros aviiclus.' 
 Virgil JEn. v. 269. Fnniccis ibant evincli tempora Iccniis. 
 
176 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 of a neat-herd (/Soy^soAd^) who had been entrusted {iTciT^iTen) 
 with the care of some of his cows. There passed here an 
 incident, which has been recorded by all the historians, 
 and was long preserved by popular tradition, though it 
 contains nothing remarkable (0«y^fl«ff-To?) in itself, except 
 so far {^vM^ '«jV<) as every circumstance is interesting (r* 
 Tgg^rvoy g^tj&z) which attends so much virtue and dignity rcf 
 duced to such distress. Humes England, 
 
 Many mortals suffer this evil ; Sound ( (pgma) in their 
 sentiments,^ they do not choose to submit {vTr^iria) to 
 their judgment, {^v^h) in many respects being overcome 
 by (^go?) friends. Eurip. (3 Iamb, Trim.) 
 
 Rule V. Verbs signifying distance or space 
 take after them an Accusative. 
 
 He is not far off, but near 
 you. 
 
 Ephesus is distant from Sar- 
 des three days journey. 
 
 The two lines were four 
 stadia distant from each 
 other. 
 
 And if now when the battle 
 was fought three days 
 journey from Attica such 
 
 a§' oy ^flfxgoj (000?) UTCivriy 
 TrXvicrKiV Sg 0"^. ^ Eurip. 
 Phoeniss. 
 
 y.fci^ci^ o^oj. Xen. Anab. 
 nrrcc^a ctx^iov uve^u i * (pec- 
 Aosyl UTT ci?\.?\.7i>\.ct;v. Id. 
 
 p pa pass yoc-oyxoj Kif^VVO^ KUt 
 
 * Sec Note 2. under Rule I. of the Concord of Adjectives. 
 
OOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 177 
 
 danger and alarm sur- <po€o$ * ;rgg<iVT)jjt6« ' * sj ;roA<5. 
 rounded the state. Dena. ;r. <rri(p. 
 
 And they chose as general Cottyphus the Pharsalian, who 
 (the article and participle) then put their sentiments to 
 the vote (l7ri'^n(pi?!^a)f Philip not being in Macedonia, nay 
 not even being present in Greece, but in Scythia, at so 
 great a distance (uTcn^i,), Mschines. 
 
 Don't go farther (|e««5«»go?), nor ask me (iTran^ofAott) again ; 
 but know that you are arrived at the very door. Aristoph, 
 (2 Iamb. Dim. Cat. and Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 IV. Of the Infinitive. 
 
 Rule I. The Infinitive Mood is governed 
 by Verbs, Participles^ and Adjectives, t 
 
 Frightful to behold. htug il^u,^^ Theocr. 
 
 Whoever desires to live let o(rri<; t^aa Itti^viazuj ^u^ettfixt 
 
 him try to conquer. vikuu. Xen. Anab. 
 
 When the boys seemed to iTni^ocv hKia ^ ^ Uxvo? ilvxi o 
 
 be fit to learn something, Traig fAccjSxvc^ rt. Xen. Mem. 
 
 Do not hasten to be rich fcn o-Tnv^av^ 7r?^ovrw fixhXov 
 
 * See Observ. 5. under Rule 2. of the Concord of Verbs. 
 
 f This construction has been imitated by the Latin poets : as, Wnn- 
 duvi dticerc qiierciis, instead of blandum ad ducendas guercus, Hor. 1. 
 Ode 12. 
 
178 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 rather than to appear to « %g>ifl'T65 ^oxiu ilmt. Isocr. 
 be good. 
 
 ^ The wicked therefore seem o fczv cvv ^rovjjgo? Trecvrug lyeaye 
 
 to me at least to be alto- ^o»s<» uXXnXay Ix^^o? |tt«6A- 
 
 gether by nature enemies Aov >> (ptXti <pva. p» Xen. 
 
 rather than friends to each Mem. 
 other. 
 
 For such abundance of ma- Too-oyro? yug x^6cvw -tcupo.- 
 
 terials has their valour a-Kivot^u ^ * ^ oyroj u^irvt^ xxi 
 
 furnished both to Poets o -xaiieo * ^wec/^&vo?, xxi « 
 
 and Orators. ZTrea^^ (ibuMki^. Lysias. 
 
 Aim OiuKo) at that virtue by which men become honour- 
 able and good, and fit to command, and useful both to 
 other men and to themselves. Xenoph. 
 
 Who then is such a wretch {^vo-rvxvi?) as (oTrts) would 
 wish ^ ^ to betray [Tr^oufzon - ^) himself, parents, sepulchres, 
 country, for the sake of a trifling (/S^<«;^«5) gain ? Demosth. 
 
 Observ. 1. The infinitive, with the accusative fre- 
 quently before it, is often put absolutely, being preceded 
 by the particles 6)5, aim^ tt^iv, tt^iv ^, iTra^ny eix^h f^^Xih and 
 
 * In this sentence may be observed the difference betwixt -roluv 
 and iiTuv. The former is applied to the Poet, the latter to the 
 Orator. It may not be improper to point out here the precise use of 
 certain expressions both in the Greek and Latin languages when em- 
 ployed to denote particular acts : thus the Orator is said Xsyti* or 
 £/Vsiv : the Historian ffvyy^tt,<puv : the Geographer in his descriptions 
 ttrro^uv. the Teacher tilutrTcnv: the Senator irv/iSovXsvuv : the decree of 
 the Senate is called •r^oGovXsv/u.a : the people are said •^vi<piZ,iir6ot.t or 
 XiiZ'>'''oviiv : the vote of the people is called ■^yi<ptirfjt,a,. The Latins also 
 say creare Consulem : dicerc Dictator cm : Icgere Senatorem : cooptare 
 Ponlijicem : capere Vcstalcm : prodcrc Inlcrrcgcm : r>^pulus jubcl : 
 SenalKS deccrnit, ^c. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 1 79 
 
 adjectives o/o?, oVa?, and some others either expressed or 
 understood : as, ag zTrog iiTrtiv. Plato. So to speak, aa-n 
 Xiyiii. So to speak. Demosth, tt^iv ^aXov elvxi. Xen, Annb. 
 Before it is evident. And sometimes without them : as, 
 T6 y o^hv iItcuv, Soph. (Ed. Tyr, But to speak the truth. 
 See Plato Crit. <r\ tloq rm ly^avf &C, oy ^oKzt cot to ^6v ^utv, 
 (tloi oi^^iiv TS Kxi viyiu.ovzmvj TczipvKZvcii. Pluto Plicsdr. 
 
 Note I. The nominative of the pronoun precedes the infinitive in 
 the order of construction, if it relates to the person of a preceding verb ; 
 thus, ri ovv, UT3I 7); uv, ffu roffourov v'rio?,oas patfiip xa) roXfAsp rovg uXkove, 
 um ^ctvTci ^aiiiv avTos. Demosth. -^fict ffn^. |'. 0. 'E^jjX^av i^ei; TTifrB 
 ixii/» avTOi x,^ovo!, 'riffr avro; uo^nv auSts kta. fii^og XaScoy* Eurip. 
 Pboeniss. 488. 
 
 Note 2. The particle ua-n, when it connects the preceding part of 
 a sentence with what follows as a co nsequence, is generally, construed 
 with the indicative, and requires to be translated, as that : thus, 
 
 uffT av^oaffiv -zilhi ^oKuffiv ; Aristoph. Nub. 829. 
 
 — — — y, Torivi' '^PC^'S ToX/zriS Tooiru^av, uffn rag ifAcc; ariyxs "ixov. 
 
 EXAMPLE FOR THE RULE AND THE OBSERVATION, 
 
 When we might live (elov) in dishonour, (,k>j KxXa^) 
 we prefer rather to die [nXivTau) nobly before bringing 
 (««^<crTjj|t6<i ") both ourselves and our descendants (w l^rw- 
 r*) into disgrace, and before shaming WtG-^vm) our own 
 fathers and our whole preceding race (Tr^offGiv yivog) : 
 thinking the (man) that shames his kindred unworthy 
 to live {u^iurcv iivx(, with the dative), and that neither 
 
180 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 man nor god is a friend to such an one, neither upon 
 earth, nor when dead (nXivTccof'^^), under the earth. 
 Plato. 
 
 Observ. 2. The infinitive is often used elliptically, 
 
 especially by the poets, i^cc, o-yA^eHf (pvXei<r<rov, /SAs^rg, o-KOTFiiy 
 So?, BiXoit KiXiva) or iv^ofj(.ct,i being understood to govern it : 
 as, uifTC^ Iv TT^aroKTi ft,x^€<r6xi, supple, o^x CV ihM. Hom. Do 
 thou fight among the foremost. 
 
 Take charge of them two t]lya^iXofAxt[tv^ofteet).Soifiit 
 
 for me. CEd. Tyr. 
 
 (1 exhort you) always to uhv u^itrnvoi kxi vTru^^^as etc- 
 
 excel and be superior to ^ivxi xXXog. s Horn. 
 
 others. 
 
 (See) that you do not ad- f^n^' vTrvog ^xXccKog \% l^y.x^ 
 
 mit sleep upon your Ian- Tireju^'tiyfi^xi. ^ * Pythag. 
 
 guid eyes. 
 
 May I, and Theseus my son, zv^xmana^ lya^ Grio-ev? n 
 
 and the city of Athens, ^at;? Itco?, ttaA^j t A6nfxi, 
 
 and the land of Pittheus « re m-rhvs y^6av. Eurip, 
 
 be happy, Suppl. 
 
 Observ. 3. The Greeks use fnXXa (faturus sum J with 
 an infinitive f to express the future both active and pas- 
 
 * Markland says that tC^^ofixi is here understood or some such 
 word. But neither ivx,f>f^-«-t nor any other verb in the first persoa 
 can be used for two reasons; 1st, -Slthra addresses herself to Ceres 
 and her ministers : the verb to be supplied, ought therefore to be in 
 the second person : and 2d, the accusative comes before the infinitive, 
 which is scarcely ever tlic case when a person speaks of himself. 
 The genuine form here is " grant that I, &c. ^ors tuletifjt.ovu)i ^j, &c. 
 See Observ. under Rule 2. 
 
 f The infinitive of the future is most frequently used ; sometimes 
 that of the present and also of both aorists, when the imperfect of 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 181 
 
 sive, which in Latin would be rendered by a participle of 
 the future in rus with' the verb sum^ 
 
 And here I mean to exhi- 
 bit it against the third 
 day. 
 
 Did not I say that you (two) 
 were going to be trouble- 
 some to me ? 
 
 If you would listen to what 
 are going to be mention- 
 ed. 
 
 KUi h&X^i fiiX>\.a iTri^iiKVVfli ih 
 
 Hipp. Maj. 
 
 Plato 
 
 -TC^etyy^cc ^ ftsAAa* \ya ^ A- 
 ristoph. Plut. 
 
 If pass p^oyaj. iEsch. adv. 
 Ctes. 
 
 § You seem to me to say, dcxw \ya, a s<yxg««r«$, a^ u 
 
 Socrates, that if we would ftiXX&f °p ayot66g ng ktuo- 
 
 acquire a good friend we fisa ^ ^ (piXog, avrcg k^us 
 
 ourselves must be good ciyudog ht yivo^m^^ As- 
 
 both at speaking and act- ya ^"^ ts kcci '^^ecrra. Xen. 
 
 ing. Mem. 
 
 Thus present pleasure {xot^ccvn^/^ ij^ovjj) and indolence 
 is more powerful (la-^vio) than what will even (o ^sxxa^) 
 hereafter contribute to our advantage. [(rvf6(pi^a ^) De- 
 mosth, 
 
 Ajax, son of the noble (ufivfim) I'elamon, are you then 
 not going, '"^ even when dead to forget your anger against 
 me** upon account of the arms? Homer. (2 Hexam.) 
 
 fiiXXu is employed : as, avrixet Tthenny, I'^u ovx. k^ iftikXev Irai^K 
 KTiivofitvoi iTafAvvai. Horn. ^<rs^ 'ifiiXXcv tjcucrrot <p^ov^i7v, Thllcyd. VII, 
 4. Elmsley remarks in a reference upon v. 1209 of the Medea of 
 Eurip,, that fiikXa in the sense o( cimctor, does not take the infinitive 
 of the/j/?Mre, far less of the aorist. 
 
182 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule II. The infinitive Mood has an Ac- 
 cusative before it, ^ and this may be an Infi- 
 nitive with the Accusative of the Article. 
 
 It is the fate of royalty, said 
 he, when conferring fa- 
 vours to be defamed. 
 
 For, in the first place, I 
 think that the being in 
 good health is a blessing, 
 and the being in ill health 
 an evil. 
 
 § Nevertheless do we affirm, 
 that to do an injury hap- 
 pens in every view to be 
 base and disgraceful to 
 the (person) injuring ? 
 
 To find fault indeed, some 
 one might say, is easy 
 and in the power of every 
 one, but to point out 
 what we should do in the 
 present emergency, this 
 is the business of a coun- 
 sellor. 
 
 /Sxa-iXiKoSf ' ^yif&if It (4,1 sv wciia 
 
 P* XCtKai UKOVM, Plut. 
 
 va etyecSog iivxt vofAt^dj to o6 
 
 voTisi KXKog. Xen. Mem. 
 
 of^a?, toys u^MSu o u^iksuv 
 xeci xctKog xxi «i<r^^og rvy 
 ^ctva ov TTccg rgoxog^ ^P^if^h 
 ii ovi Plato Crit. 
 
 TO (Aiv ov» iTriTif-toiay {<r&>s (prr 
 ^; ep 1 a ^(g ^„^ p(S4^«i5 xiit 
 vxg "f iivctr TO ^ iiTre^ rm 
 
 TTOt^aV 0, Tl ^il 7r^C6TT6} CCTTO- 
 
 (potivoi ^ ovrog uvxi o-vf^Qov 
 
 Xog, Dem. Olynth. 1. 
 
 * See Observation under this Rule. 
 
 f See No. 9. of Verbs governing the Genitive. 
 
 I Here the orator uses the middle voice in an active sense : Many 
 
 other instances occur in his speeches in which the distinction between 
 
 the active and middle voice is disregarded. So also Aristoph. Vesp. 
 S7. TttZft 'ffaZi, fjivi Xiyi, 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 183 
 
 Reckon this tlie noblest sacrifice and the best (fnyug *"P) 
 service, if you shew yourself as virtuous [xyei&oi '"^) and 
 just fas possible J, Isocr. 
 
 Note. Instead of the infinitive we sometimes find a verbal noun 
 employed ; as, ly« §' AtrxXnTiov ^avfrn^a •jrifc-^u r^j toaou 'r^h 'Ikiav. 
 Sophocl. Phil. 1437. 
 
 Observ. When a person speahs of himself^ or vrhen 
 the nominative to the verb and the pronoun or adjective 
 preceding or succeeding the infinitive respect the sarae 
 object, the accusative of the personal pronoun is not used 
 before the infinitive. If an adjective, participle or pronoun 
 {ccvTOi commonly) is employed when one speaks of himself 
 particularly, it is generally in the nominative : But when 
 he speaks of another, the accusative is most commonly 
 placed before it : * thus, cUi yet^ Sn umi xxXXia-rog n xxi 
 fi&yta-Tog, Plato Alcib. 1. For you think indeed that you 
 are very handsome and very great. He said that he {i. e. 
 another person) insulted the state. KCii.Tu,((>gcna avrov l(pii in? 
 TToXiug. jEschines adv. Ctes. f 
 
 Do you imagine having de- fcZ. a%tou (pivctKt^a ^ ^ lyu 
 luded us to escape un- <^^icAA«<r<r«-* ^ p^® ct^nfuog i 
 punished ? Arist. Plut. 
 
 * The accusative is not always placed before the infinitive when 
 a person speaks of another. The context will easily shew when it 
 is understood, thus, vuv ya^, dris vov XaSofjcivos, h akXou otou ovv, us re 
 ^ifffcuri^^iav ocyayoi, <pccff»eov a^ixiiv, (for ffi adixnv^) fi,zi^iv ahxavvrx. Plalo 
 in Gorg. l-riiT evx, oht (p^cvrtXnv, oi •pr^urov^ &c. Xen. Mem, So also 
 Virgil, Nos abiissc rati, et ventis petiisse Mycenas ; for eos abiisse* 
 JEneid. 3. 
 
 t This observation is well exemplified in the following passage of 
 Thucyd. VII. 47. Toii re yoco l^rt^n^vfiXfiv lia^uv cv KurooSovtnf, xcit 
 
lU 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 I omit that I mi/self was 
 frequently crowned. 
 
 Do you say that you are 
 able to make a rhetori- 
 cian if any one will learn 
 from you? 
 
 He said that neither he 
 himself will do it. 
 
 Do you think that you 
 yourself could speak if it 
 were necessary and the 
 senate chose you ? 
 
 Swear that you will neither 
 banish me from your 
 country. 
 
 J How I wish that you 
 dwelt with the immortal 
 sea-nymphs, and Peleus 
 had married a mortal 
 wife. 
 
 But do you promise and 
 swear to me that you will 
 readily assist me in word 
 and deed. 
 
 She says thaty having come 
 of her own accord after 
 the affair at Pylus carry- 
 ing to the city a box full 
 of truces, she was thrice 
 rejected in the assembly. 
 
 <rTi(pxvou, PP^ Dem. 7f\ 
 e-T8(p. 
 pjjTOgixfij <pJj,M< TTOna clog r ihoti 
 kx9 Tig /SovXe^uxt '" ttx^x 
 (TV s fcxv6xva ; Plato Gorg. 
 
 OVK ^Vi^l ^ ^ oifT UVTOg %OtlM ^ ^ 
 
 cvTog, Thucyd. 
 
 ^ oiiofAXt ctoa-r X9 tlfct xvTog 
 ixa ^^ It ^it °P KXi ul^iofcxi 
 
 ^^ (rv~ii iSovM ; Plato Me- 
 nex. 
 
 ofiVVfAi fAnr xvTcg he yi) c-og lya 
 h^xXXa 7ro7i» Eurip. Med. 
 
 *ilg o(piX69 cv fih xv6t fiitx 
 Mvxrog uXtog ^^^ ^ Nxleff 
 IIjjAsy? ^g B'yviTog uyu^^ xxoi" 
 Tig, Hom. (2 Hexam.) 
 
 Fv ^i <rvvri6ifAxi ^* kxi fioi 
 
 TTog P^ xai ^ii^ x^YiyAi* Hom. 
 II. I. ;* 
 
 7i?<6oV, (f>Vif*}, UVTOflXTOg fllTX 
 
 Tfl P^ £> IlyAej, CTTov^xif (f>ip6i 
 « TFtXig Kia-tvi TFXtog, utto^h^c 
 
 1 a pas 
 
 T^tg iv n iK»Xn- 
 
 G-ix* Aristoph. (3 Iamb. 
 Trim. 
 
 For I wish {o(puXa^^) the multitude were able {ohg) 
 
 See also v. 398, and Odyss. 1.521. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. t&B 
 
 to do the greatest mischief, ^j that (/»«) they might be 
 able ( to do) the greatest good.P^ Plato. 
 
 And he thought ^ * that Philocrates must evidently 
 be ruined {uTroXXvfii ^ ^ '^') and the other deputies must 
 be in danger (^Ktv^wtvci^^), that he himself must gain 
 credit {iv^cKifjcio)), and, though the betrayer of his friends 
 and a miscreant, must appear ^f pas faithful to the people. 
 JEschines adv, Ctes, 
 
 The poet says that he is the cause of much good to 
 you. Having stopped (7r«y&; i^) you from being too much 
 deceived by strange (^zvikoc;) speeches. From being pleased 
 {'tihfiui) when flattered (^^uvivAf) and from being conceited 
 citizens {j^ecwoTrcXtTKi)* Aristoph. (3 Anapaest. Tetram. 
 Catf.) 
 
 Note 1. Herodotus sometimes uses the reciprocal pronoun in the 
 accusative governed by the preceding verb: thus, on hofjt.Kn tuvro* 
 ihai avSgwru* aTfavru* okSiurarov. because he thought himself to be 
 the happiest of all men. And Plato the personal, when the person 
 speaking contrasts himself with others : xat trx^^oy ri olfiKi Iftt ^Kuat 
 ^QTiftetTct u^ya,ff6itt h a.XXovc cuvhuo otiffTivag fioukii ruv cetpiffruv. Hipp, 
 Maj. And I almost think that / have made more money than any 
 other two sophists together whom you please. When a person speak* 
 of himself emphatically, the accusative is commonly used : as, xav ftit 
 Htoipn^u (Aovm ayaSuv u.-rttiTcav evffuv ulrietv l/it. Aristoph. Plut. yefti^ai~ 
 (it ya,^ IfiteivTO* loixtvai. Xen. Cyr. olftot^ rl •xor sW, on travrov ou (phf 
 ec^iv ; Aristoph. Eq. See Horn. II. /. 269. Odys$. y. 221. 
 
 Note 2. It very rarely happens, that when another person is spoken 
 of, the noun preceding the infinitive is in the nominative case : a few 
 examples however occur, of which the following is one : 2fl^a*A»js l^w, 
 avTO{ /iiv oious ^i* ffeiiiv, Eu^i^i^ns ^i oiot tin. Aristot. Sophocles said 
 that he made men such as they should be, Euripides such as they are. 
 Thucydides employs the nominative before the infinitive when the person 
 
 See Prosodia Graca, p. 62, &c. 
 
 N 
 
186 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 speaking, is the representative of another : thus, ir^orsfitu (ru>,itr9i) 
 
 ret ffiptTi^a avruVf 'iroifAOts tifoi ff^iihiffSai, 
 
 NoTK 3. The Latin poets have sometimes adopted the same form 
 of expression: thus Virgil, ** Sensit medios delapsus in hostes." 
 " Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis." Itw. " Retulit Ajax esse Jovis 
 " pronepos." Ovid. 
 
 NoTK 4. The infinitive of tlfti, sum, is frequently used in an un- 
 common manner by the Attic writers with the nominative sing. 
 or pi. of the adjective txavj volens : thus, rov ^s aycavoi ov» iv ru koX-tm 
 tx«v tlvxi iToiTiffofAxu Thucyd. b. 2- 89. I will not willingly engage in 
 the bay. ourt a<nStn uv ^-ikenvt curi «S/x«v, ours uv "^tf^oivre Ikovtss ti- 
 veii, Xen, Cyr. 
 
 Rule III. The Infinitive Mood of Sub- 
 stantive and Neuter Verbs has commonly 
 the same Case after it as before it : as,. Its/S;? 
 Km trv (prig zlmi "^zog. Aristoph. Ran. Since you 
 say that you are a god. 
 
 Do you think Phidias a bad 
 artist ? 
 
 Does not such a person 
 seem to you to be a dis- 
 agreeable friend I 
 
 Kte we all in reality be- 
 come rich ? 
 
 <!>nhei^ MfAXi KotX9i tifeci ^n- 
 fAiov^yos ; Plato Hipp. 
 Maj. 
 
 (ptXcg umt ; Xen. Mem. 
 vifAiiq ^ thtti ; Aristoph. PI. 
 
 § They entreated Cyrus to Kv^a hofAui, ug v^cfivfui ^"p 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 187 
 
 be as eager as possible Tr^og o w-oAs.woj ^^ ymf*xt. ~ 
 for the war. Xen. Cyr, 
 
 If indeed they are of any g^Tsg ys, t* ocpsxp? ecvTog^ ufAi 
 
 use, who call themselves 
 your friends. 
 
 a (TV ^ (p<A(7K6i P^ In-lTVihtOg 
 
 11(11, Plato Crit. 
 
 How so, Socrates ! for what is correctly said, he must 
 (ivctyKYi) accede to {ai7roh^of/.ui), or, not acceding, be ridi- 
 culous. Plato Hipp. Maj. 
 
 For it is not allowed you (elss-r*) using foreign examples 
 {7rx^xh;y(i()6), Athenians, but domestic (olyMog), to become 
 prosperous (iv^xi^cm). Demosth, Olynth. 
 
 Observ. This rule admits of exceptions, particularly 
 after impersonal verbs, when the adjective, pronoun, or 
 participle, preceding or coming after the infinitive, does 
 not agree with the substantive or pronoun governed by 
 the impersonal or other verbs, but is put in the accusa- 
 tive : as, l^uvoii yci^ uvroig hvxt ^^u^xvTccg rcc (iiXria TovraVi, 
 Xen. Mem. For they may go and do something better 
 than these, e^no ^l ^^<ni) k^g uXkt^^x yiyZTdon. II. a-\ 100. 
 
 If it will be enough for you 
 to become the supreme 
 ruler of the Athenian 
 state. 
 
 I determined having gone 
 to those called philoso- 
 phers. 
 
 For it was not Cyrus' way, 
 (when) he had, not to 
 give. 
 
 If the most skilful were al- 
 lowed to go united a- 
 gainst the unskilful. 
 
 ti l^et^Kia (TV r V ^xvv og ytvo^oii^^ 
 vt *A6iivxim TToXfg, Plato 
 Alcib. 2. 
 
 l^o|g lya lx66>v TTX^cc ot^^ Kef- 
 Ma ovTOt <^tM(76^cg, LUi* 
 
 cian. 
 
 cv yu^ iffit TT^og o Kvga; Tgtf- 
 7rog,S l^av f^i) uTCohihetfAt, 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 2a 
 
 61 K^xTiTTot a-vvnh'i 
 
 Xen. Mem. 
 
 N2 
 
188 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 § It is the part of moderate 'Avjj^ y«g c-m^^uv f^if icrrify tl 
 
 men, unless they are in- fcn a^iKiUy °p iia-v^ce^af, ayot- 
 
 jured, , to remain quiet ; h^ h, uhKw, 1% li^nn ^ro- 
 
 of brave men, when in- Ag^gA^. Thucyd. 
 jured, from peace to en- 
 gage in war. 
 
 We entreat both fathers ^itfMt ^n >c,oti TFctm^ xui f^nrti^ 
 
 and mothers^ influenced ^ etvrn cvrog ^mvom ;^goe«- 
 
 by the same sentiment, fcxi^*^ e iTriXetTrtg fiioi ^««- 
 
 to spend the rest of their yof, Plato Menex. 
 lives. 
 
 It must be so (cvx. ttfu eixxug') but it is pardonable {^avyyvii* 
 fAn) in you ' to say this ?*, not being ill treated (^«<r;^jft>) as 
 I, Eurip. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 It is not the part of prudent or generous men to fail 
 (JAAgi?r<i»''*)inany (r*?**^) of the (supports) of war through 
 want ihh(») of money. Demosth. Olynth. 
 
 Note I. The following is a remarkable instance of the applicatioa 
 of this rule : 
 
 ev ya,^ vr^efffixu rhv Iftecvrov ftoi 9roki* 
 
 ihi^yinlv fc, a Ki7r(pe, k«6* offov av vdivu ; Aristoph. Plut. 91 1. 
 
 Note 2. The following sentence in the Anabasis of Xenophon 
 has been misunderstood by Hutchinson and others, through inatten- 
 tion to this construction : ort V i^a> rod hivou ytveivro, xai l^uv (r«/> 
 cT^xriuTuis) v^os aWovs (&T^etTtiyovs) a^;^«(at»fltff a^nvxi. But when 
 they were out of danger and the soldiers could go to other generals 
 to be commanded. Character of Clearchus. See a similar construc- 
 tion in Demosth. a-tgi ^a^u^^tffSnof, near the beginning, which to 
 learners would be altogether incomprehensible, as the sentence is 
 pointed in Reiske's edition of the Greek orators* A semicolon ought 
 to be placed after efiu/toKus • as, hSufiovfjuvovs must agree with iifius, the 
 accusative understood before -xoniffiai, instead of vfieiv as governed by 
 
jGovernment of verbs. 159 
 
 \ I^OTK 2. A similar observation jnay be made respecting the accu- 
 sative case before the infinitive coming after substantives and adjec- 
 tives which, in Latin, usually govern the dative : thus, xai roi^t J<3a- 
 axovra avaytttj Koti yVfAvaXnv m ^r^as akXri^ovs rovs 'Xa.iha.i vaura Totnv^ 
 Xen. Cyr, And there was a necessity for the man who gave these in- 
 structions to exercise the boys in acting so towards each other, air^^ov 
 fth <ya^ in tea.) vZv Ifr) Ui^ffatg *«i to ocro^eruuv i-^»at to fvans fiiffTpug 
 ^aUiffdat, Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Note 3. The Latin writers sometimes adopt a similar construc- 
 tion : They say either, nobis non licet esse tarn disertis, or tarn disertos. 
 ♦tpM licet esse vivos. Juv. Sat. 10. 
 
 Rule IV. Instead of the Infinitive pre- 
 ceded by the Accusative, the Indicative, 
 Subjunctive or Optative preceded by or/ * 
 or wg is frequently used : thus, yvcti^t 6rt ly&f 
 
 * oTi is in reality the accusative singular of Itrns the responsive pro- 
 noun, and both it and as in every example may be shown to be pro- 
 nouns : ovV hhi^arSi tov6* on ovk WiT^t^'tTi TctuTet •roun avTu. De- 
 mostk. Phil. 4. Nor did you show this, that you will not permit him 
 to act so. iravTts yet^, su ell^ on, ffuStiveii avTvtv iSouXiffh. Demostll. itJ^J 
 9Ti<p. (AovaraTos yet^ s« iru ifavruv aiTios, Kai tuv xxkuv, »ai tuv ayuffaiv, 
 tu i<r6t en. Aristoph. Flut, For you alone are the author of every 
 evil and of every good, be assured of it. — The accusative singular 
 neuter of the relative, is frequently used by Homer in the same man- 
 ner ; as, Xtutrcriri yot.^ royi ttavTiSt o ftoi yi^ets l^^iTXi aXX«, Jl. a, 120. 
 y\u 3* 'oWiwj oi ourif &c, >.'. 439. See also o, 248. Sophocl. OEdip. 
 Col. 1124. 
 
190 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 oKri&i^ Uya. Soph, 
 speak the truth. 
 
 (Ed. Tyr. Know that I 
 
 They said that Cyrus was 
 dead. 
 
 And having gone to ask 
 Cyrus for ships that they 
 might sail away. 
 
 And no one ever shall say 
 that I, — having betrayed 
 the Greeks, preferred the 
 friendship of the barba- 
 rians. 
 
 becoming the guides and 
 instructors to others that 
 the Persian power would 
 not be invincible, but 
 that numbers and wealth 
 of every kind yield to va- 
 lour. 
 
 Ku. P Xen. An^b. 
 
 \\&m ^^ ^i Kyg05 ulna -prXctov 
 uq cc'^ottMcj.^^ Xen. Anab. 
 
 xoit ovTFor i^iu cvoiiq US lyco, — 
 Id. 
 
 2a 
 
 viyzf/^uv KUi o<?asc"XosAo5 ot 4AAot 
 yivofAUi ^^ oil ovK uftrX^eg 
 
 uXXci sTflSj 5rAj3^05 ^ x,ui 5raj 
 TTAoyros agST)) vtciiku.^ Pla- 
 to Menex. 
 
 Note 1. After verbs to say, to know, to skew, to remember an4 a few 
 Others, us or on commonly follows. 
 
 Note 2. After verbs to fear, to deny, to prohibit to prevent or re- 
 strain, to cause to cease, to disbelieve, the infinitive is commonly pre- 
 ceded by the conditional negative fih- 
 
 Observ. 1. Sometimes on or wV is understood when 
 the sentence is interrogative, and then the verb is put in 
 the subjunctive mood, as implying conditionality : as, /Scy- 
 hii cvVy l(pyi X&ix^xTVis (•'■'"O 71^4'*'.^-" iV'^^vSoi f-csv A, hrccvhi 
 ^£ Aj Do you wish then said Socrates, that we write 
 here A, and there A .' Xen. Mem, 
 
 Do you wish (that) I men- (iovXcficu t^x^i ^ ««* iMretnrr> 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 191 
 
 tion to you the speedy <rv (p^cc^u -, Aristoph. Ran. 
 
 and precipitous. 
 
 Do you wish that we re- ^iXu (jciva ^ * uvtov y.hecKtvea 
 
 main there and hear her yooj j Soph. Elect. 
 
 groans ? 
 
 What sort of a person do t/? fiovXtfAca o-y, kKr^lm* »«^ 
 
 you wish I should state «$ \f4.uvT<!v hcutoi ^ vifAigcc^^ 
 
 you to be, iEschines, and t/^j}^< 5 2 a Demosth. ^r. 
 
 what myself on that day ? crrstp. 
 
 Should we rush in (Ite^o-^t/^tt^ ^ %) as the moment («»(tti) 
 calls M^ to stand by (w^gErv^*) Hecuba, and assist {tv^xx^'O 
 the Trojanjemales, Eurip. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. The same mood foUofws vron^a, fitvKu or Sixt/j, &>? being 
 understood, as rrort^u raXufig I'l^u, yi ro f^iffrev ^xovff'ce.t ; vEschin. adv. 
 Ctes. 
 
 Observ. 2. ag * IS sometimcs construed with the par- 
 ticiple (commonly the future) in different cases instead of 
 the indicative : as, a? ovk V7ni,%av \ ojJJg Tria-rivarm Xiyiig ; 
 Soph. (Edip, Tyr. Do you say that you will not yield or 
 obey ? e|sTA« u-; ttoM^^o-uv. Xen. Anab. 
 
 You announce, as it appears, uyyzxxeo'^^ u? g/x&;, p"^' u? 
 
 that he is dead. ^vyis-ku, ««= p p^ Soph. Elect. 
 
 Be thus assured that I will oCrat yivcoa-Ku p^ ug ovh tfxvo* 
 
 not give over. fA»i ^ ^ \yu. s Lucian. 
 
 * Sometimes ola or an, answering to the Latin utiyote or quippe 
 qui, Sj^c. is employed instead of <yj ; as, ola ^»j !r«<5 ^iXotrre^yos m <pu- 
 trUf as being a boy naturally affectionate, rioy; -ri^Kp^ow rod ^riv art 
 us aftum oixev fUTaerrnffefitvos. JEsch. Dial. I am now tired of life, 
 as I am going to remove to a better house. — For the construction of 
 as with the genitive absolute see Viger. p. 559. 
 
 t See Observ. 1. under Rule 2. 
 
19^ 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Let none of you say that I <y? (Wgj> c-r^xrvtyiM V**^^ avtc? 
 
 will command this army. «5 a-r^xT^yix fcvi^ui; v^u? ?v«- 
 
 yaf, Xen- Anab. 
 
 And he (usually) prayed to xxi zv^o^ai »*" h 7r(o^ ol ^zot 
 
 the gods to give him uttXus to dyxSog p^ ^i^aif^i, 
 
 simply what was good, as a? ol ^ioi ^^ K»X>^i(rr» i/- 
 
 the gods know best what ^zu,^ oTroiog^?^ dyethg itf^t* 
 
 is goo(J. Xen. Mem. 
 
 § He seized Elatea, so that, 
 if any thing should hap- 
 pen, you and the The- 
 bans should no longer 
 unite [ad v, conspire to- 
 gether). 
 
 That I will never, said he, 
 neglect to procure ne- 
 cessaries for my troops 
 either in a friendly or 
 hostile country, be thus 
 assured. 
 
 ^ 'EXotTgiot Ketreey^etf^Qetva, ^ ^ wj 
 
 ova c6Vf u rn; yivof*»i; 
 
 2 a op 
 
 Qn^xioi, Demosth. ^n^i. 
 
 d^iXi&f Tfl S Tec I'^lVl/^iW 01 
 
 fAioz (yi vel x'^i^)i ^vrui 
 l^u 5j yvu^^, Xen. Cyr. 
 
 Note 1. en also is construed with the participle in the genitive 
 case : as^ ort rov h ^fjb(pl(fify ?raXe/t*flv reurov (/.h -roimavTos, ffv/AVt^et»a/isvfu9 
 ^8 ruv akXu», vuv ffun^yuv uurS. Demosth, jr. <rTi<p, p. 64. Collect. 
 jBr^c. Maj. Vol. Ill, 
 
 Note 2. as is sometimes used redundantly by Plato and other At- 
 tic writers after or/, when it is separated from that part of the sentence 
 with which it is strictly connected, by some intervening particulars, 
 and has some qualifying adjective superadded : thus, ara^, w 'l^^ria, 
 ri -jrori ro cclriov on ol vo^Xaioi ixsivoi, uv ovofiecret fnyaXa Xiyirai i«"/ (ro^ta, 
 Uir-TctKou Tt xoci Btavres, leii tZv afifi rov Mikfiftev ©aXijy, ««< In ruv 
 vffTi^ov, fAi^^is 'A»a|ayfl^ay, ui h 'ranns ri el ToXXai auToiv faivovrai asjri- 
 ^ofiivoi Tuv jraXinxuv ^^eiliav ; What, pray, is the cause, Hippias, that 
 ^hose ancients, whose names are highly celebrated for wisdomi asj 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 193 
 
 Pittacus, and Bion, and the contemporaries of Tbales the Milesian, 
 and others still later, down to Anaxagoras, that either all or most of 
 them, appear to (have) abstained from political affairs ? on also, appears 
 to be frequently redundant, when compared with expressions in oi^r 
 pwn language : as, kiyefrtsj en, u Kt^eiftsu, rev /iktSov crehr a,9eotueus toTs 
 ffr^Kncarais ', Plutarch. Somewhat similar to this is the following sen- 
 tence from Cicero de Orat. I. 37. when two pronouns are employed 
 relating to the same individual but separated at a considerable distance 
 from each other by intervening clauses : Quid ergo hoc fieri turpius 
 aut dici potest, quam eum, qui banc personam susceperit, ut amicorum 
 ^ontroversias, causasque tueatur, laborantibus succurrat, aegris medea- 
 tur, afflictos excitet, hunc in minimis tenuissimisque rebus ita labi, ut 
 aliis miserandus, aliis irridendis videatur ? 
 
 Observ. 3. The Greek writers, to direct the atten» 
 tion more particularly to a certain object, put it first in 
 the accusative after a transitive verb, and then make it 
 the nominative to another, after u^ or ot< : thus, Mytvtrt 
 y »lf6sc?t <wj etKtv^vyov /Siov ^a^iv kxt oiKovi* for Myovri ug ^fcztg 
 
 ^a>fciv, &c, or MyovTi vi[>(,cis — ^^v. The Latin construct;ion 
 is, Dicunt nos agere vitam periculorum immunem domi.* 
 
 For he knew that he occu- xxi yx^ st^w p^" uyrh, «ri fii- 
 pied the centre of the cog s^^^p o Us^o-ikos o-r^d- 
 Persian army, nv^x. Xen. Anab. 
 
 I have often indeed former- TroXXxKig fciv ^^n lyayt yncKr" 
 \y considered a democra- kc^^^ ^v^^wgoinet, ert «^v- 
 cy that it is unable to go- vccrog Itrriv Iri^og ^^xet, 
 vern others: (instead of, Thucyd. 
 that a democracy, &c.) 
 
 And then one might un- kcai lvrecv6x ^y KMu^^og xcire^ 
 
 * The Latins have sometimes imitated this construction : thus 
 Cicero ad Famil. S, 10. Noslt Marcelluvi, qtiam tardus et parum effi* 
 "v: sit. 
 
194 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 derstand how Clearchus fcuvQum ^a u^ tTivtmiui, 
 
 commanded. Xen. A nab. 
 
 $ When they understood both Itfu ccla-Sctvof^cct^^ rt tiMtvav 
 
 the army of Menon that ^^nvf^ocy on h KiXixtx 
 
 it was in Cilicia within l<rrt°P tWu to flg«?.8 Id. 
 the mountains (that the 
 army), &c. 
 
 I have not now perceived tv wv xurit^oj Tr^urovy aX>,ci 
 
 for the first time, but ttoXXxki^ f^oc^vg egyu, ug 
 
 ^^6ften, fierce resentment, 
 how implacable an evil it 
 is : (for, how implacable 
 an evil fierce resentment 
 
 cif>CnX,OtVOS KCtK69 (lffT<). Eu- 
 
 rjp. Med. 
 
 And you will know how ill-informed and dull (;r«;\it;5) 
 you are. Aristoph. {1 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 And you will probably (o-;^;g^ov) find(«ygyg<(rA;«) thus con- 
 sidering, the Cretan lawgiver, that (Jog) he appointed for 
 us {(ri;vT«(7p-<y^^"^0 all his institutions [vofcif^cg), both public 
 and private, with a view (a^roCAOT^*, looking) to .war. — 
 
 Plato de leg. 
 
 First mention my son Polydorus, whom you have from 
 my hand and from his fathers at home, if he lives 5 other 
 matters I shall afterwards ask you. Eiirip, (3 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. Sometimes the pronoun representing the noun is put in tlic 
 accusative : thus, Horn. II. v 310. 
 
 eLvros ffv fAirk <p^iff) o^ai vettro* 
 
 AiviiKv, n «sy ^/v i^vfftnen. 
 
(government of verbs. 
 
 195 
 
 Rule V. The Infinitive with the Article, 
 and sometimes without it, is often used instead 
 of a Noun* : thus, rou (pi\offo<pziv ovhv ?]dwi>^ for r^g 
 pXoffopag, nothing is more pleasant than philo^ 
 sophy, TO (pPoviiVf sapientia : rov (poovnv, sapiential: 
 '^roog TO (poomv^ ad sapientiam ; h ru (p^oyetv, in 
 sapientia. 
 
 Don't you think that to die 
 is the opposite to live ? 
 i, e, that death is oppo- 
 site to life. 
 
 Since you are accustomed to 
 make use of questions and 
 answers. 
 
 He will free me from death. 
 
 The pleasantest life consists 
 in being wise. 
 
 For all things are subser- 
 vient to riches. 
 
 For you desire sleep, not be- 
 cause of toil, but because 
 you have nothing to do. 
 
 Ti&ni^t ilvoci i Plato Phaed. 
 
 iTTil^^ xcci lia&cc ^^dofACtl TO 
 Iparaco Kxi uTTO'/i^ivof^ca. Pla- 
 to. 
 
 py&; mi ^^g ^yi ^vfi<7K<a. ^ ^ Eurip. 
 
 Orest. 
 
 Iv <P|0V=6> ^5^5 yS/oj. Soph. 
 
 oiTTX? TO 9rAoyT£6> yu^ ttf^i vTrv}- 
 Koos. Aristoph. Plut. 
 
 ov ycta oix to Trcnu, oih,Ax di^ 
 TO f^rihig z^6) os-Ttg, sro^gft*,^"^ 
 
 i/jTvoj gTrih^ia. Xenoph. 
 
 * Participles are used in the same manner : thus, i| euv rod X^vras 
 <ri TO yiyvofiiyov ; ro rsdvuxos, — ri ^s l» rou riSnuro; ; avxyKciiov ofcsXoysiv, 
 oTi ro (mv. Plato Phoedo. From living (life) what follows ? the being 
 dead (death). And what from being dead? it is necessary to confess 
 that it is living (life), xai rov; (jliv tC^ov^ous ««' fovs B-t^aTroyras avrou 
 e^VTTHv <paa-iv i-ri Ko<pov rivos 3->jx«y rS riXivrnfcuvri. Xen. Cyr.. And 
 they say that his eunuchs and servants are digging a tomb upon a cer- 
 tain hill for the deceased, InluKyv; fih rhv iun^ua\t rou ra, -rXtla alruv 
 KiXivovTo;, Xcn. Anab. 
 
196 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 § You are insolent, trusting xofATrt^ g/^w;, c-Tety^cn 7ru6oi, p ™' 
 
 to the truce which saves o^ erv <ru^ea ^vna-Ka. 2 * Eu- 
 
 you from death. rip. Phoeniss. 
 
 But if any of you recedes 4aa<» ^iv u rts v^m tU ovrcs 
 
 so far from doing his duty. avx^xXXu ">' ttohu ^ ^ to ho9 
 
 PI Dem. Olynth. 
 
 By fear then and dread they to Ss/S^p™ u^cc xxi Sm$ civ 
 
 are all courageous except ^^uag la-u ^etg -rXnt ^^Aoc*- 
 
 philosophers. ^05. Plato Phoedo. 
 
 NoTK 1. The infinitive of ^aa, vivo, with the article, is commonly 
 used for thp noun ^wjj, as also ^vtjffKu for ^avarosf 
 
 Note 2. The infinitive sometimes with the article and sometimes 
 without it, is used in exclamations, and expressions of indignation : 
 thuSt T« %' ifii xo^uvif vrn^o/iivov rov ciSXtov 'O^oZ ^i^nXhtv ffrdha irXu* ^ 
 ■^iX.id, Aristoph, Av. 5. Ifii 'TuSuv rcc^s, <piv, l/jtl truXato^^ova xuru yav 
 oixiTv. iEschyl. Eumen. 83. 85. 
 
 For the mere circumstance (»v7o?) of dying (to die) no 
 one fears {(po^zu) who is not altogether stupid (aAoyo?) and 
 cowardly. Plato Gorg, 
 
 For to a woman silence and prudence (to a-u^^tvui) is 
 best, and to remain (juiet at home (ua-ot hftog). Eurip. 
 (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 But I am afraid (ret^Zzw) lest the being subject (to hv 
 Mva) to you should keep {iyrd^cj ^ *) me from speech, hav- 
 ing many just arguments, Eurip. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Rule VI. The Greeks use the Infinitive 
 Mood, generally with the Article, governed 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 197 
 
 either by a prseposition expressed or under- 
 stood, or by some other word in the sentence^ 
 in the same manner as the Latins their Ge- 
 runds and Supines : thus, iTricrTa^zvog '7roKzn,i,l^uv. 
 Horn. Skilled in the artqfwarfperitusbellandij. 
 
 In learning, fin discendo.) 
 
 To others you were going 
 to leave (relicturus eras) 
 this deserted house to be 
 plundered (diripiendam). 
 
 Worthy to be chosen (dig^ 
 nus electu). 
 
 For he was stem to behold 
 (tetricus erat visuj, 
 
 § For a faithful friend in ad- 
 versity is more pleasant 
 to behold (jucundior w- 
 su) than a calm to mari- 
 ners. 
 
 And by injuring his coun- 
 try (injuriam inferendo) 
 both with ships and other 
 troops. 
 
 And leave no pretence to 
 your general of sailing 
 (navigandij to another 
 place, or of doing some- 
 thing else. 
 
 h TO fAoc.y6ecya. ^ * Soph. 
 iXXoi ^ofAos MiTTu ^ ^ fAiXXa 
 
 o^^ecvb^ ^<fl6g?r«^<y.' * Eurip. 
 
 Alcest. 
 
 «e|*«5 ^ii^oTcucu, ^SOp. 
 
 Kcci yccp c^ua 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 o-n/yx^ ia^i. 
 
 yuXw^ yetvnMg iWb^eiM. 
 
 Eurip. Orest. 
 
 xxi TO » vciivti X^^^* ^eucug 
 vtiza xcct r^iYi^ng xcci crr^eC' 
 rtarm STSgo^. Dem. Olynth. 
 
 Kcct fAViaui 7r^6(px(ris to ^ ttXm 
 uXXoc-if ii •TV^ocvrca uXXog t;j, 
 c-r^ctryiycg xxTxXn7ru9. 
 
 Dem. PhU. 4. 
 
 Embrace (tto/sw) two occasions of speaking, either 
 about what you thoroughly (^cnctpug) know, ^ ""^ or about 
 what it (is) necessary to speak. Isocr. 
 
198 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 The Romans have sometimes imitated this construction, 
 
 Etjam tempm equum Jltmantia solvere colla, for sohendi. 
 Virg. 
 
 Observ. 1. Participles are likewise used in a similar 
 manner, and agree with the nominative to the verb in 
 gender, number and case : thus, ul^urcn TroMftav fAUavu, 
 tetvrci TToiuv. Xen, Anab. He preferred to diminish them 
 in waging war. 
 
 By dying I shall afford ^vw>cej^^^ 7i6vi^i o If^os l^6^e>g 
 laughter to my enemies. ysXej^. Eurip. Med, 
 
 But by what action he might u>^Xoi n uv a-v TctuM ^ ^ ;^g<- 
 gratify you. ^o^«<. °p ^* Xen. Cyr. 
 
 § I wish, prince, rather to fail iBovXtfAxi 5' avec^, x,»Xeo5 ^^xu 
 
 acting honourably, than \%uy.oiero(,va ^^ ^aAAov, 4 vi- 
 
 succeed by deceit. y^oca >cu,icu^. Soph. Philoct. 
 
 For you shall never by cv yu^ uvotya xot' Ivggflsv jcXua 
 
 weeping bring up the dead ci (p6if>civci »vu, Eurip. Al- 
 
 from below. cest. 
 
 But there I know well that IvTocv&a h sy ilha, p "^'' crt It- 
 
 I am inferior to my con- Trivnj ^iK^og ilf^i o 73X1%. 
 
 temporaries in horseman- Xen. Cyr. 
 
 ship* 
 
 Excite {Tc^or^zTtci) the youth ^ to virtue, not only by ex- 
 horting them {'Tvots^ccmci), but also by pointing out to them 
 with regard to actions [tfz^i^^) what (oVo^o?) good men 
 ought to be. Isocr, 
 
 Was not the man, who (article) enacted this law, at first 
 as you and I, and by his arguments (Agy^)) persuaded the 
 ancients? Aristoph. (2 Iamb. Tetram. Cat.) 
 
 Note. What is usually expressed in Englisti by a participle atid a 
 preposition is stated in Greek by the participle alone : Uuis, ev yd^ a-af 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 199 
 
 «XX4»y y ay <rn fcii{u ikgriZuttru^^ovott}. Xen. Mem. For a perf on would 
 not shew his wisdom by expecting more from others, raurit fiivret xiym 
 re ««J »uros troiuv^'^u^iffitiuci^it. Id, 
 
 Observ. 2. The following construction of the infini- 
 tive with the article, governed frequently by a prseposi- 
 tion, a noun or a verb, either with or without certain 
 cases of a substantive, adjective or pronoun, between the 
 article and it, deserves particular attention : thus, oVots 
 
 vjdiov lU Toy u-ffzikiv, Xen. Cyr. And 'when they are ambi- 
 tious to appear brave meUy and to obey is more agreeable 
 to them than to disobey. In this example, the article be- 
 fore ^xme-Scct is governed in the accusative by the preposi- 
 tion TT^og, and eiyethi is in the nominative case, as related 
 to the nominative of Ix^izv, agreeable to Observ. 1. under 
 Rule II. of this Section : The other article rov before «5rg;- 
 6u9 is governed by the comparative degree vj^icv, in the 
 same manner as if the words had been rvig ctTni&uugj which 
 is not so elegant, xxt to ^zv {^xvrov) rx fJCSyaXec vixMV revs 
 (piXcvg iv TroiovvTXj aii^iv ^avf^ccTrov. Xen. Anab. And (that 
 he) surpassed his friends in conferring great favours is not 
 •wonderful. In this sentence the accusative of the pro- 
 noun must precede the infinitive, as it has no connection 
 with any nominative going before, n yǤ rovrev ^ccKx^id' 
 re^69 rou yfT fAt^Ghcci, Xen. Cyr. Here the genitive of the 
 article agrees with the pronoun governed by the compara- 
 tive degree. 
 
 This he did from being se- 6vt«? h tfciw U to xu.Xi-Kcg 
 
 vere. g(V<«/. Xen. Anab. 
 
 With our drinking sleep our e-yv to •xinca v^^iig ^c j^§^ ^ ^g. 
 
 cares. ^i^^n. Anacr. 
 
 If all should die that par- «/ «7ro^v;j(rxw op ^gy ^^^ pi ^v«» 
 
200 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 take of life. 
 
 That it was evident that no- 
 thing was more useful 
 than to associate with 
 Socrates. 
 
 And while we live we shall 
 thus, it appears, be near- 
 est to know, i. e. we shall 
 approach nearest to know- 
 ledge. 
 
 For all other men before 
 events commonly make 
 use of deliberation. 
 
 Tfl * txu fAiraXxfA^xva, ^^op 
 Plato Phaedo. 
 
 ^ctvi^og thm on ev^m or^iXifcci 
 
 Ic-t/ T« -f '26iX^»'t1K (TVVUfCU 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 tvraqy tfj iiKu P "^^ lyyvret* 
 
 ru :{: tif*i TO li^nfAu Plato 
 Phsedo. 
 
 wgd rec vr^uyfucrx ifiu P "^ 
 ^^uofixt \\ TO liavMbbfcxt 
 
 Demosth. 
 
 J Think of immortality (im- 
 mortal things) by being 
 magnanimous, and of mor- 
 tality by enjoying your 
 fortune with moderation. 
 
 It appeared to Cyrus and 
 the rest that he had de- 
 parted from the resolu- 
 tion of fighting. 
 
 For by taking care to please 
 the person who pleases 
 
 aSctvetrcg fcif <p^cyw re ftiycc 
 
 uvoXecva, IsGCr. 
 
 ^OKW ^ ^ xxt Ky^o? xeci ci eiXXa 
 
 UTToytvaa-Ku ^ P to f^x^tn' 
 fixi. Xen. Anab. 
 
 ^M yx^ TO l7ri/x,iMo^xt to «- 
 ^io-KU ^ * cc^iVKeiv lyUf^ owe. 
 
 • See No. 6. of Verbs governing the Genitive, 
 f See Rule 4. of the Government of Adjectives. 
 J See Adverbs that govern the Genitive. 
 Ij See No. 5. of Verbs governing the Dative. 
 § The prep, in comp. governs the article. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 201 
 
 (pleasing) me, I think I 
 am able not unskilfully 
 to capture men. 
 
 And it contributes much 
 towards their learning to 
 be prudent. 
 
 And thinking himself en- 
 titled to them upon ac- 
 count of being his here- 
 ditary friend. 
 
 What (shall ive say of that 
 'person) ? who, through 
 the desire of acquiring 
 money, devotes his lei- 
 sure to nothing else than 
 how he shall make rich. 
 
 d^aTiros. Xen. Mem, 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 KUi cvToi a%ic6) lap^s ^^^ ^^ 
 
 -^sch. adv. Ctes. 
 
 T< ^£ i oa-m ^ix 
 
 Td 
 
 ecXXo ar^oXv) •Trtizei, "" ^ fl^ro- 
 hv oivrtg Ki^oiiva, Xen. 
 Mem, 
 
 He has arrived at such a pitch of impudence (ecvecthtet) 
 as that (^cTTg) he dares assert, that I, besides {tt^c? with 
 the dative) having beenPP^^^ the author {xirio?) of the 
 peace, &c. Dem, tt, a-n^. 
 
 And those, thinking they were known by (vtto) their 
 commander, seemed to him both to be more desirous 
 {hgiya^iM) to be seen doing any honourable (deed), and 
 to be more eager {Tc^ch^ua^on) to abstain ^uTVix'^f^^) 
 from doing any thing base. Xen. Cyr, 
 
 NoTK. The following example exhibits three different preepositions 
 governing different cases of the article, as V ou» aTri^i^^affKiv, Ik red 
 TirratrdoHj ug to f£r} sra/s/v a hrruro, aXX* iaaXiv^iiro iv ru vu^etffSai avdis 
 ^iXnov ^oiuv, ra^u fAiv lis fo Iffov a(piKiTo rzi I^ttik^ tois hXiMUtctiS*^^ 
 Xen, Cyr. 
 
 o 
 
202 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule VI. Verbal Adjectives in rzog * are 
 frequently used by the Greeks when any ne- 
 cessity is implied, in the same way as the 
 Future Participles Passive and Gerunds in 
 Latin, and govern the Dative of the Agent 
 with the Cases of their own Verbs : thus, 
 j5jjA/v rayra T^aznoi/. Demosth. Haec facienda 
 sunt vobis. You must do these things. 
 
 That Clearchus was nat to 
 
 be disobeyed. 
 Every thing of rulers (i. e. 
 
 Rulers) must be obeyed. 
 I think indeed that all nnust 
 
 be done by us. 
 And not to be by any means 
 
 worsted by a woman. 
 And if you think that you 
 
 ought to be enriched by 
 
 cattle, you must bestow 
 
 care upon cattle. 
 
 ^ni, Xen. Anab. 
 x^etTM larrt ar^s P^ cix6Vcrrso§. 
 Soph. Elect. 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 xeci ov rot yvvA ov^a^ag nffcn^ 
 rg«j.°" Soph. 
 
 /tftgAjjTgo?. Xen. Mem. 
 
 § You must therefore either « ovv xetuanov cvrog ra Uog, » 
 
 desist from such prac- fivi^sig uXXo^ uWionrstv f ro 
 
 tices, or blame none but tt^jP^ (pxvXag l^uf h vf^ug 
 
 yourselves for every thing ccvrog. Dem. Phil, 
 going wrong. 
 
 * Verbals in rog dififer from those in nos : the latter imply necessity/, 
 and require to be translated by the gerund ; the former denote merely 
 futurity, and may be often translated by the supine in u, or the future 
 participle passive. See Gram. p. II, page 93. 
 
 t See Rule II, of Sect. S. of the Government of Verbs. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 203 
 
 For though all others should kxi y«g uv itvx^ '^ovMvta ^>j leov 
 
 indeed yield to be slaves, (rvyj^a^zu ^ ^ ^" « ^AAo<, 
 
 you at least it behoves to v(*iii ye * vjrsg h iMvk^M g 
 
 struggle for freedom. uymt&rioy. Id. 
 
 And a man ought to con- xat tfu^ fAety^Xov uv^ fuMrn- 
 
 sider more than every tso?, cv to ^mau it^i 4y«^oj, 
 
 thing, not to appear good, uXXec to iif4,h x-sti i^iu. »«* 
 
 but to be (so) both in h^c<ri(&. Plato Gorg. 
 private and public. 
 
 And indeed those willing to assist (mz. in war) must be 
 well treated ( zv -TFoieo), that (/y«) they may feel the inclina- 
 tion (be willing) to be zealous {v^bhft,itfi»i), Xen. Mem. 
 
 Note 1. Verbals sometimes agree with the subject in gender, num- 
 ber and case : thus, toZtq ^^^Xov, or;, z'tTn^ rtfiKtSat {iovKHf dxpiXtiritc <rot 
 h vroXts \crriv. Xen. Mem. 
 
 Note 2. The person is sometimes put in the accusative : thus, 
 ev fATjv ^ovXiVTiov Tovs yi vdvv s^ovras roTg ouru xaxats (p^cvov(fiv, Isocr. Ev. 
 6VK0V9 Kcu hfttv vtvfTiOv^^lXvri^ovTas- Flato, Kep. V, 
 
 V. Of Participles. 
 
 Rule I. Participles govern the Cases of 
 their own Verbs. 
 
 * The particle yi in this example marks the opposition between 
 vfiH¥ and oi ci?^Xoit and renders the former emphatical. It may be al- 
 most always rendered by at least when it ought to be translated ; when 
 not, the word with which it is joined should be pronounced with a cer- 
 tain emphasis : ' However others may yield, who possess not such ad- 
 
 02 
 
204 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAG 
 
 For I remember once to have 
 heard you. 
 
 Those inimical to the tran- 
 quillity of the state hav- 
 ing observed him. 
 
 To whomsoever he gave out 
 that he was a friend, he 
 was evidently plotting a- 
 gainst him. 
 
 § He called it a favour, when- 
 ever any one deserted him, 
 that, when he had him in 
 his power, he did not ruin 
 him. 
 
 Forgetting your anger, you 
 should try by kindness to 
 soften him. 
 
 I first called you father, and 
 you me daughter: and 
 first putting myself on 
 your knees, I gave dear 
 caresses and received 
 them. 
 
 (AvactfAui yu^ uxovu ^ ttots ort/. 
 Hom. 
 
 TT^oa-^oXi^&u ^(Tv^tct. ^Seh. 
 
 adv. Ctes. 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 zvi^ySTict, de xccroiXiyat oTrcTi 
 rig uvTog oi(pi(7TctfAotiy ort 
 ^^oiofAxi uvTogy ovx. <«7roAAi;- 
 f^i ^ ^ uvrog. Id. 
 
 d^&Xz0 1 * uv tt o^yt^ofcetiy 
 
 Vril^CtO^CH ^^ iU TTOlSU * ^ 
 
 TTg^ocvvM etvTog. Xen. Mem. 
 
 liguTcg (TV KctXz&f ^ ^ Tfecrii^y xcif 
 -<7v voiii lyar. U^arcg §£ yo- 
 
 (plXtg ^ei^ig ^i^6>f^i, ^ ^ Kctt 
 (ltTihz)(,o[Aet.t.'^^ Eurip. (3 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 You came commanding (e6y«o-o-<y) Sparta, not governing 
 us. Soph, (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Thus he spoke praying : and wise Jupiter thundered 
 {Kxvnia^^) aloud, hearing (ulu) the prayer of the aged 
 son of Neleus. -^°^- Hom, (2 Hexam.) 
 
 vantages, you at least, who possess many, should struggle,' See also 
 Plato's Menexenus, p. 281. Bip. Ed. The following from the Medea 
 of Euripides will also illustrate this; Med. fff/.ix^ov yumixt ^tifta tout* 
 uvat ioKiTs i Jas. fins yi au^^mv. Med. Do you think this a trifling \n- 
 jury to a woman ? Jas. A prudent one at least fivoidd think so J, 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. £05 
 
 Rule II. Participles are often elegantly 
 preceded by the Verbs ei(jji, yivoybai, vTtcc^x'^^ 
 Ixcoy rvy'x//.voo^ (pdocw,* Xocvdam,^ Tjfcof, XP^igUy and 
 the poetic Verbs y.vgo^^ reXBdo), rskcf), and TreKO' 
 [jbocty to express what in Latin would be ren- 
 dered by some Tense of a single Verb : thus, 
 
 * <P^ava> often requires to be translated by the Latin jmits or prius- 
 quam. When preceded by the negative «y, and followed by *«}, it may 
 be translated by the English expression, no sooner than ; thus, olx s(p- 
 6yi[i.tv iis T^oi^viva iX^ovrss, xa) roffxvraif votreis Iajj^^jj^sv. Isocr. We no 
 sooner came to Troezen than we were seized with such diseases. Her- 
 mann, in his Annot. on Vigei-us, seems completely to have misunder- 
 stood its meaning in several examples : Thus he interprets, 
 
 ^"Ka-Tiroua av&^atovs' Horn. II. 9. 505. 
 
 Ate ita currit, ut quoque in loco, in quem earn sequantur Preces desi- 
 erit ibi currere, quum illae adveniunt. The meaning is, Ate keeps 
 far before and precedes, i. e, gets the start of them over every land, 
 injuring men. 
 
 Iffrat yuvai^iv offiesi ou (pSotveir It av 
 
 ^vfifxovrsSi r, yvvui^i huXivuv ;^^iuv. Eurip, Orest. 924. 
 
 Thus translated by Hermann. Si licebit mulieribus impune occidere 
 maritos, non cessabunt caedes, &c. It ought to be turned thus : If it 
 shall be lawful for women to murder their husbands, you cannot 
 avoid death, or you must become the slaves of women. 
 
 f \iti6avu may be frequently translated by the Latin adverb clam : 
 sometimes by the adjectives imprudcns, inscius. IXudo/itv fifiag aureus 
 Tat^uv elhv ha^i^ovTis» Plato Crit. We did not perceive that we dif- 
 fered in nothing from children. 
 
206 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Dv (rtcoTTj^crccg \ffzi ; for ov (Ttco'7rr}(retg ; Won't you be 
 silent? Soph. GEdip, Tyr. 
 
 If ray mother did not live. 
 
 Before I wet the tip of rpy 
 
 lips. 
 His corruption and bribery 
 
 escaped me. 
 
 That you may not conceal 
 from yourself that you 
 are ignorant. 
 
 The river Selinus happened 
 to run through the mid- 
 dle of the country. 
 
 Soph. CEd. Tyr. 
 
 XziXbs* Lucian. 
 \yu ^ix<p&u^u P P^ xoci TTiTT^xa-' 
 
 KM P^ ietVTOV >^C6v6oiV6). "^ 
 
 Demosth. 
 
 uyytiu, Xen. Mem. 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 J Will not those then who tvKtw oiys ftn tlhu p p^ ^vi^' 
 know nothing of either Irggoj ^^ tvroi Xn&M avTov 
 of these, be ignorantly xxi pizyca* x.xi ^^xrru o?- 
 
 ^ The reading in the Bipont edition of Plato, and in Biester's edi- 
 tion of this dialogue, is, xai Xtyovrus xctt ^^arrovrus, contrary to the 
 example from Xenophon above, many passages in the same dialogue, 
 and the practice of all good writers. See pages 76, 86, 100, &c. 
 Ed. Bip. — Another passage in the same dialogue is inexplicable ac- 
 cording to the arrangement in these editions. It may be remedied by 
 a little alteration, somewliat diflferent from that proposed in Biester's 
 edition: thus, instead of the sentence beginning with ea-frt^ av (avi 
 ^gon^ov Weu^iffyi to <nj$ ipv^t^Si eiviv yu^. See. it should begin with ccviu 
 yet^ ruurtis, scil. iTitrrtjfAtjs, o(ruti^ uv fi*i ^^ore^ev Itov^icri ro rns '4'^X^^i 
 h '^^i' }ci*ifA'^Tav *T«<r/i», &c. See page 93, Bip. Edit — The termina- 
 tion of the sentence next to this is evidently corrupt. Perhaps by chang- 
 ing /siflv into /Sioy, the praeposition U or a^o being understood, it may 
 in some measure be remedied. Transcribers have frequently changed 
 the w into V, and y zee versa, x?"^"* "^ ftax^cv (U) (iiou Btuv. In no 
 long time running from life, i. e. quickly coming to his end. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 207 
 
 bolh saying and doing 
 what they ought not ? 
 
 If however, any one should 
 treat us well, we will not 
 be inferior to him in acts 
 of kindness, as far at least 
 as in our power. 
 
 If you do not abide by the 
 agreement (things agreed 
 upon) you will gain no- 
 thing beyond being the 
 first to act unjustly. 
 
 It is incumbent on one ex- 
 empt from misfortunes to 
 look at reverses : and 
 when one lives well, then 
 especially to keep life in 
 view, lest he be unwarily 
 cut oft*. 
 
 T<5 
 
 f^ri 
 
 hii Plato Al- 
 
 cib.2. 
 
 TTciz^. Xen. Anab. 
 
 Oli^iV TrgbTZgZ&f \%a TO ^d«- 
 
 tuatjczoj. 
 
 Dem. 
 
 •Tfigi 
 
 trri^. 
 
 o^ei6j' xctt ototv rtg zv ^cioj^ rn' 
 vixccZrcc (iiH ^KOTViu ^dXiff' 
 
 ^^'v<y2a Sophocl. (3 Iamb. 
 Trim.) 
 
 For I well know that, if this were so (rvyx'^vu & lx,(o), 
 we should not have heard (av with the imperfect) of his 
 being in Elatea, but upon our frontiers. Dem, -x. <m^. 
 
 It did not escape the son of Atreus, the warlike Mene- 
 \2LMS,that Patroclus''° was defeated C^ufida^^-^) by the 
 Trojans in the battle. Horn. (2 Hexam.) 
 
 O Jupiter, why pray (Sjra) do they say that wretched 
 {^rcthu'iTfu^ti) mortals are wise? for we depend (e|<«gT«6^«<) 
 upon you. And we do such things as you happen to 
 choose. Eurip. (3 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Note. Sometimes, though rarely, two participles are joined to- 
 gether : as, ir^uTcc fitv fjct rovvofia B^uvuv \^av riSnvih ouk uuSts «». Eu- 
 rip. Hccub. 561. And this name, not being usual to me, first made 
 mc in love with death, See also Horn, II. t'. 80. Arislojyfi, Ban, 753. 
 
208 
 
 SYNTAX OJP THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule III. The Participle is used instead 
 of the Infinitive after Verbs signifying to go 
 or proceed *, to send^ to persevere, to desist, 
 to perceive, to appear, to find, &c. and such 
 as signify an affection or emotion of the mind : 
 thus, dsv^' irs, '?riv(TO[jtjSvoi roc vscurs^oc. Aristoph. 
 Av. Come hither to learn the news. 
 
 Go rejoicing. 
 
 He appeared to surpass all 
 his contemporaries. 
 
 Though I should never cease 
 looking at her. 
 
 They continue to maintain 
 the peace. 
 
 He ceases being thirsty, i, e. 
 he is no longer thirsty. 
 
 I, my friends, am glad at 
 the honour conferred up- 
 on me by you. 
 
 Xoiie,^ Tro^zvb^xi. Eur. Med. 
 
 TTxs ^A<| ^icc(^iga (paiVM. Xen. 
 Cyr. 
 
 ^cct. Xen. Cyr. 
 « g/giji/jj «y&> dtxreMa. -j" Isocr, 
 
 df^ec&t TPecva.j^ Xen. Cyr. 
 
 lya, u uvvi^, vidai fiiv vTfo vftn^S 
 
 TifAxcj, Xen. Anab. 
 
 J I perceived that I was ctla-detvo^xi ^ * u^wT^iee. voXvg 
 
 * ThQ future participle most commonly follows verbs of motion. 
 
 f AiariXia may be generally translated by the Latin adverb sem- 
 per: as, x^ufAivoi ^lanXov/jtiy. Isocr. We are always using, hetytvoficci 
 is sometimes used in the same sense : as, »«< <ro>.i/*u» '^nyinro. Xen. 
 Anab. He was constantly engaged in war. 
 
 ^ Tlotuu in the active voice sometimes signifies to desist : as, aXXa 
 traws, 'jTicu o^;^oufiivos. Aristoph. Fax. and in the middle has some- 
 times the meaning of the active. JEurip. Pkceniss. 447. ■tuvo'iti romv 
 ftt, Koci (Ts, K«) -prag-Kv TfoXit, 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 209 
 
 .very unwise and foolish- l^a ^ xui ^xnv ^^ic^ni. 
 
 ly exasperated. Eur. Med. 
 
 And thus neither you will jca] ovtm cvn o-y k'KivKea v^i.- 
 
 be found injuring your %iea 'o ha-Trtrn?, ovr& lyco 
 
 masters, nor will we have xsocu^ /SoyAsw&zP^P p^** u^u 
 
 consulted amiss for our- ^"t» Herodot. (Ion.) 
 selves. 
 
 Therefore now, said he, my ovkow vvv, l<pviy u Traig, diotys 
 
 son, through this atten- huvog « l-TFi^zXitoi. «^<6v (^.iy 
 
 tion you go with more l^jc^fx,cci tt^os ol ^go<^^ ?se- 
 
 pleasure to the gods to ^xt. ^ ^ Xen. Cyr. 
 entreat them. 
 
 But come, Pegasus, proceed with alacrity (;^a/f^*) cslus^ 
 ing {^luxiyzM ^ ^) a tinkling {Trdrayag) of the golden-bitted 
 bridle (4'«A<ov p^) with pricked up ears {(pxi^^og ch) — raise 
 (liu) yourself boldly from the earth. Aristoph. (4? Anapaest. 
 Pjm. Acat.) 
 
 And if they (are) by nature ^^ enemies, but in their 
 
 mind^'^ friends, and are come hither to teach us sonie- 
 
 thing useful (;^gJio-<^o5). Aristoph, (2 Troch, Tetram, 
 Cat.) 
 
 Observ. The participle in general is frequently used 
 instead of the infinitive^ and sometimes even instead of 
 adverbs : thus, ^g^%|/<w rct^wccTx. Soph, CEdip, Tyr, I 
 will send, having made haste (quickly). «aV uwa-ug tgixfii. 
 
 * Motile has remarked on the expression x^'^l^ovvex, ffru^i, Eurip. Hip- 
 pol. 1438. that ,it is erroneously translated IcEta et tuvade. He gives 
 vade et vale. In a note in the Alcestis, v. 282. ^al^ovrti — o^Zmv, he 
 translates, vivite et valeto ; and remarks, " participium p(;ai^ciiv hanc ha- 
 bere potestatcm jamprldem monui ad Hippol. 1438." It would surely 
 be somewhat absurd for Trygreus when mounted on his Pegasus to ad- 
 dress him : l^'adc el vale! 
 
210 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Aristoph, Plut, But run with speed. «aa' eiVg ^uf^m, 
 Aristoph, But speak boldly, ^woi^oc IfAotvrot co^oq m. 
 Plato, I am conscious that I am wise. \(r6t fnvroi uvoyi' 
 roi av. Xen, Be assured, however, that you are foolish. 
 yvacii <rv 'Trutr^m, Eurip. Suppl. You shall know to your 
 cost. t)o-hr *i^ixvif^ivyi. Eurip, Med, She perceived that she 
 was injured. Koci vvv c^a f>clv l^ecfcot^ruvm, yvvxt. Eurip, Med. 
 351. This construction is similar to what was before re- 
 marked under Observ. 1. of Rule II. Sect. 4. When an- 
 other person is spoken of the pronoun is used, and both it 
 and the participle are put in the accusative : as, ^o-^£t' ocinov 
 or uvrcvqt ^^ixi^/xivoVf or ^hfciif^zvov?. She perceived that he 
 or they were injured. i7rvi<rhr U ^zov xccXovfuvot;. Soph, (Ed. 
 Col, He perceived that he was summoned by the god.— 
 In the following sentence from the Cyropsedia of Xeno- 
 phon, the first participle is placed by attraction in the same 
 case with the nominative, and the second agrees with the 
 reciprocal pronoun (used here to vary the expression) go- 
 verned by the verb in the usual manner, tv^ k K^u(r<ruv 
 ^^g; av, recvrec Tr^ovfcoiXiiTo rovi c-yvoVToe?, «AA' oiTTi^ tv ^on latv- 
 Tov KTTovec, retvrcc l%^)(,z. He did not challenge his compa- 
 nions to those things in which he knew himself superior, 
 but he set on foot those in which he well knew that he 
 was inferior. 
 
 Note. There is an exception to this in the case of impersonal verbs, 
 when the participle is in the nominative instead of the accusative with 
 the infinitive: thus, Sophocl. Aj. 76. hlot a^jcitru fj^ivai; for, a^xi'iru 
 aurcv ivBov fiivitv, or fAivovra. 
 
 No one said that he knew. ovhts uhu p xsya. Soph. 
 
 CEd. Tyr. 
 
 Be assured that you have roo-ovTo$ ascova ^ ^ l<nniAt. Eur. 
 
 heard such things. Orest. 
 
 They say falsely that you -^f/iv^of^xi 5g c-v ^»^* Zgyj yov*? 
 
 are the descendant of JE- Atyio^os '^n j/^^_ Horn. 
 
 gis-bcaring Jove. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 211 
 
 How shall I shew that I am 
 a friend, if I do not assist 
 you in your awful cala- 
 mities ? 
 
 For I perceived that you 
 were fond of a long life. 
 
 Every man, even though he 
 be a slave, is glad be- 
 holding the light. 
 
 7^60 yec^ i(^t ^iiKvvfAt ^<Ao5, 
 lxet^x,i6>i Eurip. Or. 
 
 ^flsjcgoj /3<oj y«g ecltrSxvofAxt ~ * 
 e^cccrj a-v, Eur. Alcest. 
 
 Tree? uvYi^, x,»v ^ovXog sa-ri *" 
 m, vi^co TO ^a(; 'o^etco, Eur. 
 Orest. 
 
 § You see that you have 
 treated me most abomin- 
 ably. 
 
 In this I will show, in the 
 first place that I have 
 been wise, in the next 
 place prudent, and then 
 your best friend. 
 
 And you have better hopes 
 that you will obtain what 
 you want, because you 
 are conscious to yourself 
 that you have never ne- 
 glected them, i. e* the 
 gods. 
 
 TT^oo^XiTra/. Aristoph. (1 
 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 yivofce6iy P ™> In-BiTx c-aip^eot, 
 ilrcc erv ft,iyȤ ^iXog, Eur. 
 Med. 
 
 IXtfiZ^oj ^g f^ecXXoy rvy^etm ™* 
 
 crctvrov ^cxia * «v 'xeaTFcr 
 u/^iXm ^ * UV765, Xen. 
 Cyr. 
 
 Did not time shew ['^letcrxipiu'^ ^) that they^ were empty 
 (xgKos). Eurip. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 At all times {ha) appear so to reverence truth (jr^ort- 
 fAot6i)y as that your words be worthy of more credit (more 
 credible) than the oaths of others. Isocr, 
 
 * ^oKiuy as well as (patvofion & vo/m^o/xent docs not always imply a 
 doubt, or seeming reality, but sometimes, as here, an absolute cer- 
 tainty. 
 
212 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Come speak now, don't you know that you then gave 
 2a me a certain child (Trcti?) that 1 might rear (r^z<pa^^) 
 as a nursling (S^?jt&,te«) for myself? Soph, (2 Iamb, Trim.) 
 
 Rule IV. The participle is used after the 
 Adjectives (puvs^og, ^;jXo^, and their compounds, 
 doavYig^ l'7rt(pocr/]g, &c. ; and the Adjective is 
 commonly rendered in English by its adverb ; 
 as, drfkog tju iTihi/joov [jusv 'ttXovtov iaxv^cug, Xen, 
 Anab. He was evidently veri/ desirous of 
 riches. 
 
 He was evidently endea- ^ocn^oq §' \<m vikuu •xu^ottfAui. 
 
 vouring to surpass. Xen. Anab. 
 
 It was evident to all that (pccvi^og P^ "* Ttag la-n ecvecyKcc- 
 
 ihey would be obliged to C<» ^ ^ xeiTucpivya i(p' «^«j. 
 
 fly to us. Dem. tt, ^s(p. 
 
 And the agents also of the xai d v^n^zrug h oi ^zot svgi- 
 
 gods you will find to be o-ku u(pccvvi5 ily^i, Xen. 
 
 invisible. Mem. 
 
 Those about Ariaeus were Iv^jjAo^ I'm c'l Tn^i tov 'Agixio^ 
 
 evidently giving less at- ^ttov ol 'eaajjves '^r^tiri^u o 
 
 tention to the Greeks. vovg. Xen. Anab. 
 
 O my son (TretT^), it is quite evident you do not know 
 what you are doing. Soph. (Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 But if not, by keeping silence (the dative of the article 
 with the infinitive), by reddening (lgvfg<«w^ ''), and by 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 213 
 
 looking stern [<rxv6^cd7ric<j), make it evident (^jjAoj & yivo- 
 ^xi) that you are displeased (^w^i^xtvu) with the con- 
 versation. Epict. Enchir, 
 
 Rule V. The Participle, with the Article* 
 preceding it, is frequently used instead of the 
 i7idicative with the relative : as, rig rjv 'Trore 6 
 rovah "ks^ocg rovg \oyovg v^iv^ yvvKi ; Soph, CEdip. 
 Tyr. Who was it, pray^ that gave such irtfor- 
 mation to you^ lady ? 
 
 For I am he who saves you. 
 
 He that was purified from 
 the murder (as to the 
 murder). 
 
 What man was it that dared 
 such a thing ? 
 
 And he who arranges and 
 supports the whole world, 
 in whom are all things 
 excellent and good. 
 
 § But the person preparing 
 the decree would not go 
 on the embassy : the per- 
 son going on the embas- 
 sy would not propose the 
 decree. 
 
 lya yx^ i'if&i o xxi vfcug etvxtii ^ 
 G-at^o). Xen. Mem. 
 
 Herod. 
 
 rig uvvi^^^^ lerrt o roX^xa'^^ 
 eh ; P^ Soph. Antig. 
 
 XXI oXcq xocfAog <rmrxrroi 
 Tg KXt a-vn^oi, h os ?r«? xx' 
 Xog XXI ecyx&og ilfAi* Xen. 
 
 Mem. 
 
 AAA f^iv y^d^Ui evx xv 
 
 em XV ygcc(^6i, Demosth. 
 
 * Sometimes the article is omitted, particularly after the interjection 
 tpuvrif. Aristoph. Nub. 958. 
 
214 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGDAGE. 
 
 O supreme Jove, grant me 'AAA* a Zivq fAiyitrrog, hi fAot 
 
 to appear — a friend wor- (penva ^ ^ — u^io§ h Kv^og 
 
 thy of Cyrus who has ho- (p<A«5, rev «^«e5 t/|M«6>. ^ * 
 
 noured us. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 For from these you will xxt yx^ U rctvrec^ g/^^^^'"'* 
 
 perceive who it was that rts Im o ^tXiw^eos vus a-w- 
 
 assisted Philip in every ecya^il^e^etti x»t rig o ttpcct' 
 
 thing, and who it was ra> vTn^ vftus, text ro >) tto- 
 
 that acted for you, and A/? <rvf6(pi^09 t^v^na. Dem. 
 
 sought the advantage of tt, srrt(p, 
 the state. 
 
 And may Apollo, who sent €>«/€«? ^\ o ftkfATret « fMmU, 
 
 these responses, both be- eifAu, 'S.arn^ 3' UvU^tAt ^ * xeci 
 
 come our saviour, and the voTog Trxva-rti^iog. Soph, 
 stayer of the plague. 
 
 But say (<pg«^A; ^ ^) who it is that thunders : this causes 
 me to tremble [rsr^ifcxlw). Aristoph. (Anapaest. Tetram. 
 Cat.) 
 
 But who was it that assisted (/ianhof ^^) the Byzantines 
 and saved them ? who prevented {tcuXva ^ ^) the Hellespont 
 from falling under a foreign power («AAdTg«>A>^*P^") at 
 those periods? who that spoke {xiya^^) and proposed 
 decrees {yg»(pa) and acted for the state, and in short de- 
 voted himself wholly («(pg<^fl5) to her interests? Dem. 
 IT. o-Tg(p. See also § jj. «AA* o fiiv Tr^aros itTtavy &c. and ly. 
 uWx <n viKcS, rov Ifcov x^etrrat (pxTKovr* itvecf. Aristoph, Nub. 
 894. But I will get the better of you tvho call yourself 
 my superior. 
 
 Note 1. The article construed with the participle is frequently used 
 for the indefinite ns in the oblique cases: as, '/jxovcroi rov {rmi) kiyovros. 
 Eurip. Med. I heard one saying, ciln y«g ru xaKus uy^ov (pvvivffufAUe^ 
 IvtXovy K, T. A. Xen. Mem. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 215 
 
 Note 2. It was before remarked, that the Ionic writers frequently 
 use the praepositive instead of the post-positive article ; or, in other 
 words, the article for the relative os, h, o. The Attic writers never use 
 the article unconnected with a participle instead of the relative, except 
 in the oblique cases, or with the participle. Some modern critics, in- 
 deed, have contended that the article is used by the Attic writers, as 
 the nommative to certain verbs. But the instances are so extremely 
 rare that it seems safer to conclude with Valckenaer that it was never 
 so used See Valck. Annot, in Hippol. Eurip. 523. Matthize, Gram. 
 § 291. says, that of the Attic writers the Tragoedians only use the ar- 
 ticle for the relative og, ^, S, and these only in the neuter and the ob- 
 Iique cases J thus, ^atft-ovuv ayaXiiad* h^ce, tcjv o ^xvtX'^/a&>v lyof aViffrioriff 
 ifAxurh, Sophocl. (Edip. Tyr. 1379. see also 1427. iEschyl. Again. 
 555. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 1S51. 
 
 Rule VI. A Substantive with a Participle, 
 whose case depends upon no other word, is 
 most frequently put in the Genitive absolute : 
 as, ovhvog zotikvovrog, Xen. Anab. No one hin' 
 dering. 
 
 The enemy being encamped l;^^gw vtf ecvrc^ rn^og * j^Sk^u- 
 
 under the very walls. ^xt. Eurip. Phoeniss. 
 
 Now think that your chil* a^ ovk It av a-og nKvov (pgayn* 
 
 dren are no more. ^a ^jj. Eurip. Med. 
 
 And the Syracusans and xui nK*u ^ * cl 'Zv^etzoo-ioi xut 
 
 their allies having been ot a-vf^^x^ci, koci viK^og vTram 
 
 vanquished, and having G-jrov^og »vxi^iof6»t» ^ * Thu- 
 
 carried off their dead un- cyd. 
 der a truce. 
 
 } There being written laws, 'y^ec(pai p p*** 2i o vo^o^f o t 
 
216 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 both the weak and the 
 rich have equal justice. 
 
 The wall being weak, and 
 in one place even fallen 
 down, being also built 
 low, and at the same 
 time the gates standing 
 open through security. 
 
 Yes, the storm being in- 
 deed such as you men- 
 tion, food having failed, 
 not as much wine at hand 
 as to be smelled, num- 
 bers dispirited with fa- 
 tigue the enemy pressing 
 on. 
 
 For Chserephon once con- 
 sulting at Delphi con- 
 cerning me, many being 
 present, Apollo replied^, 
 that no man was more 
 independant than I, or 
 juster, or more prudent. 
 
 ia-os l^ej,^ Eurip. Suppl. 
 (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 TO ni^og U(rhv7)s av, xeci le-ro 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 Trot, P *"* eivos ^i jWjjS' o<r- 
 
 <P^»lVa -TTU^aVj VTTO ^g Wfl- 
 
 V(J5 pi veXvi ecyeccyogivofy tco^ 
 Xifctcg^^ Jg l-7rc^eti» Xen. 
 
 Anab. 
 
 gv AgAipo; TTig} lyo), uvut^zu 
 
 lya jLc^tn gAgy^gg<oj, fi^n ^Z- 
 xectosi fAnn <rci(p^av» Xen, 
 Apol. 
 
 And they, as (when) a herd of oxen, or a large flock 
 of sheep two wild beasts alarm (xXona pi) on the eve 
 (ufcoXyog) of a dark night, having come suddenly, the 
 keeper (sentinel, (rvifMvrejg) not being present. Horn. 
 (3 Hexam.) 
 
 Note. Instead of a substantive the genitive of the article with 
 the infinitive is often construed with a participle : thus, us ovhiTon, 
 
 * See Rule 1 1 1, of the Concord and Government of Pronouns. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 217 
 
 i^Puf l^ovTOS evTi rav aJ/K«j^, turs rou ivrxSiKiiv. Plato Crito, Since it 
 is never a proper thing either to do an injmy or revenge it. a.k>.&>i 
 rz ^n xeu rou yvuvai ri rav "diovruv b kqivm x,st£i(rraros vfitv, ISQCr. 
 Atxhid, us rod yt uTrodamv uTrag^avros '/i^^i. -Lysias c. Eratosth. 
 
 Observ. 1. To the genitive absolute grammarians 
 have added the dative and accusative. The dative, how- 
 ever, may be shown in most cases to be governed either 
 by a verb or a preposition understood. In the following 
 sentence it is used instead of the genitive : zi^yofAivois ovv 
 ctVTOis rng B'ccXac-a-n^f xxt kxtcc ysjv Trog^ovfx^ivoii;^ hij^u^nrxv rmg 
 TT^tg 'A&nvoiiov? etyccysiy mv 'xohiv* Thucyd, VIII. 245. See 
 also VI. 82. The accusative is used particularly by the 
 Attics. But in most cases, what has been called the ac- 
 cusative absolute is in reality the nominative, which ocr 
 curs much more frequently: thus, in the following passage 
 of Xenophon's Cyropaedia, /SovXc^zvog h nvot Ku.ros.<rK07rov ttbu^ 
 ipxt Itti Av^Mg, XXI fAxhiv ort Tr^xa-trn 'As-a-u^iog., l^o^iv uvro) Ixi- 
 tn^itog tivxi 'A^xa-TTxg lx6uv Itti rovro. ' Wishing to send 
 some one as a spy to Lydia, and to learn what the As- 
 syrian was doing, Araspas appeared to him to be a fit 
 person to go upon this business.* Here /iavXofavog is in 
 the nominative, when the regular construction requires it 
 to be in the dative to agree with xvra. Thus also in the 
 Iphig. in Taur. of Euripides we find, h6m ^' hua-Sf 7r^6>rx 
 ^19 (^ oxi^itg ^ivav Ixati ^i^xf, cog ^6oig (rrvyovf^ivov, for the 
 more common construction of Ixdovrx §', or Ix^ovrog Ifcov, 
 &c. ; and in the Antigone of Sophocles, ^vXxl Ixty^m (f>v- 
 Xxxxy guard blaming guard. In the following passage 
 from the CEdip. Col. of Sophocles, v. 1120, litcvx il ^xmr 
 xiXTTTx f^nKvva Aoyov, Brunck makes nxvxy &c. the accusa- 
 tive absolute. In my opinion it ought rather to be con- 
 sidered the nominative, agreeable to the example from 
 Eurip, quoted above. He seems to be equally wrong in 
 another passage of the CEdip. Tyr. ag t«v§' xl^x ^u^x^ov 
 -TToXtvy V. 101. xlfAx he confers either the nominative er 
 
 P 
 
218 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 accusative absolute. But the sentence is elliptical, and 
 ought to be supplied by the verb la-n, which is frequently 
 construed with participles, as in the following sentence, 
 ri TT^oTUKcv h Ixio-Sxi. Demosth. tts^i crretp. and as may be 
 seen in the Observ. under Rule VII. : thus, ag tjjv^' ul^a 
 {l(rTt) ^itfcx^cv TToXiv. Since blood is deluging this city. — 
 In the speech of ^schines against Ctesiphon, the latter 
 part of the sentence stands independent of any other 
 word, and is in the nominative : furx rccvrcc Ittviu o p^jgow?, 
 etfAtfTTOKM? ei^xav. After this came the time, Themisto- 
 cles being archon; for, Qe^KrroKXovs ci^^ovrog. Perhaps, 
 however, the sentence is elliptical, and may be supplied 
 thus: x^ovos, (w a) QifA. (^y) u^x>'"v. Several other in- 
 stances of a similar construction might be produced ; the 
 following will be sufficient: ^i^f^t yxg civ xxrotnva-xt v^rsg* 
 funec Kgov<&/vfl6, uTr^ciTrrav l;r<5g|/ IvxiTt^x o-vifictTx (pxivur, 
 UTT^d^ruv for uTT^UTrrovrx, Horn. II, /S'. 350. Ǥ' eiyXxtyi(pi tci- 
 TTdtda^f ^i^<Pec I yovvoc (pi^st f^irce, r itha xect vofAov /Vira/y. Id. 
 ^'. 510. Svv Ts ^y' l^'^o^ivej, &c. k, 224.- See LijsiaSj 
 p. 812, Reiskes Oratores, for an example both of a no- 
 minative and genitive absolute in the same sentence. — 
 The Latin writers have also sometimes adopted a similar 
 construction. Thus, in the Hecyra of Terence : Nam nos 
 omneSf quibus est alicunde aliquis pbjectus labos, omne 
 quod est interea tempiis, priusquam id rescitum esty lucro 
 est. Act. 3. Sc. 1. Some Editions, however, have nobis 
 omnibus, 
 
 Observ. 2. The participles of some impersonal verbs,, 
 such as l|op, -TFcc^ov, ^icv, ^oKovvy do^civ, Xi^ioiVy &c, may be 
 frequently considered either in the nominative absolute, 
 or governed by the praeposition kxtu. or fjtir» under- 
 stood. The adjective ^vmrov is used in a similar manner : 
 as, 7Foin<ro^iy uvrovg ^u^ov ^vjv, ^vvxrov uvTcig ufAiivav, Plato de 
 Rep, and the participle h in the sense of llox : as, t/ ow^ 
 t^n K^noQovXcSf ^f*^t r»VTo Xzyug^ iirvs^ cvk Itti ra of ; Xcn, 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 219 
 
 Mem. Sometimes, as was remarked on the passage 
 quoted from the (Edip. Tyr. of Soph, the substantive 
 verb ufAi is understood : thus, oinn^ cvta tts^} ^ix^uv mv 
 ^vHvo^sVf \%6v eiha^ ^aXXct xsKTri(r6xi. Isocr. Who are thus 
 exposing ourselves to dangers for trifles, it being in our 
 power to possess many things in security, ^u^ov xvrf 
 xxT i^ova-iuv KOf^xv. Lucian. When it was in his power 
 freely to indulge his pleasures. The substantive verb is 
 occasionally supplied: thus, Sophocl. CEdip. Tyr. 126. 
 Aoxevvrd recvr iv, Demosth. w. ors^. ri tt^co-'Ukoii ^f sXiff-doct 
 
 Being mortal, it behoves us ^v h ^*»jra?, *^ ^vvirov p^ fcect 
 
 to think wisely of morta- (p^ona ^^luv. Eurip. Al- 
 
 lity. cest. 
 
 As it will be requisite that a^ ^gov ^ ^ kui ovrost aa-vig Kxt 
 
 a general attend to these vjreg « vr^ttrv^ytec. ^ o cr^ec* 
 
 also, as well as about the ryiycg^^ iTrtfuXio^xh Xen. 
 
 command of an army. Cyr, 
 
 Note. The following neuter participles frequently occur in a 
 similar form of construction ; hx^e^ov, when of consequence. ivh;^efif 
 vov, when likely. \y)i^ugouv, when allowed, ^u^affxov, when in one's 
 power. ^a^KTu^oVf when circumstances inermitted. h^ayfityev, when it 
 seemed good, ^^offtixov. when fitting or necessary, ^^ocrrux^iv, when or- 
 dered, ru^ov Ss. by chance. ii^'/i/u,iyov ; lyytvofitvoi, ro Xiyoftivev, as they 
 say. Some neuter adjectives are used absolutely with the participle o£ 
 I'lfi), as a^vvarov ov. Thucyd. VII. 44. It being impossible, pa^iav St. — 5 
 y«g vetis ^ciirrBiv ff(p\ arofp*iT0v -roXu. Soph, Antig. It being prohibited 
 by the state, ^c. 
 
 P2 
 
220 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule VII. Participles as they denote qua- 
 lities in action, may, with the Article most 
 commonly prefixed, be substituted for the 
 names of agents : as, 'Tr^og rov Ixp'jrcA o phvog 1^- 
 5rg/. Soph. Envy creeps to the person posses- 
 singy i, e, to the possessor. 
 
 Seeking the advantage of 
 
 the traitor. 
 And to which part of the 
 
 repugnant ? 
 Your son shall slay you. 
 
 f And loud rejoicing accom- 
 panied us, rendering both 
 the deceased and myself 
 happy. 
 
 Such as are the exertions 
 of men now exercising 
 their reason, and still vi- 
 gorous. 
 
 Do not, sister, deprive me 
 of the honour of dying 
 with you, and of perform- 
 ing a sacred duty to the 
 deceased. 
 
 Dem. ?r. c-Ts^. 
 
 Plato Crito. 
 
 ci^6Kretvcj crv o <pvfci. ^ ^ Eurip. 
 Phceniss. 
 
 « TS B'vviTKU ^ ^ Keti lyo) oA- 
 
 Q>i^a. Eurip. Alcest. (2 
 Anapaest. Dim.) 
 oa-oq (previa rs k^a l^yov Irri, ksh 
 In ^vvetfiuu Xen. Cyr. 
 
 ^^ 1 a su ^Q ^^ Q^ B-vti(rK6) ~ ^ 
 
 re c-vv G-v, 
 
 B-' 
 
 uyvi^a. ^ * Soph. Antig. 
 (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 For neither does wealth confer distinction (KuXog) on 
 the cowardly possessor (on the person possessing with 
 cowardice), for such a man enriches (7rX«yTSA») another, d 
 and not himself. Plato. 
 
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 221 
 
 For arrogance (ccv$o6^ix) in a foolish person (<pgavg<y) 
 Is of itself weaker than nothing (^i7ov (r&ha.) iEschyl. 
 Prom. (2 Iamb. Trim.) 
 
 Observ. 1. Participles with the article, are frequently 
 used as abstract nouns : thus, ret. yivo^&vcc, Jacultates, to 
 ytyvo^tvov, justum, dehitum, propriurriy verum, al %<rixi at 
 yiyvo^ivxi* sacrificia solennia, ra nve^ia-fuvxy instituta, r» 
 vTFx^^ovTx, Jacultates, vel subsidia. to ^ixcps^ov, pr^tium, t« 
 'TTi^i^oVi aer, to (7-v(f.(^i^ovy utilitas. to Kix^vost hiatus, n etzov 
 (t6EV)j, orbis terrarum, ^ ^sTr^&t^ivvi vel ufix^f^ivvi, Jatunif S^c, 
 also without the article : as, xxi to p^xMttov mafcmv 5rgoj 
 
 Toy J TToXS/iiOV? i^OKZl ilVXl, XCU. Auab. 
 
 Observ. 2. The participle of any verb construed with 
 any tense of i'lfAt, points out the precise time when an 
 action is performed better than a particular tense of the 
 verb itself: thus, Icrr* y2^a,(pavj he is in the act of writing. 
 Tt TO KXTxMiTcofAivov ItTTi ', M>sch. ddv, Ctcs, What is in 
 reality left ? f^irx txZtx ^»j Xzym Io-tiv o Nse-r^g x,at vttow 
 Cifiivog xvro). Plato Hipp, MaJ. After these Nestor is 
 speaking and suggesting to him. to h Tm ^^zn^x? hx- 
 voix? la-Txt yiyiVTi^Avov, Isocr, The Other will have hap- 
 pened through our folly, tov kx&x^xvtx xwoXaXexag sU. Hem 
 rodpt. He had destroyed his purifier, ^xx' ovr' ivXoyov, 
 ovT ix^ov la-Ti (pvo-iv tovto ys. Demosth. Oil/nth. 2. But this 
 is neither reasonable nor natural, jixt f^n tx xvrx yivacrKoi- 
 Tig ^Tg. Demosth, Tn^t cwrx^. doKovvrx txvt «v. Soph. CEdipm 
 Tyr. 126. Kx) yx^ iyyvg tvjj Bu^xg K^n ^x'hi^cov iff6i tjic-o". 
 Aristopk, Ran, "Ekto^, vvv ^h Trxy^c^ MXxc-fthog its iTrixov^ay, 
 II. TC . 538. oi/T oyv TTPOoucrxs ii[*t T« ye vvv Xoya, SophocL 
 
 CEd. Tyr. v, 90. 
 
222 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 VIII. OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Rule I. Adverbs are joined to Substan- 
 tives, Adjectives, Verbs, Participles and other 
 Adverbs : as, sroXyyg rirrov^ multo minus, far 
 less. Xen. 
 
 And from this period many kxi voXv w«a«5 I« rovrov uv- 
 
 more men courted him. to? ^gg«9rgo« hi^uvti, ^ 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 And it was said that he u^x>^ V vtto eixxot ^ ov f*ccXx 
 
 was not very willing to l^sAw hiytf^cci* Xen. Anab. 
 
 he governed by others. 
 
 Then fly in swarms upon /Sor^v^ov ^t 'xirofjuti itc uv6c( d 
 
 the vernal flowers. ilu^ivos. Hom. 
 
 But he thought that the gods were much gratified {xeu^6>) 
 with the honours from the most pious. Xen. 
 
 Note. For the formation of adverbs, see Moor's Grammar, part II, 
 page 74. 
 
 Rule II. Adverbs govern the same case 
 as the Adjectives, Verbs, &c. whence they 
 are derived : as cc^wg hoyov j "worthy of esti- 
 mation. 
 
Of ADVERBS. 
 
 223 
 
 And I am honoured most ni^tcta h f^xXtrrec «•«?. Xen, 
 
 of all. Mem. 
 
 Sufficiently for me. l^rasgxat/vTw? h lya. Soph. 
 
 Elecj. 
 The slaves no less than the tv^iv ^rrdv el 2ovXai tXtvSs^^* 
 
 free men. Xen. Qilcon. 
 
 § For to be forced to ex- 
 tend ones journey farther 
 than a reasonable distance 
 is hard. 
 
 For an enemy to me (is) 
 he like the gates of Hell, 
 who conceals one (thing) 
 in his mind, and speaks 
 another. 
 
 ^etXiTTOi. Xen. Mem. 
 IxH^i y*C ^y^ fciivoi e/^a? Ai- 
 
 ^g fiut^a. Hom. II. (2 Hex- 
 am.) 
 
 Note. I. Sometimes adverbs are used instead of adjectives: as 
 kXXik ««/ ro fivtifin -rakXot X'^ffouffiv a.'^ius vfAtav. Xen. Cyv. But num- 
 bers shall also dig a tomb worthily (worthy) of you — In the writings 
 of the Poets in particular, adverbs are frequently used instead of their 
 kindred adjectives. 
 
 NoTK 2. There is an obvious distinction between the adverb, quali- 
 fying the verb, and the adjective agreeing with the noun ; thus, ^uiias 
 h B^iypaifi alius Vofiuv Iftuy. Eurip. Med. 562. means, And I woul^ 
 educate my children in a manner worthy of my family ; whereas, tai^ 
 }iti--alious VofMn ifieiit would signify, — children worthy of my family. 
 
224 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule III. Adverbs of time^ place, quanHtyy 
 order, exception, and the like, govern the 
 Genitive, These are ay;^/, near; akig, enough; 
 dviVy mthout; ccTTccvevh, apart; ccre^, without; 
 ax^t, till or until ; hxa, separately or mthout ; 
 lyyvg, near ; ixac, Jar from ; Uoi7i, on account 
 of; izTog, beyond, or out of; mxoc, * Jbr, for 
 the sake of; hrav&a, there ; brog, into or with- 
 in ; bcoTTiov^ in the sight of; l^a>, without; ha, 
 into or in ; 'Ttov where, roi whither, 'itri in what 
 way. Z'Tcri in what way, otoi whither. K^v(pa^ 
 without the knowledge of; KccO^cx,, without the 
 knowledge of; (jjSTa^v, during, in the midst of; 
 (jt^iy^i, as far as, unto ; '^ekag, near ; ttb^k, 
 contrary to ; 'Trkriv, except; 'ttoi, 'tttj, 'ttov, ottov 
 or oVo/, im, where : thus, ov yrjg ei[jui. Plato. 
 Where I am. ^opp^y, far from ; 'Tt^oak, I'TTi'Tr^ah, 
 'Tt^oskv h l(jij'7r^o(Thv, before ; axi^ov, near ; rnkz 
 h rrfkov^farfrom ; %ag/v,jfor th^ sake of; x^^'?> 
 without. 
 
 TSf&tiE 1. ayx* arid eikie sometimes govern the dative ; &fitt, with the 
 praeposition aw, understood, always. 
 
 Note 2. jtXjjv has sometimes the nominative after it : grXn* el ru» 
 ^ut^av 'h^a<f»ct\oi. Xen, Cyr. Except the teachers of the boys. 
 
 * \nx.a or slnxa^ has sometimes the meaning of with regard to, 
 as far as dejyends upon ; vou (pvXaffffovros i'mxtn. Herodot. as far as de- 
 pends upon his guardian. See also Demoslh, Qli/nth. 2. 
 
OF ADVERBS. 
 
 225 
 
 Rule IV. m and (Jjcc, ^ used ia adjuration 
 or swearing hy^ govern the Accusative : as, 
 icon vn A/a, yes by Jove. Xen. 
 
 I swear by this sceptre. wa ^a oh a-xYjTrt^ov- Horn. 
 
 No, I swear by those of ov, f*» ol h Mxpx&co^i it^wc<?5«- 
 
 your ancestors who ex- nva ^ ^ ol Tr^oyovoi. Dera. tt, 
 
 posed themselves to dan- ots^. 
 
 g er at Marathon. 
 
 Rule V, Two or more negatives com- 
 monly strengthen the negation : as, l-rs/ ovde 
 ItAv ovh hm^v. Horn. Since it is not at all he- 
 
 coming. 
 
 Nor did any one at all of 
 the Greeks suiFer any in- 
 jury in this battle. 
 
 That is, not only not to 
 prejudge any thing. 
 
 For the then Athenians did 
 not want an orator or 
 general through whom 
 they might enjoy a hap- 
 py slavery; they even 
 
 oxihi uhho? tvhi cl '£AA]3VS$ h 
 
 au§ cvhv, Xen. A nab. 
 
 TovTo ^ ks-riVf ov fAovoy to 
 ten TT^oKetretyivaff-Ka P fcri^iv* 
 Dera. TT. (rri(p. 
 
 ov y»g ^TiTia oi ron ASyiveciof 
 ovre fvirei^f ovri cT^ocrv^yos 
 ^i o<m$ ^ ^ovXiva * ^ ^ iv* 
 rv^ag* «AA' ovhi ^cta k\to(a 
 
 i\ fCT) fiiT IXivdi^teC ^ UVTO^ * 
 
 * fia ought always to follow a negative : v/i, an ajjirmati've. 
 f The idiom of the English language would require ^ovhiuf»nv av 
 instead of the future. 
 
226 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 did not think it worth l^iem ^ rovro vtmu, Dem. 
 iiohile to live unless it w. <rri(p, 
 should be permitted them 
 to do it with freedom. 
 
 He enacts a law expressly (5<«pp>35))y) forbidding («t<»- 
 yo^ivoi) to crown the responsible, ^schin. 
 
 Note 1. The negative in the Greek language does not always 
 qualify the same verb as in English : it always precedes <pvi(Jt.t ' thus, 
 oSs oIk l0u oUs r thai aWoig aiira 9ronuv. Herodot. CI. He said that 
 he could not act otherwise ; ad v. He did not say, &c. — ^y oTifih oJ ^nv) 
 %^)iven rolls viovs atrxiTv. Aristoph. Nub. 1054. 
 
 Note 2. When the negatives ov, ovh or ovn are used with the first 
 member of the sentence, they must be repeated with every subsequent 
 one requiring a negation. In like manner, if fjin, f^rth or fjcnri be first 
 used, they must also be repeated. If a negative adverb is usedjvith an 
 adjective, it ought immediately to follow it. aXX' ofius ouhis rouruv arw- 
 ^ort hct^avros ihuxtv tavrov tig cv^iv vy ToXtt. Demosth. ^i^} trn^. ti ^i 
 fjt.iiT \<rri, /x,)jrt 'hv, (/.nr av tt^ttv i^oi fitthus fjt.t^hi'ffu xu) Tjj^s^av. Demosth. 
 Id. ^inffOfAKi ^avrav vfiuv, fifj^iftteiv fitirs ;^a^'v, fMirt ui^^ct •proiiiirSat «rig/ 
 'rXionos 71 TO hxuiov, &c. Id. If the adjective pronoun Sikkos follows 
 the negatives oStb, evTs, fi^rt, f/.n^i, the negative pronoun of the same 
 description should follow it : thus, xat rous (Atv, evS' U^ov, ovn fiufiovj ourt 
 aXXo ruv ^iiuv ovlh rifAav. Xen. Mem. The following idiom deserves 
 attention, oW? fih (p^xirovffi (Ann o Kv^og (Jt-nn ol Kikixis xareikoiQoDTis ; In- 
 stead of the English idiom ; o^ug fi^rs o Ku^os fc^n x. r. x. Xen. Anab. 
 
 Observ, 1. When a negative precedes a word com- 
 pounded of the privative », the sentence is affirmative : 
 thuS) xcti uXX» 60-06 civ jiovXviy Myeov Tego^ If^i cvk ccrv^tiosi^. Xen. 
 Cyr. And whatever else you wish, mentioning it to me 
 you shall obtain it. vfi(-» ^iv ovx, uKXrirog, j^schyl. Choepk. I 
 come not uncalled for. a? cvk drvx^a-uq, vif^xi; rif^ai xai 
 Bxv^ei^av. Aristoph. Nub. 426. In the followhig senten- 
 ces the idiom of the Greek resembles the English : xxi 
 9v^ivx l^oKTocv ovT</ 6v dxx^vQVT acTOff'T^i^ia-Sxt. Xcii. Cyr. Antl 
 they said that no one whatsoever returned without shed- 
 
OF ADVERBS. 227 
 
 ing tears, it yu^ tccvtx tt^ohto dx-oviri TTi^i uv cC^iVet xivavvov 
 
 0VTIV6VV OV^ VTTSfCUVXV 01 TT^CyOVOl. Dem. TT. f£^. FOF if shc 
 
 had surrendered these without a struggle, for which no 
 kind of danger our ancestors did not brave. 
 
 Observ. 2. If a verb come between the two nega- 
 tives they form an affirmative ; thus, oJ ^wufceci fcn ^z- 
 fcttio'Sxi civrov. Xen, I cannot but remember him. 
 
 It is impossible not to be. l<m fnv d^wxros (z.v\ cvk uvxi, 
 
 Xen. de Venat. 
 He certainly will attack us. ovk lo-riv ottu? tvx. Ittiti&h- 
 
 ^< 1 f mi jj^g^^^ Xen. Anab. 
 You cannot but be a gene- cvx. ilfct ottus ovx u o-« ymot^xs 
 rous man. xw^^. Aristoph. 
 
 Observ. 3. When the particles ittjj oy, follow the article 
 TO construed with the infinitive, they ought always to be 
 preceded by a negative : as, Kovhii; yi ^ «j» Triia-mv xv6ga7rai 
 TO (Mi ovx. Ia^so Itf xurav, Aristoph, Ran. 
 
 VV9 3', ag ^vmfA, cvhv IxXai^/a ro fcn cv 
 
 ^x<rx» -xvktr&xi T«y§' xXn6uxv vzg). Soph, Track, 
 
 See also, Antig. 5^5. (Edip. Tyr, 1232. «aa' oy^gy xvrtii 
 iTriXUrxi « »)>^ix-ix ro [Mi oC^t xyxvxKriiv t>j tcx^ovo-^ tv^yi. Plato 
 Crit. Sometimes the article is omitted ; as, cvx. «% Triddi/^mv 
 |6c»i cv rx^ hfAxdiTv <rx(paq. (Edip. Tyr, 1065. An interro- 
 gative sometimes precedes ^^ cv ; as, ii ^ktx fciXXsig f^>i tv 
 yiyaviTKiiv TO vxv ; ^schyl. Prom. 64:8, see also Soph. Aj. 
 540. 
 
228 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Rule VI. The question Whither? is com- 
 monly answered by the Pra^positions g/V or Tir^og 
 with the Accusative ; — Where P by h ex- 
 pressed or understood with the Dative ; — 
 Whence / by Ijc or a^o with the Geiiitive ; — 
 and Bt/ or Through what place ? by h(x, with 
 the Genitive. 
 
 Cyrus having thus gone to 
 the Persians. 
 
 Wlien Mandane was prC" 
 paring to return again to 
 her husband. 
 
 At Mycene, npt here, in- 
 voke the gods. 
 
 § But after there came to 
 him twenty ships from 
 Syracuse, and others also 
 from Ionia. 
 
 Thence he marches through 
 Syria, and arrives at the 
 river Araxes. 
 
 flZV ^)J Kv^()$ OVTUS tCTTi^' 
 
 Xen. 
 
 Cyr. 
 
 ^ofixi as UTTiifAt P* 2 a ypf^xiy 
 ergo? umg' Id. 
 Mu»7ivc(,i, fin h6»^*y eivuKocMu 
 ^iog, Eurip. Phceniss. 
 
 Itth T l^jcof^eci^^ uvroi « ts Ik 
 
 ^o^xt di xcci vj ocxa 'laivix* 
 Xen. Hist. Gr. 
 
 gia, xoti a(ptx,nt>[ixi ergo? o 
 
 'A|fls|jj? ^roTflfjttoj. Xen. 
 Anab. 
 
 Observ. 1 The Greeks use adverbs in ^i and <n to 
 signify in or at a place : in ti, a-z, ^g, to a place : in ^iir, 
 from a place ; ^g is also added to the accusative cases of 
 substantives and adjectives to signify to a place. 
 
 There was one Euchenor— . l<rtt ^g t<? ^vx^nvu^ — Kc^t^hk 
 inhabiting houses at Qom tktov miuv, Horn. II. /. 
 rinth. 
 
OF ADVERRS. 2^9 
 
 That all come to Athens to ;r««j ^'^ p ^Jxw evn^^zva p^ i^ 
 
 hoM their convention. 'Adnvx^i. ^sch. adv. Ctes. 
 
 And having taken from A- Tr^oa-Xx^QavM ^ * ^g xxi 'A^uvji- 
 
 thens other ships and hv uXXog ts vxv^ k»i oTrMrvii. 
 
 heavy-armed troops. Xen. Hist. Gr. 
 
 But he Tvent to Lycia under avret^ o (ixiva ^ ^ Ay»<}jv^g S^ecs 
 
 the safe guidance of fche t^r' u^v^av TrofCTrvi, Horn. 
 
 gods. 
 
 They went each of them <tl ^ttev x»}CKSi&/ ^av dzt^ih 
 
 home desirous of repose. iKciTrcg. Id. 
 
 Note. The addition of B-sv to a substantive is equivalent to the pre- 
 position l» or ci'To with the genitive : thus, xXitrifi^iv is the same as l» 
 xXiffins or nXiffias : of h, to the prsposition ils with the accusative : 
 thus, ov^avovti is the same as iU tov ou^avov, &c. 
 
 Observ. 2. The Attic writers, particularly Xenophon 
 and Aristophanes, frequently use the adverb as instead of 
 the praeposition tt^o? with the accusative : thus, ^-o^zuiretc 
 a>s /Sflfff-iAgtfc »7 QvvxTd rcc^ia-ra. "Ken. Anab, He proceeds as 
 quickly as possible to the king. iy&> yot^ m f^n^xiciov tj-^si' 
 
 ftviv. For I being a youth threatened that I would go to 
 the just and wise, and orderly alone. Aristoph, Pluf. 
 88. See also v, 98. 
 
 Observ. 3. The adverbs f^iv and h are sometimes 
 employed to mark a distinction or opposition between 
 certain things by way of Anithesis, as may be sieeh in 
 almost every page of Isocrates : in this sense they may 
 be translated by some and others ; the one and the other, 
 or partly, repeated with each member of the sentence, or 
 on the one hand and on the other : as, rcc ^I't ^'zycvnZf, cag 
 ctia-j^^^es.' focT iTrocivcvvTci, c>jg koc>^u^ finding fault with some 
 things as odious, and praising others as beautiful. Plato 
 Hip, M.aj. TQietVT» (W£v ^y} TToX^oi gAflsAg; o Kv^cg' riXog ^j. 
 
230 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 n (Aiv fx>nrn^ uTTYiXdSf Kygos ^^ KotrifAin, Xen, Cyr. rm f^9 
 uTToiKoi ovTg?, rav 5s %vyyiviig» Thucyd, Being colonists of 
 the one and relations of the other. One of the finest ex- 
 amples of this contrast is to be found in Demosthenes, 'xt^t 
 
 (rTi<p. tvK siTTov (aIv Txvroc, ovK \ygcv<^» §£. cv^l iy^etr^x f^h, evx. 
 
 Latin they are generaly translated by the adverbs qiddem 
 and >oero ; — hoc quidem, illitd vero. When there is an enu- 
 meration of several particulars, ^zv k always joined with 
 the first and ds with all the succeeding (denoting connec- 
 tion or addition, as derived from ^sw Hgo), except the last, 
 which is sometimes connected by the conjunction kxi : 
 eTTdTi 5s, w iTtfSTSg, viovi l^aitv fAv T«e iTTiTVidUcc 01 (TT^ecTieJTUi, vyi- 
 ettvom 5g, vcnTv 5g dvmivro, rxs 5g ^oMf^iKctg rsXfVccs tia-KUKcris 
 8<gi/, (piXtrifAug 5' Ijcoiiv TT^og ro uyuht ^uivia-Soiif to 5g -xuha-Seci 
 eciiToig ti^iov ik Toy uTnikiv, &c. Xen. Cyr. When indeed, 
 father, the soldiers may now have provisions, and may be 
 in health and can labour, and may have practised warlike 
 arts, and are ambitious to appear brave, and it is more a- 
 greeable to them to be obedient than disobedient, &c. 
 When the first part of a sentence with (Aiv, or the latter 
 with 5g, comprises any additional circumstance, the parti- 
 cle icott is used : as, 0/ (^zv Trui^sg, uf^oc, tj? K^i^x, xxi tl nXaot 
 ecv^^ig' ol^e yi^siiTZ^Qt, &c. Xen. Cyr, ipv^viv 5g (piXccvd^aTroTccTesj 
 Kxi (piXo^xha-roiTogy xxt (ptXoTtf^trxros. Id, 5g is commonly 
 employed to begin a sentence after the first word, as con- 
 necting it with the preceding sentence, except when any 
 new matter is introduced, or a transition made, and then 
 the particle jwgv is used, f^chj however, is sometimes omit- 
 ted, unless we may suppose that it has been inadvertently 
 forgot by the first copyists : thus, Agy^yo-/ t^vs? (jwgy) on xoX- 
 Xei vTtia-y^v^] vyv — otv 5' ey yhn'^xi tv f^if^vw^xt <n : ivtoi 5s, <jy5' 
 i] K, T. A. Xen. Anab. In sentences where a detail of par- 
 ticulars is given, all springing from the same subject, %\ is 
 employed as the connecting particle with each, and xxl is 
 
OF ADVERBS. 231 
 
 sometimes used to denote some additional circumstance : 
 as, TFx^h ^g »(*) Xg<g/<ro<poj. Xen, Anab. And Chirisbphus 
 also arrived. — But when xett begins the same sentence, i. e, 
 when it denotes an adjunct not a particular, the particle rg 
 expresses something additional : as, koc) Kt/go? ts, x«r«7r5}^«c-«f 
 Ik Toy et^^xrog. Xen. Anab. And Cyrus also leaping from 
 his chariot. — It may here be remarked that the Greek wri- 
 ters commonly place the cause first in the arrangement of a 
 sentence and couple the effect with it by the conjunction 
 Kxt; our language generally reverses this order: thus, 
 uhX' oTfuoity diet TO ^iivixov ihect rov trn^etva^f, xett 4 xxSti^aa-ig yt- 
 HTxi. iEsch. c. Ctesiph. 
 
 Observ. 4. When the speaker makes an abrupt ad- 
 dress to any one, the name of the person is placed first, 
 then the pronoun, and lastly the particle ^g : thus, MmXxs, 
 e-oi ^g rxh "Kiyta. Eurip, Orest. 613. — When an adjective or 
 article is used with a noun, they precede it, and are im- 
 mediately followed by the particles ^iv and ^g : as, am 
 TTxvTx (Alv TTovav xvxtXvivxi, vmrx ^g xiv'^uvov vTro/^iivxi rov Ittxi- 
 ytis-6xi ivzKx. Xen. Cyr, thi KxfAQvo-ni; xvrog. Id. If both 
 the adjective and the article are employed, the particles 
 follow the article and precede the adjective : as. d h 
 Ui^TtKoi vo^ot. Id. Neither of these particles ever begin a 
 sentence. The same observation extends to the particles 
 T£, yg, y«g and f^vtv, 
 
 Observ. 5. When any strong asseveration is made, or 
 prayer is offered up, the adverb x>^Xx (formed from the 
 adjective pronoun uXXog, aliusy) begins the sentence ; thus, 
 «AA' on ftiVy a 'aQ^xoxtx, it rtg Kxt x>.Xvi TrcoTrors yt/vvi rov «vtj)? 
 
 eiv^^X fAU^6V Ttj? IxvTVig ipV^ng iTlfA'/iOriVf clf^Xt OS ytyVetXTKUV OTl XXI 
 
 lyu fcix Tovrcov ilfii, Xen. Cyr, Assuredly, Abradates, if 
 any other tvoman ever valued her husband above her cvon 
 life, I think you are conscious that I am one of these. — 
 AAA , u Zlv (^iyivrSf ^og /^ot (pxvvivxt »%iu f^iv TLxv6u»g xvd^t, &C« 
 
25^ SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Id, O supreme Jupiter, grant me to appear a hushand 
 worthy ofPantliea, — When a strong negative also is made, 
 «AA^ is commonly used, and may be often translated by 
 nay : thus, tvK liri^vifx.ovvrtq h MuKz^mci. ^iXiTCTraVi uXX ay^' 
 Iv rjT 'Eaa«^< TrA^ovTog ; Nay, not even in Greece : «xa' iv 
 ^Ku0cii?, ^schin. c. Ctes. 
 
 IX. OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 No part of the Greek language has occasioned more 
 trouble and difficulty, both to teachers and scholars, than 
 the praspositions. Grammarians and philologists long con- 
 tented themselves with an enumeration of the different 
 meanings they were found to assume when applied to 
 point out a variety of relations, without ever trying to 
 discover one general principle applicable to them all. 
 Hence many praepositions appeared, from the language 
 into which they were translated, to have meanings en- 
 tirely opposite, according as they were taken in a pri- 
 mary or secondary sense, according as they were applied 
 to sensible objects, or analogical and figurative relations. 
 The labours of succeeding philologists have done much to 
 remove the obscurity and diflSculty which impeded the 
 progress of students in this part of the Greek language, 
 by endeavouring to ascertain the primary, radical signifi- 
 cation of each praeposition, and thence tracing every se- 
 condary application it was found to assume. Though 
 complete light has not yet been thrown upon this ^subject, 
 owing to many traces of the original words from which 
 the praepositions were formed, being either lost or not yet 
 discovered in other more ancient languages, and from the 
 
OF PRiEPOSITIONS. 233 
 
 difficulty of reconciling the secondary meanings which 
 some praepositions have assumed to their primary signifi* 
 cations, yet enough has been done by the late Professors 
 Moor and Dalzel, by Mr. Bonar in his ' Disquisitions on 
 the Origin and Radical Sense of the Greek Praepositions,"* 
 and by the reverend Dr. Jamieson in his ' Hermes Scy- 
 thicus,' to make it much better and more generally under^ 
 stood. It must be confessed, that it is sometimes difficult 
 to ascertain the reason why the Greek authors, in parti- 
 cular instances, make a praeposition govern one case rather 
 than another, or why they occasionally use one praeposi- 
 tion in the sense of some other, to which it radically 
 seems to have no affinity. When, however, we can dis- 
 cover their original signification, and when we consider 
 that they were all at first applied to denote certain rela- 
 tions between sensible and material objects, and that they 
 were gradually extended by analogy to metaphorical and 
 figurative expressions, bearing in the mind's eye a kind 
 of resemblance to these material objects, we shall, in some 
 measure, be able to account for the varieties of meaning 
 they are found to assume. Proper attention also must be 
 paid to the verbs, adjectives, &c. which precede them, and 
 the modifications produced by means of these upon their 
 original significations. Much, besides, depends upon an 
 accurate knowledge of the nature of the three cases go- 
 verned by praepositions, of the relations intended to be 
 expressed by them, independent of all other associations, 
 and of the power of praepositions in altering or extending 
 the properties of these relations. The genitive case com- 
 monly denotes origin and possession ; f the dative, inter- 
 
 ■* Printed in the Edinburgh Philosophical Transactions, Vol. V. 
 
 f This will be apparent if we consider the formation of the Geni- 
 tive in English : thus, the expression, God's grace, was originally 
 Godis grace, and, by elision, God's grace. Perhaps the is subjoined 
 was no other than the possessive pronoun his. 
 
 Q 
 
234? SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 change or mutual communication ; and the accusative, ac^ 
 tion, or the relation between the agent and what he actf. 
 on. All the other relations, of motion or rest, time and 
 place, cause and effect, connexion and opposition, are ex- 
 pressed by praepositions. *' According to the mutual con- 
 << nexion between the ideas of place and time,'' says Dr. 
 Moor, < all praepositions express place and time equally, 
 <* though, perhaps, place was the primary idea or signifi- 
 <* cation in all of them. With respect to motion and rest, 
 « some praepositions express only the one of these, and 
 <« then they govern only one case. Others express both, 
 <' and then they govern two cases : one when they express 
 <* motion, the other when they express rest, (By motion 
 <« is always meant progressive motion, or motion towards. ) 
 <* When a Greek praeposition expresses only motion, the 
 *< one case it governs is always the accusative, or case of 
 " the active verb, by a very proper and natural analogy 
 " in language, as all external action implies motion towards 
 ** that we act upon. If my hand strike the table, it must 
 <* move towards the table. When a praeposition expresses 
 " only rest in situation, the one case which it governs is 
 " never the accusative, but always one of the other two 
 " oblique rases, the genitive or dative. When the same 
 *' praeposition expresses both motion and rest, it governs 
 '* ^100 cases ; when motion, always the accusative as be- 
 " fore 5 when rest or situation, always one of the other 
 " two, not interchangeably, but invariably, the one or 
 " other of the two." See An Introductory Essay on the 
 Prcepositions of the Greek Language.* 
 
 * It is surprising that the English and German writers on Gram- 
 mar have done so little to elucidate tlie true nature and primary accep- 
 tation of the Greek Praepositions. Matthiae, in his Grammar, has 
 followed the usual loose mode of giving a variety of examples without 
 once attempting to reconcile the most discordant meanings some of 
 them appear to bear. 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 23B 
 
 The following extracts from Wilkins' Essay towards a 
 real Character, &c. are deserving of much more attention 
 than is now paid them, even by those engaged in philolo- 
 gical speculations. I have endeavoured to arrange the 
 Greek praepositions> with the exception of a-w, as far as 
 regards their general acceptations, in their proper places 
 in the Diagram under the English praepositions. Some 
 others, that are occasionally used as prsepositions, are in- 
 cluded within brackets. A sensible representation of such 
 a kind as the diagram subjoined, is of great use towards 
 giving students a clearer notion of the relative situation 
 and motion denoted by praepositions in general. 
 
 Q2 
 
136 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Extract from Wilkins' Essay toxvards a real Character, 8fc> 
 
 Concerning Natural Grammar, Chap, III. 
 
 § 1. Of Praepositions in general. § 2. The particular 
 kinds of them. § 3. Explication of the four last combi- 
 nations of them, relating to place or time. 
 
 Those are styled connexive particles, whose proper use 
 is to express, either, 1. The construction of xvord xmth 
 tvord, called prceposition ; or, 2, The contexture of sen" 
 fence toith sentence, called adverb and conjunction, 
 
 Praspositions are such particles, whose proper office it 
 is to join integral with integral on the same side of the 
 copula, signifying some respect of cause, place, time, or 
 other circumstance, either positively or privately. These 
 having such a subserviency to nouns, in respect of which 
 they are by some stiled adnomia or adnomina and prceno- 
 mina, as adverbs have to verbs, &c. 
 
 There are thirty- six przepositions (in the English lan- 
 guage), or eighteen pairs of them, or six combinations, 
 which may, with much less equivocalness than is found in 
 instituted languages, suffice to express those various re- 
 spects which are to be signified by the kind of particle. 
 
 The two first combinations of prsepositions comprehend 
 such as are used to express causality, and may be stiled 
 causaL 
 
OF PREPOSITIONS. 237 
 
 The first combination of causal praepositions are either, 
 f More general, denoting either the author, subject 
 I or possessor of any thing, expressed in the La- 
 j tin by the genitive case : or the formal, or in- 
 j strumental cause, or manner of doing, expressed 
 I. ^ in the Latin by the ahhtive case : neither of 
 them having any particle in that language ap- 
 pointed for them, 
 
 1 rOf. Genitive case. 
 IWith. Ablative case. 
 
 _More particular, denoting either 
 
 I The efficient or i\iQ final cause, 
 
 J 2 j"By. Ab, a, per. 
 
 ^ (.For. Ob, pro, propter, 
 
 ^ The material cause, ex qua or circum quam, 
 
 2 5 Out of. Ex, e. 
 
 ' 1 Concerning,w;?o«. De, circa. 
 
 The second combination af causal praepositions contain 
 such as relate either to the notion of 
 
 Ideal and exemplary, or substitutive, 
 
 ^» r According to. Instar, secundum. 
 
 \ Instead. Pro, vice. 
 
 Social or circumstance of society : affirmed or de' 
 I nied, 
 
 j * {.Without, void of. Sine, absque. 
 [^Adjuvant and agreement with; or, opposing and 
 enmity against. 
 
 „ y For, on this side. Pro. 
 
 L Against, opposite unto. Contra. 
 
 The rest of the praepositions primarily refer to place 
 and situation ; secondarily, to time ; and some of them, 
 
2SS SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 by way of analogy, to comparison : some of these are ab- 
 solutely determined, either to motion, or to rest, or the 
 terminus (or end) of motion. Others are relatively appli- 
 cable to both ; concerning which this rule is to be observ- 
 ed. That those luhich belong to motion^ cannot signify rest : 
 hut those xvhich belong to rest, may likewise signify motion 
 in the terminus for end J, 
 
 The third combination consists of such as respect space 
 in general, being either. 
 
 Absolutely determined to 
 
 Motion, either oncoming or goings 
 yXo. Ad. 
 
 cFrom. A. 
 
 III -i iR^sf, or the tenns (end) of these motions, de- 
 noting either nearness and contiguity, or dis- 
 tance, 
 
 C At. Apud. 
 
 'lOff. Procul. 
 
 .Relative both to motion and rest, with rejspect to 
 the intermediate space betwixt those terms, ei- 
 ther direct or indirect, 
 g yOver, Trans. 
 
 ' t About. Circum. 
 
 The fourth combination consists of such praepositions 
 as respect space, with a particular restriction to the notion 
 0^ containing, being either 
 
 'Absolutely determined to 
 C Motion, whether of i?igress or egress, 
 J , r Into. In. 
 
 IV I j i Out of. Ex. 
 l^Rest, or the terms of these motions, 
 
 2 f Within. Intra. 
 
 I Without. Extra. 
 
 I Relative both to motion and rest, with respect to 
 
v.jH 
 
 OF ITviEPOSlTlONS. 239 
 
 the intermediate spaces^ either direct or indi* 
 recty 
 
 2 r Through. Per. 
 
 i[^ Beside. Praeter. 
 
 The fifth combination contains such propositions as re- 
 late to the imaginary parts of a thing y whether the 
 
 f Head or feet, being absolutely determined to 
 .Motion, either ascent or descent. 
 Upwards. Sursum. 
 
 Downwards. Deorsum. 
 
 'Rest, or the terms of these motions, 
 
 I a r Above. Supra. 
 
 I \ Below. Infra. 
 
 X^Face or hack, being relative both to motion and 
 rest, 
 
 Y Before. Ante. 
 
 (.After. Post. 
 
 The sixth combination comprehends such praepositions 
 as are applicable both to motion and rest, relating to the 
 situation of some third thing spoken of, which the speaker 
 considers as being 
 
 Higher or lovoer than that third thing, denoting a 
 
 contiguity or nearness to it, 
 - r Upon. Super. 
 
 * 1 Under. Sub. 
 
 ^^' 1 Nearer to it, ox farther from it, 
 r On this side. Citra. 
 \ Beyond. Ultra. 
 
 . In the intermediate space to two other things or 
 
 opposite to one of them, 
 ^ y Betwixt, 5e^tuee7z. Inter. 
 
 t Against, over against. Adrerbus. 
 
240 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 For the clearer explication of these local prcepositionSi 
 1 shall refer to the following diagram : in which, by the 
 oval figures, are represented the prcepositions determined 
 to motion^ wherein the acuter part points out the tendency 
 of that motion. The squares are intended to signify rest^ 
 OY the term (termination) o^ motion ; and by the round 
 figures are represented such relative praepositions as may 
 indifferently refer either to motion or rest. 
 
 Some of these praepositions, viz. above, helotv, before, 
 after, are by common analogy applicable to signify com' 
 parison^ which use being generally received, and the 
 words having in them a natural suitableness to this pur- 
 pose, there is no danger of any am biguity. 
 
 Several of the praepositions are sometimes used adver- 
 bially, as, ante, post, prceter, contra, inter, infra, S^c, 
 which use, when it happens, the sense will easily distin- 
 guish. The difference between these two parts of speech, 
 praepositions and adverbs, being so nice, that it is hard 
 in some cases to distinguish them ; upon which it is ques- 
 tioned, whether every praeposition, as it compounds a 
 verb, does not put on the nature of an adverb; and it 
 seems to be so, because it modifies the act after the same 
 manner as adverbs do, as in the words prceficio, benefacio^ 
 

 
 
 til V 1- Iv 
 
OF PR.EPOSITIONS. 241 
 
 There are eighteen Praepositions, properly 
 so called, in the Greek lanugage : Of these. 
 Four govern the Genitive only, viz. ' Ai^r/, ' Ato, 
 'Yjc^ or 'E|, n^o : T'wo the Dative only, viz. 
 'Ey and Sy;' : Ttc^o the Accusative only, viz. E/V 
 and 'Ai'a : Four the Genitive and Accusative, 
 viz. A/a, Kara, Msra and 'T^gg : and the other 
 Six the Genitive^ Dative and Accusative^ viz, 
 'A|W,^/ rigp/, 'E^;, HgoV, Haga and 'Tto. 
 
 1. Of sueh Propositions as govern the Gent- 
 
 f five only. 
 
 'AvtI 
 
 This praeposition is derived by Lennep and Sclieide * 
 from an obsolete noun uvq, having in the genitive uvrog, 
 signifying front or face, 'A'jtx, as Mr Bonar observes, 
 appears to be its accusative case, and is in frequent use 
 with Homer as an adverb, to express before, in face ofi 
 Iliad, g'. 167. uXXx <rvy AixvTog (AiyccMro^o^ cvk Irct^&xp 
 c-nfifiivxi uvTX, The adjectives avnog and havrtagy and 
 the adverb uvivc^vg, have the same meaning ; all clearly 
 
 * In the etymological discussions, reference is made to *' Lennep 
 and Schcide's Etymologicum Linguic Griecas," " Mr Eonar*& Dis^ 
 quisition" and " Dr Jamieson's Hermes Scythicus." 
 
242 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 shewing that the radical sense of this preeposition was in 
 Jront qf^ : cog 'Ekt6>^ tSva-s nag xvotvoir^a^oi^ 'Avrtog eti%»g, II. 
 «. 694. Thus Hector rushed right against the dark-prowed 
 ship. In this sense it is used by- Homer in the following 
 passage : ^XotTvxv 7r6^(pv^inv civr o(p9»Xfiotiy uvcta-^ay, Odyss. 
 S', 115. Holding up his purple cloak before, (in front 
 of) his eyes. — This acceptation of the prseposition uvn 
 came to be more commonly expressed by the praeposition 
 9rgo, though it ought to be observed, they differed in their 
 primary meaning ; 4vt< denoting an object fronting ano- 
 ther, i. e. having its face turned to'voards the other ; while 
 TT^o signified the position of a body in front of another, or 
 simply before. But as both denoted position before, they 
 came in the common use of language, to have this general 
 signification. — From the primary application then of cent 
 to an object fronting another, arose other significations, 
 deduced from the nature of the bodies so placed rela- 
 tively to each other : Thus, uvrt sometimes denoted 1st, 
 Opposition, from a hostile body coming in front of ano- 
 ther : 2d, Comparison, because objects were frequently 
 brought forward in front of each other for the purpose of 
 being compared. 3d, Preference, the act consequent up- 
 on comparison; and 4th, Substitution. This last is the 
 most general, and has been derived from the practice of 
 exchanging commodities by way of barter, in which one 
 object was placed before another to ascertain their respec- 
 tive values ; and hence, when the exchange was agreed 
 upon, the one was substituted for the other. The follow- 
 ing examples will illustrate these observations : 
 
 * *♦ It is undoubtedly," says Dr Jamieson, " the same pl•a^position 
 which appears in a variety of forms in the Gothic and German dia- 
 lects: Mass. Goth, anda, and. A. S. and : Alem. ante, anl, ande, cut. 
 Ibl. Su. G. and. Belg. ont:* Hcrm. Scyth. p. 17. 
 
OF PRiErOSITIONS. 
 
 243 
 
 Hector made head against 
 (in front of) the illustri- 
 ous Ajax. 
 
 That an honourable death is 
 preferable compared with 
 SL base life. 
 
 I would prefer freedom be- 
 fore all that I have. 
 
 A man whom Jupiter loves 
 in his heart is indeed he- 
 fore many people. 
 
 He shall reign instead of 
 (substituted for) him. 
 
 Are you not carrying out 
 this corpse fn^^earf of your- 
 self? 
 
 For let thanks be repaid 
 ixiith thanks (thanks sub' 
 stituted for thanks.) 
 
 *EjiT6»g S' «vT« Aaxs ii^k 1 a "^i 
 KvheiXifAoq. Hom. II. 
 
 uigirc^ * \<yTi xccXof Bx9Xtc§ 
 civn eci<r^^6s /3<oj. Xen. 
 de rep. Laced. 
 
 k i^a Tret?, Xen. A nab. 
 
 UVTt VV TTdXVi AflSO? P^ 
 
 Hom, 
 fixcTiXivu civr hcust?. Xen. 
 Anab. 
 
 CtAA* tV VV ViK^O? UfTi TV COS 
 
 lK(pi^a i Eurip. Alcest. 
 Eurip. Hippol. 
 
 1 a su 
 
 In composition it commonly retains its primary signifi- 
 cation, and frequently governs a noun in the same sen* 
 tence : thus, «aa' uyrof^xi <n Tjjc-^g ^r^og yimoc^og. Eur. Med, 
 But I entreat you (fall down before as a suppliant) by this 
 beard. viTirXuv Mvkui f4,iXei9ecg uvToiX>KCt^of4,cci. Eurip. Hel. 
 I will make a change by substituting black instead of 
 white robes. 
 
 Placing our situation in op- 
 
 position to theirs. 
 They could not resist (hold 
 
 themselves before them), 
 
 but gave way. 
 Then his noble friends car- tl fi,iv u^ ecvnkos ^ecgm^Mv 
 
 TflS iKllVtl ^ ICb «/6AgTgg6J UyTiriCil'* 
 
 fci, Plato Alcib. 1. 
 e^i ovK ^vveifMt *™ uvri^&>, «eAA 
 etvx^cc^tfcai. Xen. Anab. 
 
244 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 ried the godlike Sarpe- hos Iruigo^ w^i^ea ^roAE^ttoj. 
 don (who might be com- Horn, H. 
 pared with a god) out of 
 the battle. 
 
 This praeposition is frequently understood after verbs of 
 buying and selling: thus, t) iTr^i/M {^hrt) recXetvrav cvk eAar- 
 tcv -Tvivrz iceci iiKoiri. Thucyd, What was sold for no less 
 than twenty- five talents, fjt^ii^u ys ^zvrot [uvn) r^g l^jj? <r«- 
 rtt^ixs tiX7i(pxg i} ^i^coKotq. Eurip. Med, 534. See Gram, 
 Fragm. p. 36. § 3. and Lamberti Bos, Ellip, Ed, Sckceffl 
 
 Lennep and Scheide derive this praeposition from an 
 obsolete verb uTva, which, they say, signifies " premendo 
 ^' nitendove admoveo, adapto, unde superest «7rT4>, Lati- 
 ** ne apto, i, e, necto. — Proprie autem est genitivus anti- 
 " quus quasi a nomine cctto?" It is to be regretted that 
 so much of the etymology of the Greek language, parti- 
 cularly the propositions, adverbs, and conjunctions, is found- 
 ed on mere conjecture. Lennep and Scheide, through 
 attachment to a system, have frequently fallen into this 
 error. They have invented words which probably never 
 Ijad an existence, and affixed to them meanings to cor- 
 respond with the signification of the words whose origi- 
 nal they endeavoured to trace. Such seems to be their 
 derivation of this praeposition, first from uttu and then 
 from «5ro?, distant or remote. In support of the latter, a 
 line from the Phcenissae of Euripides is quoted, in which 
 uTFoq occurs ; but great doubts have been entertained of 
 the genuineness of the reading, several critics supposing 
 that Kccxcq, fotigue, and not w^s-oj, length or distance, was 
 tlie word used by Euripides. (See Valckenacr's observa- 
 tions on the 858th line.) Homer, however, appears to 
 
OF PRiEPOSITIONS. 245 
 
 have used the adjective ccV/05 in the sense of longinquus^ 
 Jar off: thuSj Otlyss. 57'. 18, Ia^ovt \% uTrm ^m» The ad- 
 verb oi'\>, commonly translated retrOi appears to me to 
 bring us nearer the root of this praeposition than any thing 
 I have seen stated. Its general signification is evidently 
 off from y as rstp^jsos «4' 6o(T«.7Ht. Horn, II. f&'. 420. to drive 
 off from the wall. Relatively to the assailants indeed it 
 signifies bach f-om^ but with respect to the xjoalU the ob- 
 ject of attackjiand to which it ought to apply, it denotes 
 (fffrom, TKV a."^ he %zi^av %Mra x.^ii(rov Ayoiuif/^vcov. II. tt. BS„ 
 
 IL x\ 759. See also II. tt. 441. Before the double con- 
 sonants were used it would be d-Trgy and in the genitive 
 uTTog, which would likely be pronounced without the g, 
 when it came to be used as an independent word> and 
 would then have the same signification as assigned to the 
 nominative, viz. off from, denoting the origin of one thing 
 from another, that other being the subject. — There can be 
 no doubt that the Latin praeposition ab is the same as cctto j 
 and abs seems to point directly to its affinity with d^' or aVf, 
 the X only being converted into a by a mute of the same 
 order. It is evidently the same as the Anglo-Saxon pro- 
 position afy which is now written of, and which, it is as- 
 serted by Priscian, was used by the ancient Latins for ab, 
 as in the law of the Twelve Tables : ' Sei Pater filiora ter 
 venumduit, of patre liber estod.' It may be farther re- 
 marked, that Horace uses the praeposition ab in composi- 
 tion with the same force as «Vo; thus, <* Mox ubi satis 
 *« lusit abstineto Irarum, dixit, callidceque rixcB^ Od. III. 
 27. * Its most common application is to sipace or corporeal 
 objects, denoting the beginning or origin of one t\im^ from 
 
 * It is probable that the paragoge <pt or <piv is the dative of A\^, gen, 
 «ra; : d. air/, kp, by Aphjcresis ^/, — s« Sss^^v ^oXsftiXu, II. g* 
 
24<6 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 another; hence it was easily transferred to signify the 
 " commencement of one period of time Jrom another:" 
 because, in all representations of this nature, mankind 
 affix to the progress of time a material image founded on 
 the extension of space, to aid their conceptions. It also, 
 in common with most of the .other praepositions, denotes 
 modes of action directed Jrom. 
 
 1. They departed Jrom (^ori- 
 gin of their departure) 
 Miletus. 
 
 To appoint magistrates^ow 
 the bean [origin of their 
 election). 
 
 As far beneath hell as hea- 
 ven is Jrom the earth 
 (point whence the dis- 
 tance is measured). 
 
 He hunted on horseback 
 ^Jrom a horse, xvkence 
 the action was directed). 
 
 .2 From the naval engage- 
 ment [origin of the mea- 
 surement of the time) un- 
 til the battle in the island. 
 
 To turn the ships at one 
 signal (the commencement 
 of the turning). 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 U^^UV UTTO KVUfCOg xct6tffrufcxi, 
 
 Xen. Mem. 
 
 roo-o-cv evggd' 'AV5g6>, crtv tv^ec- 
 vo$ u^t U7F6 yxin, Horn. 
 
 ^vi^ecej uTTo hrTTcs, Xen. Anab. 
 
 ^jjo-os fAcij^n' Thucyd. 
 
 «^6 a-vifiuov iU l^io-r^i(p» « 
 VXV5, Id. 
 
 In composition the same meaning may be observed, 
 with this addition, that it sometimes signifies a'wat/ Jrom, 
 off Jrom, and it frequently governs a noun in the geni- 
 tive : thus, uTn^bfioti kukuv, i. e. l^o^xi utto kuku*, I hold 
 myselfyrom mischief. ctTro^oiivu, I go Jrom. ocTro^otXP^ef^ I 
 throw Jromy &c. 
 
OP PRiEPOSITIONS. 247 
 
 Or I will dismiss you both » cifc<poTs^oi M7ro%-efC7ru i f n^i 
 
 Jrom the feast. to cvfiTroartov. Lucian. 
 
 But she refused (she de- ^ 5g «9ro<pj)/w< ^ * ^ttgy. Xen. 
 
 clared off from his pro- Cyr. 
 
 posal). 
 
 It appeared to Cyrus and ^ox« ^* x.m Kygo5 x«* «< 4a- 
 
 the rest that he had given Xci uTroytyvaa-Ku p » to /kas- 
 
 up the idea of fighting xt(Acct, Id. Anab. 
 
 (he formed a resolution 
 
 aiuayjrom fighting). 
 
 Note 1. For certain phrases, such as ol asra tjJ? ^evXuSf Senatores^ 
 &c. and the ellipsis of this praeposition, see the Fragmenta to Moor's 
 Grammar, pp. 37, 38. and Lamberti Bos. Ellips. 
 
 Note 2. The privative a, implying commonly negation, is no 
 other than this prasposition abbreviated : thus, ^oXifjtos war ; aira- 
 y.i(A.es, unwarlike, i. e. away from war. aXxvi, strength ; avukxig, 
 without strength, i. e. away from strength. In this example, and 
 in many others, the v is inserted to prevent the disagreeable hiatus 
 in the pronunciation of the two vowels. There are a few instances in 
 which the v is not inserted, probably because the spiritus asper was ori- 
 ginally pronounced betwixt them : thus, ko^utos, invisible ; ai"^^/?, un- 
 skilful ; a'tltis, the grave or hell (dark, obscure) : amtrnrosy invictus, 
 unconquered, &c. — Some have supposed that ava not asra abbreviated 
 was used as the privative a, : but the general meaning of the latter 
 accords better with the common use of this particle than the former : 
 besides, ao-a is frequently found in composition with a negative sense : 
 thus, a^oTtftos is the same as art/nos : a-^ohtrras as uhffros, apptiray ne- 
 fanda, u'^opp}]raf nefanda. Demosth. ^n^t ffri(p» x|. aS^oras and oc-ravd^u- 
 ?r»5 are used by ^schylus at the beginning of the Prometh. Vinct. in 
 the same sense. 0vr(!i; Bs x£s< ffoi r^(A u^uvhctvovr l^«, Soph. Antig. 501. 
 ouHK k'rrirtfji.vtffi ^o^uiKia IltiXBtmu. Horn. 77. v. Il3. a.'jra'yo^ivea.velo, Xen. 
 Cyr. aToxai^tov. Soph. Phil. 456. the same as kxcci^ov. aTrohKiftu^a, non 
 probo. ^schin. Ctes. See Kosn. ad Greg* Cor, de Dialect, p. 250. 
 
248 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 'Ez or *E|. 
 
 The latter form of this prasposition, which must have 
 been originally Ixj, * and which corresponds with the La- 
 tin exj appears to me to have been first in use, the s being 
 afterwards occasionally omitted. 
 
 It has, in all probability, been formed from the verbal 
 adjective Ixo?, quitted or left ; the verb l«<y, the same as 
 i]ku, cedo, I quit, yield, or give 'way, being its root. — The 
 original application of this praeposition was, like the rest, 
 1. to place and situation, denoting that one object is out 
 Jrom another : thus, \k 'tav TrcXirav iKXiyia-dxi rovg la-p^v^oTX" 
 rovg'i from which Matthiae says *^ h serves to shew a choice 
 out of several objects," not considering that the choice is 
 expressed by hXiyicrdcu. 2. by the same kind of transition 
 as was remarked of uTrc, to time. We find it also applied 
 to the materials of which a thing is made, denoting that 
 one thing is taken out of another thing. In several in- 
 stances it is used synonimously with utto, regard being had, 
 not to the primary relation the objects bore to each other, 
 but to their situation after the departure Jrom, or the com- 
 ing of the one out Jrom the other. 
 
 . Out of the adults. vc u nXuos «v«g. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 -And Ajax Jrom Salamis Aixg §' |x 2«A«/E«4-«yw ?t/d- 
 
 brought twelve ships, KxihK» vuv?. Horn. II. 
 
 * I consider this as an abbreviated expression for Ixeg. It may be 
 scarcely worth while to notice the fallacy of the etymological piocess 
 which connects the praeposition e or ex with the English substantive 
 Strange?' : thus : e, ex, extra, extraneus, etranger, stranger. How, I 
 would ask, is extra formed from ex ? To me it appears that there is 
 the assumption of another word wholly distinct from the praeposition ex, 
 and that word is evidently connected with the praeposition trans, appa- 
 rently the participle of an obsolete trao, I pass : thus in Greek ufupir^ii^ 
 TOf, pierced through : r^nvfcx, a wound. 
 
OF PRJEPOSITIONS. 
 
 249 
 
 Of bees always issuing in 
 succession out of the hol- 
 low rock. 
 
 An army being now ready 
 out of Corcyra and from 
 the continent. 
 
 But these are the customs 
 from (out of) which my 
 discipline reared the Ma- 
 rathonian heroes. 
 
 For a dream h from Jupi- 
 ter. 
 
 2. From this period Astya- 
 ges sent for his daugh- 
 ter. 
 
 After dinner (period yrom^ 
 he led forward the array. 
 
 3. Stones of{o\xi of) which 
 they make statues. 
 
 fieXiTTn ^^* ;r£Tgji he yXfi6<^«- 
 ^6g eciit noy i^X'^f^^^^' 
 Horn. 
 
 vi Ki^Kv^oi KcAi etTTc ii TjTrei^og* 
 Thucyd. 
 «AX' 0V9 recvTX hriv Ix-itug \% 
 0? eivvi^ Mx^ci6i>iyof^otxo5 *i 
 
 Aristoph. Nub, 
 
 la 
 
 Horn. 
 
 ovflfg s» Zgy? so-Tf 
 
 yatTijg. Xen. Cyr. 
 /64SC, Xen. Hist. Gr. 
 
 A<^05 ^ II (55 Td uyci,X(A» voiiu. 
 
 Theoph. 
 
 In composition it retains the same power and sometimes 
 governs its own case : thus, kS^AAjy, ejicio, I throw out; 
 htvtvgy demens, out of one's wits ; hcy.ec'KvxriiVy aperire, to 
 take off" the covering. KXsx^x'^g ^s Tore |t6gv fnx^ov g|s<pyys 
 Tfty jj«« »fl6Tfl«?rgTg(ytfn»<«^ Xen. Anah. And Clearchus then 
 narrowly escaped being stoned. The Greek idiom requires 
 the negative, narrowly escaped from not being stoned. 
 
 I will oust you from this 
 
 office. 
 If they would be forced to 
 
 quit life. 
 Don't we know that those 
 
 are the descendants of 
 
 Hercules, these of Achas- 
 
 menes. r 
 
 hcQciXXa G-v ^ rtfcri, Xen, Cyr. 
 
 d uvceyK»^co °P hcyivofAtci ^ * T* < 
 ^xa. Xen. H. Gr. 
 
 cl ^g * A^otif^'ivn? hcyticsl 
 
 Plato Alcib. 1. 
 
 R 
 
-250 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 It frequently denotes eminence, or distinction ; as what 
 is taken from a number generally possesses qualities su- 
 perior to the rest ; thus, l|fli<g£To?, eximiuSf chosen Jrom 
 among ; UTrtz^cg, valdc amarus, ver^ bitter ; hfcctv9»ve^, 
 edisco, I get by heart. 
 
 In certain phrases and with names of places it is often 
 used indiscriminately with dvco ; thus, oi »7co or he tH? ^ocig, 
 thoseyrow the Stoa or' porch, the place yrom which the 
 Stoics received their denomination, ot 1%. or utto rev vMhvgf 
 Pleheii ; oino h n<^m — 1« ^' 'l«y<«?, Jrom the islands— «wc? 
 out o/' Ionia. Thucyd. &c. 
 
 'E« is frequently joined with several substantives, adjec- 
 tives and adverbs, sometimes with and sometimes without 
 the article, and is generally translated by an adverb: 
 thus, 1% Iroiucv, promptly ; \% sTFiZovXvig, insidiose, treacher- 
 ously ; Ik tov 7rot^c6^pvifA»i and gx rev Tra^xvrtKot, &C. subitOf 
 suddeuly ; Ix rov a^ioy, unjustly, &c. See Vigerus, p. 598, 
 
 n§6 is supposed by Mr Bonar " to be derived from the 
 ** adjective 9rag«f, before, by a Syncope Tr^og, having in the 
 '* dative ;rgo, signifying, with a substantive understood, 
 *' the Jbre part, Jbre object, or object in front, ^^ In 
 Homer and other writers, ;r«g65 is frequently used as an 
 adverb signifying before in point of situation or time : otci 
 TTcc^og ^a-xv a^icrrti, II. >!, 824. : (rri^z ^ofAotrm -xa^tg, Eu- 
 rip. and tt^o itself as an adverb denoting the fore part, 
 
 thus I KVfAotrd — ergo fiiv r «AA', uvru^ Iv elxXa* II. v, 
 
 799. The waves — some before, and some behind. Al- 
 though ^oi^cg and 9r§o have a near affinity with each other 
 in point of signification, I have some doubts whether the 
 
OF PR.EPOSITIONS* 
 
 251 
 
 latter can be derived from the former, especially as we 
 find TFoi^oih formed from Tre&gog, joined with the praeposition 
 in the form of an adverb : thus, Tr^^-^ct^ctk is used in dif- 
 ferent places both in the Iliad and Odyssey, in the sense 
 of before J it ^ IkXii'S, iTtf^uvov* lya S' i'lf^i Tr^oTru^otSi, Odyss, 
 It is probable, that Trgo was understood by a Grecian with 
 a different shade of meaning from Trocgcs or Tcu^othf other- 
 wise it would be only a mere expletive. In Hesiod, ?rga- 
 «•«§ also occurs : irg05r«| '^TTri^i^m Xtyv(pamv* Theog, The 
 praeposition, however formed, must have been originally 
 applied to objects 5e/ore others, in the point of situation 
 or in the order of succession ; thus, 5rga S' u^ cv^nig Ktov «y- 
 TA>v, II. i}/'. 115. And then mules went before them, ey- 
 rai SI TTPo rov fiaa-ixia^ rirxyfAivot ^txv, Xen. Anab. I. All 
 its other significations respecting time, defence or protect 
 tion, and preference, may easily be referred to its primary 
 meaning. See Moor, El. Ling. Gr. P. II. p. 40. 
 
 a 
 
 l.--They sailed to Eleus x«T«5rAg<»M Is 'EXHiyr^atw, 
 
 first, an island before Mi- ?^« ^ga MtXvtros vjjo-oj, Thu- 
 
 letus. cyd. 
 
 -rThey publicly buried Bra- ' e Bgxa-i^eti-^vif^cTiee.'^B-x'^Tei^^ 
 
 sidas in the town, before h ^ TroXig vgcin^vvv aya^et, 
 
 the present forum. r^ "'^ ay. Id. 
 
 ^Always leading out the Sy- l|«yA» uu wgo tV tu^ta-fca et 
 
 racusans before the forti- Sygfl6xoo-«»<. Id. 
 
 fications. 
 
 But much darkness, as it wXnv tfoXv t/$ a-xorosf as loiKUf 
 
 appears interposes be- " zlfn vu^ <rv ^ p^ tt^o « <»Ajj«» 
 
 tween you and the truth, kisc. Demosth. ^gg< 5-g(p. 
 
 (ad v.h with you before 
 
 the truth.) 
 
 And after he had rode past Ittu h ven p^ vx^iXuvm ' * la- 
 
 the whole, having station- t»^* * * to k^fnoc 7rg« *) f «- 
 
 R2 
 
252 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 A«7| fAitroi, Xen. Anab. 
 
 hlKVVf^l Ort KOtl TTPO lyU^CVTCq 
 
 ed his chariot before the 
 middle of the line. 
 
 2. I shew that even hefore 
 me (i. e. the time before 
 me) the state entertain- 
 ed this sentiment. 
 
 •3. These I constructed ^or rotvrcc. 'tf^c^ocXXm ^ami i^^ ^^^ 
 
 Dem. 
 
 
 the defence of Attica 
 (placed before so as to 
 protect.) 
 4. I would prefer before 
 much wealth. (I would 
 place before and so give 
 the preference.) 
 
 « 'Att;xj3 (z^^'*') Oem. tt. 
 f/t,otoi, ^ * "*» Isocr. 
 
 In composition it retains the same meaning and fre- 
 quently governs its own case: thus, «aa' Ihxiiq, u Ziv, 
 
 ravrovt tov (px^ftsixsec 'TFgOKurecx.ynvzT&oti ^ov 3 Lucian. Pray, 
 Jupiter, do you wish this druggist to sit before me ? 
 
 Then thinking herself en- 
 titled to command (stand 
 hefore others.) 
 
 I will omit what Philip 
 seized and possessed be- 
 fore that I engaged in 
 politics and addressed the 
 people. 
 
 TOTS 5g «|<Ofl/ P^ TT^oia-rviftf P oi 
 
 uXXti Dem. 5r. 5-g^. 
 
 fisv P^ cvv 7r^6 TO -rroXinvci) ^^ 
 xoti mf^nyo^ia ^ \ya> TTPO* 
 
 f^iXiTTTTog leta. Id. 
 
 Instead of this prseposltion in composition governing 
 the noun, the praeposition uvu, which, in its original signi- 
 fication, has nearly the same meaning, is frequently used : 
 thus, «/§' ii'^oviiv Tf^ohvrsg uvrt tov kuXov uXMv t;v'. Eurip. 
 Hippol. Others preferring some other pleasure instead 
 g/* (before) the honourable. It is sometimes used in com- 
 
' OF PROPOSITIONS. 253 
 
 position in the same sense as hritfor, instead of: thus, 
 uvT» TTOTs TT^ov^ecv* uv^^og, Euvip. Alccst, SliQ thcn died 
 ^r her husband. 7r^o6n<ni (jJ^ajs) ^^rit^cxrcov, G-ci(p' oiT lya. 
 Eurip. Med, 959. For other examples of this praeposition 
 in composition see Viger, de Idiot, p. 568 ; and the Frag^ 
 mentttf p. 41. 
 
 II. Of such Praepositions as govern the Da- 
 tive only, viz.^'Ey and 2yv. 
 
 'Et', or E/V. 
 
 In a former edition of these Exercises, I stated it as 
 my opinion, that Mr Bonar's derivation of this praeposition 
 from la, I clothe, seemed to approach nearer the truth 
 than either Lennep's or Scheide's. Lennep derives it 
 from iifii sum, and Scheide from !&;, mitto, immitto. Upon 
 farther consideration, I am now inclined to think that 
 Scheide's derivation is more likely to be the true one. It 
 is probable, that the same verb gave origin to the praepo- 
 sition iU> but that while both the praepositions were form- 
 ed from its participles, the one was used actively , the other 
 passively. The praeposition lU denoted the body in motion, 
 or the body entering ; the praeposition h the termination of 
 that motion, the rest of the body, or the body entered. It 
 is, however^ not improbable, that the verb lu, commonly 
 translated / clothe, was originally used in the same sense 
 as lu to put, place, or send, because it is, I believe, seldom 
 employed without the praeposition uf>t.(^i or -Tngt in the sense 
 o^ clothing. With either of these praepositions it means I put 
 about, garments, viz. and hence / clothe. Homer uses both 
 verbs apparently as synonimes : thus, ol h y^ovm Eiur In-} 
 
254^ 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 <d9 i.uJ 
 ^irroTa-t Xthtg^ II, (r. 504?. ol ^g ^iravxg iiotro ivyKrovg--~595. If 
 
 this stateme;it be correct, there will be very little difference 
 
 between any of the derivations noticed above, as the verbs 
 
 have all a mutual connection. See Analysis of the Greek 
 
 Verb, o. 18. 
 
 Tbe natural and common application of h is, 1st, to 
 p/ace, denoting that something is loithin a limited place ; 
 2d, to time. All its other more remote significations may, 
 without difficulty, be traced to its primary meaning. 
 
 J . For the issue of it was in 
 the deity (the deity the 
 recipient), not in me. 
 "Nor did they ever injure 
 the fruit in fertile popu- 
 lous Phthia. 
 
 Whatever wisdom there is 
 among [in) men. 
 
 Going to send troops to Si- 
 cily, i. e, to send them so 
 as to be {ottus Ircnui) in 
 Sicily. 
 
 Night intervened, and next 
 day we came to the as- 
 sembly. 
 
 2. In a short time. 
 
 TftH^ve days you assisted 
 them, i, e, the period con^ 
 tained within five days. 
 
 lo-rii ovK h lya. Dem. tt. 
 6v^i "Tear h ^dtn \^i,^uX»% /3&»- 
 Hom. 
 
 Aristoph. Nub. 
 KiMx, Thucyd. 
 
 ^CClO^iU ^ hcKXviTtM, ^sch. 
 Ev oXiyos x^cyci, Isocr. 
 
 I» WgWTg j5^g^« jiaYidiCO ^ ^ UV7CZ. 
 
 iEsch. adv. Ctes. 
 
 In the Alcibiades 1. of Plato, Socrates says to Alci- 
 blades h IfAoi iuf^eXirwov, which is generally translated, 
 meditate before me, i. e. in my presence. Socrates meant 
 that Alcibiades should not withdraw heyond his view, 
 
OF PR.^POSITIONS. 255 
 
 but should be, to use a vulgar expression, in his sight, 
 •within the space to which his view extended. 
 
 Sometimes the substantive, denoting the thing entered 
 is understood, which has led grammarians erroneously to 
 say that h is used for k or utfo : thus, h ug^yv^a 9 x%vcra 
 TTiniv. Lucian, To drink out o/' silver or gold. The solu- 
 tion is, Tcmiv (tov ohcv or r« v^^/g h ct^y-)} &e. 
 
 When construed with the dative of the instrument, the 
 termination of the action denoted by the instrument is 
 implied by the praeposition ; thus, a§ h (am vMy^ jcxrs^P" 
 Got^reci -TToXv^ oxQog. jEschi/L Pers. 256. What great pros- 
 perity has been ruined bi/ one bloxio ! The ruin completed^ 
 terminated xvithin one blow, i. e. extending no farther. 
 The following sentence from Xenophon, noticed both 
 by Professor Dalzel [Gram. p. 11. p. 43.) and Mr Bonar, 
 may, perhaps, be resolved by supplying the participle 0- 
 vMt(OfAivoi before h : thus, (petv^^ov—ori — AetKi^xtf>e.oytot ovt' av 
 ©ges|; [oTThi^of^ivct) h TTsXreitg xeii ccfcovrioisj 6VTi ^»v6etis («- 
 ■7rXi^of4.iyoi) h ro^oig IkXcav et,v ^;xyan^ia-6xi. Xen. Mem. We 
 often say, armed in mail or with mail, &c. Or thus, h roig 
 Ixiimv 67rXot5 ovTt, x. r. A. The author, as is not uncommon, 
 having omitted, for the sake of brevity, the intermediate 
 idea. to<5 sv o-^Xag KOff-^vif^svois c^Qovovcriv. Xen. Cyr. Hutch. 
 211. corresponds with this interpretation, h oxXotg y»g av- 
 76> Ts o-<!(p&> TTccvv ^ct^io-Geci. Plato Euthyd. In the following 
 sentence from Thucydides, lagm h oyrag »xXvi>iovg cog h 
 SeAijvvj iiKog rljv ftiv o^tv rev a-Mfiotrog TF^oo^oiv, Vll. C. 44. h 
 triMv^ niay be considered as an abbreviated expression for 
 h ra (pan ru ovTt h csAsjv*}. h o^6xXf^o7a-i tdacti. Hom. II. cr, 
 135. 'voith my eyes, ^^i^m h ei^^xTg. JEschyL Prom, v, 
 432, Iv ivi^oteii la-rti for ivfiecgig. Eurip. Iph. Aul. 974. \v 
 MvrZ uv»if to be master of one'* s self, l^uv nm h ogyri, to 
 be in a rage tvith any one. 
 
256 SYNTAX or THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Iv retains the same power in composition as in its simple 
 state, and sometimes governs its own case : thus, hotx.iu, 
 incolo, I dwell in ; lyx^co, infundo, I pour in ; hri^o?, ho- 
 noratuS) in honour; lyKuPneif in jus voco, I summon ; Ia- 
 MifTAf, relinquo aliquid in, I leave something in, xect tjjv 
 •>^v^nv K^etrte-Tnv rS eivG^w^a lvi(pvtrs, Xen, Mem. He has 
 also implanted in man a most noble soul. It is frequent- 
 ly construed with the dative before the infinitive : as, h 
 iS 7roXirsvs<r6xi kui Tr^etrrsiv, Demosth. vs^t vri<p. In the 
 administrative and executive government, ^aa' h ecvra ra 
 rtiv ii^w^v 7roivi(rct(r6eci Tocrec I^vi7recrvicr6s ! Id, TFigi rav h y,i^» But 
 in the very making of the peace how much have you 
 been deceived ! h rS Tce^oTTtoXifAziv ku) Ivfi^ec^uv* Plato de 
 Rep, In the attacking and defending. 
 
 Note. This praepositian is sometimes omitted before its own case, 
 and sometimes it is followed by the genitive of a noun, ro^eo), hfta or 
 el»id being commonly understood : thus, aih^t vetim. Horn, soil, h xlh^i, 
 dwelling in the air. troXkazis aav Iv (olxtu) ^ttatrxaXuv vixovov •xa.ihoi ovrog, 
 Plato Alcib. 1, I have often heard you when a boy in the house of 
 your teachers, (in yi\uffu, u 'AXs^av^^s, o^av Iv {roTs ^ufAUfft) a^ou irt ffi 
 fta^uivovret ; iMcian. Shall I not laugh, Alexander, seeing you iii hell 
 still playing the fool ? 
 
 ^vVf Attice Hyf. 
 
 The Latin prseposition cum, and the Greek prasposition 
 2yv or Evv, originally ko-vv, appear to me to be the same, 
 the Romans having omitted the aspirate, while the Greeks 
 changed it into ?, as was not unusual, and either joined it 
 with the preceding consonant, which seems to have been 
 the original form of the prasposition, and no peculiarity of 
 the Attic dialect, or omitted the x, and pronounced it o-vv. 
 As the Latin praeposition in composition is always con, 
 and not cum, it seems not improbable that con was the 
 
OF PR^POSITJONS. %0 i 
 
 more ancient form in the dialect of the Romans, and corr 
 responds with the same compound in several words in our 
 own language. If I might offer a conjecture, I would say 
 that the praeposition itself is a compound, one part of 
 which seems allied to the adverb ofiov, or the verb of^oa, and 
 the other to the old verb xg&» or xxa, the active voice of 
 xitccxijaceo, denoting some things put together , hence joiu' 
 edp united. Kiev, xhf xo-ov, xcrvv, Lat. ceon, con, cum. This 
 opinion will derive confirmation from the circumstance of 
 trvv being commonly omitted when u^a the same as oy.ou 
 is used. [See the example from Homer below.] If the 
 Greek and Roman prsepositions be as I suppose, the same,* 
 Mr Bonar's derivation of a-w, from the Latin verb suo to 
 seto or join together, will appear to be incorrect, as we 
 cannot, from it, account for the adventitious letter com- 
 bined with the 0". Dr Jamieson supposes that the Gothic 
 particle sam or samUf is the same as the praeposition a-w. 
 It seems both in form and signification to be connected 
 with the Greek adverb uy^oc, taking an s for the aspirate. 
 ^ut, as I have already shewn, another element appears to 
 be necessary to complete the ancient form of the praeposi- 
 tion, as we cannot otherwise obtain either the | of the 
 Greeks, or the c of the Latins. Viewing it then, accord- 
 ing to the derivation given above, it will denote something 
 joined, put together, or connected tvith some other thing. 
 
 Ir— And advantage xjoith a kui xgg^aj yg cw fjco^Qei ^s*' 
 little trouble, i, e. trouble ^vq. Eurip. Hippol. 
 joined, connected. 
 
 * See Payne Knight on the Greek alphabet, p. 11. : who remarks, 
 " Hence too we perceive that the Latin cum and the Greek vh arc 
 the same word, the original form of which was yiruv, now written ^wr, 
 from which the one nation dropt the ff the other the 7." 
 
258 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 "It shall bfe my care ixith the 
 
 gods, i, e. the assistance 
 
 of the godiS joined. 
 He left this only to them 
 
 to fight luith a sword and 
 
 shield and corslet. 
 
 2, Their children again in 
 the fated period, (fated 
 period connected with 
 them.) 
 
 He went away in time of 
 supper (supper connected 
 with his departure.) 
 
 iya f^iXit <rt»y oi B-iou Xen. 
 
 Cyr. 
 
 XCiTUMlTTCf ^ ^ rOVTO fAOUV etV' 
 
 TOij tt a-vv fAx^cti^ce. Kctt ysp- 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 ei oih S §' etv Trcctg ytufteii ^ ^ 
 crvv }C^OVfiS TTiTT^afilVOS, Eu- 
 
 rip. Ion. 
 
 FVV TO 6U7FVW CC 
 
 vre^^o^ctt, 
 
 2a 
 
 In composition it retains the same power, and fre- 
 quently governs its own case : as, o-wccye^, congregOf I ga- 
 ther together ; g-woikiu^ I live with, &c. 
 
 But I associate with gods, 
 and I associate with nien 
 that (are) good. 
 
 And I almost think that I 
 have made more money 
 than any other ,_ two so- 
 phists together that you 
 please {to mention)* 
 
 ^i uvd^arros o etyccOos, Xen. 
 Mem. 
 
 X^^f*^ l^ycc^of^oci P yj ccXXot 
 (Tvy^vo o<rTig fiovXo(4,cct oi a-c 
 <p;a-Tjj?. Plato Hipp. Maj. 
 
 It is often omitted, particularly after the adverb eifix, 
 and always after the pronoun avros with the article, as 
 was formerly remarked: 5rAg«(r«vTg? tvdvs Trsvn xxi iUoa-i 
 mvat. Tkucyd, Having immediately set sail (with) twen- 
 ty-five ships. iKctTov ^i Ueca-Tot Kdv^ot ccfA la-ru^ov, Hom. An 
 
 hundred youths went along with each. 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. '259 
 
 Like several other praepositions it is often rendered ad- 
 verbially when joined with a noun: thus, o-iyy hit^i, justly ; 
 <rv9 KOfffAu, orderly, elegantly; a-w Tot.%u, quickly; c-vv ^oQa>, 
 iimide, fearfully, 8^c, 
 
 See Fragmenta, pp. 41 & 42 for the mode of com- 
 pounding g» and a-vv with verbs, &c. beginning with any 
 of the mutes or liquids; and <rvv before o- having a vowel 
 after it or a mute. 
 
 HI. Of such Praepositions as govern the 
 Accusative only, viz. E/V and 'Ava, 
 
 Efe or 'E^ 
 
 Lennep*s derivation of this praeposition from hi or ku, 
 mitto, appears to me to approach nearer the truth than 
 either Scheide's or Mr Bonar's. Scheide's, from tia-ej, 
 mthirif makes the derivative the root. Mr Bonar derives 
 it from lfi>, to set, having iiuui, to sit, as its perfect-pas- 
 sive. He supposes ih to be the participle of one of the 
 aorists-passive, signifying set doxvn, — with some common 
 word understood expressing directly and literally sitting 
 place, resting place, stopping place. 
 
 But I imagine zk does not refer immediately to the 
 place in which an object rests or stops, for this idea suits 
 better with Iv than tig, but to the motion of the agent sent, 
 directed to, or into that place ; and must therefore be de- 
 rived from some word implying motion to or /nfo.— Sup- 
 
260 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 pose we take the example, ixvh* us T^ctnv, I came to 
 Troy, — and it were asked. In what place did you rest ? 
 Where 'was your resting place ? The answer would not be 
 marked by the praeposition ik but h with the dative. But 
 if, on the other hand, it were asked, To xvhat place did 
 you come ? The answer would be by ug, rh S' k AjcotK^^ 
 y'tixg lv(rKce^6f*ot ^i^ov tTTvat, Hom. His nimble steeds bore 
 him to the ships of the Greeks. The ships, the point of 
 direction, r» TrotXra tig xfi^ccg Ixsi^e. Xen, Anab. He 
 took javelins into his hands. In this example tig seems to 
 combine with itself the power of h, and shews the com- 
 mon origin of both : ^n^ h^iym tig ov^ctvov ucre^oivTce. Horn, 
 IL 0, 371. raising his hands to the starry heaven; — the 
 point of direction. Eig therefore seems to me to denote 
 the motion or direction of a body so as to come close to, 
 or to enter into another body : And this idea seems ne- 
 cessary from its governing the accusative of the latter 
 object. Its primary signification refers to place ; its se- 
 condary to time ; and it also refers to the Jinal cause of 
 any action. 
 
 1. Having revolted to the uipttrrnfn^^ ng Mva-oi, Xen. 
 
 Mysians. Anab. 
 
 <And the line fiy has been xui tig * uvtxi IfCTrivra » ^y, 
 
 let fall upon them (the Euclid, B. I. prop. 34. 
 
 line /Sy sentf directed to, 
 
 them, the object to which 
 
 the direction is made). 
 
 A nd he divided (the Greeks) xeti duTTnf^t ^ ^ ug ^e^eg 7rc?ivg. 
 
 into many parties. Dem. tt. c-ncp. 
 
 When I look into our affairs orecv ts I'lg ro Tr^ety^tcc tcn-o^M' 
 
 * Euclid commonly uses the praeposition us when he directs a line 
 to be drawn in an oblique or slanting direction to or iqion another : the 
 prccposition It/ when a perpendicular is to be let fall upon. 
 
OF PRJEPOSynONS. 261 
 
 and to the speeches which ura, ^ * xui orotv cr^o? d Ao- 
 X he^., 7^^ ^^ •? uKovu. Dem. 
 
 ' Olynth. 
 
 2. To all time coming. iU ctTrecq o Xoitt^s x^tut;. H. 
 For it seemed that the king ^6x,ico '"^ yx^ iU « iTrim lax; 
 
 would come against the «x&> ^ '"^ /BxcnXsvg. Xen. 
 
 approaching morning. Anab. 
 
 3. to their acquiring a pru- u$ ro f-cxvSam <ru(p^ovia ay- 
 dent deportment. roi,^^ Xen. Cyr. 
 
 'No one blamed them re- ay^g;^ — U * (pt>^i» avrot f^i^cp o 
 
 specting friendship. fcoti. Xen. Anab. 
 
 'With respect to justice. iU ys ^uv ^tKUios-um' Id. 
 
 It is also applied to numbers denoting their extent : 
 thus, iUrtivs jtv^iovs* Id* Ad decern millia, 
 
 -^hey say that he brings ca- Xiya tTryrovs fciv lU otcrxKio-'^im 
 valry to the number of A<«< uya, Xen. Cyr. 
 (extending to) eight 
 thousand. 
 
 * The expression in this and the following example is probably 
 elliptical, and may be supplied thus : xara ra, 'x^a.yfi.a.ra xafftixovra 
 US, &c. — The following sentence from the Cyropoedia of Xenophon, 
 12. c. 1. may also be considered as elliptical. In it and others of 
 a similar kind, Grammarians have usually got over the difficulty by 
 saying that iis is used for Iv ; ruvra V IfTt 3-^^a| fit* (^Toe.^iffKtva.fffj.ivos) 
 9ri^t ra ffn^va, ytppov ^t {^u^iffxivaffiivov) lis Ttiv a^iiTTt^av, xerfis 5- »J 
 auya^ii {yru^iffKivatfiAnn) us fnv h^ietv. That is, a corslet (fitted) 
 around their breasts, a shield (fitted) to their left hand, and a cutlass 
 or scymitar (fitted) to their right. — In this passage Cyrus is describ- 
 ing the kind of armour which was provided for those of the Per- 
 sians, called ofAOTi/aoi. In Xenophon the preeposition us or Is is fre- 
 quently used after ^uga,ffKivctZ,o(A»i, See Cyr, VI. 1. 13. H. Gr. II. 
 1. 14. ^r. 
 
262 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 When the company should 07rcT& ik ik Tro^ivofixi °' « 
 advance one by one (i, e, recltg. Id, 
 one to one in the Hne of 
 succession.) 
 
 In composition it also denotes motion to or into : as, 
 ucrnmiif to go into ; ^ia-KofAt^uv, to carry into ; uToixt^uv, to 
 admit into a state as inhabitants ', utrc^o^ecf a contribution 
 paid info the treasury, &c. 
 
 This praeposltion is joined with several substantives, ad- 
 jectives, participles and adverbs to express certain phrases; 
 thus, its TTiv ^vvec^tv or TO ^vmrov, pro viribus, to the extent 
 of one's power ; ik ftxKgxv {a^uv), to a long period; i'n 
 xcct^ov, opportune f seasonably j lU ^so** or ta ^sap, necessa- 
 rily ; c/j «^«|, semelf once j iU ^;$, bis ; (U «£/> semper ; ug 
 rx -TToXXec, plerumque, mostly, &c. — In certain phrases e/V 
 and TT^og are used synoniraously. Thucydides says both 
 iig vfcxg iiTTuv and Tr^^g vftxg iiTciiv, and Plato, as well as 
 Demosthenes in the example above, uses both indiscri- 
 minately with the verb ciTfo^XiTra* See Alcib, 1. p. 37. Ed^ 
 Bip, 
 
 Etg is sometimes suppressed by an ellipsis : thus, hi* 
 XufAiv roivvv ecvrviv (^itg) ^vo fii^it. Plato Polit, Let US then 
 divide it into two parts. l^^6(r6ov {iig) zXia-mv TlnX'txhtu 
 *Ax:tMog» Horn. Go to the tent of Achilles the son of 
 Peleus. — And sometimes the substantive governed by it 
 is understood: as, ^av e/V* Ig {^^c^otrec ov ^of^^vg) 'Ai^cv, 
 Eurip, Troad, He will descend alive to (the mansions) 
 of Hades, ug (to "ht^eco-KxMicv) Liovv(rtav» Plato* To (the 
 school) of Dionysius. 
 
OF PR/EPOSITIONS. 263 
 
 'AvL 
 
 The proper derivation of this praeposition seems to be 
 very doubtful. Lennep derives it from the verb «v<w, * 
 which, says he, videtur sumptum Juisse de motUy quo ver* 
 sus superiora nitaris, vel verseris in superiore partem vel 
 superficie quasi. A verbal adjective uvcg, he supposes, 
 has been formed from it, of which uvec is the neuter plu- 
 ral. Mr Bonar supposes am to be a noun, having the 
 literal signification of reversed, turned hacTc, or traced 
 backwards, — I am rather inclined to think that Lennep's 
 derivation approaches nearer the truth, both from the 
 general meaning of this praeposition in its simple and par- 
 ticularly in its compound state, and from the adverb aya, 
 derived from the same root, always signifying motion up- 
 wards, in opposition to the natural and apparent direction 
 of various bodies, expressed by x,ee.ra, dotvnwards. In 
 searching, however, for the original application of the 
 praeposition it will be safer, T apprehend, to fix upon the 
 adverb, as it must have retained nearly the primary mean- 
 ing bestowed upon it, than upon a verb which probably 
 did not exist so early as the praeposition itself. In every 
 instance uva will be found to signify upwards ; uva iroretfiay 
 ii^av ^a^ova-i Truycci, Eurip. Med. 411. The fountains of 
 the sacred streams flow upwards, — In speaking of the 
 natural flow of rivers we always express it by the word 
 down, and the converse of this is up, not back. Sometimes 
 indeed, it is necessary to translate the praeposition by back 
 or backwards ; but in most cases, when the action is at- 
 tentively considered, this secondary application will appear 
 to result from the context, as it may be found to cor- 
 
 xvvu perftcio, has in all probability sprung from this verb. 
 
264- SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 respond better with the vernacular idiom, than the literal 
 meaning which the praeposition would require. All bo- 
 dies, it may be observed, that recede or go backwards, 
 have the appearance, especially on a plain, of ascending^ 
 and this is particularly apparent when a vessel leaves port 
 and makes out to sea. Accordingly, the Greeks express 
 this by uvxTc-Miv and uvetTrXovs : On the contrary, the 
 return of a ship to port is generally expressed by x»ru^ 
 vrMtv and KccrecTcMvi. Whatever also is in a state of pro- 
 gression from its source, is generally considered as de-» 
 scending : whatever returns to its source, mounts up'voards. 
 We say to trace up, as well as bach to its source, but the 
 former expression is used when the object chiefly is to 
 reach the source ; the latter, when the different steps in 
 the progress are principally in view. 'Avoe, then, primarily 
 denotes the ascent of a body either upon the surface of 
 another, or so as to be placed upon. In several instances 
 it requires to be translated by the praeposition through ; 
 but then, progressive motion up to a certain point may 
 be generally observed j and this will appear to have been 
 more the aim of the writer in this application of the prae- 
 position, than the medium through which the motion may 
 be traced, which is commonly expressed by ^ik. In most 
 cases, either a real or fancied idea of tendency up'voards, 
 may be observed in the use of this praeposition by the 
 best writers.* 
 
 'Am is applied, 1. to place ; 2. to time ; 2. to numbers 
 taken distributively. 
 
 1 . "To fight both in the xxt h Ti-^ho^ kui uvcc rot o^q£ 
 
 * The Maeso Gothic pvaeposition a ?ia is stated by Dr Jamieson to 
 have precisely the same meaning, ^qq Hermes Scyth, pp. 10. 11. ^c. 
 
OF PRiEPOSITIONS. 
 
 265 
 
 plain and upon the moun- 
 tains. 
 Up the green wood. 
 
 ^ot^ofjixt. Aen. Ages. 
 
 -i-Having said this 
 (up) on board. 
 
 Revolving these things (up) 
 through your mind, 
 (bringing them up to the 
 view of the mind.) 
 
 And raising them aloft from 
 himself he placed them 
 upon a tamarisk. 
 
 He divided the whole vein, 
 which running quite up 
 the back, reaches the 
 neck. 
 
 He proceeded to go through 
 the battle and the clash- 
 ing of spears. 
 
 They said that they dwelt 
 upon the mountains. 
 
 2. That they see their el- 
 ders also living moderate- 
 ly through the whole day. 
 
 3. When the officers knew 
 this they formed six com- 
 panies up to an hundred 
 men (each). 
 
 avcA vM^ Eurip. 
 i went ug zTTC'jruvsc, ygjyffi/Sjj^;. Hom. 
 
 Hippol. 
 
 Odyss. 
 
 B-v^ot^ Id. 
 
 Kdii UTTO ikv i»4'S5'' «2'g^ ^ ^ 
 
 ecv^viy tKci^al Hom. II. 
 
 avot xMvc\ ly^iixcoy. Id. 
 
 ^ .^ r '> i,, *^-v y^ 
 
 'ovrtt-.^" "^' <pJ5^<^ * tlx-zcg. hit. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 iTTU OS 7XVTX yiyva<rK£j ^ * ©fC^/ ' 
 
 ;iJ6| «SVi5t iKSCTOV CiVVi^J aGI^ ^ >^^ V ^ 
 
 Anab. 
 
 The following sentence in the 9th book of the Odyssey 
 has, I believe, been generally misunderstood, through ig- 
 norance of the original meaning of this praeposition. 
 
^66 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 rev y org TFivctsy fi^Xivi^icc chov l^v6^tv, 
 
 Xiu ' 208. 
 
 The translation, I apprehend, should be, tvhen they 
 tvished to drink of this agreeable , red luine, having Jilled 
 one cupf he poured in (viz. the wine) up to the extent of 
 twenty measures of water, i. e. the measure of the cup 
 was of that extent. It is of no consequence to the mean- 
 ing of the sentence what was the measure of water ; but 
 the quotation from Xenophon given above, as well as the 
 tenor of the whole passage, clearly shews that this is the 
 only interpretation consistent with reason and common 
 sense. I know, indeed, that it was the custom of the 
 ancients to temper their wine with water ; but this wine, 
 which the priest of Apollo, his wife, and housekeeper 
 drank, must have been potent indeed, and the cup of no 
 ordinary capacity, to have admitted, along with the wine, 
 of such a quantity of voater as twenty measures may be 
 supposed to have been ! Who would have expected the 
 poet to have added, 
 
 ^ia"ricivi* TOT «v cvrot d^rbT^STSect (ptXcv ^i¥* 
 
 'Aw in composition signifies most commonly motion up* 
 wards, retaining what I conceive to be its original mean- 
 ing : thus, dm'occivcjy I go up ; dvccTrifCTrci/, I send up ; dvcc* 
 y%\eteii I raise or set up a laugh j dvct^ex^fiocif I take upon 
 myself; I promise; dvi^ofcut, I hold myself w_p; I endure; 
 uM(rx0, I take ; drnXttncw, I take up ; I remove from its 
 proper use or situation ; I destroy ; dv»'7rMe,o»i I fiJl ^P ; 
 xxt KXifAotKotg T^ttrhm^ utto rtv ru^tvg ttti w^yoigy xect iTfctveC" 
 Qi^otToiVTig dv^^eci vMtovs. Thucyd. III. 23. And applying 
 ladders from the wall to the turrets, and having made 
 
OF PRiEPOSITIONS. ^67 
 
 most of their men mount upon them. — Here the praeposi- 
 tion dix with the verb, denotes motion up, and the prae- 
 position Ivt, the completion of that motion, updn^-^l'd 
 most of the following compounds the same idea may be 
 traced, though the idiom of the languages into which we 
 are accustomed to translate them suggests another some- 
 what different : thus, drnQiaTKu, I revive ; having before 
 been depressed, sunk down as one lifeless, I feel life spring- 
 ing up ; dvufMc-^of^cct, I am in a state to take up, renew the 
 battle ; tttvttco, I fold ; dmTrrvtrtrco, I take up the folds, I 
 unfold ; uvxKTZfixi, I get complete possession j I possess 
 myself up to the luhole amount, 
 
 'Ava, denoting elevation or upon, is sometimes found 
 with the poets governing the Dative : as, «y^oy §' iv^vtTroe, 
 K|6v<5)jv avx Tu^yx^of xk^x ^fiivov, Horn* They found the 
 loud-thundering son of Saturn sitting upon the top of 
 Gargarus. ;tj|«<rgw dvx ffxn7rT^a>. Id. Upon a golden sceptre. 
 ^^va-iixig xv /Vt©;?. Find. Upon golden horses, ivhi §* 
 uvx vKXTFTca Alos xhrtg. Pindar, In these and similar ex- 
 amples avx does not appear to be used absolutely, signify- 
 ing aloft, but upon, or resting upon, 
 
 'Avx with the accent changed is said to be sometimes 
 used by Homer for uvxc-rn^t, dyi<rrn and xnij-rwx)) : aAA* 
 am, fM^' In xua-o. II, <r', 178. But rise, nor lie longer. 
 uv S' 'O^va-ivi -proXvfAviTti, the wise Ulysses rose. — But I ap- 
 prehend both these sentences are elliptical, xvx and «/ 
 being used adverbially, signifying up : But up, nor lie 
 longer. The wise Ulysses (raised himself) iip. In the 
 former example c^cno is probably understood j in the lat- 
 ter, c^6v<rs, or some such expression. 
 
 S2 
 
268 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 IV. Of such Praepositlons as govern two 
 Cases, the Genitive and Accusative, viz. 
 A/a, Koira, Msra' *, ^Tts^. 
 
 It was stated in a former edition of these Exercises 
 that ^«tf seemed to be derived from an obsolete verb ^w, 
 of which ^<o^«; is frequently used by Homer, and that it 
 was not unlikely a verbal adjective ^«3? was formed from 
 it, signifying, pierced, penetrated, ope7ied, &c. As ^louut, 
 however, commonly signifies to drive or expel, it does not 
 correspond so nearly as could be wished with the mean- 
 ing of the praeposition. Perceiving this diiBculty I was 
 led to trace it to some other apparent root, approaching 
 nearer in its general meaning. This root I apprehend to 
 be the verb ^vu, ^wu or ^y^;, which, in several places in 
 Homer, signifies to penetrate, to go through, and is also, if 
 I am not mistaken, the parent of the numeral ^yo f, de- 
 noting an object penetrated, divided^ separated, and thus 
 from the act the parts separated obtained their name, c ^i 
 hro ^uvxi o^iXov uv^^b^zav. II. a'. 537. But he was eager 
 to penetrate, to enter the warlike croud. /SsAos ^' iU lyy-opx- 
 Aow ^y. //. B-\ 85. The arrow penetrated even to the 
 brain. 2u ^s ^iv 'A^m ^s'^o? hvxXiog. II. (. 210. Warlike, 
 awful Mars pervaded him. ^ Ky,iMM<; ^g l^va-ai^svo? |/<po5 o^v 
 
 II, (p\ 116. — And the whole two-edged sword penetrated 
 
 ♦ Mtra, with the poet?, is somethnes construed with the dnline. 
 
 f Scheide, I observe, is of the same opinion. See Animadv. ad 
 Analog. Ling. Gr. 298. 
 
OF TKiEPOSITlONS. 269 
 
 quite witliin him, tiidnKTov — |/ip«?. ^jschyl. Prom. 888. Ka) 
 TO ^/x«v ^twvut dicv^v?. Demosth, ■^. <rrs(p. fi. ^'. These ex- 
 amples appear to me sufficient to establish the affinity be- 
 tween this verb and the praeposition in all the material 
 points of connection. It can form but a very slight objec- 
 tion that the voivels are different, because in many cases in 
 the Greek as well as in the Latin language, they were in- 
 terchangeable, and probably in this instance the v was chang- 
 ed to the I to distinguish the praeposition from the numeral. 
 This is farther confirmed hy the adverb ^;?, bis, and "^ixx^ 
 divisim, separatim, evidently connected with ^va, duo, also 
 ^ixKoa-iot, &G. The verb ^/(^&;, amhigo, queerOi is apparently 
 connected with the same root. It denotes the distraction 
 of the mind in the choice of one of two objects : thus, 
 
 ^/(^g 7^^, ^£ fid^ctiro x-ccru, kXovov xvdi? l^iXToc;, 
 
 *i Xdavs I5 ?£i;^o? ofAOKXna-giiv oiXviveci. II. 7/. 7-1 S. 
 
 So also didvtco?, geminus, which, says Damm, is fornied of 
 S<5, bis and ^va, subeo, see Lex. ^t^oiviKa. Aristoph. Nub. 640. 
 The derivation stated above, is supported also by the ap- 
 parent similarity between ha and the Mseso-Gothic par- 
 ticle du, which, as Dr Jamieson has remarked, though it 
 more generally signifies ad, to, may bear the translation of 
 through in respect of space, in regard to time, and as de- 
 noting causation. Herm. Scyth, 34. It is not improbable 
 that it is the same as the particle ^s subjoined to several 
 nouns by Homer, and always denoting to. The praeposi- 
 tion ^i«, compounded with active verbs, implies the com' 
 pletion of the act, the going through with it to the end, 
 and hence its application to the end, the means being un- 
 derstood. The particle h then, according to this idea, 
 supposes a medium passed through, but refers immediately 
 to the termination, thus, vyv §' e<^< ^>^/>iy^g. 11. a, 169. w V 
 
 OXv^iTTovh l3l<^VlKiV, 221. 
 
210 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ai» with the genitive, denotes the object penetrated or 
 passed through^ and is equally applied to matter, or space^ 
 or time. With the accusative, it commonly denotes the 
 agent through tvhich, or through means of which something 
 is effected, brought to a particular end, and in this respect 
 it corresponds with the Latin praeposition per : as, rxvree. 
 7F$iit d^ct Tjjv iTTt^iMtocy* PlutQrch, He does this through 
 fhe medium of care. 
 
 1. With the Genitive, through. 
 
 iMf then the straight lines 
 («y, K, pass through the 
 centre (the centre, the 
 object passed through or 
 penetrated), 
 
 lAnd wounds him through 
 
 the corslet. 
 \They marched through Ar- 
 menia. 
 
 He lay within the cave 
 stretched through among 
 his sheep. 
 
 Thus then the old men are 
 constituted, having pass- 
 ed through all the noble 
 virtues. 
 
 Whoever then is governed 
 by the pleasures {through) 
 of the body, and is un- 
 able through means of 
 them to act well. 
 
 8« jttgy tvf ul uy, Slo. %M re 
 Kivr^cv 6lf*u Euclid, ni. 35. 
 
 xut rtr^uTKu dis6 ^w^u,%, Xen. 
 Anab. 
 
 Id. 
 
 xetfcat lvT65"d' avTgou Tay«» ^ ^ *"' 
 §<«« iM)jAo6. Horn. Od. 
 
 i<« 
 
 Stcrretfteti, Xen, Cyr. 
 
 flV«? OVV U^^CJ VTTO n dice TO 
 (An ^VVXf^lCCt TT^CCrTM TOC /SjA- 
 
 710-706, Xen. Mem. 
 
OF PRiEPOSITIONS. 
 
 271 
 
 2.1 To deliberate through a-KOTnea 2i» vv% xcti vtfM^ec, 
 night and day. Plato. 
 
 \ But Socrates through the ^am^ecmq ^g 5<« vea o fitos. 
 whole of his life. Xen, Mem. 
 
 2. With the Accusative, through means of. 
 
 -Are they not then happy 
 through means of the pos- 
 session of good ? 
 
 I am become your slave 
 through means of (for) a 
 little silver, through means 
 of not being equally rich. 
 
 Lest the Greeks should at- 
 tempt to^y through means ^ 
 
 or favour of the night. 
 
 Through not knowing. 
 
 Having seized upon Thrace 
 through means of them. 
 
 xTjjr^jj Plato Alcib. 1. 
 
 dovXos yiyt(4.xi PP^** ^tcx, ro 
 (An TeXcviia Woi^, Aristoph. 
 Plut. 
 
 fA7i7F6>? KCtl hot Vt)| 'A^eCl6S (^IV 
 
 ym c^^eiofcxu ^**" Hom. 
 
 hx TO jM« z^Yif^i. Plato Al- 
 cib. 1. 
 
 Dem. TT, o-n(P, 
 
 Aix, governing the genitive of a noun with several verbs, 
 such as l^eof >^x^Qxv6f, rik^ctf, ety^j, &c. expresses the same 
 thing as the kindred verb of the noun : thus, ^;' IXTrthg l^a, 
 is the same as IXTrt^a. h» S-av^aros l^a, as ^xvfAuZ/a, dt iv^m 
 \crri, as iv^irecu hoc ^cQov iTvxi, for (poQi7cr6xt» hoi yXacrava 'livxi, 
 to spealc. h* oiKTav XuQtTv for otKret^uv* 
 
 With some nouns and adjectives it is used adverbially 
 
272 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 as, diet ru^ov^, quicJcly ; ^lec fi^et^ioiy, shortly ; ^ttt, fiex^'orcc' 
 rm, brevissme ; ol ^icc '^mivtov, remotissimi, S^c, 
 
 A<« is often omitted before the interrogative pronoun 
 T<?, quis^ cvrogy and some others : thus, rt uyxvxKrsigj a Kv)}- 
 (Auv j i.e. ^ioi. Tt. Lucian. m f^oacxg^it <rv (2iei) rxrs <eAA«, 
 xdi ccuTc rovro. Xen. Cyr, O happy you through means 
 of, or on account o/' other things and this also. {)m) tuvr 
 ct^ IttoUvv. Aristoph. Nub. 334;, TCAvrot (^<^) lyco sc-Trgy^oy. 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 In composition ^tu, retains the same power as in its 
 simple state : thus, diccyavf to lead through ; ^io^vrruv, to 
 dig through ; dixTtrQarTHVf to finish, to go through the 
 whole work ; ^ic&Xoyi^io-dui, to go through the whole com- 
 putation ; ^leiTiX&iv, to continue through ; ^ix'^i^oveti, to dis- 
 tribute through or among ; diiffroivoi/., to set asunder^ to 
 make a separation through ; hsirsi^i^nv rh ttoXiv uxo rtlg 
 uK^ocg, Demosth. To separate the city from the citadel 
 by running a wall through the space between them. 
 2iii(pki^iiv, to corrupt, to spoil thoroughly; hotCpxtntv, to 
 shine through / (Siaa-iXziicv xai rv^xvvi^oc — dtx^s^uf aXXviX^v 
 hof/A^2, Xen, Mem, He thought that monarchy and ty- 
 ranny differed from each other, i. e. were distinguished 
 from each other by certain qualities passing as a line 
 through between them, &c. 
 
 A;« sometimes governs the genitive of the article with 
 the infinitive, more frequently the accusative : as, '^lu, hn:ov 
 ^ftkiv, Xen, through persuasion. o-vvrcfiorccTviv o^ov auro u- 
 vsit hoi Toy Ittio^xuv, Id. He thought it the shortest way 
 through perjury. «^s i/y|, hoi ro g-koiuva ihxi. Id, and the 
 night because of its being dark. 
 
 Noifi^li The Greek writers sometimes use two praepositions whose 
 secondary- applications are nearly alike to point out the same kind of 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 273 
 
 action. Thus Homer in the 12th Book of the Odyssey, v. 206, uses 
 ^da synonymously with ava. sya hx vnos <«v, I walking through the 
 ship. And in the 10th Book, v. 118, ahra^ o Tiux,i (^onv hm airrioi. See 
 also II. a. 600. av» arbfA ahi xoci ^ta, yXcaaam ^X^'^' Eurip. Andr. 95. 
 
 Note 2. Euripides uses hx with the accusative in the same sense 
 as when it governs the genitive : thus, B;a ^s XafcT^ov alSiaa 'z'if/,-^ocffc& 
 (£«'. Iphig. in Taur. 29. ; see also 358 and 889. and Homer frequent- 
 ly^ as, aiiTu^ i^u ^ifls TS erxokoTas Ktt) rx(p^ov IQrtirav (pwyovTis. 11. o. 1. 
 r^iuv h S-v^atv evfuv^ a; ihu ^s ItiXSuv. Lysias, There being three 
 doors which I must pass through. 
 
 Kara. 
 
 This praeposition has been derived from the 3. s. perf. 
 pass, of an obsolete verb x«&>, supposed to be the same 
 with icza or xjgfi-;, to lay, from which «g<ftji<, jaceo, is form- 
 ed. From 'AiKocrei.tf the perf. pass, a verbal adjective x«t«j, 
 signifying laid dovon, the immediate parent of »<»t^, has 
 been thought to take its origin. The adverb KXTca 
 is in frequent use, always signifying down or doiiori' 
 •ward J below: thus, in Hom. Odyss. -^Z, 21. Ulys- 
 ses is represented by Homerj jje-ro xeira o^om. He sat 
 looking downwards. uvc^j kutco la, Travrcc (Tvy^ixg o^ov, 
 Eurip. Bacch, Confounding every thing together up 
 and down. Though this derivation appears plausible, 
 yet I have some doubts of its correctness. It ap- 
 pears to me that we will come nearer the origin of 
 this praeposition by having recourse to other kind- 
 red dialects which underwent fewer changes than the 
 Greek, and therefore furnish us with more of the voca- 
 bles in their original state and signification. ' There is 
 one word,' says Dr Jamieson, ' signifying a way^ which 
 has been generally diffused through the northern dialects, 
 that might perhaps admit the general idea of direction 
 or course, and that when language became more polish- 
 
274? SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 ed, tljis, although originally used only as a noun, would 
 assume the form of a praeposition : In Moeso-Goth. it is 
 gatxvo : in A. S. gat, gate, in Belg. gatte, in Dan. gade. 
 But it appears to retain its primitive form in Su. G. and 
 Isl. gata ; for in these languages it retains its most sim- 
 ple meaning, via, iter.'* If this derivation be correct, 
 gata or Karot must originally have denoted the path, or tucy, 
 if I may so express it, of any object, and, as a praeposition, 
 the path or course of one object relatively to another. 
 The hearing of the one object must, it is evident, de- 
 pend upon the situation of the other. If the course is 
 direct, the praeposition will denote along ; if parallel, ac^ 
 cording to, in a figurative sense. If the latter object is 
 in a state of opposition^ y,ocru. will then denote course 
 against. If at a certain extremity, the prajposition will 
 point out the line or way to the object at that extremity ; 
 if in a lower position, the doxunxuard direction. This last 
 signification x«t« very frequently assumes, more, however, 
 from the position of the object governed, and hence the 
 direction o^ the other, than from its primary meaning. 
 When xi«T«* governs the genitive, the noun governed de- 
 notes the origin or subject of the action or relation ; 
 thus, Xcyor, Kccr Alcr^mv, the speech of which ^schines 
 is the subject; Kotr A'lar^mvf course of the speech, 
 ^schines, against ^schines. When it governs the ac- 
 cusative it denotes the course of the action, so as to ter- 
 minate a:t or to go along some other object, spps* T al^ei 
 xoiT ovTd^mv atTuMv, Horn, II. g'. 86. and the blood was 
 flowing, the course of its jflow, the wound inflicted, the 
 gate, the wound, &c. 
 
 * It gangs that gate, is a common Scottish expression. 
 
OF TR^POSITIONS. 275 
 
 1. With the Genitive, along^ S^c. 
 
 —Which these good souls '^s^ avrts xetret ii ^Ur^t^ rvi^a o 
 
 maintain against their ;^g>j(rTij.' Dem. tt. (rrgip. 
 
 country, (their country 
 
 in opposition, hence a- 
 
 gainst. ) 
 "SHe immediately digs a hole ivdvi Kecro^vTcrea jms Kuret i) <y>i 
 
 for me loto under the xetru. Aristoph. Plut. 
 
 ground. 
 \And many throwing them- Ketrec ri x^iifty^ o TroXifg ^i7tr» 
 
 selves dovon the precipi- Ictvrov. Thucyd. 
 
 ces. 
 Which pours its turbid «Tg x»r xiyt}iiip tfit^v^ ho(pi^c^ 
 
 stream dotvn a steep clifF. ^iu v^a^, Hom. 
 
 (the course of the stream, 
 
 doion the cliff.) 
 A mist was diffused over Ketroe, §' o(p&otXfAcg ^w p'" p'** 
 
 {^course of the mist, along ap^Ayf. Id. 
 
 or over) his eyes. 
 2. And (along) during all y,on Kctru. yreii o ^^cvo§ <rx.i7rT0° 
 
 future time consider. |tc«/inuem. adv. Andr. 
 
 2. With the Accusative, motion along or 
 dowriy ^c, 
 
 \He drives them along the ^iukm >.ctc^i^6i; kcc-^ o^oi, 
 
 public road. Hom. II. 
 
 \The water ran along the ta l^a^ Kara « rx<p^05 ^m^w, 
 
 trenches. Xen. 
 
 \For it struck him grasping xctft^j ^ * yx^ eivroi l^u Ketrci. 
 
276 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 (it) on the breast (direc- 
 tion of the stroke) near 
 the neck. 
 
 Who are you that thus 
 
 j_ come alone to the ships 
 {^direction of their way) 
 thro the camp, thro'* the 
 dark night ? 
 
 But by itself (taking its 
 own direction) it is weak 
 and full of numerous e- 
 yils. 
 
 But evil at least with regard 
 to (taking the direction 
 of) the deaths and the 
 wounds. 
 
 But may Diana, scouring 
 along the mountains with 
 his mother, destroy him. 
 
 1 have been wandering dur- 
 ing the moonless night. 
 
 srrridoi ttx^cc du^vi.^'^ Hom, 
 
 m o ovra xxrei vxvg ecvee. trr^X' 
 
 vccioz 
 
 Id. 
 
 cci/rn Qi ^ot.^ uvTou ufrhvvig xxi 
 TToXvs xciKog fcscrrog, Dem. 
 Olynth. 
 
 raq 7i Kxi TO iXKOi. Plato 
 Alcib. 1. 
 
 f^i ^ ^ op (Alt.) Eurip. 
 Phceniss. 
 
 Anacr. 
 
 This praeposition is frequently understood before the 
 accusative when any relation is signified : as. cvk Icrnv 
 cff-ng {kxto.) TrxvT xr/i^ iv^xifAovu, Aristoph. Ran. Nemo 
 est ab omni parte beatus. 'A^yuoi [kxtx) yivog. Thiicyd. 
 See the examples under Rule IV. of Verbs governing the 
 Accusative. 
 
 iLuTx is frequently joined with some nouns and pro- 
 nouns in common with other praepositions : as, kxtx k^w 
 
 rog OT uvcf, Koarog, by force, xx^ Ixvtov, g^' ixvrov and Trgo; 
 Ixvrovy by himself. — kxtx ra^og, quickly ; xxrx f^i^og, hif 
 turns; yMia. t^ottov, according to custom, usually; kxtx 
 
OF pr.i:positions. 277 
 
 C/rauSjjy, carefully ; y,oi&' iy, singly ; kx^ yiy^^xv, daily ; «/ 
 xxr etxh, the domestics of a Jamily. — kxtx TLXxravx, ac' 
 cording to Plato ; to xxt IfAZ, as far as regards me ; Kx-t 
 lf6t, in my time ; xi xxrx to c-afAx lyri&vf^ixi. Plato Phced, 
 The pleasures respecting the body, xxrx T^oyov, Herod, 
 pro rafione. oi kz9' >ifixg, according to our station. 
 
 In composition its general signification with verbs of 
 motion is doivn, probably from the natural course of bodies 
 in motion. In most other cases it expresses relationship 
 in various ways : y.xTx^xiva, I go ^ory« / KXTxa-Trxa, I draw 
 down ; y.xTx^x'h'ha, I throw dovon ; xxhXKvhv vm?, deducere 
 naves ; xxnsvxi elg d^ov, to descend to hell ; xxrxTrXzii, op- 
 posed to avxTTXiiy, in portum redire ; Zsv? Kxrxxl^avioq, Ju- 
 piter infernus ; x.xrxyi>.xv nvog, to laugh at one ; Kxrxyt' 
 vofd-KSiy, to entertain sentiments respecting, commonly a- 
 gainst ; kxi Kxnyyaxorx Ixvrov tovtov. Dent, tt. ttx^xttp. 
 Both that he had decided against himself. »xTx^ix.xi^uf, 
 to pronounce sentence against, S^-c. 
 
 When joined with verbs signifying loss, injury or ex* 
 jyense, it denotes complete loss, or the extension of the 
 loss, &c. : with others of a contrary kind, the extension of 
 the good, &c. : Kxrxf6i(r6o(pe^uv rx vTrx^^oiTx, to expend (lay 
 out) their means in hiring troops ; ttoXXx KXTxMXnTiv^yr,- 
 xtug. Dem. VTT. Od|. Having laid out a great deal upon 
 public shows. y,xTx(poQo5, full of fear (fear extending along 
 the whole mind.) xxrxXoyi^ia-dxi, to extend the enumera- 
 tion to the end ; xarxTriTTivuv, to extend one's confidence ; 
 xxTxpfoipicif, to sip up. It sometimes denotes comparison, 
 or, in the sense of according to : thus Thucyd. Vil. 4<o. 
 oTfXx fiivToi Iri ttXucj j) xxtx rovg vix^ovg lxvi(p&n' iVIore shields 
 were, however, captured than according to the number of 
 the slain. 
 
278 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Note. It seems probable that the conjunction x»i owes its origin 
 to the verb xaw, supposed, by Mr Bonar, to be the root of xutk. 
 This is the opinion both of Lennep and Scheide, but their mode of 
 applying it does not appear to be correct, xoci is probably formed 
 from Kart, signifying one object or thing laid to another so as to join or 
 connect them, xai ya^ olxiast ^«' ay^ovi xat avS^a^raSa, &c. Xen. Mem. 
 DtKias laid to ay^oi/g, uy^ou; laid to av^^ct-^oici, &C. 
 
 Mgra. 
 
 None of the derivations assigned to this praeposition 
 appear to me to correspond so exactly with its general 
 meaning, as that proposed by Dr Jamieson. " This prse- 
 " position," says he, " very sh'ghtly varied in form, and 
 <* retaining the characters of identity in its principal sig- 
 " nifications, appears in all the Gothic dialects. Maeso- 
 « Goth. A. S. mith, mid. Alem. mit. Isl. Su. G. Dan. 
 « med, mede. — Whatever may be viewed as the origin 
 « of the Greek praeposition, that of the Goths has proba- 
 <« bly been formed from the verb signifying to meet, or 
 <« from some one of its derivations. — If a noun," he adds, 
 <» should be preferred as the root of the praeposition, one 
 « may be found which will express its common significa- 
 « tions at least equally well with the verb. This is Alem. 
 '^ mate, maet, socius, sodalis ; Isl. Su. G. mat, maet, id. 
 " Teut. maed, med, maet, socius, collega, sodalis, aequalis, 
 '« compar. Kilian.*' The signification affixed to the noun 
 agrees exactly with the meaning of the praeposition when 
 it governs the genitive case; viz. with, sharing iuith./ 
 The noun mate in our own language, may be interpreted 
 in a similar manner, as one sharing with another, one 
 met with another, and so joined in all the relations of life. 
 It is not improbable that the Greek fAiT-cg and Latin 
 med'ius, among, are both connected with the same root. 
 In signification they correspond with the praeposition f^irx 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 279 
 
 when it governs the dative. These collateral terms en- 
 able us, I imagine, to fix pretty nearly the primary mean- 
 ing 0^ fiiiec when it governs the genitive; viz. as denoting 
 one thing met tvith anothevy and so joined with that other ; 
 and by an extension of the idea as arising from the con- 
 nection, shari?ig ivitk : thus f^tr ciXvikietg. Plato, xvith truth , 
 truth met, joined: thus, in the language of scripture, 
 truth met ivith mercy, f^ira Boiarm l^d^ovro. Horn, They 
 fought tvith the Boeotians : the Boeotians ivere sharers of 
 the fight. ^gT« /Bx^Qiray uu^av, Ajiacr. singing Voith the 
 lyre. The lyre, accompaniment of the singing. Mirotj 
 however, when it governs the accusative, generally as- 
 sumes, both in Latin and English, a very different mean- 
 ing, viz. Post, after. In accounting for this difference, 
 we must keep in mind the progressive motion or action of 
 the one object, and its relation to the other, as pointed 
 out by the praeposition : thus, in the expression, ftirci, toj* 
 •TTcMfAov iiKitv, Plato, three things are to be considered : 
 1st. The action as denoted by tixsiv : 2d. The war; and 
 3d. The relation between the two as denoted by f^sru. 
 Now, as the praeposition with the genitive signifies junc- 
 tion, or one object met with another, it is plain, that with 
 a verb denoting motion, and intended to point out the 
 course of that motion relatively to another object, the 
 first object must be in a progressive state to meet or join 
 the other : and as the latter object to a spectator will ap- 
 pear before the other, the former must of consequence 
 advance behind or after the other in its progressive state 
 to join it: hence, to come after the war; to come, 
 the war preceding in the order of time, ^zret, after, as if 
 to join. In other examples, the praeposition may be trans- 
 lated by the verb to meet, to join : thus, Zivg ya.g Itt axiX" 
 vov fAir ufivf^ovxg AldicTrvieig, yj^itji(i e(o>j f6sr<» ^xirx, Horn, 
 For Jupiter went yesterday to the ocean to meet the vir- 
 tuous Ethiopians, to join a festjival. In a few the idea of 
 
280 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Tttate or companion may be distinctly traced : thus, eCrs 
 vvKTog dvvccrai xnSiv^uv, ovn fxid^ vumpocy, ou uv j, fcsvitv. Plato. 
 Pkcedr. Neither in the night could he sleep, nor through 
 the day (along with the day), rest where he was. 
 
 MiTu with the Poets governs the Dative in the sense of 
 among, hetvoeen, corresponding, as was already remarked, 
 with the Latin medius. 
 
 1. With the Genitive, mtk. 
 
 \They were going to expose 
 themselves with many 
 brave allies (allies, com- 
 panions, mates. J 
 \ With much thanks this 
 would have been willing- 
 ly given to the state. 
 
 They do not lie unhonour- 
 ed with (in) oblivion^ 
 
 And in no long time the 
 trouble (disease) de- 
 scended to the breast with 
 a severe cough. 
 
 Others with fraud and art 
 having become superior 
 to their enemies. 
 
 Thucyd. 
 Dem. ir. c-T£(p. 
 
 CV fMTOC XVi^Vi OiTlf^Og XilfACCt* 
 
 Xen. Mem. 
 Kcci h cv 'TPoXXcg x^ovog xctnc 
 
 Qa 
 
 itn 
 
 ig Toft. a-rr 
 
 ,^P» 
 
 Thucyd. 
 
 yivof^cci ^ * g;tj^go5. ^ Isocr. 
 
 2. With the Dative, among, betweeti, 
 
 ^ He was busy among the (nircc Tclartg vcnu. Horn, 
 foremost. 
 
 ^Conspicuous «W?0??^ the Tro- 'l^cnog yw;), Tvai^hvog T «^o« 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 jan matrons and virgins. 
 
 281 
 
 ^XiTTTOi flit 61. Eurip. He- 
 cub. 
 I will devour Noraan the Ovrig lyw ttv^catos l^a 2f mi 
 last among his associates. f^iret o? ir»^o§, Horn. O- 
 
 dyss. 
 He held the lightening (in) l^a h crggajru ^at» xit^C* Id. 
 between his hands. 
 
 2. With the Accusative, after. 
 
 \ After the Sicilian disaster 
 (the Sicilian disaster pr^- 
 ccding. ) 
 \Whom I love most after 
 
 . you. 
 J vA. city the richest in Asia 
 after Babylon. 
 Then even Neptune, though 
 much inclined otherwise, 
 should immediately change 
 his mind after (to join) 
 thy heart and mine. 
 His pliant limbs bear him 
 to (after) his haunts and 
 the pasture of the mares. 
 
 cyd. 
 
 Aristoph. Plut. ■ 
 
 TToXtg ^'^ Jj ?rXovTios h 'jj 'A<n» 
 (AiToc Bx'^vXav, Xen. Cyr. 
 
 TO) xs Uoa-uaxav yi, text ii fixXa 
 ^ovXof/.At uXXti, eci-^ct f^erx'^ 
 
 xett l^og x?g. Hom. 
 
 J' : 
 ^i^^cc I yovv (ps^a jt^sret r ^$6^ 
 
 Kdi vofAos Itttfos* Hom. 
 
 Mirac and o-yv are both used after the verbs uKoXcvhu and 
 i7ro(^.cti : thus Thucydides, Aagtziq Itfi Aa^nag ^ixct 'A&vivxtav 
 'lavuv ^KoXovSovv, VII. c. 57. Ittov ftir Ipiov Tcxihet^iov. AriS" 
 toph. Plut. xKdXovhi f^iT l^ov. Plato Menex. And also 
 with several substantives : thus, fAira rav voftm and o-yv vcTi 
 vof^oig, Thiicyd. and Xen. fcsrct rov hxectov, /teer* Bivv. And 
 
 T 
 
282 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 sometimes synonymously with Itti governing the dative : 
 KoidcvTtci, iirt h rovrot^ ^oiKott. Xen. Cyr, 
 
 In composition it retains the meaning both of iKith and 
 after : thus, f^irxXxf^'ouvuv rav y.iv^wut, to share tuzM ano- 
 ther in the dangers ; (/.itix^ and ^iruf^if I share with ; fn- 
 ru^u^i^io-dcci, to hold with the hands, to have in subjection ; 
 (ittreocog, a sojourner, a dweller with citizens. — ^^sT^TrgtsTrso-- 
 6oci, to send after ; o-o(pieiv ^imveii, to go after wisdom, to 
 prosecute it. MgT««, in composition with certain words, 
 seems to express a change, an event different from the 
 one that preceded it : thus, f^iretxx&oTrXi^uv, after being 
 armed in one way to arm in another ; ntsruTni&uvj to per- 
 suade to the adoption of one opinion ajier holding ano- 
 ther ; fAtTS/^ihovro rg Tg^an^ov ovx, etyeta-retvris* 2%ucyd. Having 
 resolved not to move, they took an after resolution, they 
 repented that they had not formerly moved ; fjtiruvozoy 
 after thinking one way I change the objeqt of my thought, 
 &c. This is the usual way of resolving fjcirx, in such com- 
 pounds ; I apprehend, however, that there is an ellipsis of 
 some noun to make the construction complete and legiti- 
 mate ; thus, in the example fiir»v<iiaj the ellipsis may be 
 supplied by ukXcv T^cTrov ; vcia f^sr uXXov t^ottov, I think 
 after a different way ; I change my thoughts. Sometimes 
 also it has the same signification in composition as when 
 it governs the dative : as, furetftx^iovf between the breasts ; 
 jtcgT«5og5r;oj, between supper, &c. 
 
 The noun or pronoun governed by this praeposition is 
 sometimes omitted : as, fisrx ^g, i. e. ^iret ^l ruvrcti after 
 this. And sometimes it governs the article with the infi- 
 nitive ; as, fiiici rev zxt k ru eixxot B-gt^e-iiv. With confidence 
 in other matters. 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS* 
 
 283 
 
 This prseposition seems evidently formed from an old 
 adjective vTri^o? probably the comparative of an obsolete 
 adjective, y;r«j. From wVggo? another comparative seems to 
 have been formed, still existing in the language, viz. y^rsg- 
 TSgej, by a syncope for vTsn^on^o^: 05 ^a rod^ 'Ex.ro^i Kv^og vTt?^- 
 Ti^ov lyyvaXi^i. Hom. ll. o. 644'. l^d^av rav IfAav VTri^ri' 
 ^ovg. Eurip. Med. 918. It corresponds exactly with the 
 Mcesc-Gothic w/ar, the Anglo-Saxon ufer, the Scots uxmr, 
 English over and upper. See Jamiesons Hermes Scyth, 
 'X^jg, then, appears to denote that one object is higher 
 than, or over another object.* 
 
 1. With the Genitive, it commonly signifies 
 rest ot^^r or above: 1. In point of place : 2. 
 In defence of or in behalf of: 3. In room of 
 It may also be translated by for or concern- 
 ing.f 
 
 l.^High above the earth, v-^ov vttz^ yean- Horn. 
 
 ^The sun advancing over us o iiXiog vm^ *if^>iig xect ui cmycts 
 
 and our habitations. Tro^ivafiui, Xen. Mem. 
 
 Him he struck on the head o fa /Bx>,Xaf ^ * Ki(pecXn vtts^ 
 
 above the ear. omg, Hom. 
 
 2, And that it is right to ex- xut roivrcc v^rjg tifcug ^ikuio? Im- 
 pend them hereybr (in &»^i umxiM xect fin vrs^ 
 
 * See observations under «5ro. 
 
 f See Moor's Grammar part II. p. 58. 
 
 T 2 
 
284. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 behalf of) ourselves and 
 not for those exiles. 
 
 3.^ But go as quickly as 
 possible, and learn j^r me 
 
 (i. e. in my stead, v^rgg rotJ 
 TflTrey ray e(iov). 
 
 I entreat you bt/ your soul 
 and knees, (life) and pa- 
 rents, i. e, by the regard 
 you have^r, as watching 
 over. 
 \ 4. What he falsely charged 
 me concerning the peace 
 («. e, he formed his false 
 charge over the peace as 
 the subject). 
 
 ^jrjjg cpvyxi ot^i' Thucyd, 
 i/TTi^ lya fce(v6uvci>, Aristoph. 
 
 Nub. 
 
 Xto-are/^* VTFig 4'y;c«, x.on yovvy * 
 e-tfj TS TCKivg. Horn. 
 
 ^ ^ lyaf, Dem. 9r. <rTi(p. 
 
 2, With the Accusative, motion over or 
 heyond. 
 
 ' And laboriously heyond \ 
 my strength (preceding 
 
 Dem. ;r. a-Ti^, 
 
 fVVXf4,ti, 
 
 higher than. 
 
 ♦ yovv is frequently used by 'Homer for the animal life; as when a 
 person faints through weakness or loss of blood the knees fail and he 
 sinks to the ground; thus, os rot yovtar ikvffot,. II. ^, 355» who have 
 deprived you oilife. 
 
 f In this example the difference between xara and u'x't^ will show 
 more clearly the meaning of the passage : xara, "^um/iiv, extending to 
 one's strength, as far as one's strength, v^s^ ^uvetfuv, rising higher, 
 above the strength. In the following passage from Demosthenes vri^i 
 cri<p. the two praspositions are beautifully contrasted : T«wrjj» fuv tv^v- 
 art vroivrii Iv rt7; xaivaTs i^ira^o/xivnv vtIo vfcwv ufi xai ov^aftou xa^' vf/,uv. 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 285 
 
 \ Another to those beyond «aa« el vs-eg r« e-T^etnva-ifAai 
 
 the age of military ser- gTojP^ ytyojt««<. p* p ™^ Xen. 
 
 vice. Cyr. 
 
 Lest even over fate (con- ^vi Koti vTn^ ^oi^cc ^o^to^ ui^oi 
 
 trolling the decrees of ilgrx^iKvicfcxi.^^*^ Horn. 
 
 fate) you descend to the 
 
 abode of hell. 
 
 *Y7r£g frequently governs the genitive of the article be- 
 fore the infinitive : thus, vtts^ rov f^n ravrn* lyri^uv ^svAst/ov 
 G-uv. Dem. TT. <rrg(p. For the sahe of not seeing her en- 
 slaved. 
 
 For formerly we contended Tr^en^ov ^£» y«g yjrsg re d 
 
 Jbr the sovereignty over <eAAo» k^yfii uyuyt^o(Aott' vvn 
 
 others, but now Jbr the ^g y^sg to ^jj 'x-ona xvres 
 
 sake of not executing our- to Tr^oa-retTTCfcxt, Isocr. 
 selves what is prescribed. 
 
 'Yjrsg, in the sense in which it is used in these and other 
 examples, denotes over something as an object of care, or 
 as a prize. 
 
 In composition it commonly signifies over or beyond, 
 as being connected with verbs of motion: thus, vTrifixt- 
 niv, to go beyond ; V7ri^e^u,y, to overlook ; kxi iTTTFivnv fccrn- 
 6xvav vTri^i^c'ii^iv. Xen. Cyr, And learning to ride he was 
 overjoyed. v7i-i^ipoQit<rdxt, to fear beyond usual fear, to be 
 greatly afraid. vTrs^xyxTrxv, to love beyond common love, 
 to love greatly, vjregjj^s^o?, a debtor who passes beyond 
 the day of payment, &c. 
 
286 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 V. Of such Praepositions as govern three 
 Cases, the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative^ 
 viz. *Ai^(p)y Hg^/, 'Et/, n^oV, ria^a and 'Tto. 
 
 This praeposition probably owed its origin to the verb 
 ufAota or u(AO0, * used by Homer in the sense of, I collect 
 together, 1 embrace or grasp. II. /. 550. — 'ivQcc ^ i^tdoi"u^a¥, 
 olsU? ^^iTTclvx^ h ^iej^iv s^ovreg. Hence the Latins derived 
 their verb amo, commonly signifying I love, but origi- 
 nally I embrace, as appears from a passage in Plautus, 
 Pcen. Act. 2: Sine, amem. suffer me to embrace (my 
 mistress). From this verb was formed the adjective u^b^, 
 signifying collected into one heap, and generally taken 
 for one, and also the adverb ufAoc, together. We more 
 frequently find the former in its compound state of ov^ccfcog 
 and (je,n^ce,y.(>g, not one, and with the epenthesis of <p in the 
 dual u(A<poi, two objects embraced or united together, Mr 
 Bonar supposes that an obsolete adjective uf^itg was likewise 
 formed from the verb, and that with the epenthesis of the 
 ^ * it became u(>c(pi§, having the same meaning as ^^(poj, 
 
 • This verb is evidently the root of the Latin inseparable praeposi- 
 tion am, denoting about, and sometimes an, as in anceps. 
 
 * Mr. Bonar says, ** Perhaps the <p thus inserted was originally the 
 ^olic digamma ; a letter common in the most ancient Greek vs'rit- 
 ings, and, it seems probable, pronounced not unlike the (p." See a 
 probable account of the paragoge ipi under the praeposition atro. — 
 Dr Jamieson, after pointing out the similarity betvt^een this pra?position 
 and the Celtic am, amb, and amba ; tlie Anglo-Saxon evib, t/nib, ymhe 
 QIC unib, says, I am almost inclined to think that the Moeso- Gothic bi, 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 287 
 
 nnd that its dative case was afterwards used as a praeposi- 
 tion, denoting place or object embraced, grasped or com- 
 prehended. — But as ufAipi is frequently used synonimously 
 with TTi^tf which Mr Bonar thinks signifies the bounder or 
 circumjerence, and in the following passages from the Iliad 
 of Homer is joined with it, I apprehend it must refer to 
 the first noun, and denote it as the object grasping or em- 
 bracing : y)f/Mg 5' (XfAipi TTi^i »^j)v*)v h^cv5 Kocroi /Sfo^soj gg^Ojtts?. 
 We were sacrificing round about the fountain, at the 
 sacred altars, o^^xi ^' «^(p; ^e^i fizyax' ix^ov. II. <p'. 10. The 
 banks echoed loud ground about* wt>.>.o(. ^g tiv^iot, n.ct.'hu, ^rgcoK 
 fci^t T u^(p) ts Wfpgov. //. ^. 760. The chief difference be- 
 tween k(A(^] and TTgg/ seems to be this : «/tc(p<' primarily signi- 
 fies to grasp or embrace on both sides, tci^i to surround on 
 all sides. Hence <»|e«(p<5g|<oj cn^vi^cg, anceps gladium, not ^rggr- 
 ^£|<o?. eifc(pi'^^orn fisc-Tr;?, a shield protecting the man both 
 before and behind, not Trm'^^orvi. au(priXi<i'(roii vmg. Horn. 
 Ships impelled by oars on both sides, not •^i^nXio-ercti. uf^- 
 (pcjsg KiTo-v'^iov. Theocr. a cup with t'voo handles or ears. 
 When, however, neither the form of jobjects is such as to 
 confine the application of the praeposition to two sides only, 
 nor is it necessary to state very particularly the extent of 
 the circuit, u^cpi and jrgg/ are used synonimously. Thus 
 Homer II, g . 4. A^^i ^' «g' etvr^ /3«t;v', a? ns Trept ^o^reuci 
 f^nrn^. See also II. -r. 369, &c. 
 
 I. With the Genitive, about, concerning. 
 
 They dwell about the city ^(^(pi ^roXig oUw, Herod, 
 (f. e. their dwellings em- 
 bracing the city). 
 
 circum, be in Anglo-Saxon j embe, ymbc and bi in Alem. umbi, point out 
 the original form of ^i in the Greek kf/i,<pi, whatever may have been 
 the origin of the first syllable. 
 
288 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 \WishIng to learn about you 7rvii6»vcftett * * ho^xt ret t «^- 
 and about Orestes. ^i <rvy i» t' ufx,(f 'Oggc-Tjjj. 
 
 Eurip. Orest. 
 \ A treatise about the stars. ufA(pt «Wg«j» yga<pjj. Lucian. 
 
 2. With the Dative, close about or around. 
 
 \ Shaking about your head. nma-a-u ufAp x^xg e-og, Ari- 
 
 stoph. 
 
 \ 3he will put round her yel- |«v^o? §' u(^(pi mfin ri&t)f<.i « 
 low locks the deadly or- ui^x Koa-f^og, Eurip. Med. 
 nament. 
 
 To suffer calamities a long rtioT^t uf^tpi yvv^ ^roXvg ^avcs 
 time about such a wo- ^Aycj %»q:%u* Horn, 
 man. 
 
 3. With the Accusative, motion or fljcfo'o/i 
 about. 
 
 \Where the old men take h^ct^n vety^utag ^utriru ecf^(pt 
 
 their seats about the sac- Hg^gnvaj y^6»g. Eurip. Med. 
 
 red waters of Pirene. 
 
 \He was, when he died, a- Ic-t; ds on riMvretej ufi^t ro 
 
 bout fifty years, 5r£yrjj«6VT« Itoj. Xen. Anab. 
 
 You say, said Cyrus, that Mya c-v, (pvifAi o Kv^ag, jrg^o? 
 
 the infantry are nearly ^g p-;t;s^Qv u^<pi d yi^iervg* 
 
 about the half. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 About her dear son she u^(pih log (pi?^og viog x^'^^^^'^ 
 
 threw her white arms. ^vix^g ^^ Mvxog. Horn. 
 
 As when in heaven the stars ag S' «V' b ov^xvog atrt^ov cpxti- 
 
 shine bright around the vtg «^^< viMn (pectm u^i' 
 
 refulgent moon. «r^g?n}f. Horn. 
 
OF PRiBPOSiriONS. 289 
 
 In phrases of the follcwing nature, in which the name 
 of the person or persons vfirst in dignity or rank is only- 
 mentioned, ufi<p{ and Tf^^t are used indiscriminately : thus, 
 0^ elfiipt or 'TTi^i H£vo(^«i'''«, those about Xenophon ; Xeno- 
 phon and his fohowers ; fws ei(A<pi Q^oia-v^-ov kxi 'E^«c-;y<^jjy, 
 those about Thrasylus ar<a Erasinides, i. e. the nine gene- 
 rals of whom they were the chief. 
 
 ol f^zv u^ v,^<^ AlccyTtii kcc) 'l^of^iviicc eivuKrot, 
 
 vcrfiinTiv «gT«voj».— Horn. IL c, SOI. 
 
 Ajax and his followers, kiag Idomeneus, &c. set in order 
 the battle. 
 
 A^(pi is sometimes used in the sense of wgg;, denoting 
 eminence, distinction ; thiiS a^^^fy^t^ras^o^eyoj, aiTii 3-' gov vth 
 ionx. IL 5r'. 192. 
 
 With the verbs l^et a4id dui, it signifies to be employed 
 about ; thus, e f&tv Kt^«^«^c$ ce^tt^i ^ii^vov il)(^iv, Xen, Oyr. 
 Cyaxares was supping «/*^ tM^toc ko-xv. Dionys. Hal, 
 They were employed abozit these. «^(p' ocvrovq ii^n l^uv, 
 Xen, Cyr. To be new etcployed abut themselves. 
 
 In composition «'w^/ retains its original power : thus, d^^ 
 (piQctXMiv^ circumjicere, to chrow around ; uf>t(pimvoj, I clothe 
 all around, I begird ; ix je^<pi>^>y<», controversise forenses, 
 about tvhich lawyers can s^y much on both sides ; uf/^cpn^z^ 
 (piiiy undique tectus, protected all around; uf^cpiyvoicj, 1 
 have doubts about ; «,<6f »rggoj, comprehending the one and 
 the other, both, &c. 
 
 Scheide derives this p-a»position from'^wega?, contracted 
 for ivt^dta, penetrOf iransea from which he supposes an ob - 
 
290 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 solete noun ^ip?, having in the dative jrgg*, to have been 
 formed. He explains it by penetration to the utmost boun- 
 dary, or the circumference of a thing, Mr Bonar considers 
 it " an immediate cognate of Tciqu^^ a boundarij, contracted 
 ^* from the dative of this noun Tn^oiri, 'Tti^Ui, Trig/, signify^ 
 " ing the containing houndary.^^ 
 
 I am inclined to agree with Mr Bonar's derivation, 
 though it does not differ essentially from Scheide's, and 
 to consider jrjg;, xvith the genitive, as signifying, in gene- 
 ral, hounding so as to touch upon, so that the noun go- 
 verned forms the origin or subject ; hence it is generally 
 translated by the Latin praeposition de^ concerning : When 
 connected with this case, it sometimes denotes about for 
 defence, and sometimes for possession, as in the one case 
 the object of defence is protected on all sides by the arms 
 of its defender, and in the other, when there is a struggle 
 for the possession of an object, the assailant attempts it 
 on all sides. These accessory ideas, however, do not arise 
 from the praeposition, but from the context. With the 
 dative, in general, close about : With the accusative, about 
 any thing as a centre to which the object is directed. Hence 
 it is generally translated by the praeposition circa. With 
 the accusative, it applies, 1. to place; 2. to time; 3. to 
 numbers. ' 
 
 1, With the Genitive, about or concerning. 
 
 The contest will be about Tre^i Tretr^t? uf6t o uym. Thu- 
 
 {our) country. cyd. 
 
 One omen (^is the) best, to s/j o<&>yoff oiyx&oi;, afAwu^^ ttz- 
 
 contend for our country. g< -^retr^n, Horn. 
 
 Are not these poems about oyxoyi/ rcvro 'xmf^ot, stt* 7r£g< 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 291 
 
 the difference between ^M^po^oi hx'Oi.ug ^^ n xut «- 
 
 justice and injustice ? ^<«05 j Plato Alcib. 1. 
 
 Concerning the power of weg; ts '^^u.^^tx. ^wx^i? x-eii 
 
 letters and syllables, and o-uAAcsSj) Kstt ei^y^ovix ^^ x.m 
 
 harmony and rhythm. py^^oj. p^ Plato Hipp. 
 
 Maj. 
 
 They two contended about o^z ik wsgf vocvg l^u 7r6vo?, 
 
 one ship. Horn. 
 
 2. With the Dative, close about. 
 
 Armed ahout his body with 
 golden armour the labour 
 of Vulcan (Vulcanian la- 
 bour). 
 
 Fearing for (ahout) the 
 ships. 
 
 But what is called defensive 
 armour, a breast-plate 
 close ahout the breast. 
 
 '/l(pcci(r707rovog ico^vhu. Eu- 
 rip. Iph. in Aul. 
 
 ^iiheo ^ ^ 7Cip_l i) vxvg, Thucyd. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 
 With the Accusative, directed about, tend- 
 ing about. 
 
 1. Upon account of their 
 former services about me. 
 
 He stationed the whole ar- 
 my round the city. 
 
 And this square, viz. about 
 the magistrates (houses) 
 is divided into four parts. 
 
 2. Now ahout (verging to- 
 wards) twilight. 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 nvf/^ot TTi^t vj TToXig, Xen. 
 ^icct^z&i P P^® ^g cvrog ^ «yog«, 
 7i TTi^i TO ec^^utg (^^aifax^ tig 
 
 iirroi^zg f^i^og 
 
 Id. 
 
 iri^t ^uXti ^^n ii^itg. Thucyd. 
 
2S2 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANG UAGE. 
 
 They come about the mid- «(ptKno^xi^-'7Fi^t ^se-ns »t»|. p^ 
 
 die of the night. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 3. And having sunk about yccv? rz K»Tcch&>'^^ vi^i 8€5««, 
 
 seventy ships they erect- f^viKovroi tffrnf^i ^ * r^oTtwov. 
 
 ed a trophy. Thucyd. 
 
 The best writers sometimes use this prseposition with 
 the genitive and accusative without any apparent diffe- 
 rence : thus, in the first book and first chapter of Xeno- 
 phon's Memorabilia, ^otv^et^u ova, cTras ttotz Itfikf&wxv 'A^ji- 
 vuiti '2uKg^xTnv TTs^f rovg B-iovg f^n (ra(p^oniy, rav eitn^ig f.i,iv nv^n 
 TFtri TTi^i Toug B-eovs out' iiTroyrec ovn Tr^x^avrxj roixvrec h x,tft 
 MycvTa xoa Tr^ccrrcvrc^ Tre^t Bsmv, &c. And Homer uses it 
 with the Genitive and Dative without any apparent distinc- 
 tion of meaning : thus, 
 
 pvrt ro<roy viKvos tts^i hi'^ia Uetr^cKXtio — 
 
 Homer frequently uses 7r£g< with the genitive, and 
 sometimes absolutely in the sense of W5rg|, denoting emi' 
 nence or superiority ; as the object which surrounds must 
 be of greater magnitude and importance than the object 
 surrounded : thus, II. u, 258. pi Tn^t ^tv /SovXyi Aetyecm, 
 TTi^t y la-rs fAct^id-dui. Who surpass the Greeks in council, 
 and surpass them in battle, a ol m^i 2a>Kzy 'A^jik^. Odyss, 
 Which Minerva in a distinguished manner conferred upon 
 her. See also /. 38. k. 88. /. 329, &c. Compounded with 
 i'lfAi and 'yivdfAXi it has always this meaning : thus, lyco yx^ 
 «y cWos. on tovrm rjj yg (pyo-g* tcocvv ^roAy TTi^tsa-ofAXt, Plato Al- 
 cib. 1, For I know well that I shall very far surpass them 
 in natural talents at least. ro<rov7a> yu^ TcXvihi Tci^iiiy (iacG-iMvg. 
 Xen. Anab. For the King was so much superior in num- 
 ber. Homer sometimes uses ?rg§/ with 5r§«, as both prwpo- 
 
OF PRJEPOSITIONS* 293 
 
 positions denote eminence j thus^ Tn^t tt^q yu,^ lyjcii ^^^v. Jl, 
 tt'. 699. 
 
 With particular terms of art, preceded by the article, it 
 denotes those who exercise or are conversant about such 
 arts; thus, t>i Tci^t prc^iKriV (ri^vv)v,'^ Rhetoricians, oi tts^i 
 TJj? y^x/^fcocrixTiV {j^X>^nVj) Gl'ti^^niarians. ol %-ipi lovg Xoyov^f 
 Orators, &c. — In these and similar examples the participle 
 hccr^i^ovTsg or some such word is understood. See Isocr. 
 ad Nicol. p. 48. 
 
 With the genitive of several adjectives, and the infini- 
 tive middle of the verbs TrauM, nhf^i and iyscfcoct, it denotes 
 the measure of value : thus, ^-s^t TroXXdv Troiuij-Scn, or nhc- 
 6cci, or riyiia-Sxh magnijacei-e, to esteem highly, ^rsg/ ttAs*©- 
 vti;, &c. pluris ; %-s^t ttX^ittcv, phirimi ; Tn^t Tracvrtg, maximi ; 
 TTS^} fiix^dVf parvi ; Tirs^i Ixxrrovog, minorzs ; ttz^) IXx^ta-roUf 
 minimi ; ^n^] ey^gvo?, nihili ; Tne) sroAAoy Itrvi, magni interest. 
 or with the verbal 7ro;>)T£oj ; thus, on tv to ^y^v Tn^t TrXupTov 
 vcbinnoy. Xenoph. Mem. In these and similar expressions 
 the genitive of ri^.r^fiu, pretium, or x^W'^^y ^^ understood. 
 Thucydides employs the expression h Ixiya^lu. n Ittoiovvto, 
 parvi Jaciebantf in the same sense as ^rs^i f^cix^ov, or ttzpI 
 ov^ivog iTroiavvro. VII. 3. 
 
 It frequently governs the genitive of the article before 
 the infinitive : as, rovg ^tv yug Xcyovg vi^i tov rif^a^Ytc-xsrScct 
 ^iXiTTTToy o^a yivcf/.zvovg. Dem. Olynth. For I perceive our 
 speeches are about revenging ourselves on Philip, -nri^t tou 
 -Tre^bT'thhrj. Xen. About getting access. 
 
 In composition with tl/^t and yivoy.xif it sometimes go- 
 verns the genitive of a noun in the sentence, denoting SU" 
 periority. In other respects it retains its original signifi- 
 cation : at^Ti ray y^xXiTray xxt ^vs-KoXm ccTFccvruv Tn^iyfyf.vyiT- 
 
294" SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 &oi(, Demosth. So as to have got the better of every thing 
 difficult and disagreeable. 5reg<7r«T?<j', to voalk about : Trt^i" 
 QxiTTiiv, circiimspicerej to look round or about ; Trz^isXecwuy, 
 to drive round; 7rm<^Xg7i-rog, drawing about him the eyes of 
 all, illustrious; Trt^i^a^vig, agreeable in every part, all «- 
 roundj or contaiiiing toithin its boundary other agreeable 
 things and so surpassing them. ^gg<€o»3ro?, proclaimed all 
 around, infamous; 7r^t<poQog, surrounded as it were by 
 fear ; Tn^i^yogy one who goes about a piece of business but 
 does not apj^fy to it, idle, trifling ; '^s^iihiv and tts^io^Zv, to 
 look round, not direct at an object as '^^Ig implies, hence 
 to 71 eglect, to despise s 7ri^i(p^ovuvf sometimes in a similar 
 way signifies to despise, S^c. 
 
 This prseposltion is more frequently used by the Greek 
 writers, and assumes a greater variety of meanings than 
 any other. It is therefore difficult to reconcile them to 
 one particular root and one simple idea. The verb l7r6>, 
 as stated by Mr Bonar, is likely to have been the origin 
 of this praeposition, as its general meaning coincides pretty 
 nearly with the different acceptations in which Itti is taken. 
 It occurs several times in Homer, and is translated by 
 Henry Stephen, Thes. operor, ago, tracto, item sequor, as 
 in the middle voice ; thus, ywA ^ Irr avrot? ilTnro. Eurip, 
 Alcest, 1051. and the lady followed, close upon them. Ixt 
 ^g fivwfi'^^i Ucc(rro5 Trcti^m, Horn, and besides, in addition, 
 let each remember his children, d^xxovra B' os -fruy^^va-ot 
 afjc((>i7FMv h^ui. Eurip, Med. 480. If Ixo) be the root, the 
 praeposition must, I apprehend, signify an object toiiching 
 ov pressing upon, and hence also Jblloiving upon. Mr Bo- 
 nar connects it with the latter substantive, and explains it 
 by object pressed, adhered to, or object touched closely. But 
 
OF PRiE POSITIONS. 
 
 295 
 
 I imagine the ratio of the cases and the application of the 
 praeposition require it to be joined with the former sub- 
 stantive rather than with the latter^ as it denotes, parti- 
 cularly with the accusative, the motion of the one directed 
 upon or against the other. * With the genitive it com- 
 monly signifies motion or rest upon. With the dative, 
 close upon, depending upon, upon accoimt of. With the 
 accusative, motion directed upon or against. It is applied, 
 1. to jjlace ; 2. to time ; 3. to numbers. 
 
 1 . With the Genitive, motion or rest upon. 
 
 1. And let any point ^ be 
 assumed upon (the line) 
 uy. 
 
 V For he was sitting regard- 
 ing the battle and the 
 fight upon the lofty sum- 
 mit of the woody Samus. 
 Nor were you by yourselves 
 (i. e. resting upon your- 
 selves) able to under- 
 stand them. 
 
 2. For these happened in 
 my time, {^resting upon 
 me, and hence denoting 
 the precise period,) not 
 long ago. 
 
 f^iiov iTTt vi AT TO A. Eucl- 
 
 VI. 9. 
 
 Txrjiig. Horn. II. 
 ^n}' i^' vfAUg etvrei clog ts Irri 
 
 G-vvivifii, -^ Dem. K. 'Api- 
 
 CTOK, 
 
 It lyco yct^i cv^i TretXut, ymo- 
 f/.cci cvroi. P '^^ Dem. O- 
 lynth. 
 
 * The adverb e^ri/ is evidently derived from the same source, as it 
 signifies one imrtion of time folloiving upon or jwessing upon another : 
 irarx, after these things^ following upon these. 
 
§96 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK ANGCAGE. 
 
 The third day sitting on 
 his chariot, he was pro- 
 secuting his march. 
 
 3. The captain leading his 
 company one by one ; i. e. 
 one adhering to another 
 ovJollo-Ming upon. 
 
 ti h T^iro? Itti re o u^^\et6n'* 
 uctt 'A TTo^uct TTona. ^ Xen, 
 Anab. 
 
 s/ff. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 2. With the Dative, dQ^e upon,^ he. 
 
 \Plose upon the sources of 
 the river. 
 
 Who first ? and wk j next ? 
 (i. e. Jbllowing close up^ 
 on.) 
 
 He deliberates how he shall 
 no longer be dependent 
 upon his brother. 
 
 You commit murder upojz 
 murder [pressing close 
 upon.) 
 
 I do not sp^ak thus upon ac- 
 count o/' reproach, {speech 
 close upon) or insult, but 
 grief. 
 
 Such entertainment he af- 
 forded them during sup- 
 per {^entertainment close 
 u^oon. ) 
 
 TTi 1* %tyvi TTorceAccg, Xen. 
 
 m pr^»rdg i T/ff 5' iTTt TT^ardg 3 
 Eiifip. 
 
 I TXi I fci ct^iT^^es, Xen. 
 
 i^Jiab. 
 
 Itti <pci9g TT^eca-creo ^ovdg. Eurlp. 
 
 Orest. 
 
 0^0' 9!-' CVSl^OS, P^ 0V§* \7sri X^P- 
 
 Id. PLseniss. 
 Toi^vi'^S U.ZV uvrog^ tvGvfiiec^^ 
 
 VttQ^f^U I TTi to hlTTVOV, XCH. 
 
 Cyr. 
 
 The early poets, as Homer and Hesiod, equently join Isri with 
 the dative in the sense of against or uj^on. thus, ii ftti a,^ viov lev Sa^- 
 wjjSaya (Anvtirot. 2si/j u^ffiv sw' KoyiioKti. Hp'ni. TL (s . 292. See also 
 Hesiod, Theog. 684. *AXt' itti UinTa.it^i^. Jl. v'* 11. He leaped upon 
 Pisander. For other observations sec Gram. \^ II. p. G5, &e. 
 
OF PRiEFOSlTIONS. 
 
 297 
 
 Siiould they say any thing 
 for money {depending up. 
 on.) . .i\ ,?jaflra^i«: 
 
 I indeed chiefly admircj Ho- 
 mer Jbr epic poetry {ad* 
 miration resting upon.) 
 
 Dem. TT, '^x^et, 
 fAx^a. P Xen. Mem. 
 
 3. With the Accusative, motion directed upon 
 or against. 
 
 1. When a right line being 
 placed upon a right line. 
 \^For they came against the 
 parent state against us 
 with the Mede. 
 
 For they now suspected that 
 they were going against 
 the king. 
 
 The Lacedaemonians, when 
 many of them were wound- 
 ed, being hard pressed, 
 retreated upon their steps 
 {toent back upon.) 
 
 After this they went to the 
 division, laughing hearti- 
 ly at the horsemanship, 
 (their laughter against the 
 horsemanship.) 
 They laid waste the coun- 
 try ybr two days. 
 s^Bear up, ray friends, and 
 remain^or a little. 
 
 \2, 
 
 orxv ^i iv&iix tTF iv&vi iatnfu. 
 la pass Eucl. I. 12. 
 
 i^^OfiXt yX^ ItTI « (MJ3Tg05r«A/f 
 
 2(p' y.f^ug fiirx Mn^og. Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 VTrOTTTiVa yX^ Ǥ>) ItT* fiXTiXiV^ 
 
 h^i. Xen. Anab. 
 
 Av5 Ttr^utrxa, f^.x'hx xn^a. 
 
 XVX^eifPiii 
 
 H.Gr. 
 
 la 
 
 iTTt TTOVg* 
 
 Xen. 
 
 Ik ovro? (AIv itut *" "" iTt » 
 
 xo? ^ yihxa, Xen. Cyr. 
 
 ^*)a« J} yjj g?r< ovo *if-ci^x. Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 ^^dvog, Horn. 
 
 U 
 
298 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Both Thucydides and Xenophon, and, perhaps, some of 
 the other Greek writers, occasionally use the genitive af- 
 ter im, when motion to a place is signified, particularly af- 
 ter the verb 7FXia, navigo. Applied in this way, it com- 
 monly signifies versus, totoards, and is used synonymously 
 with «-g«5« When, however, l;r* with the genitive signi- 
 fies motion to a place, it is generally to ajriendli/ country, 
 to one belonging to those sailing or going thither. When 
 with the accusative, against y as to a hostile country : Itti 
 Xtov InXioy, Thucyd, The Athenian commander sailed 
 against Chius. ageig IttXh Ixs, t«? ^lov. Id, The Lacedae- 
 monian commander having weighed, sailed towards Chius. 
 htXii iTTt rvis MtXmrov Tr^ci tviv vecOx^^^txv. Id. He sailed to 
 
 Miletus to his station. IttS^Sjj oi Ko^ivdtoi — uvi^a^via-cev lir etxov. 
 
 Thucyd, I. SO. See also VIII. 64?. K^oia-oi fiivrot svhg Itti 
 ^et^iuf l<pivyi a-vv rS trr^ecrivf^etrt. Xen. Cl/r, VII. C. 2. 
 Croesus, however, immediately fled towards Sardes with 
 his army. Itts; ^s yif*igei lymro sv6v? Itti ^ct^ui iyiv o Kv^o?, 
 Id, VII. c. 2. When it was day, Cyrus immediately 
 led his forces against Sardes. 
 
 Eiec Uf^iiiovg iTFt^umfAVi,' II. 'Tf. 394. 
 
 Some commentators understand the Greeks to be here 
 referred to, and not the Trojans : but the whole of the 
 context and the use of the praeposition Ivt applied to wjaj 
 and voMo? clearly shew that the Trojans were meant. See 
 Clarke's note. — The same construction is observed when 
 one goes to what belongs to one's self. Thus Horn. Odyss. 
 T . 260. 
 
 1(0 fx KXK^ ai(ryi KoiMi Itfi vviog 'Oov<r<rivq 
 (SeiB also V. 238. 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 299 
 
 .^^ 'B^t with the genitive is frequently used to denote the 
 j^uperintendants or administrators of certain offices : thus, 
 jfl Itti vav iv0vyiu7f the superintendants of accounts; o ivt 
 j^tf rcifciucv (supple KocH<rreiis)y the quaestor; o Itti rov a-trov, 
 yl^c ; prafectus annoncBy the superintendant of provisions, 
 
 ^ It is sometimes used adverbially with certain nouns in 
 Jhe same manner as x«r«: thus, W hofmTAi, nominatim ; 
 |jr« and KccT Ixtroy^y^Vf summatim ; Irrt vyfiM^y otiose, leisure- 
 ly ; Itt uhixgy tuto, safely ; Itf aXn&ucci, vere, truly, — g(p* 
 ^ggctf, the whole day [Jbllomng upon) ; Itfi fcnvh the whole 
 month ; hr hiccvray the whole year. — It* 5ogy iiyu<r&cci, Xen, 
 To lead to the right ; because the spear was held by the 
 right handn Itt uftfi^oc or mxv <rr^i<piiVf to turn to the left ; 
 because the shield and the reins were held by the left 
 l^and, |<p' lecyTov 7rctu<r6ecff to reduce under one's power ; Ivt 
 iffiXu, diiif long ; g5r' oXtycv, paululum, for a little ; Itti ttX^ov, 
 idteriusy farther ; Im jatrcvro, tantum, kactenus, thus far, &c, 
 
 'Etti is frequently construed with the article before the 
 infinitive ; as^ k»} rovrov? o^yi^of^ivovs l-^i rS fcvi ^^omyyiXxi¥ecif 
 Dem. And being exasperated at these persons npon ac- 
 count of not having given previous warning. 6ivrtK»6t<rrn 
 9r<eA<y Itti to B-ct^o-uv, Thucyd, He restored them again to 
 confidence. 
 
 , .. The noun or pronoun is sometimes omitted after It* : 
 
 uihus^ Itti ^g, i. e. Itfi ^g nvroii, ayxf^off Im S', uriKV<^, Eurip, 
 
 Orest, i. e. Itti h rovra — In the following line from Homer 
 
 both TT^o and Ixt are used absolutely : as T^m$ Tr^^t f*iv »A- 
 
 Ao< u^Yi^origy uvTet^ Itt etXP^ot — Ittovto. II. /. 800. In like 
 
 manner the Trojans followed, some drawn up in fronts 
 others behind (following close upon, Itv ecvroig). It is some- 
 
 U 2 
 
300 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 times disjoined from its verb by a tmesis : as, ^, kcc} Kvunvr 
 (TUt W l(p£V(ri vivtri K^ovim* Horn. IL ci» 528. 
 
 In composition it either signifies upon, or motion di- 
 rected upon : e(pg(7T<ej, a suppliant , one who sits close upon 
 the hearth *, l-^iyovoi and iTs-tyiyvofuvoip descendants ; chil- 
 dren following upon; g;raAAj5X<», some following close upon 
 others 5 IxiTT^mv, to sail following close behind ; iTriruxi" 
 ^iiVf to construct fortifications agaitist ; iTri^ecvxrog, leading 
 to death, &c. See other examples in Viger, pp. 628, 629. 
 
 U^og, 
 
 Various derivations have been given of this prseposi- 
 tion. Dr Moor resolved it into ^rgo and ug, signifying in the 
 Jore space of, Scheide forms it from ^rago?, before, from whicTi 
 also he derives both tt^o and wec^et, Mr Bonar derives it 
 from TTi^ocgi a termination^ limit, or terminating boundary. 
 He forms it from the genitive ^rsgaraj, the t elided, ^rggadj, 
 contracted, Tci^uq, and, lastly, abbreviated •K^ug or ^rgo?. 
 Derived in this manner, he thinks it signifies termination, 
 or terminating in. This derivation, however, does not 
 seem to accord well with the meaning of wgo^ in various 
 instances, nor is it so nearly allied to the praeposition ?r«gi 
 in its general acceptation. It appears to me that Dr Moor's 
 derivation approaches nearer the truth than any of the 
 others, as ^rgo and i\g or I5 will denote an object put or 
 placed before another : a signification with which tt^o^ in 
 most instances agrees. It is evident that the adverb Tr^oa-h 
 is formed from this praeposition by the addition of the ter- 
 mination 6i, and in all the examples where it occurs, it 
 corroborates the above formation and meaning assigned to 
 TT^og. Thus, 70 TT^oo-h (rri^voio (pi^uv TthctfAuvicg Alxg, Hom. 
 Jl, «'. 224-. This carrying before his breast. 7r^o<r6i h 01 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 301 
 
 ^o^v r l<rx,i' g. SOO. And hefore him he held his spear. 
 The noun Trgor^/Trov also, denoting thejront of the face, shews 
 the primary idea affixed to the prasposition. That it is a com- 
 pound of TT^o and lU is farther rendered probable by the 
 latter prasposition frequently following a compound of Trgo? : 
 thus, ovKiT sifii '^^tT-^Ki'Tciiv olce, % \<; vf^otg. Eurip, I am no 
 longer able to direct my view to you. In almost every ex- 
 ample TT^og seems to me to denote primarily the situation of 
 ap, object before, but either proceeding yroTW before or ad- 
 vancing^rtuarc?, according to the case it governs or the 
 nature of the act; 1. With the genitive,yrom before,* de- 
 noting the origin ; also to and tovoards, denoting the po- 
 sition of the object before another : 2. With the dative, 
 close before, so as to communicate tuith, make an addition 
 to: 3. With the accusative, the motion of an object ^o- 
 wards another : and sometimes against : In this sense it is 
 opposed to ^erci>—-xeit y«4g rov uyavsA f^i&^ v^^av fioiXXdv, Ij 7rg«5 
 vfAoiq IXofAt'jci ^oiria-et(r6e6i* Demostli. tt. crsip. It also denotes 
 comparison, for, when one object is brought vi^ljorijiiard 
 to another, an opportunity is afforded of comparing the one 
 >Voith the other, ^rgoj Itarnvg l^irei^itv xoit TTct^ccQxXMiv If^s, 
 Demosth. tt. c-ts^. Ti-oi^a^ccXMtv TO uXXcv Tidog 'Tc^og rcelvrce, ovra 
 xpivirej. Xen. Mem. 
 
 1. With the Genitive^ from, &c. 
 
 To the north of Ecbatana irgoj /Bo^^g ^°^ rs un^cg rap 
 
 and towards the Euxine AyQccretvm xu) ^^og i Tctvrog 
 
 sea. Ev^itvog* Herod. 
 
 Since she has felt that she iTi-it ir^og uvyi^ cct(r6ccv6tceti ^^ 
 
 * It frequently, with the genitive, corresponds with an obsolete ex- 
 pression in our own language, from forth. 
 
502 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 has been injured hy her 
 husband (f. e. the injury 
 proceedingyromj. 
 
 She did not die by us at 
 least. 
 
 For I was returning home 
 
 possessing great praise 
 
 Jrom you, and possessing 
 
 through you also glory 
 
 from the other Greeks. 
 
 I entreat, I supplicate, hy \ 
 your children, by your 
 wives, by the blessings 
 you possess. 
 
 Tell me, by the gods, (I 
 entreat you Jrom reve- 
 rence of the gods) why 
 are you angry with me ? 
 
 K^ix,w. P pass Eurip. Med. 
 
 Eurip. Alcest. 
 
 'TTo'Kvg TTgog vfcug uvoieoglvc 
 
 xxt V7F0 01 uXXoi £AA)]yg; 
 ivkXhcc, X^n. 
 
 TT^og yyvjj, v^og rei ai vfiitg 
 
 rt lyu ogyi^u j Xen. Cyr. 
 
 * To understand the force of the prseposition in this and similar 
 sentences we must render the verb as if it were a noun wilii the sub- 
 stantive verb : thus her death was not from us. 
 
 f When sr^flf is used as the sign of adjuration, the sentence is evi- 
 dently elliptical. It may be supplied thus : I entreat you, by your 
 love /or your children, &c. In this sense it agrees with vwi^ as ex- 
 pressing nearly the same idea. See under v-ri^. When the pronoun 
 (fi is used, it is almost always placed between the praeposition and the 
 noun : as, u ^^os ct yovarm. Eurip. Hippol. Aristophanes, however, 
 Nub. 1 13. arranges it otherwise : thus -^ghs <rou Atos avrdoXu <n. The 
 Latins^have adopted ihc same arrangement : as, per te deos oro. Te- 
 rent. Andr, III. 3. 6, 
 
OF PR/EPOSITIONS. 
 
 303 
 
 2. With the Dative, close to^ in addition to, * 
 
 VThe angles close to the 
 base. 
 Fighting close to the land. 
 
 \Lamachus openly said (that) 
 it was necessary to sail 
 against Syracuse, and en- 
 gage as soon as possible 
 close to the city. 
 
 Whether that your father 
 Tromes was a slave with 
 Elpias, who taught letters 
 close to the temple of 
 Theseus ? 
 
 Besides these {^close to^ so 
 as to make an addition), 
 they learn to shoot with 
 the bow, and to dart the 
 javelin. 
 
 He is young, and, {added 
 to) besides his youth, ten- 
 der. 
 
 11 TTgoj ») fictirn ymiot. Euclid. 
 
 TF^og 5) yjj yxv^Aei^ia.^^ Thu- 
 cyd. 
 
 vxi ir?iW Itti 'Zv^eCKoa-oci text 
 fcec^vi 7r6nof*ec(. Thucyd. 
 
 CTdTIg as WfltTJJg 0-6V T^CftTiS 
 
 y^xfifAx ; Dem. «r. «t2^. 
 
 7rg«; "^i /rxvrx ftxydxna rc^ivof 
 xat uKovti^of* Xen. Cyr, 
 
 Plato Symp. 
 
 * a-gaj with the Dative generally signifies an addition made to the 
 forepart of an object, i-rJ behind it. 
 
304 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 3. With the Accusative, to or towards. 
 
 inhabiting that part of Si- 
 cily tovoards Africa, (si- 
 tuated before), 
 \The path leading toxvards 
 
 the palace. 
 XFor she was adding ;V?ro5 
 to his name, Xanthippus, 
 &c. 
 Examirte your own affairs 
 compared tvith those of 
 other men (affairs set he- 
 fore so as to allow the 
 comparison to be made). 
 That the ancients were con- 
 temptible in wisdom cow- 
 pared to you. 
 It is in our power (i. e, it 
 is in the direction tovoards 
 us). 
 
 nfAM, ^'^ Thucyd. 
 
 uyvict ^^ ii TT^og o fixirtMioy (^i" 
 ^«.P* Xen. ' 
 
 rcvvofiXf Sciv&t7ir7ro^* Ari- 
 stoph. Nub. 
 (rxoTTSa ^^ TO' v/^iT?^ag etvret 
 
 Dem. Epist. '• 
 
 Plato Hipp. Maj. 
 
 TT^og iifing \a-TiV* Plflt. 
 
 In the following phrases, the radical meaning of T^og, 
 as compounded of ;rgo and ug, may, I think, be observed. 
 It is frequently used synonimously with kxtx, as the one 
 denotes the course of the object along, the other the 
 original situation before, and then, when construed with 
 the genitive, from before : thus Tr^og rov t^ottov ilvxi, to be 
 o/* such a disposition; Ketrcc rlv rgoTcov, to be according to 
 such a disposition. Opposite to this is, utto r^oxov, awaj/ 
 from, i. e. contrary to, &c. ; vr^og BvfAov or tcetrx ^v^ov, gra- 
 tus, jucundus ; utto B'vfAcv, ingratus, injiicundiis ; Tv^og ul- 
 ftetrog and ^rgo? yinxg, consanguinei and propinqui ; ol Tr^og 
 vxr^6g, paterni generis propinqui, having relationship from 
 the father ; ol 7r^»g ^nr^ogj having relationship from the 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 305 
 
 mother, uxt^ denoting origin from, is sometimes used in 
 a similar manner, though it commonly refers to inanimate 
 objects : thus, «/ .4;p' »if/.»To^, consanguinei ; rsth u-xo t?? 
 jtMjTgoi ^Kvh^, JEsch, A Scythian with respect to his ori- 
 gin yrow his mother. 
 
 Il^oi ^xgiv, ad gratiam i ^r^og o^ynvf iracutidcj passionate- 
 ly i TT^og (pSoyov, enviously j ^r^og (iiotv, vi, violently ; ^§a,- 
 uK^i'Ziiaiv, accurately; TFg^og yS^tv, injuriously, insultingly, 
 &c. -n-^ag rccvTUf "uoherefore ; Tcgog lovroig, in addition to ,• 
 moreover. Sometimes Tr^og is omitted before tlie dative : 
 as, TT^og §£, i, e. TT^og ds ravroig. 
 
 n^og is frequently construed with the article and the in- 
 finitive: thus, TT^og ra TropvKtvsii. Isocr, In addition to 
 the natural inclination, ^r^og Tola^yv^iov lx,ziv, Xen, Anab. 
 Totvards the acquiring of money. Tr^og to y.y\ ^ovixi hxnv, 
 Dem. TT^og KecXX. Toxoards the not suffering punish- 
 ment. 
 
 n^og is sometimes understood before the genitive in 
 phrases implying entreaty or supplication : as, Ayxfci^vov, 
 tKZTiva (TTgoj) c-g raii^i yovvstrav, Eurip, Hecuh. and before 
 the accusative after verbs of motion; as, (^gaj) o» xsv Ikw 
 fcca. Horn. 
 
 In composition, -r^og has commonly the same power as 
 when it governs the accusative in its simple state : thus, 
 •;r^6T}cecXucr6xi, to Call to ov towards ; p^a^uv Tr^oa^xrovj a place 
 to which the passage is open ; 7r^o<ro^og, revenue brought 
 to the treasury ; Tr^cc-i^^^rtZv, to question Jarther ; Tr^oTa-jco- 
 M<rxi, to incur an additional loss, &c. 
 
^06 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Ilaga. 
 
 This praeposition was derived by Lennep from the ad- 
 jective TTcc^og, hejore, and by Scheide from the verb 'jraui 
 to press, Mr Bonar, justly dissatisfied with both these 
 derivations, has recourse to an old substantive noun sig- 
 nifying side or Jlanh, as the original meaning of the prae- 
 position. It is only by analogy, however, that this opi- 
 nion can be established, there being no traces of such a 
 noun in the Greek language.* Mr Bonar thinks that 5r^- 
 gg<«, a eheelcy and in Latin the adjective par, equal, are 
 both evident descendants from this root ; the former de- 
 noting the side parts of the head, the latter an object 
 corresponding side for side with another. As, therefore, 
 he remarks, the English praeposition beside, is nothing 
 but a contracted form of being side, i. e. being the side 
 of an object : so the Greek praeposition ^et^», beside, may 
 justly be set down as a noun signifying side ovjianh ; and 
 from the dift'erent aspects under which an object may be 
 viewed, as occupying the side of another, the different 
 applications of tcx^o, take their rise. It is not improbable 
 that the French verb parer, and our own, to parry, have 
 been formed from the same root as the praeposition. 
 Parer un cap, to double a cape, to leave it on the one 
 side: to parry a blow, to turn it aside. Uu^oi. then, com- 
 monly signifies, 1. With the genitive, yrom beside.f Mr 
 
 * Par frequently signifies near, beside, as, separ, away from beside: 
 thus Phsedrus Fab. 30. Est static separ. 
 
 f Uu^ex, is used with the Genitive, denoting the passage of objects 
 from beside, and with the accusative to beside any body of \vhicli they 
 could not form an integral part. In the first instance it differs from 
 \x and avo, and in the other from ir^oj. 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 307 
 
 Bonar thinks that, when used in this sense, the praeposi- 
 tion Ik was originally joined to it, making 7r<»g£x, a 
 word not unusual with Homer ; but its connection with 
 the genitive is sufficient to account for this meaning, 
 without the aid of another praeposition ; 2, With the 
 dative, close beside ; * 3. With the accusative, motion to 
 beside. 
 
 1 . With the Genitive, Jrom beside. 
 
 ^Having drawn his sword 
 Jrom beside his thigh. 
 
 ^The deserters Jrom beside 
 the king. 
 
 \And thinking that they had 
 heard ^row one exceed- 
 ingly well informed. 
 For there is no one so stupid 
 who would choose to ac- 
 cept of this power ^ow 
 his ancestors. 
 
 goq. Horn, 
 
 Xen. Anab. 
 
 r» u^6>s ^Kovat.^""' Thu- 
 cyd. 
 ovists y»^ Irrtv tvTaq fX^uf^eg 
 
 ct TT^oyovcc n ei^xni ovroi tcx" 
 g»>>xfx,Zetm, 2 ^ Isocr. 
 
 2. With the Dative, close beside. 
 
 \The market-place which was «yogjj ^^ it vetgoc vuv§ riv^u» p^" 
 constructed close beside Hom. 
 the ships. 
 
 * Sophocles in his Electra makes a beautiful distinction between 
 «rtfg« with'the dative and U. or ou «r«g' avreig «A.X' If avroTo'iv xxmTs ToT^iv 
 fityifriis ovrs? ov yiyvuffntn ; 1239. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 .Don't speak thus beside 
 (among) the crowd. 
 
 His venerable mother heard 
 him as she was sitting 
 beside her aged father. 
 
 The boys do not eat beside 
 their mother, but beside 
 their teacher. 
 
 He said that it was neces- 
 sary to go [to be) beside 
 Tissaphernes. 
 
 ev fMi TTX^ o^^og rxoi yjjgWAT. 
 suiamiEurip. Hippol. 
 
 TTX^ec *c6TJjg yi^av, Hom. 
 
 Xen. Cyr. 
 vYii* Id. Anab. 
 
 With the Accusative, motion beside^ xsr 
 
 io beside, - '"'" ^^ 
 
 '^ He went in silence beside 
 the shore of the far-re- 
 sounding main. 
 But Achilles struck him on 
 the collar-bone beside the 
 neck (the blow directed 
 beside.) 
 
 \ He went to Egypt to (be- 
 side) Amasis, and also to 
 Sardis, to (beside) Croe- 
 sus. 
 The line ^^ is drawn paral- 
 lel (beside) to one of the 
 sides, viz. /3y. 
 
 Xv(pX6iTves S-fltAflsro-flc. Hom. 
 xX^'t's Tiret^ ccit^v^v. Id. 
 
 f/,oe,<rig, xuf 0ii xxt eg "Zx^^ig 
 TFUgcc K^oicrog. Herodot. 
 
 TTU^ce (AM « ttXsv^x V /3y uyej 
 ppass^^. Euclid. B. VI. 9. 
 
 ilx^sc with the accusative sometimes denotes compari- 
 son or contrast. The idea is taken from the two objects 
 being placed side by side to allow of more accurate ob- 
 
OF PROPOSITIONS. 309 
 
 Servation : thus, cv yu^ ^uw <roi Kctret2n>^ov ori vct^et tee, «AA« 
 t<a» anTTTi^ B^ot civ6^&>7roi Hiorivovcn ; Xen. Mem, For is it 
 not quite evident that men live like gods compared tvitk 
 other animals (brought side to side) ? — Sometimes also 
 it signifies beyond, to the farther side ,* thus, jj a? el Trce^cc 
 Tjjv civrav u^ixv 'hi^Qv>^ufizvot QirrxXoi. Dem. Olynth, Or how 
 the Thessalians were enslaved contrary to their expecta- 
 tions, (they were enslaved, a circumstance aside from 
 their expectations ;) cr<«g» toy TrorecfAov l(piv'yoy, they fled 
 beyond or to the Jarther side of the river ; -TFot^cc ^va-iv, 
 contrary to nature, i. e, not going in the direct line, as 
 KccTcc implies, but aside ; Tre^^ec to Tr^t-xoVf itidecore, contra^ 
 ry to propriety ; ;r«g' at^xv, intempestive, unseasonably ; 
 TFx^cc TToAy, longe, far on the other side, with the accusa- 
 tive : with the genitive, far on this side : thus, ttx^x tfoXu 
 T«j IxTFi^oi, far away from hope, i. e, far from the side of 
 hope ; 7r«g« toa-ovroy fisv kiv^vvov, Thucyd. Near to (ap- 
 proaching to the side of) such danger fparum abfuit 
 quin.) 
 
 liet^cc governing the accusative of the adjectives ftiK^og, 
 
 «My6?, oii^iig, &C. with the verbs uy6>, viyiofuti, Tt6sf*»t, TTotiO" 
 
 fcxtj has the same meaning with tts^i governing the geni- 
 tive of these adjectives, &c. : thus, ttx^x f^ipc^ov iiyairSxi, 
 parvi focere ; tcx^ ov^iv uynv, nihili Jacere, ttots^x ttx^' 
 cii^iv rev (iioy KVihrd" m. Soph. Elect. 1327. 
 
 In composition it most frequently signifies beside, to 
 the side of; sometimes to the Jarther side, beyond ; some- 
 times aside from the direct line : tov tfxi^x •^x^xXxf/Axveva-t* 
 Plato. Alcib. 1. They take the boy beside them. 5r«g«- 
 xeXevduv, to accompany, to go by one's side : Trx^xKxdna-dxt, 
 to sit down beside ; Trx^x^xmiv, to go beyond, to the Jar^ 
 iher side ; Trx^xa-Trovhiy, to violate the truce, not to keep 
 in the line, but to go aside ; ttx^x^u^sTv o^av, to recede 
 from the direct path, to go aside from the direct path \ 
 
310 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 oTTov h iPTugm KAifcnv, Xen. Anab. Whenevei' h^ passed 
 a village. t< t«§' ccv 7roc^x<p^ev 6pp<%J/««? Ittos i Eurip, Himol. 
 Why again do you utter this foolish speech ? % 
 
 /NoT£. 'E«ri n^es and Ilofga, when they take the accusative aitei 
 them, have significations nearly similar. '£{r< denotes the motion of a 
 body so as to touch upon another ; ^rgaj, of one body moving forward 
 to or towards another ; and a-aga, of one proceeding beside anothen 
 These different ends, signified by the praepositions in their primary ap- 
 plication, are variously modified by the peculiar nature of the action. 
 
 This praeposition appears evidently to have been formed 
 from the obsolete adjective vvos, being the dative of the 
 masculine gender, as vTrat, used in the same sense by Ho- 
 mer, was the feminine. The praeposition v-rsg, as was for- 
 merly remarked, was formed from the same root, denoting 
 an object higher in point of place or situation. Mr Bonar 
 thinks that *' the application of the two prsepositions, 
 <« though originating from the same root, was reversed : 
 ** in the one case the attribute being referred to the 
 <* noun preceding, in the other to its correlative, the 
 " noun following. In these, therefore, there is no con- 
 *< tradiction, but merely a diversity in the mode of ap- 
 " plication. High and lotv, above and under, are merely 
 « relative terms. When one object is loxo or under in re- 
 <* ference to another, this last of consequence comes to 
 ** be high or above in reference to the first. Such a po- 
 " sition of two objects, therefore, may be equally expres- 
 " sed by saying, that the first is above the second, or the 
 '* second is under the first. In the praeposition vTrgg, the 
 " Greeks used the one mode of expression, in the praepo- 
 '< sition vTTo the other." 
 
-■ OF PRiEPOSITIONS. 311 
 
 These ingenious remarks do not appear to me to con- 
 vey a correct notion of the praeposition y^o ,• for, I appre- 
 hend, we must join it as well as vtfI^ with the preceding 
 noun, if we pay any regard to the cases which it governs. 
 If we are i-ight in supposing vxtg to signify high, then the 
 praeposition, as being the dative, must have had originally 
 the same meaning. But as Mr Bonar properly remarks, 
 high and /o?o are relative terms ; so also are higher and 
 high : What is raised higher must be alove the other ob* 
 ject, and of course the latter will be under it. I there- 
 fore imagine, that the Greeks when they began to use 
 the praeposition lyrlg in the sense of higher or above, lost 
 sight of the radical meaning of vTre, and used it, in its re- 
 lative situation to v^rsg, as denoting under, * — It may here 
 
 * The following observations by my learned and ingenious friend, 
 Mr Carson, Rector of the High School, Edinburgh, corroborate the 
 opinion stated above, and coincide with those of Dr. Jamieson on the 
 same subject. Herm. Scyth. p. 2. p. 99. &c. 
 
 The opinion, says he, that these two praeposltions stand related 
 to each other as positive and comparative words, is strongly confirm- 
 ed by a singular coincidence, both in regard to meaning and mode 
 of structure, in the most ancient dialect of Gothic that remains, the 
 Moesogothic version of the Gospels by Ulphilas. Uf, in the lan- 
 guage of the venerable Bishop, signifies under, whilst ufar, its com- 
 parative, means over ; thus, ufhrot mein, Matth. viii. 8. under my roof, 
 f/.ou v'xo rr,v ffny/iv. Uf skadau is, Mark. iv. 52. under the shadow ofity 
 v-Tto rnv ffKiKv tthrov, Nist siponeis ufar laisarga : nich skalks ufar 
 fanin seinamma, Matth. x. 24. the disciple is not above his master, nor 
 the servant above his lord ; ol» Iitti fiahr'At vtfi^ rov h'^atrxaXov, oJJs 
 hi/Xos wa-eg rov xv^iov avrov. Warth riquis ufar allai airthai, Matth. 
 xxvii, 45. there was darkness over all the land. 
 
 The root of all these propositions, both Greek and Gothic, is in 
 all probability a verb common to botli during the earlier stages of 
 their existence. This verb, or, more properly, this past-passive-par- 
 
312 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 be remarked, that the Latin praepositions, suh and super 
 are the same as Itto and vweg, formed by substituting s for 
 the spiritus asper, as was the custom among the Latins, 
 and that they occupy the same relative situation to each 
 other. The Greeks too, sometimes substituted the a- for 
 the spiritus asper, as we find in Herodotus hoi and o-woj in 
 the story of Atys and Adrastus. 
 
 'Y^ra then, signifying wwc^er, with the genitive,* com- 
 monly signifies re5^, or situation under, and very frequent- 
 ly under the agency or instrumentality of; as the object 
 under is generally affected by what is above it . With the 
 dative under, with different modifications depending upon 
 the nature of the higher object, as subjection, influence, 
 protection, S^c, : With the accusative, motion tending un- 
 der or coming under. 
 
 1. With the Genitive, rest or situation un- 
 der, &c. 
 
 \ For it was extended under viro y«g rufAit^ Tra^ecTuvu ^ * "* 
 us and Pericles. Kxt Ti^tKXsm- Aristoph. 
 
 Nub. 
 
 ticiple, is still to be found in some of the compounds of hqfian, leva- 
 9'e, erigere, toUere, under the forjn hof; and it is to this that the 
 English are indebted for their hovi, hoven, ^c. the participle and pre- 
 terite of heave. 
 
 * A/a with the accusative, and y^-o with the genitive, are frequent- 
 ly used in a similar manner: thus, a^ uvei/rot tu ir^xTrenv ^la r«i> 
 
 thyd. 
 
OF Ptl.«POSlTlONS. 
 
 SIS 
 
 NWhen honoured hy men 
 (under the agency of 
 men) they are pleased. 
 
 \ Where deepest under the 
 earth is the gulf. 
 
 High under the clouds he 
 saw the timid dove, which 
 circhng (in air) he pierc- 
 ed in the middle under 
 the wing. 
 
 But now he goes alone car- 
 rying off the dead body 
 from under the Trojans. 
 
 And I myself also, under 
 the effect of pleasure, 
 went along with your 
 children to the apart- 
 ments of the women. 
 
 Eurip. Hippol. 
 ^gov. Horn. 
 
 TTTggyl 
 
 Horn. 
 
 ^ciXKa 
 
 2a 
 
 fAi<r6i, 
 
 »go5 VTr' Ik Tg&>gj. Id. 
 
 lyu ds xcivrog noom Itpq a-riyn ^^ 
 yyvjj (Tuv rixvcv kfA iTTFOfActi* 
 Eurip. Med. 
 
 2. With the Dative, close under, under the 
 influence of^ he* 
 
 "^ And one having fallen under 
 
 Cyrus' horse. 
 '^ Until they reduced Thes- 
 
 saly under Philip. 
 '^ Having yoked (them) under 
 the chariot. 
 Thinking that we would 
 thus be least subject un* 
 der the Peloponnesians. 
 O Jupiter, under my hands 
 subdue him. 
 
 X 
 
 TTfls. Xen. Cyr. 
 
 'KOiici, ^ ^ Dem. ;r. o-T£<p. 
 («^it4« ^^ t^ivya ^ ^ vTiro. Eurip. 
 
 Hippol. 
 voy^i^&f ^ ^ iix-ta-T civ vtfo U^Xo^ 
 
 TTon'Anoi ovrar, uf/^t. Thucydt 
 
 IftOg VTTO ^11^ ^CCfACta ^ ^ »VT«?f 
 
 Z Zivu Horn. 
 
314" SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 His eyes darted fire w;w/er * otra-t Xctf^.Tnt^u'^^'''^ ^Xo^v^h 
 
 his threatning eyebrows. vtt' o^^v^. Id. 
 
 He came under night. lg;^o,t««« 2 a ^^^ yy|. Apollon. 
 
 3. With the Accusative, motion iendi7ig 
 under, &c. 
 
 > The side subtended under (^rAgyg^v) vTroiuva vtto ik « 
 
 one of the equal angles. is-ogymiot* Eucl. HI. 3. 
 
 ^ Under the darkness we Itco g-xotos (pivyu. Eurip. O- 
 
 fled. rest. 
 
 s He did not march his troops «y« uv»^iQu^» Itfi Aeipoj, 
 
 up the hill, but caused ^aa' vtto etvioi la-rv^fAi ^ ^ to 
 
 them to halt at the hot' o-r^ctnvfcx, Xen. Anab. 
 
 torn of it (under it). • , • . * ; • 
 
 As he was fetching the Trxtar §* etvris uKovrt^et rif 
 
 blow", some one strikes vxXroy i/tto o^SaX^^os ^<«<- 
 
 him violently with a ja- e^g. Id. 
 
 velin under the eye. 
 
 When he was just going to ^aa' en ^n r»^» fctXXai var* 
 
 arrive under the town and ttoXi? eciTrvs ts ru^os ho^xiS 
 
 the lofty wail. Horn. 
 
 In composition it generally retains the meaning of wn- 
 der, but modified in several instances according to the 
 nature of the verb, &c. : thus, vttoQxXXsiv, to throw un- 
 der ; vTcotKovitv, parere, to be obedient under ; vTrxtrto^, 
 under an accusation ; vn-o^6oviegf under the earth ; vn-o- 
 c-TFovheg, sub indiciis ; vvi^vS^o?, subruber, under red, red- 
 dish; vTToXivKog, subalbidus, palish; iffftlxi^iiT&xt, clam e 
 
 * Homer uses viro with the genitive and dative without any material 
 distinction. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS* 335 
 
 medio tollere, to take away under concealment. ?io^M 3' vjre- 
 6ca^-Jia-<r6vro. Hom. II. <r. 513. They armed themselves se- 
 cretly for an ambuscade, vtto is sometimes used to denote 
 the duration of time^ as, ^ravd' y^o f^nviduov, Hom. II. t/* 
 202. Under (during) the whole period of my resent-* 
 ment. 
 
 IX. OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 In treating of conjunctions, I propose to trace sevei'af 
 c5f them, as far as I am able, to their respective roots, 
 and point out the particular tenses and moods of the 
 verbs with which they are commonly joined by the best 
 Greek authors. In this manner we shall be able to keep 
 in view their original signification, and reduce the variety 
 of meanings they were supposed by grammarians to as- 
 sume to one common principle, modified, as is the case 
 in all languages, by the nature of the subject and the de- 
 finite or indefinite time of the action. Most of the con- 
 fusion and uncertainty observed in the writings of philo- 
 logists respecting the application and meaning of these 
 particles, arose from a total ignorance of their original 
 powers, existing commonly in the form of verbs ; an ig- 
 norance by which various significations altogether diffe- 
 rent from each 'other were ascribed to several of them. 
 In none of them is this more remarkable than in the 
 different meanings they have given to the particle uv, 
 the most common but least understood of all the con- 
 
 X2 
 
316 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 junctions.* Hoogeveen, the most laborious and diligent 
 of all these philologists, has endeavoured to explain its 
 power m the following words : « Particulae h potestas 
 " uo^ia-TdhdyiKTif ubi in verbis versatur, suum ipsis actum 
 *< toliit, et quidem quadruplici modo. Tollitur enim ac- 
 ** tus, ubi is redigitur vel ad potentianif vel ad volujitatem, 
 ** veladoffictum, vel denique ad tempus Juturum" He 
 then proceeds to give examples of these in their order, 
 without ever reflecting that such different significations 
 must depend upon the context, and that the meaning of 
 the particle must be simply one wherever it occurs. This 
 will be rendered, I think, evident by endeavouring to 
 trace this particle to its original source, and by establish- 
 ing its primary signification from several examples.— 
 Lennep derives it from Avcoy the same, he says, as ^.way 
 perficio, from which also he derives the praeposition ^vct, 
 '* Hinc j^m 4y,'* says he, " quasi ab uvx vel obsoleto 
 " uvog vim accepit particulae expletivae et potentialis," &c. 
 Tliis is not at all satisfactory, as is the case with many 
 others of Lennep's derivations, and therefore we must en- 
 deavour to trace it to some other source. — It is evident 
 that dv and lotv are nearly connected together both in point 
 of form and signification. ^Eocv, I imagine, is not derived, 
 as Scheide and Hoogeveen suppose, from I or ii and ccv, 
 but from the verb leta, sino, permitto ; perhaps the impe- 
 rative with the 9 added, or more probably a contracted 
 participle-neuter of the passive voice. 'Av was likely 
 formed in a similar manner from the original verb ««», or 
 «^^, or dvif^iy the same with la or w, mitto, sino. It was 
 not unusual with the Greeks to prefix the s to several sim- 
 
 * For a more detailed account of this particle, I must refer the 
 reader to a small treatise " on its Origin and General Power," print- 
 ed witii the Analysis of the Greek Verb, 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 317 
 
 . pie verbs and nouns, as Lennep has remarked in his Ana- 
 logia Linguae Graecse. He has produced several examples : 
 as, iKu from Kia, vado / h^m from i^<rvi, ros ; hhec from Iha, 
 spolia. To these might be added a variety of others, such 
 as where the s is prefixed for the temporal as well as the 
 syllabic augment, l*yoF, l^^cav-, hxm^ov, loTra^oy, &c. Ac- 
 cording to this analogy, it is not unlikely that l«««w was 
 formed from «<y, the root of the particle «y, signifying to 
 give, grant, allo\x). — It is very remarkable that the Anglo- 
 Saxons had a verb of the same signification, viz. anan, 
 from which the imperative an was formed, signifying 
 grant, allotu : 9. word now become almost obsolete in the 
 English language, but which was frequently used in the 
 time of Shakespeare, as Home Tooke has remarked in his 
 Diversions of Purley. The particle an among the Latins 
 also was probably of the same family. 
 
 iSever^l cj^amples migiit b^ produced to show that «y 
 and feiv have nearly the same meaning, particularly when 
 the former is construed with the subjunctive mood. The 
 following will, I judge, be sufficient : thus Demosthenes, 
 
 dv ^' vTTo tm TTViviAscruv ^h ^vvuf^i^o^, TTS^t rm h Xsp. If we 
 are unable by means of the winds. Wrz ag ^(^ivy uv ^zv visca- 
 
 sii^atfconuv. Plato Menex, Be assured, if we surpass you 
 in virtue, the victory brings disgrace upon us; but de- 
 feat, if we are overcome, happiness, xoiv fih | hi7, rh 
 dtfcnVf 'i^Yii ;k;gji^8<v lyrthTveci ecvrS' ^v dl (pivyy, iifAStg hit v^o^ rxu- 
 ret /iovMvffo^idot. Xen. Anab. ^^Reasoning then by analogy, 
 and from these and other examples, we may, I think, 
 conclude that dv and Ixv are both sprung from the same 
 roof, and that the former was from the original verb. 
 
 Before proceeding to establish the meaning which, from 
 this derivation »v must assume, it may be necessary to 
 notice also the probable root and signification of the par« 
 
218 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 tide xs or xsv, as it was used synonimously with «% by the 
 early poets, particularly Homer. Kg, in all probability, 
 was formed from tew* or xticj, Ilay down : perhaps the 
 imperative of the former xss, by an apocope^ kz, lay dotvn. 
 The V is commonly added before a vowel, or in order to 
 lengthen the syllable. Ks, therefore, will signify lay down, 
 or, in other words, allow, grant ; for, when a condition 
 or supposition is made, what is figuratively laid down, 
 may be said to be granted or allowed. 
 
 If Phcebus Apollo had not sent forth the noble Agenor, 
 lay down that, grant that, the sons of the Greeks had then 
 taken lofty-walled Troy. 
 
 In like manner the particle dv may be resolved in the 
 following sentence from Aristophanes. — An old woman is 
 asked by Chreraylus what her lover chiefly demanded 
 froiii her, she replies, cv ttoXXcc* xui yug iKVdfuag ^ ^<r^vviro. 
 Not much, for he had an uncommon regard for me. 
 
 us Ificcriov , ■ 
 
 But he might perhaps (as it is commonly translated) 
 have asked twenty drachms of silver for a coat : granted 
 he askeiJ twenty drachms for a coat: cv ?roXXu, it was not 
 much. — oKTu y uv ilg vTrc^nf^ecroi, granted he asked eight for 
 shoes : ov ^oXXx, it was not much. 
 
 * xa is used for xe or civ by Lampito, the Laccuasmonian lady, in 
 the Lysistrata of Aristophanes, v. 117. Homer uses the participle 
 }tiuv, Odyss. «'. 341. 'O^cre Kiuy. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 319 
 
 The auxiliary verbs may and can, might and could, 
 tvouid and should , by which («v is usually translated, are 
 all epithets oi power flowing from the permission of others, 
 the nature of circumstances, one*s duty or inclination. 
 Hence, when any thing is allowed or granied, or supposed, 
 a person may, or caw, or might, &c. perform his intention 
 or purpose whatever it be. The present or imperfect time 
 denoted by them does not depend upon this particle, but 
 upon the context: a circumstance to which it is necessary 
 to attend in the common use of the subjunctive and opta- 
 tive moods : For, according to Dawes, in his Miscellanea 
 Critica, " the subjunctive is used only after verbs of a 
 ** present ot future signification,* and answers to the Latin 
 ** amarem^^ In illustration of this rule, he produces seve- 
 ral examples from Aristophanes with the conjunction ha. : 
 one or two of each will be sufficient for our purpose at 
 present. 
 
 'E«T<yg ^jv nosTgoxAoy, Itch kXvxcc tzv)^l ecTnjv^cc 
 
 n>^% If otV a)fA6iiv xi(PmMv TAMOId|ei* y/t'Kx.a. II. g. 124. 
 
 «5s ^ 'EnOIHSEN Ti/fpAoF 
 \m ^Yi AIAnrNflSKOUVII rovrm ^nhva. Plut. 721. 
 
 He made me blind that I might not . distinguish any of 
 them. 
 
 At? TV flOl TO T^l^aVtQV, 
 
 W 'AMOIESn rov (rvxt^ccvrriv rovrovi. Id, 936. 
 
 * The Greek writers have sometimes deviatet^ from this rule by 
 using the subjunctive after verbs of the past tense, particularly the im- 
 perfect, as Dr Burgess has shown, in his notes upon Dawes Miscell. 
 Crit. p. 421, when the action is continued or supposed to continue to 
 the present time. See Horn. 11. «'. 127. Eurip. Hecub. 27. 
 
S^O SYNTAX OF TH3E GRE^:^ LANGUAGE. 
 
 Qive me that thread-bare cloak that I may clothe this 
 Informer. 
 
 I have already remarked, that the different meanings 
 affixed to civ by Hoogeveen may be all reduced to one 
 simple signification, by stripping it of every adventitious 
 idea derived from the context. As every disquisition of 
 this kind is best understood by examples, I shall take somp 
 from each of the four sections in which he affixes to uv 
 the signification of posse, veUe, debere and-Jiiturum esse. 
 
 1. In which av signi^e^ posse, 
 
 . "El §g ris Tws x^^ecTovvTus row vXmdovi hrt u^itp '^'gftTgs^'g/e?, 
 «^9dT£goy? av <y(p£A>jc«g. Isocr, If any otne ^ould excite 
 the rulers of the people to virtue, that granted, he luould 
 benefit both. In this case the benefit could only accrue 
 from the excitement to virtue ; th^ being aUoUfcd or 
 gmv$^9 it of course necessarily follows. 
 
 Lucian, in his panegyric upon Demosthenes, says that 
 it was easier to praise him than Jlomer, as his country 
 was known, and a wide field for his eloquence was open : 
 but, he adds, if this, viz. Athens, had been Homer's 
 country, oy^' uv si? Itt h^q u%k6>5 l^iMa-&ui dvyutra rS Xoy^ e 
 A'ufioa^msf this granted, no one Demosthenes toould be 
 able by his eloquence to do justice to his fame. Here it 
 may be necessary to remark, that the verb ^wafccit im- 
 plies bodily or mental power ; uv reflected power, if I may 
 be allowed the expression. 
 
 2. In which av is translated by velle. 
 ^* Generalis payticulae «v" ^siays Hoogeveen, '< facultas 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 321 
 
 verbis suum actum eripiendi non semper ad vim ^wnriKnv 
 reduci debet, sed est ubi velle potiusquam po^se notatj" &c. 
 
 'Ottoo-ov &v v^tet(Oi axrre rm yvvetiKx aTFoXcdonv ; said Cyrua 
 to Tigranes, the prince of Armenia : so as to recover 
 your wife, that grantedy that put in your poxioer, what 
 price ^ould you give? Tigranes wished to recover his 
 wife : the verb then with which dv is connected must im- 
 ply that inclination. BoyAo^^jjy £»v, ^ Itix.^^cArz?, says Euthy- 
 phro to Socrates in the Euthyphro of Plato, when that 
 philosopher informed him that the accusation of Melitus 
 was intended for the public good : granted it tvere so, that 
 is my wish ; I ivould wish it were so. 
 
 3. When iti is translated by debere, 
 
 av^goj. Lucian, He ought not on this account to be reck- 
 oned better than a noble commander : granted his head 
 was encircled with a diadem, on this account he could 
 not be better, &c. The circumstance of having worn a 
 diadem adds nothing to his merit, he ought not therefore 
 to be reckoned better. Ovkovv, \<pn o Kv^o?, ret hfcuiec wciavt 
 ixia-T dv rov ufAu^rocuvret f^tftotnv. Xen, Cyr, III. Where- 
 fore, said Cyrus, by acting justly, this granted, I "would 
 by no means imitate an oiFender. The translation in La^. 
 tin ought rather to be by imitaturus sim than debere. 
 
 4. When av is translated by futurum esse. 
 
322 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Dent, Olynth, If Philip should make use of such an op- 
 portunity against us, and a war should take place adjoin- 
 ing our country, this granted, how readily do you think 
 he would invade us ? — From all these examples, I think 
 it is obvious that uv has only one simple, definite mean- 
 ing, that of denoting conditional poxioer, A German cri- 
 tic, Carolus Reisigius Thuringus, has subjoined to a late 
 Edition of the Nubes of Aristophanes, a dissertation upon 
 the power and use of the particle dv. Throughout the 
 whole there is not the least appearance that the author un- 
 derstood the principle upon which the power of this par- 
 ticle depends. Like most of his brethren, he has involved 
 his definitions in such obscure and unintelligible terms, 
 and with so little regard to unity of system, that any per- 
 son who would wish to obtain from his work information upon 
 the subject, will, I imagine, feel himself much dissappoint- 
 ed. Take the following as a specimen : " dicendum igitur 
 potius est, uv reddere sententiam optativi per se incertissi- 
 mam hand paullo certiorem. Nam, ut paucis aperiam, Uv 
 particula aliquidjieri per caiissarum quondam cohcerentiam 
 posse indicat." p. 99. 
 
 I shall now proceed to mention the tenses and moods 
 with which m is commonly construed. 
 
 I. The Present Indicative. 
 
 The late Professor Person, in his notes upon Toup's 
 Emendations to Suidas, denies that «v is ever construed 
 with the present indicative. Brunck, however, and Dr 
 Burgess, have produced instances to the contrary from 
 different plays of Aristophanes. The 885th line of the 
 Plutus is quoted by both ; In line 395 of the comedy 
 pf the Clouds, ^v is also construed with the present-indi-. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 32$ 
 
 catlve : «AX' o xg^^yva? TTckv »v ^i^irah XoifiTrcjy w^t. The 
 particle ecv is supposed to be the genuine reading. See 
 also Aves 1069, and Anacreon's Hymn to the Dove : 
 TTioverci ^' dv %6e^zva, having drunk, that granted, I may 
 dance. — It must, however, be confessed, that very few ex- 
 amples of os.y construed with the present indicative are to 
 be found. It is safer, therefore, to conclude with Person, 
 that uv ought not to be construed with the present indi- 
 cative. It appears to me little short of absurdity to sup- 
 ' pose that the particle eey could ever be construed with the 
 present indicative^ because from its very nature, it denotes 
 something conditional or continge?it, which cannot absolute- 
 ly exist at the present moment, for if it did so, it would 
 lose every attribute of contingency. 
 
 II. With the Indicative of the Imperfect, 
 Aorists, and Pluperfect, when used as an 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Rule 1. 'Af, preceded or followed by s/, 
 joined with the Indicative of the Imperfect, 
 Aorists, or Pluperfect, when a supposition or 
 hypothesis is made, is also construed with 
 the Indicative of all these Tenses except the 
 Perfect.^ 
 
 Rule 2. When g/ is construed with the 
 
 * Because it is then used as a present, and called the present-jjcr- 
 fect. 
 
324 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Optative *, the Verb in the other membei- of 
 the sentence with kv must also be in the Op- 
 tative. 
 
 1. *Ey(yy' <xv iiTCav %\ %»^m Irvy^etvcv. Aristoph. CotlC. 40Y» 
 IF I had been present, that grantedj I ivould have spoken. 
 E* ycc^ TOTS hciitrs g^ojj^ijirie^sy, oio-jrgg I4^n<pi<roif^i6ocy 7r^c6vf^uip. 
 tvx, uv KVM^Xn vvv ifiiv ^t?ii7r7r65, Demosth, Olynth, 3. J^'or 
 if\^Q had then promptly sent our assistance thither, as we 
 had decreed, that granted, Philip mov.1^ »ot now be. di§r 
 turbing us. 
 
 cri rm eidifcvi^urav »v g^s^tvjjro Tav IccvroVf it n %i^t }f^W ^^\r., 
 y^^^i. Demosth. Tn^i anip. x\ §'. ,, 
 
 2. E<, vj) A**, civr} riig kukvj^ yXarrvii yroSiv 
 
 Aristoph. Vesp, H04. 
 
 If by Jove, instead of this foul tongue, you would buy 
 wheat from any quarter, granted you did so, you would 
 seem to me to have some sense. Ovk ecv ^ctvfiocff-etifAt, il fin- 
 ^uv ii'?rovri fiot yivciro "Teci^ vftm fiXu^n- Dem, Olynth* I Piiould 
 not be surprised if a heavier punishment from you await- 
 ed me mentioning, &c. 
 
 It sometimes happens, when uv is construed both with 
 the indicative^ optative, and infinitive, the condition or 
 
 * ¥.1 is frequently construed with the indicative of the present in 
 the first member of the sentence denoting a supposition in the state- 
 ment, but a certainty in the fact, and is followed by «v in the other 
 member of the sentence. See the example from Plato's Pha?drus \k 
 the follo^ring page. 
 
OF CONJU:NCtIONS. 325 
 
 supposition usually stated by u must be inferred from the 
 context. I take the following examples from Hoogeveen 
 as an illustration of this remark : »xi ttxvtoc rotvrx. h hi^oig 
 fiiv fcrag eiv aKvovv iiTriiy, Isocr. ad NicocL And all this, if 
 among others indeed^ (s< h hi^oig fctv ^v ; not «/^y, as he has 
 it), I ivould be afraid perhaps to mention, ^aa' ovk av uy 
 gciKUi yif oiueii, Xoi^e^'/iosiecyj Said Socrates to Phaedrus, who 
 had made the following' reply to an observation of that 
 
 philosopher, Ktct ovroi civ, a EiwxgfitTS^, oi/zctt, KecTetysXatVf i't rig 
 cUroM r^etyu^iocv eiXXo 7t Siveti ij t«v rovTav cvtrroccrtv, Tr^^-nrovtrocv 
 uXXviXois Tg x,xi rS oXa a-vvt<rTet^svr,v. Plato Phcedr. p. 367« 
 Ed, Bip. If any one entertains such an opinion, they 
 would laugh at him : But, says Socrates, if he did enter- 
 tain such an opinion, they tvould not, I imagine, rudely in- 
 sult him. — Much depends upon supplying the ellipsis pro- 
 perly in all conditional statements towards understanding 
 correctly the meaning and application of this particle. 
 
 Instead of the particle si, as construed with the indica^ 
 five or optative, the participle of the verb of existence is 
 frequently either expressed or understood, denoting aii 
 affirmation, or the participle of some other verb precedes 
 uif with the same power : * thus, Ttug «yv, avrog m roiovrog, 
 cixxovg civ i an^ug — iTroincsv ; Xen^ Mem. How then, he 
 being such a person, could he make others either impious ? 
 &c. cufc. «y yivetro vovg xxKog KxXag <Pgoym. Soph. (Edip. Tyr. 
 600. A mind well disposed cannot become wicked, avra 
 yup Kctt iTTOfiivoi, 06V ^iXit ccira Kctt ^po^vfcoi STrcif^iSet, xett cCTiov^ 
 ng, aa-<p»Xa<; »v uTrtot^i?.- — S7rof>tiyoi here is equivalent to St 
 iTToluiSx, and uTTtovTig to uTTiot/xty. Tho construction is nea- 
 ter and more elegant than if the conditional statement had 
 uTi^jiQj vlfnai 
 
 * The same conditional statement is expressed in Latin by the ab' 
 latlve absolute, which is followed by the subjunctive : thus, Com. 
 Nepos, in Vit. Miltiadis : '■ quibus, se opprcsso, nulla spcs salutis re- 
 linquerctur." ' 
 
826 SYNTAX OF THE GBEEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 been made by si in every member of the sentence, on ^oA" 
 
 A<e ^£v av ^^ilifAxrec s^azz <I><A<o-t<^D5, dys-r' 'i^uvJCl^sov* De- 
 mosth. 77. (TTgip. ay yag (KV ^-^etr uiruVf 'Trctgovruv v}[^av. Id. ir. 
 
 yTToj^pijovcrjij vTroAu-vJ^g^wj ^«gi lx,oc,Ti^ov» Id. tt. crT£(p. It may be 
 remarked that, when the power of this particle depends 
 upon the condition stated by a participle, it is generally 
 construed v^ ith the indicative of the Imperfect or Aorisis^ 
 «y y«g »v irihiix,siv, Aft^ft>vaj m. Lucian Dial. Mort. 
 
 III. With the Future Indicative. 
 
 Dawes, in his Miscellanea Critica, will not allow that 
 ecv is ever construed with the future indicative. Dr Bur- 
 gess, however, has shown that xiv, which has the same 
 power with 4v, is joined with it by Homer, Iliad, d. 139. 
 eh Mv xi^oXaTSTceij cv xgv (kcj^^oh. — Other passages might al- 
 so be adduced in which xg or xiv with g; is construed with 
 the future indicative, giving it the usual power of the sub- 
 junctive of the Aorist : as, aAX' ayzr, si x.zv '^a^ B-c^^Ti^oiiiv 
 viot? 'A^ciieov. /S'. 72. But, as in Homer's time the parti- 
 cles were used with greater latitude and uncertainty than 
 by later writers, we must therefore endeavour to discover 
 whether they have ever used uv with the indicative of the 
 future. Brunck has produced several instances from Aris- 
 tophanes, contrary to the opinion entertained by Dawes : 
 a^c6 y& rovr uv lyco ttot' oipo^xt ; Nuhes, 465. Pray shall I 
 ever behold it I The reading, however, should be, a^oc yg 
 rovT a,^ \ya ttot h-^of^oti y See Vesp* 942. Niibes, 1157. 
 The particle uv cannot with any consistency be construed 
 with the future, because the future ofitseL'is equivalent to 
 uv with another tense : thus, x.cti aero xTvio-iiT&ui g« rovrm eva- 
 
 fAx f/iyct. Xen. Anab. And he thought that he ijooidd ac- 
 quire. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS, S27 
 
 IV. With the Subjunctive. 
 
 " *Ay,*' says Dawes, " is never construed with the 
 |[ subjunctive unless accompanied with certain other 
 ** words." — These, which he has not mentioned, are the 
 
 relative ej, &C. 5 eg «y i ocrog KV i oa-ris uv j oTTon^og uv ; «y 
 
 uv i oTTov civ i /»' eiv 5 as civ ; oTFag «v, translated by the La- 
 tin ut» — oTTOToiV i orecv ; 'ocroCKig eiv j — Ittoiv, hruxv ; iTTiihuv * j 
 iTCiiKS ; eTreuciv } lag uv ; tt^iv eiv f ; o(p^ uv ijl, orxgv; and a 
 iew others §. After verbs denoting past time, they are 
 commonly followed by the optative. 
 
 It would be quite superfluous to give a number of ex- 
 amples upon each of these ; one or two will be sufficient : 
 
 thus, Xen. Cyr* 0/ S' kv h roig i^n^otg ^tos,TiXz(ra<ri r» vof^ifzx 
 7coi6vvTig. Whoever among the youths steadily perform the 
 duties prescribed by law. tld" ottotxv >jx»j Ittj to ^sittvov. Then 
 whenever he comes to supper. uTrccvd' or av Mya>. Aristoph, 
 
 * l-rii^av is construed by Lucian with the indicative. Dialog. Mort. ; 
 Wu^xv yifttis oifcu^oftiv »ai trrivofAiv — l^iyiXS.. Whenever we lament and 
 groan — he laughs at us. It is also construed by Xenophon with the 
 optative : Wnlav oIkoi iiti;. Cyr, Whenever you return home. The 
 reading should be la-e/S*;. 
 
 f The Tragoedians, says Elmsley, do not use the subjunctive with 
 •Tfinv av unless there be in the preceding member of the sentence a ne- 
 gation or prohibition : thus, koux, b.'^itfjt.i <r^os ^aptous ^ttXiv^ f^i* av « 
 lyatas ri^fjtdvuv \%m p,aXta. Eurip. Med, 277. The same, he adds, must 
 be stated of the optative. See Annot, in Eurip. Med. 
 
 \ Frequently v.ith the subjunctive after prseterite verbs. See 
 Brunck's Annot. ad ApolL Rhnd. 17. 
 
 § Occasionally the tragic poets and prose writers omit the «v after 
 some of these indefinites. 
 
328 SYxVTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Acharn. 355. All whatever I may say. la^ <rixinov a,v Xot&v,q 
 diu^^otyus* Id, Pax. 
 
 'Av, however, when it is merely conditional, and has the 
 same power with lav, is also construed with the subjunc- 
 tive : thus, oVfWj cvv f^n «:toAj^ ^XTTiyovf/Avog, Ixii^vi oIkoi gjjjj, uv, 
 voL^a, ravrov ^xSav, vjKn?, &c. Xen. Cyr. Betvare lest you be 
 whipped to death, when you return home, if, having learn- 
 ed from him, you come, &c. ^jj roivwf u dv^^ii 'Ahvociotf B-av- 
 fixcrvirs, civ Trac^oi^o^ov liTCOt Ti toT? TraXXoig, Dem* Oil/nth, 
 
 V. 'Av construed with the Optative. * 
 
 'Av is construed with the optative of all the tenses ex- 
 cept thej^^Mre, chiefly after verbs denoting past time ; for, 
 as it was before remarked, the optative has generally the 
 same relation in point oHime to the subjunctive, as the 
 imperfect has to the present. 
 
 It is unnecessary to multiply examples, as many have 
 already been given, and others may be found in every 
 Greek author. See below, where uv is construed with the 
 optative after the interrogative particles jrjj, ^«, vokv^ Ttrmt 
 &c. 
 
 *Av is sometimes construed with the optative when no 
 conditional statement precedes it. The expression, how- 
 ever, is elliptical, a conditional statement being necessari- 
 ly understood to make the sentiment or statement com- 
 
 ♦ «y is never construed with the genuine optative, i. e. when a ivish 
 is expressed by it, but with the potential : thus, <w vfat, yivoia •Trar^os 
 tVTuxuffic^i' ■^jcua Soph. O son, may you be more fortunate than your 
 father, yivot* av, you might become. See Brunch's Annot. ad Aristoph. 
 Equit. 400. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 329 
 
 pleat : thus, lya ya^ okvoUv fih uv etg ra, TtXolct. IfiQxivitf » ifcTv 
 ^017), Xen. Anab. For / ivould be afraid to embark on 
 board the ships which he might give us. (Should Cyrus 
 give us ships) I would be afraid to embark on board, &c. 
 This construction is essentially different from that of «\ 
 with the subjunctive having the meaning of l«ev ,• i, e. De- 
 pending upon no preceding conditional statement, but point- 
 ing out the condition upon which something else either 
 does or mai/, or shall depend. 
 
 VI. With the Infinitive. 
 
 ?iec<!-rov uv uvat, Plato Hipp. Maj, As the statuaries now- 
 a-days say that Daedalus would be laughed at. chvrui yx^ 
 Toy? u^oc^i(rrov5f Kctt tts^i B-iovg uv (Aoc>.i(rre& cifx,i><,o)g ^X^^iv, &C, 
 For they think that the ungrateful must be exceedingly 
 careless, &c. It is not construed with the yw^wre infini- 
 tive. See Dawes. MiscelL 'la-Qt fnvroi uvonrog m, it chi »v 
 ryiv vuiTi^ecv ugzrviv 7ri^tyina-6ect fvi? /Bxa-iXiag awoifAsag. Xen. 
 
 Anab. II. rclg §' av^lv Kv 9rorg Kiwi&vimi. Xen. Mem. To others 
 that nothing could ever be in motion. In this sentence 
 the conditional power of «\ depends upon something un- 
 derstood : and that is the principle which Zeno maintain- 
 ed respecting the eternity of matter. T^Tthat principle were 
 true, then there could be no change by the motion of bo- 
 dies. 
 
 VII. With Participles, 
 
 'Tfiitg 3' e< xoii fAif4,-^otf£ivoi TroKXei. KXi ^iKcticc civ kxuvctg uko* 
 tag. Dem. tt. ^s(p. When you who might have with rea- 
 son justly complained against them, ag cv}' uv, it rt yiuircy 
 Iti a-v^Tryivc-ovrav vfj(,uv xcii rav Qv/^xim. Id, That the The- 
 
330 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 bans and you, should any thing happen, could no longer 
 conspire together. «t^^, « tt^sts^, Ii^jj, crv it ha^cc^ riv» Teo^cv 
 x»t uTt if^ov civ w^oTyivdfiivcv* Xen, Cyr, But, father, said 
 he, if you perceive any resources that could even be pro- 
 vided by me. «V is sometimes construed with the parti- 
 ciple and the article, a construction frequently adopted 
 for the relative with the indicative or other moods : thus, 
 (o^ae) |66^ ciq uXTidag roivrcc, u K^irav, a-x-ef^i^ctrx ^ rav ^et^iat; 
 
 UTTOKTiVVVVTm, KCtt UT^X^iCOifKOfAlVCO]) y Hvy it olot Tl ho-XV. PlatO 
 
 Crit. 
 
 VIIL 'Ai/ repeated with the same Verb. 
 
 1. 'Av is frequently repeated in long sentences, where 
 several particulars intervene between the conditional 
 statement signified by it at the commencement of the sen- 
 tence, and the verb with which these particulars are con- 
 nected. * 
 
 2. *Av is frequently repeated for the sake of emphasis, 
 or for calling the attention particularly to the nature of 
 the condition suggested by it. 
 
 The following sentence from the Acharnes of Aristo- 
 phanes, will exemplify both these observations. 
 
 OVK UV \tF £^)J5 yi vso- 
 mrcg, or l^ta (ps^cjv 
 m&gxKm cpo^Tiov 
 
 * av, says Elmsley, is never repeated with the subjunctive. It can- 
 not be repeated consistent with the princip e already stated; because 
 when construed with the subjunctive, it never refers to any previous, 
 conditional statement, but to some future act depending upon the in- 
 clination of the speaker or hearers, or a supposed contingency. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 331 
 
 ads <potvh.a^ uv o 
 <r7rovdo(po^05f vtt Ifzov ^<- 
 
 oii^ civ iXci^^eoi uv etxi'^Xt^XTd, 
 
 1. crrccg «v, aFTTS^ oyrflff, STTt rvi g<Vd^», I'^urx, oTon ^avXti-to 
 ua-iivect Itt' ci^i^rovj XzyaifA civ, &c. Xen, Cyr, Having sta- 
 tioned myself, like him, upon the threshold, then, when- 
 ever he should wish to enter, I xioould say, 
 
 2. 5r&»5 ^g y ciV KoiXaq ?iSyoig uv, UTTSg IcTrsta-ai y ci7ret%, 
 
 Aristoph, Acharn* 
 
 How can you, how can you say it was properly done, if 
 you have but once formed an agreement with those who 
 neither regard altar, nor good faith, nor oaths ? 
 
 'E^^cct oivf io rovr (<rSi* uv, g| (aM iov B^ou 
 H^artTT* l^^^^ov hcfAx6i7v ri tt^ccktsov. 
 
 Soph. CEd. Tyr. 1438. 
 
 Some editors seem disposed to construe the latter particle 
 uv with the imperative licr&i ; an unheard of soloecism : C. 
 Reisigius Thur. commits nearly as great a blunder : " Ni- 
 mirum «\ non ad imperativum refertur, sed ad infinitivum 
 animo conceptum, ut, quum Sophoclis verba haec sunt, 
 'id^xT uv, iv rovr 'la-Q' «vj— ad uv subaudiatur d^uo-ul f^i.—' 
 The verb understood is 'i^^etcru. I xjoould have done it, be 
 well assured / tuoidd. 
 
 * Person upon this remarks, Eurip. Med. 21. ** ubi (iufMs est jus- 
 jurandum per victimas, H^xos per verba, Titrns per dextras." 
 
 Y 2 
 
332 isYI^TAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE, 
 
 Contracted ^f, ifi Poetic alzz, zIh^z* 'E^;?^ 
 and Wiavy after* 
 
 'E«v, as was formerly remarked, does not appear to be 
 compounded of I or i\ and otv, according to Lennep and 
 Hoogeveen's idea, but to be formed from the verb Ixa^ or 
 its old form in ^i^ Ixf^n, sino, permitto. It is construed, 
 with very few exceptions, and those of doubtful authority, 
 with the subjunctive: thus, l«v y«g rovra ^iZ»iwg v7rct^%^, 
 Dem. For if this were secure. l»v n yx^ rtg ^syoc? ovrag 
 oUrcti siveii. Xen. Mem, For if any one think himself so 
 tall. — In the following sentence from the same author, it 
 has been supposed to be substituted for ^v ,- but if both be 
 derived from the same source, and have nearly the same 
 meaning, there can be no reason but the usus scribendi 
 against it: thus, cos-ttz^ «v il (puiv^s aa-Tiri^oi,, a Itffv oi^fiorrfif rov 
 
 ru iv^v6fiov iivcciy Just as if you should say that a shield is 
 adapted to him to whom it mai/ be fitting. — The chief 
 difference between lav and uv I take to be this, that the 
 former, denotes the conditionality of the present ox future 
 action ; the latter, denoting the action as granted^ points 
 to the results, hocn cCn — IkXwviTi c-T^etTSVie-dcci, &C, icrug «v, 
 
 A'tKi is a compound of ec(, the same as u, and xs. eti is 
 evidently the iEolic form of it, as may be seen from 
 Sappho's ode to Venus, ett ds ^a^» fx,n ^sxst', aAAas ^u^* ul 
 ^i f^n ^iMif &c. 
 
 Ahi is most commonly construed by Homer with the 
 subjunctive : II, ^. 249. o(pgot, /5>jt2, uhi v^7v bTFi^o-^vi xH'* 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 333 
 
 It is sometimes construed with the optative, as in the 
 following example : 
 
 x'lyJ IhXm yi fcivoiq. Horn. Odyss. >;. 315. 
 
 I would give you both a house and possessions if you 
 tvould willingly remain. — " Ubi tamen optativo jungitur," 
 says Hoogeveen, " quod vel raro, vel nunquam contingit, 
 nisi suspicamur, subesse votum." To me it appears that 
 Ki only is construed with the optative, and that «; ought to 
 be connected with the participle IhXav. 
 
 'EjTjjy and ysctv I take to be the same, compounded of 
 the preposition Itti, denoting the time Jbllomng after, and 
 lotv. They both take the subjunctive after them. 
 
 e;, if 
 
 Ei, I imagine, is the second person singular imperative 
 of the verb \a, the same as Is;, mitto ; h being contr^icted 
 into it, denoting give, allow, which mitto in Latin very fre- 
 quently signifies. To this imperative the Latins added s^ 
 and it became first sei and then si ; a derivation much 
 more probable than that which brings it from the substan- 
 tive verb in both languages. 
 
 L E;, as was before remarked under «v, is construed 
 with the indicative of the present, imperfect, aorists, per- 
 fect, and pluperfect. When it is construed with the in- 
 dicative, it implies a supposition in the statement, but a 
 certainty in the fact, i. e. the fact is neither contingent 
 nor future : thus, il yu^ ila-t finff^ei, ila-i kui ^ioi. Lucian, 
 If there are altars, there are also gods, kxi tl ^vt « (iovxk n 
 II A^g/«y TTccyov—^-lTri^nTVis-i rov etv^^isyTrey,— l|»3g5r«(rT uv o roicv- 
 
 T0i,-—l^Z7r£fA7nT UV. DemOSth. -X. Cti<^. 'oy il (AVi UX'^fiiV, 
 
 ojWfljoj rc7? Tvf Aois ^y if^i"- Xen, Mem, IV. c. 3. 
 
334 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 2. It is also construed with the optative, chiefly of the 
 aorists, and then denotes both contingency and Juturiti/ : 
 si yxp iloitvjg o(rov ^pyvpiov u^yoccfActt lya^ ^xvfAxa-xis uv» Plctto 
 Hip. Maj, For ij' you were to know how much money I 
 have made, you would be surprised. 
 
 3. El is never construed with the subjunctive mood. 
 See Dawes Miscell. Crit. side page 324. s/Veg, however, 
 is construed with the subjunctive in Homer II. d. 81. iiTcig 
 
 4. E< is construed with the future indicative, though h 
 in the other member of the sentence be construed with the 
 optative: uxxu, f^^nv tl rovTo yivwixoci. Dem, Olynth, But 
 indeed z/'this shall happen. — It is sometimes construed with 
 the future when another verb follows in the future : Ari- 
 stoph. Plut. 1064. 
 
 g; ^' IxTrXvviTrctt rovro to i^tf^v&tov 
 
 o'l^St K06TClO'lfi?<0C Toy TT^OTCOTirOV rot DOCKi}, 
 
 5. St fm is sometimes construed with the participle of 
 tlie aorist when ^v is also construed with the aorist : thus^ 
 Aristoph. Nub. 229. 
 
 — — oy yag uv TTOTi 
 
 si ftl) x^t^cia-ug to foyifAx, 
 
 When i( is construed with fiti in the sense of even though, 
 the particle xect always intervenes : thus, Soph. (Edip. Tyr. 
 302. SI Koti (AVI jSXsTnig. 305. si xctt fi^ 'xXvsg. In the follow- 
 ing sentence from Thucyd. VII. I have little doubt that 
 si has been improperly omitted: thus, 'Hfitv r Ik -no'h'hm civ 
 TTi^iowMg Vim fAo>\.i5 TovTo VTTVi^^s (e<) Koci ^h ccvccyxec^cfcsvoi?, 
 X. r, A. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 335 
 
 cog 67<y 
 
 Aristoph. Eccles. 
 
 As I will not advance one foot before another, unless 
 this shall be put to rights. See Eurip. Hippol. 4"84<. 
 
 6. Ei TTov is properly construed with the optative : as, 
 u TTov l^iXxvyoi. Xen. Cyr, If he ever rode out. 
 
 7. E< yafg 8/;^joy, signifies, 1 ivish I had, it y»^ l^ai^xi, I 
 tjoish I might have, 
 
 " Eha," says Brunck, " in interrogatione absurdita- 
 <* tem dicti vel facti arguit." ud' a. f^ty^iTTTecq uv ivlcciro roa 
 B^ieig, Toivd^ ii^m Ivdech rmg tt^xttovo-iv ; Demosth. 71:1^1 xm h 
 Xif, 
 
 Ei6& and Aih, utinam, appear to be the imperatives of 
 the obsolete verbs ti6&/i and at9&>, the same as gu and ua. 
 This appears from the use Homer makes of the optative 
 of if^i in the same sense : II. §'. 64<0. 
 
 Eiii §' oa-Tig iTXt^og ctTrayyiiXite rx^to-rec 
 TlnXii^yi. 
 
 I iuish that a friend might report as quickly as possible to 
 Achilles. 
 
 'Ewg in the sense of donee, is construed with the Aorist, 
 wq xTTxvrav \%x7Fi(phi^xy (im. ^schyh Pers. 470. Some- 
 times, but rarely, it is construed with the optative of the 
 
336 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Aorist. When it signifies dum, quamdiu, it is canstrued 
 with the present or imperfect. ';<i{0':iifB' 
 
 This particle is supposed by Hoogeveen to be derived 
 from f^eiUf by an aphaeresis for ufAxa, meto, colligo, item 
 amo, Scheide imagines that it is the imperative of fcioij 
 a kindred verb, denoting *^ desidero, vel potius qucero et 
 interrogo ; ut ^« et ^nt PP» significent qucsre, vel interro" 
 ga, et ^oc rov ^h-TroKkma. pp. sit interroga Apollinem, &c. 
 nempe, utrum res ita, &c. habeat, an vero mentiar ?" 
 
 1. M)j appears to me to be formed from the same verb as 
 the comparative adjective f^um, fninor, less ; from which 
 is derived the verb fAnouy I lessen, ^n is probably the 
 imperative of an obsolete verb ^iij or ^iia>, to taJce axuai/y 
 to diminish^ to lessen : o^a. — |tcj5 "Tcin^ot. a-ctvti^ xxt ^irxyvoiecv 
 tihi. Soph. Elect, betvare lest (lessen your care) you oc- 
 casion mischief and repentance to yourself. In exam- 
 ples of this kind, it is always translated by the English 
 
 * If a direct negative is stated, when the verb must be in the in- 
 dicative, the negative ov or ov» is employed ; when the negative de- 
 pends upon any confmgency, the particle fjt,7) is used: »«< ov av yvaffi 
 ^vvufAivov fd,iv ;^a^'v a^a^i^ava/, (Jt-n ocTrohihovra 'ht. Xen. Cyr. And whom- 
 soever they know able to requite a favour, but not doing it. nv fiti 
 vr^offvih ^cc^uvoii. Id. Unless they have been warned to be present. 
 It is always used after verbs of prohibiting and freeing. It always 
 follows si when a negative is employed, and not av. See Dcmosth. 
 ^i^i ruv Iv Xip. p. 95. ova av with the indicative, commonly of the im- 
 perfect, precedes il //.h with the same tense j as, olx. av T^olXiytv, il /jch 
 IriffTiutv aXvihvffttv. Xen, Mem. — ^/ is sometimes omitted by the Poets ; 
 thus, — iO ya^ av rran QvKffKsov itruhv, (ih VJ tm ^hvm xbikm. Soph. QLd. 
 Tyr. 145. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 33T 
 
 word lest, which Home Tooke has shewn to be the past 
 participle of an Anglo- Saxon verb, signifying to dismiss, 
 to take aijoai/. See Diversions of Parley, vol. 1. pp. 224, 
 and 263. un xetroKVit (AUK^av o^ov TTo^iviaSxt Tr^og lovg ^t^cta-KHv 
 rt xpnsrif^ov hcxyyiXXofAivovg. Isocr, Do not grudge (dis- 
 miss the grudge) to go a long way to those who profess 
 to teach something useful, rov^g a^iKowra. jWjj iTramtv, Xen. 
 Anab. Dismiss the praising the injurious, rot^i ds MiM" 
 (Tioia-i ov^ccf^oi 'imuv tov ttoAi^ov Toyrav <7-yvg;r«Xfls(pgyvov, on fcn 
 Xtoi f/.ovvoi. Herod. Clio. None of the lonians supported 
 the Milesians in this war, but only the Chians ; take awa?/ 
 this, the Chians only. 
 
 2. M>3 is construed with the imperative of the present, 
 rarely, if ever correctly, with that of the 1 . aorist : it is 
 frequently construed with the subjunctive of the aorists : 
 ^s, (4,ri hctTinrxfyVf fiv^^ uTTiXdvig fAi^eifin* Aristoph. Lysist. 733. 
 Z TFov^ci, f^n G-iUTTctrz. AHstoph. Pax. 381. O wretches, 
 don't be silent. Ts-^oa-i^i, ftn o-g j5 ^oiVTeca-tce, c-vvci^'Tiroia-vi, Epict. 
 Enchir. When the imperative precedes, ftti or ftvi^l re- 
 quires the subjunctive of the aorist: thus, ndnTocivi xxi 
 
 (p^ovrt^e, finy oiv&ct^Uv 'Ev^ovhtctg k^zivov Yiyw'^ TTOTi. iEsch. Prom, 
 
 1070. See also Sophoc!. Philoct. 1040. fAr^ufcai %fMim 
 fAot, M)3^s f&' iTTtr^t^yii. Aristoph. Nub. 1482. 
 
 It ought not to be construed with the subjunctive of the 
 present, but is sometimes with the indicative : ^t^ ng '^roXt* 
 Tuv h T^lZu (pxvrd^iTect. Eurip. Phceniss. 91. See also Troady 
 179. Hippol. 640. Alcest. 555. See Person's Hecuba, 
 note on 1166. 
 
 3. Mn is also construed with the indicative of the fu- 
 ture; as, 7n^i(rxon-ovf^ivn—-fin ^vf^(po^u yivna-neci to Tr^etyf^a. 
 Aristoph. Eccles. 486. See Valckenaer's Notes to the 
 Phceniss. of Eurip. 93. 
 
3S8 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 4. Sometimes, though rarely, it is construed with the 
 optative of the aorists after verbs denoting past time. 
 Hoogeveen supposes that av is commonly understood : 
 
 M}} f^iv aTiroiga-iii ^eyetg TforufAog /iecdv^mS' Hom. IL 
 
 Tovrov Oi^tTTov^ TrocXoti r^if^av rov uvh^ l^&vyi 
 
 Ma KTocvoi Soph. CEdip. Tyr. 94?7. 
 
 It is, however, sometimes construed with the optative 
 when a wish is expressed : as, jttjj g^g yovv clrcq yg Aa^o< ;ii«- 
 Xoq* Hom. II. w. 30. May such resentment never seize 
 me. xoi) f^n Tr^oQxin f,ait,cv 4 to vZv Kctxov, Eurip. Hec. 903. 
 aXciTo f^h ^Yi. Eurip. Med. 81. 
 
 5. M)) is also construed with the indicative of verbs in 
 the aorists and perfect tense t as, 
 
 Odyss. g. 300. 
 
 ^ihet ftvi TO licecn^ov xaXXog « f^i^tg c-vvi^hi^ev. Lucian. T. 1. 
 p. 31. See Musgrave's Phoeniss. Eurip. 93. 
 
 After o^et, ^yAesVff-oy, it takes the subjunctive ; thus, c^x, 
 xeiicag '^pettra-cvn fm (^li^cj xotxoi KT)3C"A»|t6£0'. Sophocl. Electr. 
 
 998. 
 
 'O^ors, with the Indicative, Subjunctive, and 
 Optative, 
 
 *07rori is usually construed with the optative when the 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 339 
 
 imperfect indicative precedes it : as, ol fiiv ovv uXXa lyiXm, 
 oTtoTi <rKu(^km, Lucian Lapith. See Dawes, p. 216. 
 
 When the time signified by ottoti is indefinite, it re- 
 quires the optative : as, h ^g rovra fcg IxaKnv o ^i^xa-y.cc>,og, 
 
 'O-jr^;^ (jbj^ and Ov yijri 
 
 * 
 
 9 
 
 Are never construed with the subjunctive of the 1. 
 aorist. either active or middle, but with the subjunctive 
 of the 1. aorist passive. They are construed with the fu- 
 ture indicative, or the subjunctive of the 2. aorist active 
 or middle. See Dawes Miscell. pp. 221. 227. 459. 
 Brunck's Note upon hne 704? of the Lysistrata of Aris- 
 tophanes. 07sra(; lovra f^vi yiv^.o-eretif Tret^ecrvi^Zv ^nriXcvv. De- 
 mosth. TT. a-Ti(p> p. 124'. Collect. Gr. Maj. Vol. III. aAAa* 
 rn^af^urd" oTTtag ^n B^sAy»Agft»v cii<rH<!'irc6i. Aristoph. Eq. 371. 
 cv (t6»j Tir^tiTOKrYi Xiis,'^} /tt)3§' ««t|/ji iTSsrA^y. Eurip. Hippol. 657. — 
 If this rule admits of no exceptions, Trua-wfciGos,, in the 3. 
 Olynthiac of Demosthenes, Reiske's Oratores, should be 
 
 changed to •^no-o^i&eC'-'axrtt, oTirui ^jj TTlttraf^i&ct, etvrot %-^ori^ov 
 
 xxKciii o-Ki'^eiffScci hov. See towards the beginning of the 
 speech, f 
 
 * " 'O-rus, or o-yTcos fi)j," says Porson, " is, for the most part, con- 
 " strued with the 2d person, sometimes with the 3d, rarely with the 
 " 1st." In Attic Greek, ov does not precede a verb of the subjunctive 
 mood, unless accompanied by ^>j. Dawes Miscell. 
 
 f In the new edition of the Collect. Maj. Vol. I. I have inconside- 
 rately retained the common reading in the following passage from the 
 Crito of Plato § /. xui oga, &i K^iruv, rauru o/ahoyuv, o^uf (avi •ra^a, 
 
310 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 When they must be translated by the Latin ut, are 
 not construed with the optative, but with the subjunc- 
 tive j unless preceded by a verb of the past tense. They 
 are not usually construed by Aristophanes in this sense 
 with the subjunctive * without the particle uv : as, 
 
 vfAoi$. Aristoph. Concion. 57. 
 
 They are sometimes construed by the Attic Poets with 
 the indicative of praeterite verbs, when it is signified that 
 if such a thing had taken place, such another thing toould 
 he the result : and with the subjunctive after verbs deno- 
 ting past time, when the effect signified by the verb is ei- 
 ther present ox future, 
 
 'OTrag, wh^n it signifies the final iit, is sometimes con* 
 strued with the future indicative : as, yng f^ cyrag ^if^-^u^ 
 uTFotKov. Soph, (Edip. Tyr, 1518. In interrogative sen- 
 tences, when preceded by hrt or ow lirri, it requires the 
 optative : as, ee-r' eyv oxa? AXKHicrns iU v>jg«5 ^oXpi j Eurip* 
 Alcest, 52. 
 
 *0;r6>5, when it denotes the manner rather than the fnal 
 cause, takes the future indicative : also when it depends 
 upon other verbs understood : as, o^a, <rK07ra, (p^oyrt^u j Jg«. 
 dppt(6s^ thus, uyi vvv, G7Feifg,——ivkci)5 v(pcc^7rccffU5. (tkotfu, is un- 
 
 * The tragedians, however, somethnes omit the particle av before 
 the subjunctive; thus, Xiy, us laroois ar^ayjWfls (irnvS^ roh. Eurip. 
 liippol. 296'. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 341 
 
 derstood. Aristoph, Nubes 4-90. Aristophanes has almost 
 always fci^.yn<ro before oTvag. See Nub. 1110. 
 
 'h», with the meaning of ottov, construed with «p, re«» 
 quires the optative .* thus, fAvi^ // civ (rxvrov x^xtcT?. Soph. 
 GEdip. Col. 405. 
 
 'n? and art are sometimes construed with the optative 
 of the future after verbs denoting past time. See Soph, 
 CEdip. Tyr. 791-2. Eurip. Hippol. 1186. ori, when it de- 
 notes the language of the speaker, and not of the author 
 or historian himself is usually construed with the optative : 
 as, oT uTTiK^ivctra 'on ctKovoi Ao^oxo/zetv. Xen. Anab. Xeno- 
 plion most commonly construes it with the optative. See 
 Anab. passim. 
 
 ag sometimes takes the present indicative in the sense 
 of as : thus, ag fclv yx^ vvv if^h o ^log ro7s ut^^^'raii ^iccxiircct* 
 Aristoph. Plut. 500. 
 
 OuTTOTB, OvhTOTS, 
 
 Says Brunck, '« are always joined with verbs of the 
 " future tense." See note on line SOI of the Lysistrata 
 of Aristophanes. OvTron is, however, frequently joined by 
 Homer with the present and the imperfect : as, rov ^ oCttc 
 
 Ti KVfAXTCC XStTTSl. II. /S'. 396. TO filV CUTTOTi ^Xttsto ^Vf^a TSheC" 
 
 ^iv, ^. 404'. and ovhTcorz with the imperfect in II, g. 790. 
 OvhixoTi Tgftjgj — o'l^viTnov. With the 1 aor. in II. ^r'. 645. 
 with the same tense in Odyss. g. 39. The prose writers 
 construe them with verbs both of the present and past 
 tenses : thus, ov^iTroTZ Tr^oayiKU tt^xticcv a^yitv, Xen. Cyr. r. 
 
 6,14. 4_ 
 
 i 
 
34-2 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 Up, TToi, '^rokv, Ttov, icooq, or any other interro- 
 gative Particle, demand the Optative with 
 av, the Subjunctive v^ithout it. See Dawes 
 Miscell. Crit. 207. 
 
 61 f^oi ri ^^cc<r6f J Tirt] (pvyca f^YiT^o^ %^%*'i i 
 
 Eurip. Med. 1271. 
 
 ttZ? uv •vv iiiiv Keixo$ • ■ j Eurip. Hippol. 654'« 
 
 TTchv ovv uv In ytvotro -n-aMs ^h ^ovog ; 
 
 Aristoph. Eq. 140. 
 
 u^KiTUiVi Xen. Mem. 
 
 coa-TS, though commonly construed with the infijiitive, 
 sometimes takes after it the indicative : thus, 
 
 Aristoph. Phit. l^l. 
 
 aa-v uv'^^UTiv TCiihi ^oXatriv j Nub. 830. 
 
 Having thus pointed out the tenses and moods with 
 which the greater number of the conjunctions are con- 
 strued, I shall, before concluding, offer a few observa- 
 tions upon the probable derivation of some other par- 
 ticles. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 845 
 
 'Ag/ or AJst. 
 
 This adverb, with the Greek writers, commonly sig- 
 nifies semper : it is evidently connected with aim, cBvum, 
 an age. It is not improbable that the original form was 
 etUi, and that the first i was afterwards omitted. If I 
 may hazard a conjecture respecting its formation, I would 
 say that it was most likely formed by a duplication of the 
 3. singular of the substantive verb, having for the first 
 part the form ua, and for the latter \a, denoting continued, 
 uninterrupted existence. Dr Jamieson says that the Mces. 
 Gothic aiw has the same signification, and its similiarity, 
 both in sound and signification to the old English and 
 Scotch cy, cannot fail to strike every one. 
 
 'Ag« denotes, in one sense, the consequence drawn from 
 certain premises stated, or the conclusion of a syllogism, 
 and may generally be translated by then : thus Lucian, u 
 ya^ ti<n /Za^oif it<rt y-oci B-ioi' aXhct, fsjjv iitn (icofioi' sta-i apot, kxi 
 S-iot, If there are altars, there are also gods : but there 
 are altars ; there are then also gods. Its derivation from 
 u^6>, apto, seems to be correctly given by Hoogeveen, 
 Doct. Part. c. 5. and by Lennep and Scheide in their Ety- 
 mologicum Linguae Graecae, vol. I. p. 154. 
 
 ^Ag««, however, is sometimes used in another sense by 
 the Greek writers, answering to the Latin num, when a 
 question is asked. When it has this signification, it is 
 probably formed from the verb ue^aaij the obsolete active 
 of u^xofixif precor. 1 have little doubt that ec^a, apto, and 
 u^ufj, precor, were originally the same, and that «g«, when 
 
S44j syntax of the greek language. 
 
 it signifies num, was formed from the latter. «g* oWU, 
 nostin' ? Pray do you know ? 
 
 »g' uv ri ffioy d&^xto /iovXiVTxvrog iv -, Eurip. Hippol. 
 Pray would you accept of good advice from me ? 
 
 'Ara^ and Ayra^. 
 
 'Ar«g and Kvru^ appear to me to be formed from the 
 Doric fltTg^o?, the same as It2|oj, ajiother ; the latter having 
 probably been pronounced at first with the Digammaj 
 which was afterwards softened into t». Derived in this 
 manner, ura^ and uvroc^ will signify another thing, x§jjT«tg< 
 
 og o/yfli/ f&i<ryov' ctrctp /BsccriXiva-iv vaaip Itt) y^npotg l^svxv. Hom, II. 
 
 y, 270. And the heralds mixed wine in the cup : Ano- 
 ther thing, they poured water upon the hands of the princes. 
 Ar^iih/l, a-v ds Trocvi riov (Aivog* ccvrctg lyayi XiT<ro(^ 'A;^j/AAj{7 ^iH* 
 fciv ^oXov. 11. u. 282. Agamemnon, do you stop your 
 rage : another matter, I entreat you to dismiss your resent- 
 ment against Achilles. 
 
 H, 
 
 Seems to be the 3. singular of the subjunctive of il/^t, 
 sum ; and frequently, when interrogative, has a similar 
 meaning with u^a, ; but, in addition expresses some de- 
 gree of surprise and earnestness. It may be often trans- 
 lated by the Latin an, and in English by May it be? 
 Let it he. — | y«eg vog?^ B-xttthv crip" u7ro(i^virov ttoXh ; Soph, 
 Antig. May it be that you think to bury him prohibited 
 by the state ? — In the following lines from Homer, where 
 ^ is used in its most common signification, and generally 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 345 
 
 translated by either and or, it will allow of being turned 
 agreeably to the idea suggested above : 
 
 « Alacg, vi ^iho(x,invg, it ^log * O^vve-ivg* 
 *ii crv liviMt^Vi, U. ». 
 
 And let some senator be commander ; let it be A jax 5 
 let it he Idoraeneus ; let it be the noble Ulysses j let it be 
 you, son of Peleus. 
 
 In the following sentence from the same Poet, the 
 meaning of the passage is clearly brought out by a similar 
 translation. 
 
 VI yu^ eivf Ar^U^n, vv» VTrxrei XaQna-ecio, IL el, 231. 
 
 Thou art a tyrant king, since thou rulest over men of 
 no spirit : for luere it so that thou ruledst over men of spirit, 
 thou wouldst now have done an injury for the last time. 
 iexi y»^ uv ii^iv fivot ort to TrXovniv uyetdov* « ycc^ 5 Plato 
 Euthyd, For every one would say to us that riches are 
 good. May it be ? tjoould they say it ? ? tcoi) ^i^ei^i (p»mt, 
 ftaty a vetTTVif retvrec ifFetvrx roc ic^ioc. ; Xen. Cyr. May it be, 
 said he, you give rae, grand-pappa, all this flesh ? 
 
 *' Pray,'' says the servant to Hippolytus, " would 
 " you receive from me good advice?" Hippolytus re- 
 plies : 
 
 ^* ««» Kccgrety* ^ yct^ cv co^ot (pxtvo^i&* eiv.'* 
 
 "Yes certainly: for, toereit otherwise (^aa^;?), we tuould 
 •* not seem wise." t/ SjJtcc ;^»f^s<5^ « i^e yJj? l^a> fitchuv ; 
 Soph. CEdip. Tyr. 622. 
 
 Z 
 
346 SYNTAX or the greek language. 
 
 Is evidently a compound of ys and u^, or u^x. yg owes 
 its origin to yg<y, the same as ȣ^, to extend, to lay dovoii ; 
 hence it denotes the extension of the idea, if I may so 
 express it : lyayz^ /, for my part. It commonly renders, 
 as was formerly remarked, the word with which it is 
 joined emphatical, yct^, formed from yg and cc^», will sig- 
 nify and then, or, commonly, Jbr ; yg denoting the con- 
 nection of the thought, ag or u^os, the consequence to be 
 deduced. In many interrogative sentences, its connec- 
 tion with ugot, jpray^ may be remarked : as, CE>g^. c-oZ t «% 
 
 xect TT^icr'Zvv B-xmv ; Eurip. Alcest. By dying for you I 
 would have committed a greater error. Ad. And is it the 
 same, pray, for a young man and an old to die ? 
 
 Has probably been formed from the verb ^ecof or ^a5g&;, 
 disco, signifying know, Jcnoto this as a truth. Zgy ttocts^, 
 stTTOTi ^n <rs fiiT d6xvccroi(ri ovt^o-x, Hom. II. «t. 503. Father 
 Jove, if ever I have assisted you among the immortals, 
 knoxv this as a truth. 
 
 'Er/. 
 
 This particle is probably a compound of k and the accu- 
 sative of the indefinite pronoun n 3 the a- having been 
 omitted when the two words were united. 
 
 Mi 
 
 m 
 
 Is probably the participle of the verb fcdui'cupio, queer 0; 
 
 TgKV6v, T<yo5 (pfVVJjjecsc j fx.m 'O^vttm? iTFi^v^ofiy^y ; Sophocl. Phi- 
 
or CONJUNCTIONS. 347 
 
 loct. 1271. Wishing to knoiu if I have Iieard the voice of 
 Ulysses ? 
 
 This particle seems to be of very doubtful origin. I 
 have sometimes thought that it might probably be form- 
 ed from the numeral tig, f^icc, !»> the neuter originally hav- 
 ing the (A prefixed like the feminine. Derived from this 
 source, it would denote, with some common word under- 
 stood, one part, or subject^ as distinct from the rest. (ra(p^cov 
 f^iv ov^t f^ctXXovy ivrv^A? ^ irug. Eurip. Alcest. Not more 
 discreet, one circumstance, but perhaps more, fortunate. 
 Tg&>ff-; yAv yjyi^ovivs fczyetg fca^vdoctoXcg Eara^. Hom. The 
 
 Trojans, one division of the army, the great impetuous 
 Hector led. 
 
 Oh 
 
 Seems to be the contracted participle neuter gender of 
 the Ionic verb la/, the same as u^iy sum, hv, contracted 
 evv, signifies it being so, therefore, then. See Lennep and 
 Scheide*s Etym, L. Gr. vol, 2. p. 705. 
 
 Tg 
 
 Is formed from a verb jiUy the attenuated form of ha, 
 ligo, the root of the particle h. From nu is formed ruvuy 
 tendo, and the Latin teneo, I hold. See Miscell. Crit. p. 
 4S3. The perfect passive rirec^ea is formed from t^a;. 
 
 Tot 
 
 Is evidently the old dative singular of the article, and 
 requires the praeposition yi to govern it. Itt} to), on this 
 
348 SYNTAX OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 account, thereforf*. avroi, y/M^wiib^) oriTi *7ri rS dufta %vvuf&' 
 iurov. TretXxi. Aristoph. Eq. That you have long been con- 
 spiring against the people, you shall not, on this account, 
 escape with impunity. Kott rot tl (t-oi ^rfv u^tov rcvtaiv lav a-TZ- 
 ^v^hii Aristoph. Nub. 1070. And if you are deprived of 
 these, on this account what is the advantage of life to 
 you? 
 
 t/ rev ^2o<5 lj(^&i(rrov tv c-rvyzig ^icv 
 cG-rig TO F-oj» ^mrctc-i ^pcvoeox&v ygg«$ j 
 
 says K^drog to Vulcan iii the Prometh. Vinct. of ^schylus. 
 The reply is, to o-vyymg rot ^nuv, ^d' o/^tMcc. I compassion- 
 ate him Itti roit on this account, because the bond of relation- 
 ship h strong. 
 
 It was formerly remarked that an is the accusative 
 singular of erng, the responsive pronoun, 'fig is either the 
 old accusative plural of o or o?, or the genitive plural : 
 most probably the latter. AAa' ov^* ag MinXuav l^rifcts-wng 
 cifiiXn<rs» Horn. II. §'. 697. But not, tJdngs being thus, 
 
 I 
 
 //, 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 C. Stkwart, Printer to the University. 
 
I 
 
 t 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnoiogies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724) 779-21 1 1